CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Periodic Trends In Properties Of The Elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Periodic Trends In Properties Of The Elements

The properties of elements can be divided into two categories:

  1. Properties of individual atoms: The properties such as atomic and ionic radii, ionisation energy, electron affinity, electro¬negativity and valency are the properties of the individual atoms & are directly related to their electronic configurations.
  2. Properties of groups of atoms: The properties such as melting
    point, boiling point, heat of fusion, heat of vaporisation, atomic volume, density etc. are the bulk properties i.e., the properties ofa collection of atoms and are related to their electronic configurations indirectly.

All these properties which are directly or indirectly related to the electronic configurations of the elements are called atomic properties. Since electronic configurations of the elements are periodic functions of their atomic numbers, these atomic properties are also periodic functions of atomic numbers of the elements. Thus, atomic properties are also called periodic properties.

Remember that, when we descendin a group, the chemical properties ofthe elements remain more or less the same due to same valence shell configuration, but there is a gradual change in physical properties due to gradual change in the size ofthe atoms owing to addition ofnewelectronic shells.

Atomic size or atomic radius

If an atom is assumed to be a sphere, the atomic size is given by the radius ofthe sphere, called the atomic radius.

Atomic size or atomic radius Definition:

The distance from the centre of the nucleus to the outermost shell containing the electrons is called the atomic radius

Difficulties in precise measurement of atomic radius:

  • It is not possible to isolate a single atom for the measurement of its radius.
  • The electron cloud surrounding the nucleus does not have a sharp boundary as the probability of finding an electron can neverbe zero even at alarge distance from the nucleus.
  • The magnitude ofatomic radius changes from one bonded state to another.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 3 Periodic Trends

Types of atomic radius:

As already mentioned, the size of an atom varies from one environment to another. Therefore, several kinds of atomic radii have been defined.

These are

  1. Covalent radius
  2. Metallic radius
  3. Van der
  4. Waals radius.

1. Covalent radius:

It is defined as one-half of the distance between the centres of two atoms of the same element bonded by a single covalent bond

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Covakent radius

Thus for homonuclear diatomicmolecules, covalent radius (r) = ½ internuclear distance.

Example: In H2 molecule, the internuclear distance is = 0.74 A

= 74pm. So, the covalent radius of hydrogen atom = ½  × 0.74

= 0.37 Å= 37pm.

1Å = 10-10m, 1 pm = 10-12m,

2. Metallic radius:

It is defined as one-half of the internuclear distance between two adjacent atoms in a metallic lattice.

Example:

The distance between two adjacent copper atoms in solid copper is 2.56 Å(determined by X-ray diffraction).

Hence, the metallic radius of copper is 1.28 Å. Similarly, the metallic radii of sodium and potassium have been determined as 1.86 Å and 2.31 Å respectively.

Note: Covalentradii ofNa and K are 1.54 Å and 2.03 Å

A metallic radius is always greater than a covalent radius.

3. Van der Waals radius:

It is defined as one-half of the distance between the nuclei of two non-bonded neighbouring atoms belonging to two adjacent molecules of an element in the solid state.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Van der waals radius

Periodic Trends in Properties of Elements Class 11 Notes

Example:

The distance between nuclei of two adjacent Cl -atoms of two adjacent chlorine molecules in solid states is 3.6  Å. So, the van der Waals radius of Cl-atom is

⇒ \(\frac{3.6}{2}\)= 1.8 A.

Since the van der Waals force of attraction is weak even in the solid state, the internuclear distances between the atoms of two adjacent molecules held by van der Waals forces are much larger than those between covalently bonded atoms (which involve mutual overlap of atomic orbitals).

Van der Waals radii are always greater than covalent radii. For example, the van der Waals radius of chlorine is 1.80 Å while its covalent radius is 0.99 Å

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Radius

Sequenceofthree types of atomic radii: van der Waals radius >Metallic radius > Covalentradius

Variation of atomic radii or sizes in the periodic table

1. Variation of atomic radii or sizes across a period:

While moving from left to right across a period in the periodic table, atomic radii or atomic sizes progressively decrease.

Atomic radii across a period  Explanation:

The principal quantum shell remains unchanged in the same period. So, the differentiating electrons enter the same shellbutdue to an increase in the number of protons, the positive charge of the nucleus also increases. So, attractive force of the nucleus for electrons in the outermost shell also increases. Hence, the atomic sizes, rather than the atomic radii of elements in the same period, gradually decrease with an increase in atomic number. In any period, atomic size of the element of group-1A is maximum and that of the halogen of group VILAisminimum.

Variation of atomic [covalent] radii of the elements of the third period (n = 3]:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Variation Of Atomic Radii Of The Elements

2. Variation of atomic radii or size down a group:

On moving down along any group of the periodic table, the atomic sizes rather than the atomic radii of the elements increase remarkably.

Atomic radii or size down a group Explanation:

On moving down a group, a new electronic shell is added to each succeeding element, though the number of electrons in the outermost shell remains the same. This tends to increase the atomic size. At the same time, there is an increase in nuclear charge with an increase in atomic number. This tends to decrease the size.

However, the effect of the increased nuclear charge is partly reduced by the shielding effect of the inner electronic shells.In practice,it is found that the effect of the addition of a new electronic shell is so large that it outweighs the contractive effect of the increased nuclear charge. Hence, there occurs a gradual increase in atomic radii on moving down a group in the periodic table.

3. Variationofsizein agroupforheavierelements:

On moving down a group, the relative rate of increase of atomic radio is slow for heavier elements. So, the differences in size for heavier species such as Cs (6s¹) and Fr(7s¹) of group-1 or Ba(6s²) and Ra(7s²) of group-2 are very small. This is due to the presence of electrons in the inner d and f-orbitals having a poor screening effect. D and f-electrons do not screen the outer electrons effectively from the pull of the nucleus. There is only a small increase in size in spite of the addition of a new electronic shell.

Example: Na(1.54 Å), K(2.03Å), Rb(2.16 Å), Cs(2.35Å) etc

In the case of transition elements, such a decrease in the atomic size is relatively less. Here the differentiating electron instead of entering the outermost orbit, goes to the penultimate (n- f )d -subshell which is closer to the nucleus. However, due to the poor shielding effect of the additional d -electrons, there is a small increase in effective nuclear charge and hence, the decrease in the size with an increase in the atomic number is relatively small.

In the case of lanthanide elements, the differentiating electrons enter the (n-2)f-orbital having a very poor shielding effect. So, in such cases, the increase in the effective nuclear charge is greater than that in the case of transition elements. Thus, the decrease in atomic sizes of the lanthanides is much more regular and distinct as compared to the transition elements. So, the difference in the extent of the decreased atomic sizes of these elements is due to their relative inability to screen the outermost electrons from attraction of the nucleus.

Periodic Trends in Properties of Elements Class 11 NCERT Solutions

Covalent radii (pm] of representative element:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Covalent radii Of Representive Elements

 Variation of atomic radii with atomic numbers across the second period:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Variation Of atomic radii with atomic numbers across the second period

Variation of atomic radii with atomic numbers for group-1 metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Variation of atomic radii with atomic numbers for group -1 metals

Screening effect or shielding effect:

In multi-electron atoms, the electrons present in the inner shells shield the electrons in the valence shell from the pull of the nucleus. It means that the electrons of the inner shells act as a screen between the nucleus and the electrons in the valence shell. This is known as the screening effect shielding effect.

Screening effect or shielding Definition:

The ability of the inner electronic shells to shield the outer electrons from the attraction of the nucleus is called the screening effect or shielding effect.

Magnitude of the screening effect of electrons belonging to different subshells follows the sequence: s>p> d>f.

Periodic Trends Chapter 3 Class 11 NCERT Notes

Important points regarding atomic (covalent) radius:

  • The alkali metals occupying positions at the extreme left side ofthe periodic table have the largest size in period
  • The halogens occupying positions at the right side of the periodic table have the smallest size in each period.
  • The noble gases present at the extreme right of the periodic table have larger atomic radii than those of the preceding halogens because van der Waals radii (but not covalent radii) are taken into consideration for noble gases.
  • In transition series {d -block elements), there is only a small decrease in size with successive increases in atomic number because the differentiating electrons enter into (n-1)d subshell, which partially shields the increased nuclear charge acting on the valence electrons. This is known as d contraction.
  • For inner-transition series ( /-block elements), the decrease in atomic radii wide increase in atomic number is relatively greater and more regular as compared to the transition series elements. This is so because the differentiating electrons enter into (n- 2)/ -subshell having a very poor shielding effect.

In a group of representative elements, there is a continuous increase in atomic radii with an increase in atomic number.

On going down a group of transition elements, there is an increase in size from first member to second member as expected, but for higher members, the increase in size is quite small. This is due to lanthanide contraction. For example, Cu(1.28 Å), Ag(1.44 Å), Au (1.44 Å)etc

 

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Short Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Elements And Periodicity In Properties Short Question And Answers

Question 1. Locate the position of an element in the long form of the periodic table.
Answer:

Electronic configuration: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p3.

Period = 4th, Group No. = 10+ total no. of electrons present in 4s and 4p orbitals =10 + 2 + 3 = 15

Question 2. The atomic radius of elements in a period decreases with an increase in atomic number but for inert gases, it increases. Why?
Answer:

Atoms in inert gases are held together by weak van der Waals forces, not by covalent bonds. Thus, atomic radii and van der Waals radii of inert gases are equal. However, as the van der Waals radius is greater than the covalent radius, the atomic radius of elements across a period decreases with an increase in atomic number but for inert gases increases.

Question 3. The number of electrons in Sr2+ and Br are the same. Justify whether the atomic radii of these two ions will be the same or not.
Answer:

Although Sr2+ and Brhave the same number of electrons, their proton number are different Number of protons in Sr2+ is greater than that of Br-‘; Thus, the nuclear pull on the electrons is greater in Sr2+ than in Br. So atomic radius or Sr2-1, is less them that of Br.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Short Questions

Question 4. Which of the following oxides is the most acidic? Al2O3, SO2, SO3, P4O10 and CO.
Answer:

Out of the elements Al, S, P, and C, S lies at the extreme right of the periodic table and so it is the most electronegative. Again in SO3 die oxidation state of S is the highest (+6). Hence, SO3 is the most acidic compound. It reacts with water to give a strong acid.

Question 5. Arrange the elements according to the instructions given:

  • Na, Cu, Zn (increasing order of electropositivity).
  • Na, Cs, K, Rb, Li (increasing order of atomic volume)

Answer:

  1. Cu < Zn < Na
  2. Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs

Question 6. The first ionization enthalpy of Na is less than that of Mg, but the second ionization enthalpy of Na is higher than that of Mg. Explain.
Answer:

By losing an electron from its outermost shell. Na attains the stable electronic configuration of the nearest noble gas Ne. So, the first ionization enthalpy of Na is less than Mg.

On the other hand, the removal of one electron from the outermost shell of Mg+1 leads to the attainment of the stable electronic configuration of Ne. So the second ionization enthalpy of Mg is less than that of Na.

Question 7. Ionization enthalpy values of Se, Br, Te andI are 869, 941, 1191, and 1142 kj. Mol -1. The values are not arranged in the correct order. Predict which element the ionization enthalpy value is 869kj. mol-1 and 1142kJ . mol-1 respectively.
Answer:

  • Se and Te are found in the fourth and fifth periods of group 16 in the periodic table. On the other hand, Br and are found in the fourth and fifth periods of group 17.
  • On moving across a period from left to right, ionization enthalpy increases whereas on moving down a group, its value decreases.
  • So, the elements in increasing order of ionization enthalpy are Te <I < Se < Br. Therefore, ionization enthalpy values of Te and Br are 869 and 1142 kj-mol-1 respectively.

Question 8. The ionization potential of hydrogen is 1312.0 kj mol-1. Express the value in eV atom-1. (leV = 1.6 × 1019)
Answer:

Ionisation potential of hydrogen = 1312.0 kj-mol-1

= \(\frac{1312 \times 10^5}{6.023 \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{atom}^{-1} \)

= \(\frac{1312 \mathrm{w} \times 10^3}{6.023 \times 10^{23}} \times \frac{1}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV} \cdot \mathrm{atom}^{-1}\)

= \(13.61 \mathrm{eV} \cdot \mathrm{atom}^{-1}\)

Question 9. Why is the size of F- smaller than that of O2- ion? 
Answer:

O2- and F ions are isoelectronic, but their nuclei contain 8 and 9 protons respectively.

So, the nuclear attractive force acting on the electrons of the F ion is greater than that on the electrons of the O2- ion. Consequently, the F ion is smaller than the O2- ion.

Question 10. Compare the radii of K+ and Cl ions (each contain the same number of electrons)
Answer:

The nuclei of the isoelectronic ions K+ and Cl contain 19 and 17 protons respectively. So the magnitude of nuclear attractive force acting on the electrons of K+ ions is greater than that on the electrons of Cl ion. Consequently, the radius of the K+ ion is smaller than that of the Cl ion.

Question 11. The electronic configuration of the atom of an element is ls22s22p63s23p1. Locate its position in the periodic table. Is it a metal or non-metal? What is its valency?
Answer:

The receives its last electron in 3p -orbital. So it belongs to p -p-block elements.

∴ Accordingly, its group number = 10 + no. of electrons in the valence shell = 10 + (2 + 1)= 13.

Again, the period of the element = several principal quantum numbers ofthe valence shell = 3.

It is metal because it belongs to the 13th group of the periodic table.

∴  Valency of the element = number of electrons in the valence shell = 2+1 = 3.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Short Questions

Question 12. Justify by mentioning two reasons, the inclusion of Ca and Mg in the same group of the periodic table.
Answer:

Both Ca and Mg have similar electronic configurations. Both of them belong to s -s-block.

Electronic configuration of Mg: ls22s22p63s2

Electronic configuration of Ca: ls22s22p63s23p64s2

Both are typical divalent metals and form stable ionic compounds,

For example: MgCl2, CaCI2; MgO, and CaO.

Question 13. Cu, Ag & Au are regarded as transition elements. Why?
Answer:

Despite having filled d -orbitals (d10), copper, silver, and gold are considered transition elements because at least in one stable oxidation state of the atoms of these elements, d -orbital is partially filled with electrons,

For example → The electronic configuration of Cu2+ is ls22s22p63s23p23d94s2.

Question 14. Can Cu (At. no. 29) and Zn (At. no. 30) be called transition elements? Explain.
Answer:

Although the Cu -atom in its ground state does not contain an incompletely filled d-orbital, Cu2+ has a partially filled d-orbital and so it is a transition element.

  • Electronic configuration of Cu: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s1
  • Electronic confiuration of Cu2+: ls22s22p63s23p63d94S2

In the ground state or any stable oxidation state of Zn, the d orbital is filled. So, it is not a transition element.

Electronic config. of Zn: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s2

Electronle’dbnfig. of Zn2’: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s0

Question 15. Write down the electronic configuration of the element having atomic number 21. Name two other elements of the same series to which this element belongs. Why do they belong to the same series?
Answer:

Electronic configuration ofthe element (Atomicnumber= 21): ls22s22p63s23p63d14s2

From the electronic configuration, it can be said that the element belongs to the first transition series as its 3d –orbital is partially filled.

Two other elements belonging to this series are Cr(24) and Mn(25). The 3d -orbitals of these elements are also partially filled.

Their electronic configurations are:

  • Cr: ls22s22p63s23p63d54s1
  • Mn: ls22s22p63s23p23d54s2

Question 16. The atomic numbers of three elements A, B, and C are 9, 13, and 17 respectively.

  1. Write their electronic configuration.
  2. Ascertain their positions in the periodic table.
  3. Which one is most electropositive and which one is most electronegative?

Answer:

1. Electronic configurations of

9A: ls22s22p5

13B: ls22s22p63s231

1717C: ls22s22p63s23p5

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Short Q&A

2. All three elements are p-block elements. Hence, their group and period numbers are as follows:

⇒ \(\begin{array}{|c|c|c|}
\hline \text { Element } & \text { Period number } & \text { Group number } \\
\hline \mathrm{A} & 2 & 10+2+5=17 \\
\hline \mathrm{B} & 3 & 10+2+1=13 \\
\hline \mathrm{C} & 3 & 10+2+5=17 \\
\hline
\end{array}\)

3.

  1. Element B can easily donate 3 electrons from its outermost shell to attain a stable inert gas configuration. So, it is the most electropositive element.
  2. Elements A and C are electronegative because they can accept one electron to attain a stable inert gas electronic configuration.
  3. These elements (A and C) have similar outer electronic configurations (ns2np5) but the size of A is smaller than that of C. So, the electronegativity of A is greater than that of C. Hence, A is the most electronegative element.

Question 17. Why is the atomic size of Ca2+ smaller than that of K+?
Answer:

  • K+ and Ca2+ are isoelectronic (each contains 18 electrons). K+ contains 18 protons in its nucleus and Ca2+ contains 20 protons.
  • Several protons being in Ca2+  ion, the electrons in the outermost shell of Ca2+  ion will experience greater attractive force by the nucleus compared to K+.
  • Consequently, Ca2+ has a smaller ionic size than K+ ions.

Question 18. The atomic radius of the chlorine atom is 0.99 Å but the ionic radius of chloride (Cl) is 1.81 Å—explain.
Answer:

In an anion, the total number of electrons being greater than that of the number of protons, attraction of the nucleus for the outermost electrons decreases.

  • Furthermore, due to mutual repulsion among electrons, the outermost orbit gets appreciably expanded.
  • As a result, the anionic radius becomes more than the radius of the parent atom. On account of this, the radius of C (1.81Å) (18 electrons and 17 protons) is greater than the radius of the chlorine (0.99 Å) atom (17 electrons and 17 protons).

Question 19. First ionization energy of elements increases with the atomic numbers of the elements in a period—why? Cite an exception.
Answer:

In any period, with an increase in atomic number, the magnitude of the positive charge of the nucleus increases, but there is no addition of any new shell.

  • In consequence, the attractive force of the nucleus for the outermost electrons increases.
  • So, the amount of energy required for the removal of an electron from the outermost shell of the atom ( first ionization energy) in any period increases with the increase in atomic number.
  • An exception to this generalization is the nitrogen-oxygen pair. In the second period, oxygen belonging to group VIA has a lower value of first ionization energy than nitrogen of group.

The reason can be ascribed to the stable electronic configuration of the nitrogen atom (ls22s22p3)

Question 20. What are d-block elements? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • The reasons behind placing Na and K in the same group of the periodic table are
  • The valence shell electronic configurations are the same

Na: ls22s22p63s1 K: ls22s22p63s23p64s1.

Question 21. Calculate the energy (in kj unit) required to convert all sodium atoms into sodium ions, present in 3.45 mg of its vapor. [I.P of sodium 490kJ mol-1 ]
Answer:

Sodium atoms present \(=\frac{3.45}{23} \times 10^{-3}=1.5 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol}\)

Na(g) + I1 = Na+(g) + = 490 kj. mol-1

The energy required for the ionization of 1 mol sodium is 490 kj.

The energy required for ionization of 1.5 × 10-4 mol sodium is 490 × 1.5 × 10-4 kj

= 73.5J

Question 22.

  1. Write the name of the element which is diagonally related to the element beryllium.
  2. Three elements A, B, and C have atomic numbers 11, 14, and 17 respectively.
    State the periodic table in which elements A and C belong. Write the formulas ofthe compounds formed between B and C and A and C. State the nature ofthe bonds.

Answer:

1. Aluminium (Al)

2.

  • 11A: ls22s22p63s23p2
  • 17C: ls22s22p63s23p5

From the electronic configuration is evident that A is an s – block element whereas C is a p – block element.

The compound formed between B and C has the formula BC4 and the nature of the bond is covalent. The compound formed by a combination of A and C is AC (electrovalent).

Question 23.

  1. Write the symbols of one transition and inner transition element.
  2.  Indicate as directed:
    • Which has the highest ionic radius? Al3+, Mg2+, O2-, F.
    • Which has the lowest electronegativity? H, Na, Si, Cl.
    • Which has the highest ionization energy? N, O, Ar, P

Answer: 

1.

  • Symbol of one transition element — Fe.
  • Symbol of one inner-transition element — Ce

2.

  • Ionic radius is highest for O2- for the given case.
  • Electronegativity is lowest for Na for the given case.
  • Ionization energy is highest for Ar for the given case.

Short Question and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3

Question 24. State the group number in the modem periodic table where solid, liquid, and gaseous elements are present at room temperature. Identify solid, and liquid elements. Indicate the given elements as alkali metal, alkaline-earth metal, coinage metal, chalcogen: Li, Ca, S, Cu.
Answer:

Group 17 of the modern periodic table contains solid (iodine, I2), liquid (bromine, Br2), and gaseous (chlorine, Cl2) elements at the same time.

  • Group 17 of the modern periodic table contains solid
  • (iodine, I2), liquid (bromine, Br2) and gaseous
  • (chlorine, Cl2) elements at the same time.

Question 25. Which has greater ionization energy and why—S or P?
Answer:

Phas greater ionization energy than S.

  • According to Hund’s rule, the half-filled electronic configuration is highly stable, and the outermost 3p -orbital of the P atom is half-filled.
  • To produce P+ ions by removing an electron from the 3p orbital of Prequireshuge energy resulting in a very high value of ionization energy.
  • On the other hand, the S atom has a partially filled 3p -orbital which attains a stable half-filled electronic configuration in the S+ ion.
  • Therefore, to produce S to S+ comparatively lower energy is required resulting in a lower value of ionization energy.

Question 26. Why is the electron-gain enthalpy of oxygen less than that of sulfur? Arrange the following metal oxides in terms of ascending order of basicity: ZnO, MgO, CaO, CuO.
Answer:

Electron-gain enthalpy of O is less than that of S as the 2p -orbital of the outermost shell of O-atom is much smaller in size than the 3p -orbital of the outermost shell of the S-atom.

  • So, the additional electron-electron repulsive force produced due to the addition of one electron to the 2p -orbital of the oxygen atom from outside is more than the additional electron-electron repulsive force developed by the addition of one electron to the 3p -orbital of the S-atom.
  • So the electron-gain enthalpy of the O-atom becomes less than that S-atom.

⇒ \(\mathrm{CuO}<\mathrm{ZnO}<\mathrm{MgO}<\mathrm{CaO}\)

Question 27. Why is the first ionization enthalpy of helium maximum among all the elements? Arrange the given compounds in terms of ascending order of oxidizing property: HCl, HBr, HI, HF
Answer:

Configuration of He is Is2, i.e., all electrons of He are present in the Is -orbital. These electrons are attracted very strongly by the nucleus. Further, there are no inner electronic orbitals to shield these electrons from the pull of the nucleus.

So removal of an electron from the Is -orbital requires a large amount of energy. Therefore, the first ionization enthalpy of He is maximum. Hydrogen halides do not show oxidizing properties.

However, the reducing power of the hydrogen halides follows the sequence: HF <HCl < HBr < H

Question 28.

  1. Which of the following two elements has a diagonal relationship? Li, Be, Al, and Si
  2. Between 29Cu and 19K which one has higher ionization enthalpy and why

Answer:

1. Be and Al

2.

  • Electronic configuration of 19K: ls22s22p63s23p64s1
  • Electronic configuration of 2gCu: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s1

The nucleus of the Cu-atom contains 10 more protons than that of the K-atom.

Additional nuclear pull on the outermost electron (4s¹) in Cu-atom is not counter-balanced by the shielding effect of ten 3d-electrons because orbitals have poor screening effects. Thus the effective nuclear charge acting on the 4s-electron of copper is greater than that acting on the 4s-electron of

Question 29. Which is more stable between BCl3 and TlCl3 and why? What is the oxidation state of Zn in Zn-Hg?
Answer:

Because of the poor shielding effect by the inner d – and f – electrons, the inert pair effect is maximum for Tl. Thus the most stable oxidation state of Tl is +1 and not +3. Therefore TIClg is unstable. B does not exhibit an inert pair effect and thus BCl3 is stable.

Question 30. In terms of period and group, where would you locate the element with Z =
Answer:

It is known that the difference between atomic numbers of the successive members of any group is 8,8,18,18 and 32 (from top to bottom). So, the element with atomic number 114 will lie just below the element with atomic number (114- 32) = 82.

The element with atomic number 82 is lead (Pb), which is a member of the 6th period belonging to group number 14 (p -p-block element). Thus the element with atomic number 114 takes its position in the 7th period and group- 14 (p -block element) of the periodic table.

Question 31. Write the atomic number of the element present in the third period & seventeenth group of the periodic table.
Answer:

The general electronic configuration of the valence shell of the elements of group-17 (halogens) is ns2np5. For the third period, n = 3.

  • Therefore, the electronic configuration of the valence shell of the element of the third period and group-17 Is 3ia3p12 and the complete electronic configuration of this element Is ls22s22p63s23p5.
  • There are a total of 17 electrons In this element.
  • Thus, the element In the third period and seventeenth group of the periodic table has atomic number = 17.

Question 32. Consider the given species: N2-, O2-, I1-, Nn+, Mg2+ and Al3+. What Is Common In them? Arrange them in the order of increasing ionic radii.
Answer:

Each of the given ions has 10 electrons. Hence, they are all isoelectronic species.

  • Ionic radii of isoelectronic ions decrease with an increase in the magnitude of the nuclear charge.
  • The order of increasing nuclear charge of the given isoelectronic ions is N3- < O2- <F < Na+ < Mg2+ < Al3+.
  • Therefore, the order of increasing ionic radii is: Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F- < O2- < N3-.

Question 33. What is the basic theme of organization in the periodic table?
Answer:

The basic theme of organization in the periodic table is to study different physical and chemical properties of all the elements and their compounds simply and systematically.

  • Elements belonging to the same group have similar physical and chemical properties.
  • So, if the physical and chemical property of any one element of a group is known, then it is possible to predict the physical and chemical properties of the remaining elements of that group.
  • Therefore, it is not important to keep in mind the physical and chemical properties of all elements in the periodic table.

Question 34. How would you react to the statement that the electronegativity of N on the Pauling scale is 3.0 in all the nitrogen compounds?
Answer:

The electronegativity of any element depends on the hybridization state and oxidation state of that element in a particular compound, i.e., the electronegativity of an element varies from compound to compound. For example, the electronegativity of Natom varies as sp3 —N < sp2—N < sp—N. So, the, given statement is not correct.

Question 35. Would you expect the first ionization enthalpies for two isotopes of the same element to be the same or different? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Isotopes of an element have the same number of electrons and similar electronic configurations. So their nuclear charge and atomic radii are identical. Consequently, two isotopes of the same element are expected to have the same ionization enthalpy.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 NCERT Solutions Short Question Answers

Question 36. What are the major differences between metals and non-metals?
Answer:

Metals have a strong tendency to lose electrons to form cations they are strong reducing agents, have low ionization enthalpies, have less negative electron gain enthalpies, low electronegativity, and form basic oxides and ionic compounds.

Non-metals have a strong tendency to accept electrons to form anions. They are strong oxidizing agents, have high ionization enthalpies, have high negative electron-gain enthalpies, and high electronegativity, and form acidic oxides and covalent compounds.

Question 37. Formulas of oxide and chloride of an element A are A205 and AClg respectively. Which group of Mendeleev’s periodic table will the element belong to? State whether it is a metal or a non-metal.
Answer:

Hiking oxygen as standard, the valency ofthe element A is 5, and taking chlorine as standard, the valency of A is 3. Since oxygen-based valency (8-chlorine-based valency) is the same as that ofthe group number of the element, the element will be of group Mendeleev’s periodic table. Thus, itis a non-metal.

Question 38. A and B are two elements with atomic numbers 9 and 17 respectively. Explain why the element A is a more powerful oxidizing agent than the element B.
Answer:

Electronic configuration of 9A: ls22s22p5.

Electronic configuration of  17B: ls22s22p63s23p5.

Both A and B can accept electrons to form the anions of A and B having inert gas electronic configuration. However, the anions A are more stable than B because of the smaller atomic size of A. So A is a stronger oxidizing agent than B.

Question 39. Which one is more basic and why—MgO & Al2O3?
Answer:

MgO is more basic than Al2O3. Mg & Al are elements of group-2A and 3A of period-3 respectively. Since in a periodic table, metallic property decreases along a period from left to right, the metallic property of Mg is greater than that of Al. Again the oxide of an element with more metallic character is more basic than that with less metallic character. Thus, the basic character of MgO will be more than that of Al2O3.

Question 40. LiCO2 despite being an alkali metal carbonate, is sparingly soluble in water like MgCO3 — explain.
Answer:

The electronegativities of Li and Mg are very close to each other. Furthermore, both Li+ and Mg2+ have similar ionic potential) values and both of them have high polarising power.

So Li and Mg show some similarities in their chemical properties. Due to their small ionic size and high polarising power, their carbonates are somewhat covalent. So, both LiCO3 (alkali metal carbonate) and MgCO3 are sparingly soluble in water.

Question 41. Compare the atomic radii of fluorine and neon.
Answer:

Fluorine and neon are the members of the second period having atomic numbers 9 and 10 respectively. The covalent radius of fluorine (halogen) is expressed in terms of its covalent radius, while that of neon (noble gas) is expressed in terms of its van der Waals radius. Since by definition, van der Waals radii are always greater than covalent radii, therefore, the atomic radius of neon is greater than that of fluorine.

Question 42. Give one example of each of the following and indicate their positions in the periodic table (long form)

  1. Liquid non-metal
  2. Liquid metal
  3. Radioactive halogen
  4. Radioactive inert gas
  5. Radioactive alkali-metal.

Answer:

  1. Liquid non-metal: Bromine (Br), 17th group in 4th period,
  2. Liquid metal: Mercury (Hg), 12th group in 6th period,
  3. Radioactive halogen: Astatine (At), 17th group in 6th period,
  4. Radioactive inert gas: Radon (Rn), 18th group in 6th period,
  5. Radioactive alkali metal: Francium (Fr), 1st group in 7th period.

Question 43. Why is the ionization enthalpy of oxygen less than those of nitrogen and fluorine?
Answer:

For the explanation of the ionization enthalpy of oxygen is less than nitrogen, the  Ionisation enthalpy of oxygen is less than fluorine because—

  1. Nuclear charge increases from oxygen to fluorine,
  2. The number of shells remains the same and the addition of differentiating electrons occurs in the same shell of fluorine,
  3. The atomic size of oxygen is greater than fluorine.

Question 44. What are rare-earth elements? Why are they so called?
Answer:

  • The 14 elements from cerium (58Ce) to lutetium (71Lu) ofthe periodic table are called rare-earth elements.
  • These elements are so named because most of these elements occur in very small amounts in the earth’s crust.

Question 45. What is the basic difference between electron-gain enthalpy and electronegativity of an element?
Answer:

  • Electron-gain enthalpy means the enthalpy change involved when an electron is added to an isolated gaseous atom in its lowest energy state.
  • Whereas electronegativity means the tendency of an atom to attract the shared pairs of electrons toward its nucleus when the atom is covalently bonded in a molecule.

Question 46. How does the basicity of the oxides of representative elements vary on moving a group in the periodic table? On moving across a period from left to right, how does die acidity of the oxides of representative elements vary?
Answer:

  • On moving down a group in the periodic table, the basicity of the oxides of representative elements increases.
  • On moving across a period from left to right, the acidity of the oxides ofthe representative elements increases.

Question 47. Formulas of oxide and chloride of an element M are M2O5 & MCI3 respectively. State the group to which the element belongs to. Determine whether it is metal or non-metal.
Answer:

  • The valency of the element M is 5 when oxygen Is considered the standard and the valency of M Is 3 when chlorine Is considered as the standard.
  • Since, the oxygon-butted valency of an element Is equal to Its group number, the group to which M belongs Is VA(15). Element  M Is a nonmetal as It Is located In group VA of the periodic table

Classification of Elements Class 11 Short Questions and Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Warm-Up Exercise Question And Answers

Question 1. Three elements X, Y, and Z follow Dobereiner’s law of triads. If the atomic masses of X and Z are 7 and 39 respectively, then determine the atomic mass of Y.
Answer:

The atomic mass of Y = arithmetic mean of atomic masses of X and Z. Therefore, the atomic mass of Y = 7 + 39/2 = 23.

Question 2. Which properties of the elements are dependent on their electronic configurations and which are not
Answer:

The chemical properties and some physical properties of elements are dependent on their electronic configurations whereas nuclear properties (like radioactivity) do not depend on their electronic configurations.

Question 3. The outermost electronic configuration of the atom of an element is 3s-3p³. Mention the position of the element in the long periodic table.

Answer:

It is a p -block element. Hence period no. = principle quantum no. ofthe outermost shell= 3 Its group no = (total no. of electrons in s-and p orbital) +10 = 2 + 3 + 10 = 15

Question 4. Elements of the 4th, 5th, and 6th periods of Mendeleev’s periodic table were divided into even and odd series—why?
Answer:

Due to the difference in properties of each pair of elements belonging to the same period and group, the elements of the 4th, 5th, and 6th periods of Mendeleev’s periodic table were divided into even and odd series.

Question 5. Identify the elements eka-aluminum and eka-silicon. What was the reason for such naming?
Answer:

Ga and Ge. The elements were so named by Mendeleev because he predicted that the properties of ekaaluminium and eka-silicon would be similar to those of aluminum and silicon respectively.

Question 6. State the reason for the repetition of properties ofthe elements after certain regular intervals of their atomic numbers.
Answer:

After certain regular intervals of their atomic numbers, elements show similar electronic configurations in their valence shell. For this reason, repetition of properties of the elements is observed.

Question 7. In the modern periodic table, period indicates the value of atomic number atomic mass principal quantum number azimuthal quantum number
Answer:

Each period in the modern periodic table begins with the filling of a new shell. So, the period indicates the value of a principal quantum number.

Question 8. Cu in the +1 oxidation state and Hg in the +2 oxidation state resemble each other in their properties. Explain.
Answer:

Valence shell configurations of Cu+([Ar]3d10) and Hg2+([Xe]5d10) are similar. So they resemble each other in their properties.

Question 9. Write the formula of the compound formed by the most electronegative and least electronegative elements.
Answer:

The most electronegative element is F while the least electro-negative element is Cs. Formula ofthe compound is CsF. 85

NCERT Solutions Chapter 3 Classification and Periodicity Short Q&A

Question 10. Calculate the atomic volume of sodium (atomic mass – 23) if its density is 0.972 g-cm-3.
Answer:

Atomic volume of sodium \(=\frac{23 \mathrm{~g}}{0.972 \mathrm{~g} \cdot \mathrm{cm}^{-3}}=23.66 \mathrm{~cm}^3\)

Question 11. Determine the position of an element in the long form of the periodic table if its electronic configuration is [18Ar]3d104s2
Answer:

It is a d -block element. Hence period no. = principle quantum no. of the outermost shell = 4 and its group no. = total electronin 3d and 4s -orbital = 10 + 2 = 12.

Question 12. Mention the name and the position of two elements, one which is most electronegative and the other most positive in the periodic table.
Answer:

  • Most electronegative element =F (group 17, period-2)
  • Most electropositive element = Cs (group 1, period-6)

Question 13. The outermost electronic configurations of the two elements are 2s2 and 2s22p1 respectively. Which has greater ionization enthalpy Which has the highest ionization enthalpy: N, O, Ar, P?
Answer: The element with the outermost electron configuration 2s2 has greater ionization enthalpy.

Question 14. Electron-gain enthalpy of N is less than that of O. Explain.
Answer:

Nitrogen (2s22p3) has a stable outer electronic configuration with a half-filled 2p -subshell. So, it is reluctant to accept an additional electron. Thus the electron-gain enthalpy of nitrogen is less than that of oxygen.

Question 15. Consider the set of ions (Na+, N3-, Mg2+, O2-, F-, and Al3+) and answer the following questions: What is the common factor associated with the species? Arrange the ions in order of increasing radii.
Answer:

All are isoelectronic species.

Al3++ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F < O2- < N

Question 16. Which products are liberated at the cathode and anode when molten ionic hydrides are electrolyzed?
Answer:

When molten Ionic hydrides are electrolyzed, the metal Ions are discharged at the cathode while hydrogen gas is liberated at the anode.

Question 17. Arrange according to the instruction given: Al2O3, P2O5,  Cl2O7, SO3   (increasing order of acidity)  MgO, ZnO, CaO, Na2O, CuO (increasing order of basicity).
Answer:

Al2O3< P2O5 < SO3 < Cl2O7

CuO < ZnO < MgO < CaO < Na2O

Question 18. What do you understand by the negative value of electron-gain enthalpy of an element?
Answer:

It signifies that energy is released when an isolated gaseous atom of the element under consideration accepts an electron to form a monovalent gaseous anion.

Question 19. Why is the value of electron-gain enthalpy negative?
Answer:

When an electron is added to a neutral gaseous atom to form a negative gaseous ion, energy’ is usually liberated, i.e., the enthalpy change in the process is usually negative. So electron-gain enthalpies of most elements have negative values.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Introduction

At present, 118 elements are known to us. It is Almost an impossible task to remember the individual properties of these elements And A larger number of compounds derived from them. Several attempts were made by former scientists to arrange the elements in a coherent and orderly manner. After Dalton’s Atomic theory, attempts were made to establish a correlation between the atomic masses of various elements and their properties.

But until a method for the estimation of correct atomic masses of elements was innovated, the work on the proper classification of elements could not make any significant progress. However, after the atomic masses of elements were correctly determined, the attempts for the classification of elements received particular attention. The way of arranging similar elements together and separating them from dissimilar elements is called the classification of elements.

Historical Background Of The Classification Of Elements Based On Atomic Weight

Dobereiner’s Law Of Triads

In 11117, German scientist Doberelnor stated that in a group of three chemically similar elements, called a triad, the atomic weight of (the middle element of each triad Is very close to the arithmetic mean of those of the other two elements.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 3 Classification of Elements

This was called Oohereiner’s law of triads. Some familiar triads, based on lids law, are shown below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Dobereiners law of traids

From the table, it is observed that the atomic weight of sodium (Na) is the average of the atomic weights of lithium (Li) and potassium (K)

⇒ \(\left[\frac{7+39}{2}=23\right]\)

This relationship is only applicable to a limited number of elements and hence fails to classify all the known elements.

However, it cannot be denied that it indicated the existence of an inter-relationship between the properties and atomic weights of elements.

Law of Telluric Screw

In 1862, Chancourtois attempted to classify the elements based on atomic mass. He took a vertical cylinder with 16 equidistant lines drawn on its surface (lines are parallel to the axis of the cylinder). He drew a spiral line or helix on the surface making an angle of 45° to the axis of the cylinder.

The atomic weights were plotted vertically along the spiral line. He arranged the elements on the helix in order of their increasing atomic weights. It was observed that in the telluric screw, the elements that differed from each other in atomic weight by 16 or multiples of 16 fell on the same vertical line. The elements lying on the same vertical line showed nearly the same chemical properties. However, this concept did not attract much attention.

Newlands’ Law Of Octaves

Arranging the known elements in the ascending order of their atomic weights, Newlands, observed (1865) that properties of the eighth element, starting from a given one, is a kind of repetition of the first, like the eighth note in an octave of music. He called this regularity the law of octaves.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Newlands law of octaves

Starting from Li, the eighth element is Na and the eighth element following Na is K. There exists a striking resemblance in properties among these elements. Similarly, F shows similarity with the eighth element Cl following it in properties. The law of octaves was found to be satisfactory in the case of lighter elements from hydrogen (H) to calcium (Ca). However in the case of heavier elements beyond calcium, it lost its validity and hence, the law was discarded.

Lothar Meyer Arragngement

In 1869, Lothar Meyer, a German scientist, studied the different physical properties of the known elements and plotted a graph of atomic volume (atomic weight divided by density) against the atomic weight of various elements. He noticed that the elements with similar properties occupied similar positions on the curve. Based on this observation, Lothar Meyer concluded that the physical properties of the elements are a periodic function of their atomic weights.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Class 11 Notes

Periodic Law

In 1869, Russian chemist, Dmitri Mendeleev, examined the relationship between the atomic weights of the elements and their physical and chemical properties. From his studies, Mendeleev pointed out that the physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions of their atomic weights. This generalisation is called Mendeleev-Lothar Meyer Periodic Law or simply Mendeleev’s Periodic Law.

Mendeleev’s Periodic law:

The physical and chemical properties of elements are a periodic function of their atomic weights. This law implied that if the elements are arranged in the order of increasing atomic weights, the physical & chemical properties of the elements change regularly from one member to another and get repeated after a definite interval. This recurrence of properties ofthe elements at definite intervals is called the periodicity of elements.

Periodic classification and periodic properties:

Based on the periodic law, the classification of elements according to the increasing atomic weight is called periodic classification. The properties of the elements which are directly or indirectly related to their electronic configurations and show a regular gradation when we descend in a group or move across a period in the periodic table are called periodic properties.

For example:

The size of atoms or atomic radii, ionic radii, atomic volume, metallic character, ionisation enthalpy, electron affinity, electronegativity, melting point, boiling point, valency etc. Radioactivity is not a periodic property of elements: Radioactivity is neither directly nor indirectly related to the electronic configuration of atoms. It depends on the ratio between the number of neutrons and protons present in the atom.

Classification Of Elements Based On Outer Electronic Configurations

Based on electronic configurations of the ultimate and penultimate shell of the atoms, Bohr divided the elements into four classes viz., gas elements,

  1. Representative elements,
  2. Transition elements and
  3. Inner-transition elements.

Inert gas elements

S and p -subshells of the outermost shell of the elements of this class are filled.

Except He (electronic configuration: Is2)

  • All other inert gas elements have the valence shell electronic configuration: ns2np6.
  • All these elements are stable and chemically inert as their outermost shells contain octets of electrons.
  • They do not normally participate in chemical reactions because the gain or loss of electrons by their atoms would disturb their stability. So, they are called inert gas elements.
  • Their valency being zero, they find a place in group ‘0’ or ’18 These elements act as a bridge between highly electropositive alkali metals and strongly electronegative halogens.

Representative Elements

Elements present in s – and p -blocks (except group-1) of the periodic table are known as representative elements. The electronic configuration of the outermost shell of these elements varies from ns1 to ns2np5. These consist of some metals, all non-metals and metalloids.

The name ‘representative’ has been assigned to the elements because of their frequent occurrence nature and because they typify the properties of all other members of the group to which they belong.

All the elements of groups 1A, 2A and from 3A to 4LA are included in this class.

These elements are very reactive Chemical reactivity of these elements can be ascribed to the ability of their atoms to attain inert gas electronic configuration (ns2np6 or Is2) either by gaining or losing electron(s) or by sharing one or more electron pairs with other atoms. These elements are also known as typical elements.

Transition Elements

Elements of this class are characterised by the presence of atoms in which the inner d-subshell is not filled. According to the modified definition, the elements in which atoms in their ground state or any stable oxidation state contain incompletely filled d -subshell are known as transition elements. Atoms of the elements in this class have the general electronic configuration: (n-1)d1-10ns1-2

Cu, Ag and Au, despite having filled d orbitals, are regarded as transition elements. This is because at least in one stable oxidation state of these elements, d subshell remains incompletely filled.

There are four transition series corresponding to the filling of 3d,4d,5d and 6d orbitals These four series belong to the 4th. 5th. 6th and the period of the periodic table.

Each series begins with a member of the group-3 and ends with a member of the group-12.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Classification of Elements Notes

Characteristics:

  • All transition elements are metallic.
  • They have more than one oxidation state or valency.
  • Their ions are coloured.
  • They form complex compounds.
  • Elements of group-12 (11B) (Zn, Cd, Hg) are not considered transition elements because they have no partially filled d -d-orbitals in any of their oxidation states.
  • Moreover, they do not form stable complexes and do not show characteristic colour and paramagnetism.
  • However, their tendency to form complex is much greater than that of the representative elements.
  • They exhibit properties of both transition representative elements.

Differences between typical and transition elements:

  • During the building up of an atom of a typical element by the filling of electrons in its various orbitals, the last electron goes to s -or p -orbital of the outermost shell (n).
  • However, in the case of transition elements, the last electron enters the inner d -d-orbital of(n- 1) th shell.
  • For the representative elements, atomic volume or radius decreases but ionisation enthalpy and electro negativity go on increasing with the increase in atomic number across a period.
  • In the case of the transition elements, as the last electron enters the inner (n- 1)d -orbital, the extent of change is relatively small.
  • Most of the representative elements exhibit only one valency. Some elements, of course, show more than one valency.
  • But transition elements show 2 or more valencies through the participation of inner d -d-orbital electrons.
  • In the case of representative elements, the tendency to form complex compounds is almost negligible while transition elements are found to show a strong tendency to produce complex compounds due to the presence of incompletely filled d -d-orbital.
  • Compounds formed by representative elements are, in general, colourless but the compounds of transition elements are mostly coloured.
  • Due to the absence of odd electron(s), compounds formed by representative elements are diamagnetic while transition metal compounds, because of the presence of odd electrons, are paramagnetic.
  • Many of the transition metals and their compounds act as catalysts in chemical reactions. Such a tendency is seldom observed in the case of representative elements.

Inner-transition elements

Elements of this class are also transition elements, although they may be distinguished from the regular transition series by their electronic configurations.

  • Atoms of these elements not only contain incompletely filled d-subshell [(n-1)d] but also contain incompletely filled f-subshell [(n- 2)f].
  • These elements comprise a transition series within a transition series and hence, they are called Inner-transition elements.
  • The two series of inner-transition elements are O lanthanoids (rare earth elements) and actinoids.

In the case of 14 elements i.e., cerium (Cel to lutetium (71Lu) following lanthanum (57La), 4f- and 5d subshells remain incompletely filled. These are called lanthanoids.

Their general electronic configuration is:

4f1-14 5d0-16s2 With the increase in atomic number (58-71). the differentiating electrons of these elements enter the 4f- subshell, despite the presence of a partially filled 5d -subshell. The total electron-accommodating capacity of the f-subshell Is 14.

So the number of lanthanoids is also 14. Likewise, 14 elements after actinium (89Ac), from thorium (90Th) to lawrencium (103Lr) are called actinoids. Their general electronic configuration is 5f1’14 6d01 7s2. With the increase in atomic number (90-103), the differentiating electrons enter the 5f-subshell, despite the presence of an incompletely filled 6d -6d-subshell. Hence, like the lanthanoids, the number of actinoids Is also 14.

Lanthanoid contraction

In the case of lanthanoids (58Ce – 71Lu), it is observed that with an increase in atomic numbers, atomic and ionic size (M3+) go on decreasing, although the decrease in Ionic radii is much more regular than that of atomic radii.

This decrease in atomic and ionic radii with an increase in atomic number in the case of lanthanoids, is known as lanthanoid contraction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Change in inoinic radius of ianthnoids elements

Cause of lanthanoid contraction:

  • The general electronic configuration of lanthanoids is 4f1-14 5d0-16s2. The differentiating electrons of these elements enter the 4f-subshell.
  • Now due to their diffused shape, f-orbitals have a very poor shielding effect.
  • Thus with the gradual addition of the f- electrons, the atomic number increases by one unit while the shielding effect does not increase appreciably; i.c., there is a gradual increase in the effective nuclear charge acting on the outermost electrons.
  • Consequently, the attraction of the nucleus for the electrons in the outermost shell increases, causing the electron cloud to shrink although its magnitude is small.
  • Thus, there is a gradual shrinkage in the atomic and ionic radii with an increase in atomic number.
  • Precisely speaking, f-orbitals are too diffused to screen the outermost electrons effectively against the attractive force of the nucleus. Thus, there is a slow contraction in atomic and ionic radii (lanthanoid contraction).
  • In the same way, the d -contraction due to the accommodation of die electrons in (n- 1) d -subshell in the transition series can be interpreted.
  • But d -d-orbitals are more effective in screening compared to tyre f-orbitals.
  • So this effect is less pronounced in the case of transition elements.

Classification of elements as metals, non-metals and metalloids

All the known elements can be divided into three classes— metals, non-metals and metalloids based on their properties.

Metals

About 78% of the known elements are metals. They appear mainly on the left side and central portion of the long form ofthe periodic table.

Examples are:

  1. Alkali metals,
  2. Alkaline earth metals,
  3. D -block elements,
  4. F-block elements,
  5. Higher members of p -block elements.

Metals have the following characteristics:

  • They are solids at room temperature. Mercury is an exception, which is a liquid at ordinary temperature.
  • Gallium (melting point 30°C) and caesium (melting point 29°C) are also liquids above 30°C.
  • They usually have high melting and boiling points.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • They are malleable (can be flattened into thin sheets) and ductile (can be drawn out into wires).

Non-metals

There are only about 20 non-metals discovered so far. They are located towards the top right-hand side of the periodic table. Hydrogen and some p-block elements are non-metals.

  • Six of the non-metals (C, B, P, S, Se and I) are solid.
  • Bromine is the only liquid non-metal.
  • The remaining non-metals (N, O, F, Cl, H and inert gases) are gases.
  • Non-metals have low melting and boiling points (boron and carbon are exceptions).
  • They are poor conductors of heat and electricity (graphite is a good conductor of electricity).
  • Nonmetallic solids are usually brittle and are neither malleable nor ductile.

Metalloids

  • There are some elements which have certain characteristics common to both metals and non-metals.
  • These are called semimetals or metalloids. Examples are—silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), arsenic (As), antimony (Sb) and tellurium (Te).
  • In most of their properties (both physical and chemical), metalloids behave as non-metals. However, they somewhat resemble the metals in their electrical conductivity. They tend to behave as semiconductors.
  • This property is found particularly in the case of silicon and germanium.
  • These two metals are mainly responsible for the remarkable progress in the past five decades in the field of solid-state electronics.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification of Elements

IUPAC Nomenclature Of Transuranic Elements (Atomic Number More Than 100)

The elements beyond fermium (100) are called transfermium elements. They have atomic numbers above 101.

Fermium (100), mendelevium (101), nobelium (102), and lawrencium (103) are named after eminent scientists. Some of the elements with atomic numbers higher than 103 were synthesized and reported simultaneously by scientists from the USA and the Soviet Union.

Each group proposed different names for die same element, e.g., an element with atomic number 104 was named Rutherfordium by USA scientists while Soviet scientists named it Kurchatovium.

To overcome such controversies, the IUPAC (1977) has recommended a new method of naming these elements. This is discussed here.

1. The digits expressing the atomic number of an element are represented serially (from left to right) by using the numerical roots given below.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties iupac nomenclauture of transuranic element

2. The successive roots are written together and the name ends with ‘mum’ To avoid the repetition of some letters, the following procedure is adopted.

  • If ‘enn’ occurs before ‘nil; the second ‘n’ of ‘enn’ is dropped.
  • Similarly the letters ‘i’ of ‘bi’ and ‘tri’ are dropped when they occur before ium,bi+ium= bium, tri+ium= trium, enn+nil= ennil etc.

3. The symbol of an element is derived by writing successively the initial letters (z.e., abbreviations) of the numerical roots which constitute the name.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Systematic and Iupac Approved Names Of Elements Having Z100

 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Introduction

Organic compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms are called hydrocarbons. Their major sources are petroleum, natural gas, and coal. Hydrocarbons are considered to be the parent organic compounds. All other compounds are considered to be derived from hydrocarbons by replacement of one or more of their H-atoms by appropriate functional groups.

Hydrocarbons play a very important role in our daily life. Some of these are used as fuels. The largely used fuels are LPG (liquefied petroleum gas), LNG (liquefied natural gas), CNG (compressed natural gas), gasoline (petrol), diesel, kerosene etc.

These are a mixture of different hydrocarbons. The main constituent of natural gas is methane. Some hydrocarbons are used to manufacture polymers such as polythene, polypropene, polystyrene, nylon, terylene etc. Some hydrocarbons are used as solvents in the paint industry and as the starting material for the manufacturing of many dyes and drugs.

Petroleum Or Crude Oil Commercial Source Of Hydrocarbons

Petroleum is a dark viscous oily liquid that is a mixture of hydrocarbons containing different impurities and found within impenetrable rock structures deep below the earth’s crust In Latin, petroleum means rock oil [Latin: petra = rock, oleum = oil). As it is collected from underneath the earth, its alternative name is mineral oil.It is also called crude oil. Petroleum is also known as liquid gold because of its commercial importance. The colour of petroleum depends on its source and nature.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Natural gas:

The gas mixture found above petroleum at various depths below the earth’s crust is referred to as natural gas. The main constituent of natural gas is methane (90%). It also contains ethane, propane, butane and very small amounts of pentane and hexane vapors.

Composition Of petroleum:

Petroleum mainly consists of three types of hydrocarbons. These are chiefly alkanes
(C1-C40),  small amount of cycloalkanes

For example: Methylcyclopentane, cyclohexane, methylcyclohexane) and a very small amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, etc.).

Besides hydrocarbons, it also contains certain organic compounds containing oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen

Refining of petroleum:

The process of separating crude petroleum into different useful fractions having different boiling ranges with the simultaneous elimination of undesirable impurities is called refining of petroleum. Crude petroleum (mainly a mixture of hydrocarbons with carbon atoms ranging from(C1-C40) is separated into different fractions by fractional distillation. According to the demand and the necessity of different industries, each fraction, obtained by distillation under different boiling ranges is collected.

In addition to the low boiling volatile hydrocarbons, the four main fractions obtained by distillation of crude petroleum are:

  1. Crude naphtha
  2. Kerosene or paraffin oil
  3. Fuel oil or diesel and
  4. Residual oil.
  5. Crude naphtha and the residual oil are further fractionated to get fractions within still narrow boiling ranges, suitable for different uses.

Different fractions obtained by fractional distillation and their uses:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Different Fractions Obtained By Fractional Distillation

Cracking And Reforming

1. Cracking Definition

The process in which high-boiling long-chain hydrocarbons are decomposed to give a mixture of low-boiling smaller hydrocarbons by the action of heat alone or heat in the presence of a catalyst is called cracking.

Cracking involves the breaking of carbon-carbon and carbon-hydrogen bonds. Thermal decomposition of organic com¬pounds is known as pyrolysis and when it is applied to alkanes it is known as cracking. The hydrocarbons that will be formed by cracking depends on the conditions applied for the process

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cracking Reaction

Thermal cracking:

The type of cracking that involves the conversion of high-boiling long-chain hydrocarbons into a mixture of low-boiling smaller hydrocarbons by the action of heat alone is called thermal cracking.

Due to the random dissociation of C—C bonds in thermal cracking, a complex mixture of a large number of hydrocarbons (both saturated and unsaturated) is obtained. The components may be separated from the mixture so obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Thermal Cracking

Catalytic cracking:

Cracking carried out at a relatively lower temperature (330-380°C) in the presence of a catalyst is called catalytic cracking. The most commonly used catalyst is a 4: 1 mixture of silica (SiO2) and alumina (Al2O3). About 85% of the world’s total production of gasoline is obtained through this method. Kerosene is converted into gasoline applying this process

Oceano number:

All gasoline are not equally effective as fuel. n-heptane ranks as a fuel of inferior quality because its combustion takes place rapidly, producing a knocking in the internal combustion engine. On the other hand, 2,2,4- trimethylpentane or isooctane which burns smoothly, does not produce any significant knocking in the engine. Hence, 2, 2, and 4-trimethylpentane having higher antiknock properties (rated as 100) and n-heptane, with lower antiknock properties (its fuel rating taken to be 0) have been introduced as standards for rating fuel.

Based on these two extreme cases, different fuels are standardized with respect to octane numbers. So, octane number indicates the relative antiknock tendency of a gasoline sample.

  • Octane number is defined as the parts by percent of isooctane that must be added to a sample of n-heptane to produce the same fuel efficiency of the fuel whose standardization is to be made.
  • The octane number of a fuel is 35’—which means that the efficiency of the fuel is identical to a mixture of 35% isooctane and 65% n-heptane.
  • The higher the octane number better is the fuel efficiency.
  • The knocking tendency of n -n-isomers is much greater than that of branched-chain alkanes.
  • When tetraethyllead [(C2H5)4Pb] is added in small quantities to gasoline, it converts the n -n-alkanes to branched-chain isomers, consequently decreasing the knocking tendency i.e, the octane number of gasoline is increased
  • Gasoline obtained by catalytic cracking is more effective for internal combustion engines than that obtained by direct distillation of crude petroleum.
  • Because this gasoline contains a large amount of unsaturated hydrocarbons & has a higher octane number

2. Reforming Definition

Reforming It is the method of changing low-grade gasoline to high-grade quality gasoline by changing the structures of constituent hydrocarbons by isomerization and aromatization

Isomerization:

In isomerization, a straight-chain hydrocarbon is heated with Al2Cl3 orPt to give a branched one.

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomerism

Aromatisation:

In aromatization, a straight-chain hydro¬ carbon is converted into a cycloalkane by cyclization, which is converted into an aromatic hydrocarbon by dehydrogenation. The process is carried out by heating the alkane in the presence of a catalyst (Pt, Pd or Ni) at 400- 600°C.

Example:

After aromatization, hexane is converted into cyclohexane and heptane into methylcyclohexane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatisation Reactions

Platinum is the most effective catalyst used in the reforming process and so the process of reforming is also called platforming.

Importance of reforming:

  • The octane number of a fuel can be improved by increasing the percentage of branched-chain alkanes and aromatic hydrocarbons which possess greater efficiency as a fuel.
  • A mixture of benzene, toluene, and xylene obtained in the reforming (aromatization) process is known as BTX. Many benzene derivatives may be prepared from these compounds

Classification Of Hydrocarbons

Classification of hydrocarbons may be summarised as:

Based on (their structure, hydrocarbons can be broadly classified

Into two main classes:

  1. Acyclic or open-chain hydrocarbons and
  2. Cyclic or closed-chain hydrocarbons.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chart Of Hydrocarbons

1. Acyclic or open-chain hydrocarbons

In the molecules of these compounds, the carbon atoms are attached to form open chains, which may be branched or unbranched. They are also called aliphatic hydrocarbons. Depending on the nature of carbon-carbon bonds, these are further classified into the following two categories, these are saturated hydrocarbons (or alkanes) and unsaturated hydrocarbons (alkenes and alkynes)

Saturated hydrocarbons or alkanes:

The hydrocarbons in which the carbon atoms are linked with each other by single covalent bonds are called saturated hydrocarbons.

Example:

1. CH3—CH3 (Etliane)

2. CH3— CH2—CH3 (Propane)

3. CH3—CH2—CH2— CH3 (Butane)

Unsaturated hydrocarbons:

Hydrocarbons in which at least two adjacent carbon atoms are linked by a double bond or triple bond are called unsaturated hydrocarbons.

Compounds containing carbon-carbon double bonds (C=C) are called alkenes and those containing carbon-carbon triple bond (C=C) are called alkynes.

Example:  Some alkenes are

1. CH2=CH2 (Ethene)

2. CH3—CH=CH2 (Propene)

3. CH3—CH2—CH=CH2 (But-l-ene) etc.

Example:  Some alkynes are

1. CH=CH (Ethyne);

2. CH3—C=CH (Propyne)

3. CH3—CH2—C=CH (But-1-yne)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

2. Cuclic or closed-chain hydrocarbons

The hydrocarbons having closed chains or rings of carbon atoms in their molecules are called cyclic or closed-chain hydrocarbons. They are further divided into two classes, alicyclichydrocarbons, and aromatic hydrocarbons.

Alicyclic hydrocarbons:

The cyclic or closed-chain hydrocarbons which have properties similar to those of aliphatic hydrocarbons are called alicyclic hydrocarbons. They can be classified as saturated and unsaturated alicyclic hydrocarbons. Saturated hydrocarbons are cycloalkanes. Unsaturated hydrocarbons are further divided into cycloalkenes and cycloalkynes.

1. Cycloalkanes:

Alicyclic hydrocarbons in which all the ring-forming carbon atoms are joined by single covalent bonds are called cycloalkanes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cycloalkanes

2. Cycloalkenes:

Alicyclic hydrocarbons containing one carbon-carbon double bond are called cycloalkenes.

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cycloalkenes

3. Cycloalkynes:

Alicyclic hydrocarbons containing one carbon-carbon triple bond are called cycloalkynes. Lower cycloalkynes are highly strained and unstable, cyclooctyne is strained but somewhat stable while cyclone yne and higher members are unstrained and stable.

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cycloalkynes

Aromatic hydrocarbons:

Aromatic hydrocarbons are of two types: benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons and non benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons.

1. Benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons:

Hydrocarbons containing one or more benzene rings (either fused or isolated) are called benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons.

They are also called arenes.

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzenoid Aromatic Hydrocarbons

2. Non-benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons:

Aromatic hydrocarbons containing no benzene ring are called non- benzenoid aromatic hydrocarbons.

Examples: Azulene, Pentafulvalenes etc..

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aliphatic Hydrocarbons

Alkanes

Open Chain saturated hydrocarbons are referred to as alkanes. At ordinary temperature and pressure, they generally do not show any affinity towards most of the reagents such as acids, bases, oxidising and reducing agents and because of this inertness, they are called paraffins (Latin: parum = litde, affinis= affinity). Each C-atom presentin an alkane molecule is sp³ -hybridised.Four cr -bonds formed by each sp3 -hybridised carbon are directed towards the comers of a regular tetrahedron. Thus, alkanes have tetrahedral structure around each carbon atom. The molecular formula of alkanes is CnH2n + 2 [wheren 1, 2, ]. Their general formula is RH (R: alkyl group).

Nomenclature of alkanes

The nomenclature of alkanes according to the IUPAC system has been thoroughly discussed. Here, only the trivial names ofthe isomers of butane and pentane and the IUPAC names of some higher alkanes are mentioned

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of Some Higher Alkanes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of Some Higher Alkanes.

Structure of alkanes

1. Alkanes contain only carbon-carbon and carbonhydrogen single bonds. They have the following structural characteristics:

2. Each C-atom is sp3 -hybridized. Four sp³ -hybrid orbitals are directed towards the comers of a regular tetrahedron. The carbon atom lies at the centre ofthe tetrahedron

3. All C—C and C—H bonds are strong sigma bonds. Each C —C cr -bond is formed as a result o axial overlapping of two sp3 orbitals, one from each carbon atom and each C—H bond is formed by the axial overlapping ofone sp3 orbital ofcarbon with the s -orbital of hydrogen.

C—C and C—H bond lengths are 1.54A & 1.12Arespectively.

4. All bond angles in alkanes (C —C —C, C —C —H and H—C—H) have a value of 109°28′ . Thus, alkanes possess tetrahedral structures

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structure Of Ethane

5. Carbon atomsin an alkane molecule having three ormore carbon atoms do not lie along a straight line. Instead they form a zig-zag pattern. Thisis because each carbon atomis sp³ -hybridised and naturally the C—C— C bond angle is 109°28′ instead of 180°. It becomes clear from the structure ofpropane shown

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structure Of Propane

6. C—C and C—H bond dissociation enthalpies are,83kcal -mol-1 and 99 kcal-mol-1 respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzenoid Three And Two Dimensional Representation

Structural isomerism in alkanes

Alkanes (except methane, ethane and propane) exhibit chain isomerism, a type of structural isomerism. This type of isomerism arises due to the difference in the nature of carbon chain or the skeleton ofthe carbon atoms.

Example: 

  1. The two chain isomers having molecular formula (C4H10) are n-butane and isobutane. If a 1° or 2° H atom of a propane molecule is replaced by a methyl group, then these two isomers are formed.
  2. The two chain isomers having molecular formula (C4H10) are n-butane and isobutane. If a 1° or 2° H atom of a propane molecule is replaced by a methyl group, then these two isomers are formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Two Chain Isomers of Molecular N butane And Isobutane

2. Three chain isomers of molecular formula C5H12 are n -pentane (CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3), isopentane [(CH3)2CHCH2CH3] and neopentane [(CH3)4C]. These isomers are formed on replacement of different H -atoms ofn-butane and isobutane bymethyl group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Three Chain Form Of Isomers

There are five chain isomers having molecular formula C6H14 and these are obtained by replacement of different five chain isomers having molecular formula

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chain Isomerism Of n Pentane

Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT Notes

Conformational isomerism in alkanes Definition

Electron distribution of the sigma molecular orbital of a C—C bond is cylindrically symmetrical around the internuclear axis and as this is not disturbed due to rotation about its axis, free rotation about the C—C single bond is possible. Infinite number of spatial arrangements of atoms which result through rotation about a single bond are called conformations or conformational isomers or rotational isomers or simply conformers or rotamers and the phenomenon is called conformational isomerism.

The difference in potential energy between the most stable conformation and the conformation under consideration is called the conformational energy ofthe given conformation. It is to be noted that the rotation around a C—C single bond is not completely free.It is hindered by a very small energy barrier of 1-20kl-mol-1 due to very weak repulsive interaction between the electron clouds of different cr -bonds. Such repulsive interaction is called torsional strain. Conformations are three-dimensional. These are generally represented in paper by three projection formulae: flying wedge formula, sawhorse projection formula and Newman projection formula

Conformations of ethane

A molecule of ethane (CH3—CH3) contains a carbon-carbon single bond (σ-bond) and each carbon atom is attached to three hydrogen atoms. The two —CH2 groups can rotate freely around the C—C bond axis. Rotation of one carbon atom keeping the other fixed results into infinite number of spatial arrangements of hydrogen atoms attached to the rotating carbon atom with respect to the hydrogen atoms attached to fixed carbon atom.

These are called conformational isomers or conformations or conformers. Thus, there are infinite number of conformations of ethane. However, there are two extreme cases. The conformation in which the hydrogen atoms attached to two carbons are as close together as possible, /.a, in which the dihedral angle between two nearest C —H bonds of two — CH3 groups is zero, is called the eclipsed conformation.

The conformation in which the hydrogen atoms are as far apart as possible, i.e., the dihedral angle between two C —H bonds is 60° is called the staggered conformation. The eclipsed conformation suffers from maximum torsional strain whereas in staggered conformation this strain is minimam.

So, the eclipsed conformation is much less stable than the staggered conformation. Any other intermediate conformation i.e., the conformation in which the dihedral angle is between 0-60°, is called the skew conformation. Its stability is in between the two extreme conformations. Therefore, the order of stability of these three conformations is: staggered > skew > eclipsed. It is to be noted that in all these conformations, the bond angles and the bond lengths remain the same.

Saturated hydrocarbons containing more than two carbon atoms have different conformations. However, as there is only one carbon atomin methane, it does not existin the above-mentioned conformations. The eclipsed and the staggered conformations of ethane can be represented by the flying wedge formula, sawhorse projection formula.

Newman projection formula is as follows

1. Flying wedge formula:

In this representation, the two bonds attached to a carbon atom are shownin the plane of the paper and of the other two, one is shown above the plane and another below the plane. The bonds which are in the plane are shown by normal lines (—) but the bond above the plane is shown by solid wedge ( —) and the bondbelowtheplane isshown by hashed wedge.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Flying Wedge Formula

2. Sawhorse projection formula:

In this projection, molecule is viewed along the molecular axis. It is then projected on paper by drawing the central C —C bond as a somewhat elongated line. Upper end of the line is slightly tilted towards righthand side. The front carbon is shown at the lower end of the line, whereas the rear carbon is shown at the upper end. Each carbon has three lines attached toit corresponding to three H -atoms. The lines are inclined at 120° angle to each other

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sawhorse Conformation Formula

3. Newman projection formula:

In this projection, the molecule is viewed along the C —C bond. The C-atom nearer to the eye of the viewer (i.e., the front carbon) is represented by a point and the three H-atoms attached to the front C-atom are shown by the three lines drawn at an angle of 120° to each other. The C-atom situated farther from the eye of the viewer (i.e., the rear carbon) is represented by a circle and the three hydrogen atoms attached to it are represented by three shorter lines drawn at an angle of 120° to each other.

Eclipsed and staggered conformations of ethane in I H H terms of Newman projection formula (along with dihedral angles, 0) are shown below

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Newman Projection Formulae

Energy barrier between two extreme conformations is actually very small and so, rotation of two —CH3 groups takes place extremely rapidly. Due to this, it is not possible to separate the conformations of ethane. However, at any moment, majority of ethane molecules exist in the staggered  conformation ofminimum energy {i.e., maximum stability).

The eclipsed conformation is least stable because hydrogens and bondingpairs ofelectrons of eclipsed C —H bonds involving adjacent C-atoms are very close to each other causing maximum repulsion. The staggered conformation is most stable because the hydrogens and bonding pairs of electrons of each pair of C —H bonds involving adjacent C-atoms are at a maximum distance. This causes minimum electronic as well as steric repulsion.The potential energy of the molecule is minimum for staggered conformation.

It increases with rotation and reaches a maximum at eclipsed conformation. Experimentally, it has been found that staggered conformation of ethane is 2.8 kcal-mol_1 more stable than eclipsed conformation. (E eclipsed ~ = 2 8 kcal-moH ). Therefore, rotation about C—C bond is not completely free. However, this energy barrier is not large enough to prevent rotation at room tempe¬ rature as collisions between the molecules supply sufficient kinetic energy to overcome this energy barrier.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Energy Barrier

Dihedral angle Φ

Dihedral angle (Φ) is the angle between the X—C—C and the C—C—Yplane of X-C-C-Y unit ,it is the angle between the H—1C— 2C plane and 1C—2C—H plane, i.e., it is the angle between the 1C—H bond and the 2C—H bond in the Newman projection formula. It is also called the angle of torsion.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dihedral Angle

Conformations of propane (1CH32CH23CH3):

In propane molecule Both C1 —C2 & C2 —C3 bonds are equivalent in propane molecules. An infinite number of conformations of propane can be obtained as a result of rotation about the C1 —C2 (or C2 —C3 ) bond. The two extreme conformations are the eclipsed conformation (I) and the staggered conformation (II).

The staggered conformation is more stable than the eclipsed conformation by 3.4 kcal-mo-1

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Conformations Of Propane

Conformations of n-butane (CH3-CH2-CH2-CH3): nbutane contains two kinds of C —C bonds. So, conformations likely to be generated depend on that particular C —C bond around which C-atoms are made to rotate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Conformations Of n Butane

Rotation about the C1—C2 bond:

Keeping C1 fixed, when C2 is rotated around the C1—C2 bond axis, infinite numbers of conformations are obtained. Among these, twoprincipal conformations are eclipsed (I) and staggered (II) conformations. Their order of stability is: staggered > eclipsed, i.e., molecules of n-butane spend most of their time in staggered conformation (II).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Rotation C1 And C2

 Rotation about the C2-C3 bond:

Infinite number of conformations are possible if C3 is made to rotate around C2—C3 bond axis, keeping C2 fixed. Among these, the four chief conformations are— antistaggered (1), gauche staggered (3), eclipsed (2) and fully eclipsed (IV). In an-staggered conformation, the two —CH3 groups exist anti to each other, i.e., they are oriented at an angle of 180° (<p = 180°).

In the gauc/ie-staggered conformation, the two —CH3 groups make an angle of 60° with each other (Φ = 60°). In the eclipsed conformation, the two pairs of —CH3 and H and one pair of H -atoms are in direct opposition, while in the fully eclipsed conformation, the two pairs of H-atoms and one pair of CH3 groups are in direct opposition.

The order of their stability is:

1 >3 >2 > 4, i.e., the molecules of n -butane pass most of their time in and-staggered conformation (1).

Their Newman projection formulae are shown below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Newman Projection Formulae

The most stable and least stable conformations ofn -butane are anti-staggered and fully eclipsed conformations respectively. The angular distance between two similar bonds in the anti-staggered conformation is maximum (180°). Thus, repulsion between electrons of such bond pair is minimum. Again, two —CH3 groups are located farthest from each other and so, no sterlc hindrance or steric strain acts between them. On the other hand, the angular distance between two similar bonds in the fully eclipsed conformation is minimum (0°). Thus, repulsion between electrons ofeach bondpair is maximum.

Again, two —CH3 groups are in direct opposition and hence there occurs severe steric strain involving these two CH3 groups. For this reason, anti-staggered conformation is the most stable while fully eclipsed conformation is the least stable conformation of n -butane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Potential Enery Changes Rotation Of Bond Of n Butane

General Methods Of Preparation Of  Alkanes

1. From compounds containing the same number of C-atoms

By hydrogenation of unsaturated hydrocarbons (alkenes or alkynes):

Alkanes may be prepared by the reduction of alkenes or alkynes by hydrogen in the presence of finely powdered nickel platinum or palladium catalyst. This process is called catalytic hydrogenation. The pressure and temperature of the reaction depend on the nature of the catalyst used.

When a mixture of the vapors of any unsaturated hydrocarbon and hydrogen is passed over a nickel catalyst heated at 200 – 300°C, alkanes containing the same number of carbon atoms are obtained. This process is known as Sabatier-Senderens reduction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sabatier Senderens Reduction

Reduction of alkenes or alkanes can be carried out at a lower temperature 25°C) by using highly 200°C active Raney nickel as a catalyst

  • Each mole of alkene combines with 1 mole of hydrogen while each mole of alkyne combines with 2 moles of hydrogen to yield the corresponding alkane.
  • Raney nickel: When an alloy containing equal amounts of Ni and Al is digested with sodium hydroxide solution, aluminum dissolves in alkali and finely divided nickel is obtained as residue. This is called Raney nickel. It is washed with water and stored under water or alcohol

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Raney Nickel

  • Hydrogen gas thus produced remains adsorbed and occluded in the finely divided nickel and for this reason, the efficiency of Raney nickel as a catalyst is very high.

Applications of hydrogenation reaction:

  1. Hydrogenation reaction takes place quantitatively and the volume of hydrogen added can be easily estimated. Therefore, with the help of this reaction, the number of double bonds present in an unsaturated compound can be determined.
  2. Vanaspati or vegetable ghee,
    • For example: Dalda, margarine, etc., (saturated glycerides)
  3. May be prepared from edible vegetable oils,
    • For example: soybean oil, sunflower oil, cotton-seed oil, etc., (unsaturated glycerides) by catalytic hydrogenation.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT Notes

By reduction of alkyl halides:

Alkanes can be prepared by the reduction of alkyl halides with zinc/hydrochloric acid zinc/acetic acid, zinc/sodium hydroxide, zinc-copper couple/ethanol, aluminum amalgam/ethanol etc.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Reduction Of Alkyl Halides

Mechanism

Zn→  Zn2+- + 2e

R→X + e → R + X

R + e→ :R

R + H+→ R—H

or, :R + C2H5OH→ RH + C2H5O

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethyl Iodide

Alkanes may also be obtained by the reduction of alkyl Red P/150°C halides with lithium aluminum hydride (LiAlH4) sodium borohydride(NaBH4) or hydrogen in the presence of palladium (Pd) catalyst.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrogen Presence Of Palladium Catalyst

1. LiAlH4 is not suitable for the reduction of tertiary alkyl halides because in that case alkenes are obtained. However, if NaBH4 is used, the corresponding alkane is  obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Tertiary Alkyl Halides

2. Primary, secondary, and tertiary alkyl halides may be reduced to the corresponding alkanes by triphenyltin hydride (Ph3SnH or TPH ).

3. The order of reactivity of alkyl halides (RX) in reduction reaction is: RI > RBr > RC

By Clemmensen, the reduction of aldehydes and ketones:

When aldehydes and ketones are reduced with amalgamated zinc and concentrated hydrochloric acid, the corresponding alkanes are obtained. The reaction is so-called after the name of the discovery

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Clemmensen Reduction Of Aldehydes And Ketones

Reduction of alcohol, alkyl iodide, aldehyde, ketone, and carboxylic acid by red P and HI:

When alcohol, alkyl iodide, aldehyde, ketone, and carboxylic acid are reduced by heating with concentrated aqueous solution of hydroiodic acid at 150°C in the presence of a small amount of red phosphorus, the corresponding alkanes are obtained. The reaction is conducted in a closed vessel

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reduction Of Alcohol Alkyl Iodide And Aldehyde And Ketone And Carboxylic Acid

Examples:

Red phosphorus reacts with 12 to regenerate HI. Therefore, the backward reaction leading to the formation of the starting compounds does not take place.

3I2 + 2P→2PI3

PI3 + 3H2O→H3PO3 + 3H

By the hydrolysis of Grignard reagents:

When dry and pure metallic magnesium is dissolved in a dry ethereal solution of an alkyl halide, an alkylmagnesium halide (R—MgX) is obtained. This organometallic compound is known as Grignard reagent.

In this compound, the carbon atom is directly attached with the Mg-atom, and the C—Mg bond is a highly polar covalent bond. When Grignard reagents are treated with water or dilute acids, the corresponding alkanes are obtained in this reaction. The alkyl group (R) of the Grignard reagent takes up a proton to generate alkane (RH).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Hydrolysis Of Grignard Reagents

It is to be noted that Grignard reagents may also react with other compounds containing active hydrogen such as alcohols, ammonia, amines etc., to form alkanes

2. From compounds containing a greater number of C-atoms than the corresponding alkanes:

By decarboxylation of carboxylic acids:

When a mixture of anhydrous sodium or potassium salt of a carboxylic acid and soda lime (NaOH+CaO) is strong, a molecule of carbon dioxide is eliminated from the acid (decarboxylation) to produce an alkane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Decarboxylation Of Carboxylic Acids

The alkane obtained has one carbon atom less than that of the corresponding carboxylic acid

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Corresponding Carboxylic Acid

3. From compounds containing less number of C-atoms than the corresponding alkanes:

1. By Wurtz reaction:

When a dry ethereal solution of an alkyl halide (preferably bromide or iodide) is treated with metallic sodium, the two alkyl groups of two alkyl halide molecules combine to form an alkane. This reaction for the preparation of an alkane is known as the Wurtz reaction. The resulting alkane contains twice the number of carbon atoms present in the molecule of alkyl halide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Molecule Of Alkyl Halide

Mechanism: Two different mechanisms have been suggested.

1. Through the formation of the organometallic compound as an intermediate

2Na → 2Na+ + 2e

R —X + 2e → R + X

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Organometallic Compound

2Na+ + 2X→ 2NaX

2. Through the formation of free radicals as intermediates

2Na → 2Na+ + 2e

2R—X + 2e → 2R+ 2X

R+ R → R—R

2Na+ +  2X→ 2NaX

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethyl Bromide Examples

Some important points related to Wurtz reaction:

  • Metallic sodium acts as a reducing agent and ether acts as a solvent.1° and 2° alkyl halides participate in the Wurtz reaction while 3° alkyl halides do not participate in this reaction due to steric effect.
  • Methane cannot be prepared by this reaction because this reaction always leads to the formation of alkanes containing more than one carbon atom.  This processis not suitable for the synthesis of unsymmetrical alkanes.
  • This is because in that case, the reaction is to be carried out using an alkyl halide containing an even number of carbon atoms (RX) and an alkyl halide containing an odd number of carbon atoms (R’X).
  • RX combines with R’X to yield the desired alkane, R—R’ but at the same time, two molecules of RX combine to form the alkane, R —R and two molecules of R’X combine to form the alkane, R’ —R’.  Therefore, a mixture of three alkanes are obtained.
  • Although the desired alkane is obtained, its yield is low and it cannot be separated from the mixture easily as the boiling point of the formed alkanes are very close to each other.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dry Ether

Example:

When methyl bromide and ethyl bromide are made to react with each other for the preparation of propane; ethane and butane are also produced along with propane. This results in a very poor yield of propane and it cannot be easily separated from the mixture

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Bromide And Ethyl Bromide

Wurtz reaction is applicable for the preparation of symmetrical alkanes containing an even number of Catoms but not for the preparation of unsymmetrical alkanes containing an even or odd number of C-atoms.

Because a symmetrical alkane can be divided into two required equal parts and so two types of alkyl halides are not required for its preparation. However, an unsymmetrical alkane cannot be divided into two equal parts and so two different alkyl halides are required for their preparation.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Symmetrical Alkanes

  • The symmetrical alkanes that require tertiary (3°) alkyl halides for their preparation cannot be synthesized by the Wurtz reaction.
  • The order of reactivity of various alkyl halides: RI > RBr > RCl

Importance Of Wurtz reaction:

This reaction leads to the formation of C — C bond. The formation of C — C bond is very important in organic synthesis. Also, bicyclic compounds can be prepared by intramolecular Wurtz reaction.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Importance Of Wurtz Reaction

By Kolbe’s electrolysis method:

When a cold and concentrated aqueous solution of sodium or potassium salt of a carboxylic acid is electrolyzed between platinum electrodes, hydrogen gas and NaOH or KOH are formed at the cathode and at the anode, alkane, and CO2 are obtained.

When the mixture of CO2 and alkane is allowed to pass through a caustic soda solution, CO2 is absorbed and the alkane is obtained: This process for the preparation of alkanes is known as Kolbe’s electrolysis.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kolbes Electrolysis

Mechanism:

RCOOK ⇌  RCOO- + K+ 2HO⇌  2H+ + 2OH

At anode: RCOO → RCOO+ e; RCOO →R+ CO

R+ R→ R —R

At cathode: 2H++ 2e→ [2H] → H2

Example:

Electrolysis of concentrated and cold aqueous solution of potassium acetate between platinum electrodes produces ethane at the anode

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrolysis Of Concentrated

Some important points related to Kolbe’s electrolysis method:

In this method, alkanes with double the number of carbon atoms present in the alkyl group of the carboxylic acid is obtained. Thus,if n is the number of carbon atoms present in the salt of carboxylic acid, the alkane formed must contain 2{n- 1) carbon atoms.

Therefore, methane cannot be prepared by this method This is [fcWI because in this case a mixture of aqueous solution of sodium or potassium salts of two different carboxylic acids is to be subjected to electrolysis and as a result, two more alkanes in addition to the desired alkane will be produced. This reduces the yield of the desired unsymmetrical alkane and it cannot be easily separated from the mixture

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Like Wurtz Of Unsymmetrical Alkanes

Importance of Kolbe’s electrolytic method:

This reaction leads to the formation of C — C bond which is synthetically important. Also, alicyclic compounds can be prepared by intramolecularKolbe’s electrolytic method.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kolbes Electrolytic Method

Corey-House synthesis:

An alkyl halide, RX is first treated with lithium metal in dry ether medium to form alkyl lithium (R—Li) which is then treated with iodide to formlithium dialkyl cuprate (R2CuLi). Lithium dialkyl cuprate is finally’ treated with a suitable alkyl halide (R’X or RX) to form desired alkane (R—R’ or R—R)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Corey House Synthesis

The third step i.e., the final step is an SN2 reaction, and therefore, no tertiary’ (3°) alkyl halide (R’X) can be used in this step.

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Corey House Synthesis Example

Importance of Corey-House alkane synthesis: This reaction can be used to prepare both symmetrical and Therefore, methane cannot be prepared by this method. unsymmetrical alkanes in good yield.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Notes

 4. Preparation of alkanes from inorganic compounds

From inorganic carbides:

Some inorganic carbides react with water to liberate saturated hydrocarbons.

For example:

When beryllium carbide and aluminum carbide are heated with water, they get hydrolyzed to form methane. This method gives pure methane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Beryllium And Aluminium Carbide

The carbide compounds which react with water to form methane are called methanides.

From alkyl boranes:

1. Alkanes may be prepared by treating trialkyl boranes, obtained by hydroboration of alkenes, with propanoic acid (protonolysis)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons From Alky Boranes

2. When a trialkyl borane is heated with a mixture of AgN03 and NaOH at 30-40°C, an alkane of high molecular mass is obtained.

For example: When tripentylborane is heated with a mixture of AgNO3 and NaOH at 30-40°C, decane is formed as the product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons triakylborane Heated On Formed Decane

General Properties Of Alkanes

1. Alkanes Physical properties

1. With increase In the number of carbon atoms, the physical s states of the alkanes change in the order: gas -> liquid ~> solid. At normal temperature and pressure, straight chain alkanes from C1 to C4 (i.e., methane, ethane, propane, and butane) are colorless gases, C5 to C17 (from pentane to heptadecane) are colorless liquids and from C18 onwards are colorless solids.

2. Alkanes are non-polar, lighter than water and almost insoluble in water but they are soluble in non-polar or less polar solvents like benzene, chloroform, ether, carbon tetrachloride etc

Boiling points of isomeric pentanes:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Boilling Points Of Isomeric Pentanes

3. With an increase in molecular mass, boiling points, melting points, and viscosities of straight-chain alkanes increase regularly. Among the Isomeric alkanes, the boiling point decreases with an increase in branching, i.e., a branched chain alkane hasInvariablylower boiling point than the corresponding n -n-alkane,

For example:

In the case of isomeric pentanes, n-pentane has the highest boiling point while neo-pentane has the lowest boiling point.

4. It is also evident that the increase in melting point Is relatively more in moving from an alkane having an odd number of carbon atoms to a higher alkane while it Is relatively less in moving from an alkane with even number of carbon atoms to a higher alkane. As n -n-alkanes with an even number of carbon atoms are more symmetrical than those containing an odd number of carbon atoms, they pack more closely in the crystal lattice involving much stronger intermolecular forces of attraction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Variation Of Melting Points Of n Alkanes With Increase

The reason behind decreasing boiling point:

Among nonpolar hydrocarbon molecules, the forces of attraction\which come into play are weak van der Waals forces. These which come into play are weak van der Waals forces. These Waals forces depend on the area of contact between Waals forces depends on the area of contact between the molecules. Branching reduces the area of contact because

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reason Behind Decreasing Boiling Point

A branched compound has a more compact, nearly spherical shape, and spheres touch only at a point. For this reason, branching reduces the van der Waals forces and so it reduces the boiling point. Since branching, for example, increases gradually on going from n-pentane to neopentane, the area of contact gradually decreases and consequently, the boiling point gradually decreases as van der Waals forces go on decreasing

Van der Waals forces of attraction: in non-polar molecules, the center of positive charge density coincides with the center of negative charge density. However, due to the random 300-movement of electrons around the nucleus, a momentary 280 distortion of their distribution may occur.

This results in both momentary loss of electrical symmetry and the formation of a momentary dipole in the molecule. This instantaneous dipole induces a dipole in a second molecule. These dipoles then attract each other which hold the molecules together. These attractive forces are known as van der Waals forces of attraction

2.  Alkanes Chemical Properties

Alkanes are generally inert substances. They do not easily react with acids, alkalis, oxidizing agents, and reducing agents. However, under suitable conditions, they form compounds by substitution reactions.

Reasons for chemical internees of alkanes:

The reasons for the chemical reactivity of any compound are polar bonds,

  • The presence of one or more lone pairs of electrons,
  • The presence of an atom with an expandable octet and

Presence of an atom with an incomplete octet. Alkanes possess none of the above characteristics.

For example:

The C —H and C —C bonds present in alkane molecules are non-polar.

So the polar reagents do not find any suitable site to attack the alkane molecules. There is no lone pair of electrons in alkane molecules. In alkane molecules, the octet of carbon is filled with electrons and hydrogen has also attained the stable electronic configuration of an inert helium atom. Again, due to the absence of any orbital, carbon cannot expand its octet. All these factors collectively contribute to the general inertness of alkanes

3. General reactions of alkanes

1. Oxidation reactions of alkanes:

Combustion:

Alkanes burn in the presence of excess oxygen or air to produce carbon dioxide and water along with the liberation of huge amounts of heat. For this reason, alkanes are used as fuels. Chief constituents of LPG used for household cooking are n-butane, propane and isobutane, and a small amount of ethyl mercaptan.

CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O + 213 kcal.mol-1

2C2H6 + 7O2 → 4CO2 + 6H2O + 368 kcal.mol-1

The general equation for combustion of an alkane may be given as follows:

CxHy + (x+y/4) →x CO + y/2 H2O + heat

When burnt in a limited supply of air or oxygen, alkanes produce different quantities of carbon (carbon black) and carbon monoxide, besides carbon dioxide and water.

Controlled oxidation:

Controlled oxidation of alkanes by oxygen at high temperature and pressure in the presence of metal or metallic oxide catalyst produces alcohols, ‘ aldehydes and carboxylic acids

Example:

1. The controlled oxidation of methane yields methyl alcohol and formaldehyde.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formaldehyde

2.  Methane is oxidised by ozone to form formaldehyde

CH4 + 2O3→HCHO + H2O + 2O2

3. Alkanes containing tertiary hydrogen are oxidized to tertiary alcohol potassium permanganate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Potassium Permanganate

2. Substitution reactions:

The characteristic reaction of saturated hydrocarbons are substitution reactions. In this reaction, the hydrogen atom attached to the carbon atom is displaced by any monovalent atom or group.

1. Halogenation:

In the reaction of halogens with alkanes presence of light, heat (250 – 400°C) or catalyst, the hydrogen atoms of the alkanes are easily replaced by halogen atoms to give haloalkanes and hydrogen halide. This is called a halogenation reaction.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Chemistry Solutions

Example:

1. When methane is allowed to react with chlorine in the presence of diffused sunlight at ordinary temperature, all the hydrogen atoms of methane are replaced by chlorine atoms successively to yield different substitution products

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Diffused Sunlight

Mechanism:

The displacement of hydrogen atoms of alkane by chlorine atoms in the presence of diffused sunlight proceeds through the free radical mechanism.

It is a chain reaction which occurs through the following steps:

First step (chain initiation):

In the presence of light or heat, ClCBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons First Step Chain Initiation molecules get excited and its covalent bond undergoes homolytic cleavage to form free radicals (Cl ).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons First Step Chain Initiation

Second step (chain propagation):

Two reactions occur in this step.

1. Chlorine-free radical abstracts a hydrogen atom from a methane molecule to form methyl radical

Hydrocarbons Second Step Chain Propagation Of Methyl Radical

2. The formed methyl radical abstracts a Cl-atom from Cl2 molecule to form CH3Cl and another chlorine-free radical C

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Second Step Chain Chlorine Free Radical

The two reactions (1) and (2) are repeated again and again and as a result, the chain gets propagated. Consequently, the amount of CH3Cl in the reaction mixture gradually increases.

[The resulting CH3CI reacts similarly with Cl to form CH2Cl2 which in turn leads to the formation of CHCl3 which subsequently facilitates the formation of CCl4 by similar mechanisms].

Third step (chain termination):

The two free radicals (same or different) combine to terminate the chain

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Third Step Chain Termination

From the above-mentioned mechanism, it is observed that, methyl free radical forms as an intermediate in the halogenation of methane. Two methyl free radicals (CH3) formed in tills way combine to terminate the chain thereby forming an ethane molecule

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethane Molecule

Therefore, it can be said that a small amount of ethane may be formed during chlorination of methane

2. Bromine atoms also substitute hydrogen atoms of alkanes, but bromination reaction takes place at a much slower rate than chlorination reaction. This reaction also follows the free radical mechanism.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Free Radical Mechanism

3. The iodination reaction is reversible because hydroiodic acid produced in this reaction, being a strong reducing agent, reduces the alkyl iodide back to alkane. In this case, an oxidizing agent capable of oxidizing HI such as HIO3, HNO3, HgO etc., is used and as a result, the reaction becomes irreversible

CH4+ I2 ⇌  CH3I +HI

5HI + HIO3 → 3I2 + 3H2O

4. Fluorination of alkanes with pure fluorine has very little practical use. It cannot be controlled under ordinary conditions as fluorination of alkanes is very vigorous. It causes extensive breaking of C —C and C —H bonds and a mixture of products is formed. However it is done by diluting fluorine with an inert gas such as nitrogen or argon. Suitable inorganic fluorides like AsF3, SbF3, AgF, HgF2 etc., are heated with suitable chloroalkanes to get alkyl fluorides.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chloroalkanes To Alkylfluorides

It is called the Swarts reaction.

The reactivity of halogen towards the alkanes follows the order: of fluorine > chlorine > bromine > iodine.

If any alkane contains two or more non-equivalent hydrogen atoms then all the isomeric monohalogenated derivatives are formed. However as the reactivity of different types of hydrogens differ, the monohalo derivatives are obtained in different quantities, The reaction follows free radical mechanism, and since the stability of free radicals

Follows the order:

3° > 2° > 1°, the reactivity of different hydrogens towards halogenation reaction follows the order: 3°H > 2°H > 1°H.

For example: 

2-chloropropane is obtained as the major product in chlorination of propane and 2-bromobutane is obtained as the major product in bromination ofbutane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Major Bromination Of Butane

Nitration:

The reaction in which the hydrogen atom of an organic compound is replaced by a nitro (-NO2) group is called nitration. When a mixture of an alkane and fuming HNO3 vapours are heated at higher temperatures (400 – 475°C) under pressure, it undergoes nitration to yield a nitroalkane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nitration

All types of hydrogen atoms of an alkane molecule may be replaced by —NO2 group during a nitration reaction. Also, there is a possibility of C —C bond cleavage leading to the formation of a mixture of lower nitroalkanes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mixture Of Lower Nitroalkanes

Sulphonation:

The substitution reaction in which the hydrogen atom of an organic compound is replaced by a sulphonic acid group (-SO3 H) is called sulphonation. When an alkane is heated with fuming sulphuric acid (H2SO4 + SO3 ) or oleum (H2S2O7 ) at a higher temperature, an H-atom of alkane is substituted by -SO3 H group to form alkane sulphonic acid

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sulphonation

3. Pyrolysis or Cracking:

The thermal decomposition of organic compounds is called pyrolysis and in case of alkanes, it is called cracking. When an alkane containing a large number of carbon atoms is heated at high temperatures (500 – 700°C) in the absence of air, it undergoes cracking to yield a mixture of lower alkane, lower alkene, and hydrogen

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pyrolysis Or Cracking

Isomerization:

The conversion of one isomer of a compound into another isomer is called isomerization. When an n -alkane is heated at high temperature (300°C) in the presence of a catalyst (anhydrous AlCl3/HCl or AlBr3/HBr ), it gets converted into abranched chain isomer.

Example:

Isobutane is obtained from n-butane by isomerization. Isobutane is the chain isomer (a type of structural isomer of n-butane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Isomer Of N Butane

Isomerization is a very important reaction for the preparation of high-quality gasoline (higher octane n

4. Dehydrogenation and dramatization:

When an alkane is passed over a suitable catalyst (oxides of Cr, Mo, Al, etc.) heated at 500-750°C , one molecule of hydrogen is eliminated from a molecule of the alkane to liberate an alkene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Isomer Of N Butane

When alkanes containing six or more carbon atoms are passed over Pt, Pd or Ni catalysts heated at higher temperatures, benzene or alkylbenzenes are obtained. This reaction is known as aromatization. Aliphatic hydrocarbons may be converted into aromatic hydrocarbons by using this reaction.

Example:

When n -n-hexane is heated at 400-600°C in the presence of Pt catalyst, benzene is obtained. Similarly, n -heptane gives toluene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatisation Reactions

4. Use of hydrocarbons as fuel

  • Natural gas: The gas found above petroleum deposits at various depths below the earth’s crust is referred to as natural gas. The main constituent of natural gas is methane (90%). This gas is supplied by pipelines for use as a fuel.
  • CNG (Compressed Natural Gas): Natural gas kept in steel cylinders under high pressure is called CNG. It is used as an alternative fuel in different vehicles in many metropolitan cities.
  • LNG (Liquefied Natural Gas): Liquefied natural gas kept in steel cylinders under high pressure is called LNG. It is also used as a fuel
  • LPG (Liquefied Petroleum Gas): Liquefied petroleum gas kept in steel cylinders under high pressure is called LPG.It is mainly a mixture of n-butane and isobutane with a small amount of propane.It is mainly used as a pollution-free fuel in small-scale industries and for household purposes.

Methane

Methane is the simplest paraffin or alkane. Its molecular formula is CH4. The general formula of the paraffin is (CnH2n + 2). When n = 1, it gives the formula of the first member of the alkane series, methane (CH4).

1. Preparation of methane

1. Laboratory preparation:

Methane  Principle:

Methane is prepared in the laboratory by heating a mixture of anhydrous sodium acetate (1 part) and sodalimde (3 parts).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sodium Acetate And Sodalime

Methane  Purification:

  • Acetylene is eliminated by passing the evolved gas first through the ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution.
  • Then ethylene and moisture are removed from the gas by passing it through fuming sulphuric acid.
  • The methane gas obtained contains a small quantity of sulphuric acid vapors and hydrogen.
  • Vapors of H2SO4 are then eliminated by passing the gas over solid potassium hydroxide and the gas thus obtained is collected by downward displacement of mercury. In this methane, a small quantity of hydrogen is present as an impurity.
  • In order to remove hydrogen, this gas is passed through palladium heated to about 100°C. H2 gas is adsorbed by palladium. Pure methane obtained is collected over mercury.

2. Preparation of methane at room temperature:

By hydrolysis of aluminum carbide: At ordinary temperature, methane is prepared by treating aluminum carbide with water. If dilute HC1 is used instead of water, there is less possibility of the formation of aluminum hydroxide layer on aluminum carbide

Al4C3 + 12H2O → 3CH4 + 4Al(OH)3

Al4C3 + 12HCl → 3CH4 + 4AlCl3

Besides this, methane can also be prepared by the hydrolysis of beryllium carbide (Be2C).

Be2C + 4H2O→ CH4+ 2Be(OH)2

By the reduction of methyl iodide:

Almost pure methane can be prepared by the reduction of methyl iodide with ethyl alcohol and Zn-Cu couple or aluminum amalgam. Methane thus obtained contains traces of hydrogen as an impurity

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reduction Of Methyl Iodide

By the hydrolysis of methylmagnesium iodide (a Grignardreagent):

CH3Mgl +H2O →CH4 + Mg(OH)I

By the hydrolysis of zinc dimethyl:

Zn(CH3)2 + 2H2O → 2CH4 + Zn(OH)2

3. Synthetic methods:

Methane is obtained when a mixture of H2 and CO or CO2 is passed through overpowered nickel at 250-400°C.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Synthetic Methods

Methane is obtained in small amounts when the electric spark is produced in H2 gas with the help of carbon electrodes. electric spark Heat

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carbon electrodes

2. Properties of methane

Physical properties:

  • At normal temperatures, CH4 is a colorless, odorless, tasteless & non-poisonous gas.
  • It is lighter than air and sparingly soluble in water but is highly soluble in organic solvents (alcohol, acetone, and ether).
  • On cooling, it turns into its liquid & solid state. Its boiling & melting points are -161.4°C & -183°C respectively.

Chemical properties:

  • Methane, being a saturated hydrocarbon, is highly stable.
  • At ordinary temperature, it is inert to acids, bases, oxidizing and reducing agents. However, methane participates in different substitution reactions

Will O The Wisp:

Methane is produced in marshy lands due to bacterial decomposition of organic matter and hence, it is called marsh gas. Again, due to the putrefaction of animal bodies, phosphine, (PH3) and diphosphorus tetrahydride (P2H4) are also produced in marshylands. So methane gets contaminated with PH3 and P2H4. P2H4 readily bums in the air.

So when the whole mixture comes in contact with air, P2H4 sets the gases on fire and the heat produced causes methene to bum with a blue flame. As a result, an intermittent source of light is produced, known as will-o’- the-wisp. Thus, light can be seen in stagnant swampy areas, especially graveyards. Will-o’-the-wisp is not a supernatural phenomenon

3. General reactions of methane

Combustion:

Methane does not support combustion but in the presence of air or oxygen, it bums with a non-luminous bluish flame with the formation of carbon dioxide & water.

CH4 + 2O2 →CO2 + 2H2O + 213 kcal-mol-1

A mixture of methane and air or oxygen explodes when comes into contact with fire and this is a possible reason of explosions in coal mines.

Substitution reactions:

1. Reaction with chlorine:

Methane does not react with chlorine in the dark, but in the presence of direct sunlight, methane reacts with chlorine explosively to form carbon (in the form of soot) and hydrogen chloride

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane React With Chlorine

In presence of diffused sunlight, methane undergoes substitution reaction with chlorine. In this case, the hydrogen atoms of methane are successively replaced by chlorine atoms to form methyl chloride, methylene chloride, chloroform and carbon tetrachloride respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carbon Tetrachloride

The substitution reaction of methane with chlorine proceeds via free radical mechanism In this reaction, a mixture of different chloro compounds is always obtained. The constituents of the mixture can be separated. The reaction can be restricted to the first step by using excess of methane and consequently, methyl chloride may be obtained as the predominant product.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Chemistry Solutions

2. Reaction with bromine:

Like chlorine, bromine also reacts with methane. However, the reaction proceeds slowly because bromine is less reactive than chlorine.

3. Reaction with iodine:

The reaction of iodine with methane is extremely slow and the reaction is reversible. So, the reaction is carried out in the presence of an oxidizing agent like HIO3 or HNO3

CH4 + I2  ⇌ CH2 HI, 5HI + HIO3 +3I2 ⇌  3H2O

4. Nitration: Methane reacts with nitric acid vapour at about

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane Reacts With Nitric Acid

Reaction with fluorine:

Fluorine reacts violently with methane with explosion to form carbon and hydrogen fluoride

CH4 + 2F2→ C + 4HF

Recently, it has been possible to prepare different fluoro compounds by reacting fluorine with methane in the presence of inert gas (dilution of the active reagent).

Reaction with ozone:

Methane undergoes oxidation by ozone to yield formaldehyde (HCHO).

CH4 + 2O3 → HCHO + 2O2 + H2O

Controlled oxidation:

Methane on controlled (partial) oxidation by oxygen at much higher temperature (1500°C) produces acetylene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane Controlled Oxidation

Oxidation:

  • When a mixture of methane and oxygen solution of by volume) is passed through hot copper tube at 200°C under a pressure of 100 atmosphere, methanol is obtained.
  • Methane is oxidised by air at 450°C, under pressure in the presence of molybdenum oxide as catalyst to yield formaldehyde

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidation Reactions

Reaction with steam:

When a mixture of methane and steam is passed over nickel (catalyst) kept on alumina heated at 800 – 900°C, a mixture of CO and H2 is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With Steam

Thermal decomposition:

At 1000°C, methane decomposes to produce fine carbon powder.It isknown as carbonblack

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Thermal Decomposition

4. Uses of methane 

  • Carbon black is used for preparing printers’ ink, black paints and in rubber industry for making motor tyres
  • Useful chemicals like methyl chloride, acetylene, formaldehyde, methanol etc. are produced from methane
  • 3. The gas mixture (CO + H2) obtained by the reaction of methane with steam is used for the commercial preparation of hydrogen.
  • When steam is passed through a catalyst heated at 500°C, CO is converted into CO2 and H2 is obtained:
  • CO + H2O→CO2 + H2. Also, when the gas mixture containing CO (1 part) and H2 (2 parts) is passed through a mixture consisting of CuO, ZnO, and Cr2O3 as catalyst under 200 atmosphere pressure, methanol is obtained: CO + 2H2→ CH3OH.
  • Methane is used as fuel. Its calorific value:1000Btuper eft

5. Identification of methane

Methane reacts with ozone to yield formaldehyde. So the gas being tested is subjected to react with ozonised oxygen. Ifit is methane, it emits the characteristic pungent smell of formaldehyde. Water is added to the reaction mixture to prepare a dilute solution of formaldehyde and with this solution, Schryver’s colour test is performed.

Schryver’s colour test:

2mL of an aqueous solution of phenylhydrazine hydrochloride is added to lmL 5% aqueous solution of potassium ferricyanide and to this mixed solution, a small quantity of the above test solution is added followed by the addition of 5mL of concentrated HCl. If formaldehyde is present, the solution turns pinkred. It indicates that the gaseous sample is methane

Methane is a saturated hydrocarbon—Proof:

Methane is chemically inert. At ordinary conditions, it does not react with acids, bases and oxidising or reducing agents. When methane gas is passed through red bromine water or through alkaline KMnO4 solution, colours of the reagents do not change, i.e., methane does not react with these reagents.

So methane is not an unsaturated compound. It undergoes a substitution reaction with chlorine to produce four chloro compounds (CH3Cl, CH2Cl2, CHCI3 and CCl4) and HCl. It means that methane is a saturated compound.

5. Structure of methane molecule

The central C-atom of methane is sp³ -hybridised and it has a regular tetrahedral structure. Four C—H bonds of formaldehyde, methanol etc. are produced from methane. bond energy and the same bond length.

If any one of the H-atoms of methane is replaced by a monovalent atom or group (Z), only one type of derivative CH2Z is obtained. This proves that four H-atoms of methane are equivalent.

Methane has a regular tetrahedral structure—Proof:

If two hydrogen atoms of methane are substituted by two similar atoms or groups (Z), only one disubstituted methane (CH2Z2) is obtained

For example:

Only one kind of methylene chloride (CH2Cl2) is known to exist which has no isomer. From the above observation and in the perspective of tetracovalency of carbon, it can be concluded that structurally methane molecule is a regular tetrahedron—it is not square planar, rectangular planar, pyramidal with square or rectangular base.

This is becauseit will not have any isomer only when it becomes tetrahedral but if it assumes any structure other than tetrahedral, then it will have more than one isomer.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Tetrahydral Structure

Ethane (C2H6)

Ethane is found to exist along with methane in natural gas. Ethane is also obtained in small amount from coal gas.

1. Preparation of ethane

1. By heating sodium propanoate with soda lime:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sodium Propanoate With Sodalime

Ethane thus obtained is impure and contains some amount of methane and hydrogen as impurities.

2. By the reduction of ethyl iodide:

Ethyl iodide, on reduction with Zn-Cu couple or aluminium-amalgam and ethyl alcohol, yields ethane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Reduction Of Ethyl Iodide

3. By Wurtz reaction: When metallic sodium reacts with methyl iodide dissolved in dry ether, ethane is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Wurtz Reaction

4. By Kolbe’s electrolytic method :

When a concentrated aqueous solution of sodium or potassium acetate is electrolysed by using platinum electrodes, ethane, and CO2 are evolved at the anode. At the cathode, hydrogen gas is evolved and sodium or potassium hydroxide is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Kolbes Electrolytic Method

5. By hydrolysis of ethyl magnesium iodide:

When ethylmagnesium iodide (CH3CH2MgI) is treated with water, pure ethane is obtained.

CH3CH2Mgl + H2O→  CH3 —CH3 + Mg(OH)I

6. By hydrogenation of ethylene or acetylene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Hydrogenation Of Ethylene Or Acetylene

2. Properties of ethane

Physical properties:

  • At ordinary temperature, ethane is a colourless and odourless gas. Its boiling and melting points are -89°C and -172°C respectively.
  • It is slightly soluble in water but highly soluble in organic solvents such as ether, alcohol etc.

Chemical properties:

  • Ethane is a saturated hydrocarbon and hence,itis quite stable.
  • Like methane,itis chemicallyinert to acids, bases, oxidising and reducing agents.
  • The main reactions that ethane undergoes are substitution reactions similar to methane.

3. Reactions of ethane

1. Combustion:

Ethane burns in air or oxygen with a nonluminous flame, producing CO2 , H2O and considerable amount ofheat.

2C2H6 + 7O2 → 4CO2 + 6H2O 368 kcal-mol-1

2. Halogenation:

In diffused sunlight, ethane undergoes a stepwise substitution reaction with chlorine or bromine to yield different compounds. Ethane contains two methyl groups. So ethane produces two disubstituted, two trisubstituted, and two tetrasubstituted chloro or bromo derivatives in this substitution reaction,

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Halogenation

Due to the substitution of H-atoms of C2H6 by P & Cl- atoms, chlorofluoroethanes are formed. Some chloroform-ethanes are known as freons,

For example: Cl2FC—CCIF2 (Freon 113), CH3, (Freon-114) F3C—CClF2(Freon-11 5) etc.

3. Nitration:

Ethane reacts with nitric acid vapor sat 400°C to form nitroethane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethane Reacts With Nitric Acid

4. Pyrolysis:

When ethane is heated at 700°C in the absence of air, it decomposes to yield mainly ethylene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pyrolysis

Uses of ethane:

Ethane is mainly used as fuel.

It is used to prepare ethyl chloride and C2H4 etc., C2H4 is an important raw material for the preparation of various organic compounds

Alkenes Olefins

Unsaturated hydrocarbons in which at least two adjacent carbon atoms are linked by a double bond are called alkenes. Alkenes are also called olefins (Greek: Olefiant = Olt forming) because the lower members (eq, ethene, propene) react with halogens cl or Br to form silly substances. They are represented by general formula CnH2n, where n = 2,3… etc

Nomenclature of alkenes

IUPAC nomenclature of aJJames has been only the IUPAC names of some higher alkenes mentioned here

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nomenclature Of Alkenes

Structure of the carbon-carbon double bond

The carbon-carbon double bond consists of one cr -bond and one σ-bond. The tr-bond is formed by head-on overlapping or axial overlapping of two sp² -hybridized orbitals of two C-atoms while the σ-bond is formed by lateral or sideways overlapping of the two unhybridized p-orbitals (let us assume, pz -orbital) of the two C-atoms. The n -n-electron cloud remains distributed above and below the plane in which the two C-atoms and the atoms attached to them exist.

If now one of the C-atoms of the double bond is rotated along the axis of the cr -bond keeping the other C-atom fixed the (>. orbitals will no longer be parallel and there will be no overlap between them. As a result, the π -bond will break, However, the breaking of an n -bond requires 60 kcal mol-1 of energy which Is not provided by the collision of the molecules at room temperature.

Consequently, free rotation of the doubly bonded carbon atoms Is not possible at room temperature. So the relative positions of the four groups (a, b, and a, b) attached to the two doubly bonded C-atoms remain fixed. The value of each of the three bond angles originated around the doubly bonded C-atoms (sp² -hybridized) is 120°

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carbon Carbon Double Bond

Isomerism of alkenes

Alkenes exhibit both structural isomerism and geometrical or ds-trans isomerism.

Structural isomerism:

Alkenes containing three or more carbon atoms can exhibit position, chain, and ring-chain isomerism.

1. Position isomerism:

This isomerism arises due to the difference in the position of the double bond in a particular carbon chain. For example, but-l-ene and but-2-ene are two position isomers

CH3CH2CH=CH2 (But-l-ene)

CH3CH =CHCH3(But-2-ene)

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Chemistry Solutions

2. Chain isomerism:

This type of isomerism arises due to differences in the carbon skeleton. For example, but-l-ene and 2-methyl prop-l-ene are two chain isomers

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chain Isomerism

Ring-chain isomerism:

This type of isomerism arises due to ring closure. For example, propene and cyclopropane are two ring-chain isomers

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ring Chain Isomerism

2. Geometrical or cis-trans isomerism:

Due to restricted rotation about die carbon-carbon double bond, alkenes exhibit geometric or ds-trans Isomerism.

For example The two geometric isomers of 2-butene are as follows

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomers 2 Butene

As each of the doubly bonded carbon atoms Is attached to two different groups, two types of spatial arrangements of groups are possible. The geometric isomers which have similar groups on the same side of the double bond are called c/s-isomers while the geometric isomers which have similar groups on the opposite sides of the double bond are called trans-isomers. Both the isomers have same structure but they have different configurations (arrangements of groups in space)

4. Relative stabilities of alkenes

Hydrogenation of alkenes leads to the formation of relatively more stable alkanes and the amount of heat evolved when 1 mol of an alkene is hydrogenated is cailed heat of hydrogenation. Higher the heat of hydrogenation of an alkene, less is its stablity. Therefore, the stabilities of alkenes can be predicted from the values of their heats of hydrogenation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of Alkenes

Order of stabilities of alkenes based on their heat of hydrogenation values: 1 >2 >3 > 4 > 5  > 6.

Explanation of relative stabilities of alkenes:

Relative stabilities of alkenes can be explained based on hyperconjugation. The greater the number of a -H atoms i.e., the greater the number of hyperconjugative structures, higher the stability of the alkene.

A number of a-H atoms present in the alkenes I,  II, III, IV, V, and VI are 12, 9, 6, 6, 3 and 0 respectively. Therefore, the order of stability is: I >II >III = IV > V > VI. However, due to presence of two methyl (-CH3) groups on the same side ofthe double bond in ds-2-butene (IV), it is somewhat less stable than the trans-isomer (III) due to steric hindrance. Hence, the correct order of stabilityis: I >II >III > IV > V > VI.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Steric Hindrance Or Strain

Generalalkenes Methods Of Preparation Of Alkenes

By elimination reactions

Reactions that involve the removal of two atoms or groups from two adjacent carbon atoms of an organic compound resulting in the formation of a double (or triple) bond in between those two carbon atoms are called elimination reactions.

By dehydration of alcohols:

  • When alcohols are heated with molecule of water gets eliminated to form alkenes.
  • In these reactions, —OH group is lost from the a -carbon atom while H atom is lost from the p -carbon atom.
  • Therefore, for a dehydration reaction, the alcohol must contain a ft hydrogen atom. 0 Concentrated phosphoric acid can be used instead of concentrated sulphuric acid’

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Dehydration Of Alcohols

Mechanism of dehydration:

It is an El (Elimination unimolecular) reaction which proceeds via three steps.

These are

  • Protonation of alcohol
  • Removal of H2O and formation of carbocation
  • Loss of proton by the carbocation.
  • The second step (slowest step) is the rate-determining step of the reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mechanism Of Dehydration

Some important points related to the dehydration of alcohols:

  • For dehydration of primary and secondary alcohols, concentrated H2SO4 and for dehydration of tertiary alcohols, dilute H2SO4 are effective.
  • For different alcohols, ease of dehydration follows the one order: 3° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 1° alcohol.
  • Alcohol vapors, when passed over phosphorous pentoxide (P2O5) or heated alumina(Al2O3) produce alkene with the elimination of one water molecule

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethyl Alcohol Heated Formed By Ethylene

  • Rearrangement during dehydration of alcohols: During dehydration of alcohols, sometimes unexpected or rearranged alkenes are formed. These rearrangements happen due to 1, 2-hydride or 1, 2- methyl shift in order to  form a more stable carbocation intermediate.

Examples:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Rearrangement During Dehydration Of Alcohols

By dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides:

When alkyl halides are heated with alcoholic caustic potash (KOH dissolved in ethanol) solution, alkenes are produced.

In this reaction, the halogen atom is lost from the a carbon atom while H-atom is lost from the β -carbon atom and therefore, it is also β -elimination reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydration Of Alkyl Halide

Mechanism:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydrohalogenation Of Alkyl Halides

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydrohalogena6tion Of Alkyl Halide Example

Important points related to dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides:

1. Due to the greater solubility of KOH than that of NaOH in ethanol, ethanolic potassium hydroxide is a more effective reagent. In this reaction, alcoholic solution of sodium or potassium alkoxide can also be used. 3-1

2. In that case, alkoxide ion (RO) acts as a base. For example, potassium ethoxide (C 2H 5OK+) dissolved in ethanol, potassium ferf-butoxide (Me 3COK+) dissolved in tertbutyl alcohol.

3. Alkyl halides undergo hydrolysis in the presence of KOH (or NaOH) dissolved in the more polar solvent water to give mainly alcohols through substitution reactions.

4. On the other hand, they undergo dehydrohalogenation reaction, i.e., elimination reaction in the presence of KOH (or NaOH) dissolved in the less polar solvent ethanol to produce alkenes as the major product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Solvent Ethanol To Produce Alkenes As The Major Product

5. When an alkyl halide is heated in the presence of ethanolic KOH solution or potassium alkoxide dissolved in alcohol, ether is obtained as a side product along with alkene. If a primary alkyl halide is used, the possibility of the formation of ether becomes much higher because in that case reaction is more likely to proceed through SN2 mechanism.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkyl Halide

6. The order of reactivity of different types of alkyl halides towards de hydrohalogenation reaction is: alkyl iodide > alkyl bromide > alkyl chloride.  In case of alkyl groups, order of activity is: tertiary > secondary > primary.

By heating 4° ammonium hydroxide:

Alkene is obtained by heating 4°  ammonium hydroxide.

For example:  When tetraethylammonium hydroxide is heated, C2H4 is formed.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ammonium Hydroxide

Saytzeff and Hofmann rules:

During the preparation of alkenes via elimination reaction (E2 mechanism), more than one alkene can be produced if two or more carbon atoms adjacent to the carbon atom containing the leavinggroup

For example: —X, —+NR3, –+SR2) have available H-atom.

1. According to the Saytzeff rule, if the leaving group be halide (except fluoride) or sulphonate (neutral substrate), the E2 reaction leads to the formation of a highly substituted alkene as the major product. This is called Saytzeff product. For example, when 2- bromobutane is heated with ethanolic KOH solution, 2-butene (80%) is obtained as the major product.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Saytzeff And Hofmann Rules

2. According to Hofmann rule, If the leaving group be a charged one

For  example: +NR3 or – +SR2),

Then the E2 R — C = C —R- frans-alkene (major) reaction leads to the formation of a less substituted alkene as the major product. This is called the Hofmann product. For example, when cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide is heated, 1- butene (95%) is obtained as the major product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sec Butyltrimethylammonium

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

By dehalogenation of vicinal dihalides:

Dihalogen derivatives of alkanes in which the two halogen atoms are attached to adjacent carbon atoms are called vicinal dihalides or 1,2- dihaloalkanes. When a methanolic solution of a vicinal dihalide is heated with Zn-dust, one molecule of halogen is eliminated from the dihalide molecule to produce an alkene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Dehalogenation Of Vicinal Dihalides

By the reduction of alkynes

When alkynes are reduced with sodium in liquid ammonia, (rans-alkenes are obtained as the major product.

Reduction of alkynes by hydrogen in the presence of Lindlar’s catalyst [Pd-CaCO3 partially poisoned with lead acetate, Pb(OAc)2 ] gives cfs-alkene predominantly

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By The Reduction Of Alkynes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By The Reduction Of Alkynes 2 Butyne

By Kolbe’s electrolysis

When an aqueous solution of sodium or potassium salts of saturated dicarboxylic add are electrolyzed, alkenes are obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kolbes Electrolysis

By pyrolysis or cracking of alkanes

When alkanes are passed through a tube heated at 500-600°C in the absence of air, they undergo thermal decom¬ position to produce lower alkenes, alkanes and hydrogen.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Pyrolysis Or Cracking Of Alkanes

By pyrolysis of some other compounds

Alkenes are obtained by the pyrolysis of esters, xanthates and N-oxides of tertiary amines

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Pyrolysis Of Some Other Compounds

Cope elimination reaction:

Tertiary amine oxides on thermal decomposition produce alkenes and dialkylhydroxylamines. This reaction is known as Cope elimination reaction

General Properties Of Alkenes

1. Physical properties of Alkenes

  • The first three members of alkene family, i.e., ethene, propene and butene are colourless gases, the next fourteen members (C5-C18) are liquids while the higher members are solids at room temperature. All are colourless.
  • Except for ethene which has a pleasant odour, all other alkenes are odorless.
  • All alkenes are lighter than water and insoluble in water. However, they are soluble in non-polar organic solvents like benzene, petroleum ether, carbon tetrachloride, alcohol, chloroform etc.
  • Due to the presence of double bond (C=C), some alkenes exhibit geometrical isomerism.

Boiling points:

The boiling points of alkenes increase regularly with increase in molecular mass and for the addition of each CH2 group to the chain, the boiling points increase by 20- 30.

In cls-alkene, the alkyl groups lie on the same side of the double bond but in trans-alkene, the alkyl groups lie on the opposite sides of the double bond. For this reason, the molecules of cis-isomer are polar but the molecules of trans-isomer are non-polar or less polar. Thus, in the liquid state, the intermolecular attractive forces are relatively stronger in the case of the cis-isomer and hence it has a higher boiling point than the trans-isomer.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cis And Trans Isomers

Melting points:

In trans alkene, the molecules are more symmetrical, and therefore, they can pack more closely in the crystal lattice than the molecules of cis-alkene. Due to this, the intermolecular forces operating in frans-alkene are stronger and iso, a larger amount of heat is required to break the crystal lattice of trans-alkene than the corresponding lattice ofc/s-alkene. Thus, the melting point of trans-alkene is higher than that of c/s-alkene

2. Chemical properties  of Alkenes

The double bond present in alkenes consists of a strong cr-bond and a weaker 7r-bond. The 7T -electrons are loosely held and are easily polarisable. So the n-bond takes part in chemical reactions easily.Itis for this reason, alkenes are more reactive than alkanes. The typical reactions of alkenes are addition reactions in which the rr -bond breaks and two new (r-bonds are formed. Two monovalent atoms or groups become attached to the doubly bonded carbon atoms to form a saturated compound.

General Reactions Of Alkenes

Chemical reactions of alkenes are generally divided into five classes:

  • Combustion reaction
  • Addition reaction,
  • Oxidation reaction
  • Polymerization reaction and
  • Substitution reaction.
  • Combustion reactions

Alkenes are combustible substances. They bum in air or in O2 with a luminous flame to yield CO2 and H2O with the evolution of heat. The percentage of carbon content in alkenes is higher than that in alkanes and so during combustion alkenes produce black smoke due to liberation of free carbon.

2CnH2n + 3nO2→  2nCO2+ 2nH2O + heat

Example: CH2=CH2 + 3O2 →2CO2 + 2H2O + heat

1. Addition reactions Definition 

The reactions in which two reactant molecules are added together to yield a single molecule of product are called addition reactions

Characteristics:

  • The compounds obtained in addition reactions are called addition products.
  • Alkenes give additional products by reacting with halogens (Cl2, Br2 or I2), hydrogen halides (HX, X = Cl, Br, I), ozone etc.
  • The molecule which gets attached to the unsaturated molecule in addition reaction is known as addendum.

Addition of hydrogen:

Presence of finely divided platinum, palladium or Raney nickel at ordinary temperature or finely divided nickel at 200-300°C hydrogen adds to the double bond of the alkene to give an alkane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Hydrogen

Addition of halogen:

1. At ordinary temperature, halogens (Cl2 or Br2) participate in addition reactions with alkenes to produce vicinal dihalides. Generally, the alkenes are added to solutions of halogen dissolved in carbon tetrachloride (CCl4).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Halogen

2. In case of iodine, this reaction is reversible and takes place very slowly. © At ordinary temperature, fluorine does not from additional compounds with alkenes. However, at extremely low temperatures (-78°C) & under controlled conditions, the addition reaction may be carried out by using xenon fluoride as the reagent. In addition reactions, the order of reactivity of halogens is: CI2 > Br2 > I2.

Mechanism of the reaction:

The reaction of halogen with alkene is an electrophilic addition reaction. Bromine molecule is non-polar. However, under the influence ofn -electrons of C=C bond, the displacement of cr -electrons of the bromine molecule takes place.

As a result, the Br-atom which is close to the double bond acquires partial positive charge while the other Br-atom gains partial negative charge.

The reaction of an alkene with this polarised bromine molecule takes place in two steps as follows:

First step:

The σ-electrons of carbon-carbon double bond attacks the bromine atom having partial positive charge. This results in heterolytic fission of Br—Br,  σ-bond and the positive bromine atom (electrophile) becomes attached to both the doubly bonded carbon atoms concertedly to form a cyclic bromonium ion. A bromide ion is obtained along with it. It is the slow or rate-determining step of the reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Slow Or Rate Determining Step Of The Reaction

Second step:

The bromoniumion undergoes nucleophilic attack (SN2) by the Br ion and the cyclic ion opens up Markownikoff’s rule: In the addition reactions of producing 1,2-dibromoethane (addition compound). This step is fast

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Second Step Of Is Fast

As the addition reaction is initiated by electrophilic end of the reagent, it is termed an electrophilic addition reaction.

If the electrophile contains no unshared pair of electrons or if one of the double bonded carbon contains an aromatic ring (as in the case of C6H5CH=CH2), then a carbocation intermediate is formedin first step.

Addition of halogen hydracids:

Halogen hydracids HX (X = Cl, Br, I) undergo an addition reaction with alkenes to form alkyl halides. The reactivity of halogen hydracids towards addition reactions of alkenes follows the order: HI > HBr > HCl > HF

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Halogen Hydracids

Example:

(Ethylene)CH2=CH2 + HBr → CH3CH2Br(Ethyl Bromide)

When a halogen hydracid reacts with an unsymmetrical alkene, there is a possibility of formation of two different alkyl halides.

Example:

Propene is an unsymmetrical alkene. Propene, when reacts with HBr, may give rise to both 1-bromopropane and 2-bromopropane. However, one of the two products is formed predominantly

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Bromopropane Predominant Product

In addition reactions of this type, i.e., in case ofaddition of an unsynunetrical addendum (as H—X) to an unsynunetrical alkene, out of the two addition compounds, the compound obtained as themajorproduct is governed by a rule known as Markownikoff’s rule.

Markownikoffs rule:

In the addition reactions of producing 1,2-dibromoethane (addition compound). unsymmetrical addendum (adding molecules) with unsymmetrical alkenes, the negative part of the addendum becomes attached mainly to that doubly bonded carbon atom which carries a lesser number of hydrogen atoms

Example:

In the addition reaction of HBr with propene, 2- bromopropane is obtained as the major product because C-2 of propene contains lesser number of hydrogen atoms than C-l and the negative part of her, i.e., bromine (Br) is added to C-2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Markownikoffs Rule

Similarly, the addition of HI with 2-methylpropene takes place according to Markownikoff’s rule and 2-iodo- 2-methylpropane is obtained as the major product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpropane

Mechanism of the reaction:

In the first step of the following electrophilic addition reaction,

CH2CH=CHCH2+ HBr→  CH3CH2CHBrCH3

the electrophilic end (H) of \(\stackrel{\delta+}{\mathrm{H}}-\stackrel{\delta-}{\mathrm{Br}}\) is attracted by the r -electron cloud of the double bond, i.e., the σ-bond attacks the H atom of HBr, thus forming a new C—H bond while breaking the H—Br bond. As the remaining carbon atom of the original double bond is left with six electrons, a carbocation is formed. This is the rate determining step of the reaction. In the second step, the nucleophile Br ion is added to C+ of the carbocation to form 2-bromobutane as the only additional compound.

Since the addition of the electrophile occurs in the determining step (the first step), the reaction is called an electrophilic addition reaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophilic Addition Reaction

Explanation:

When propane (CH3CH=CH2) reacts with HBr, the proton obtained from HBr can add to the number1 carbon atom (C- 1) to form an isopropyl cation (a secondary carbocation) or it can add to the number 2 carbon atom (C- 2) to form n -propyl cation (a primary carbocation).

The secondary carbocation is formed more easily and rapidly because it is more stable than the primary carbocation. Therefore, 2-bromopropane is expected to be formed as the major product in this reaction. In fact, 2-bromopropane is the predominant product obtained in this case

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Bromopropane Predominant Product Obtained In Case

Exception:

The addition reaction of CH2=CH —CF3 with halogen hydracids

For example: HCl takes place contrary to Markownikoff rule.

1. In this case, the carbocation formed by the addition of H+ to C-l, in spite of being a secondary (2°) carbocation, becomes less stable than the primary (1°) carbocation formed by the addition of H+ to C-2 because of the presence of strong electron-attracting CF3 group. So the reaction occurs mainly through the formation of primary carbocation thereby producing ClCH2CH2CF3 as the only addition compound.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Primary Carbocation

2. During addition of halogen acids to the alkene sometimes rearrangement occurs by 1, 2-hydride shift or 1, 2-methyl shift to form a more stable carbocation intermediate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons More Stable Of Carbocation Intermediate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons More Stable Carbocation Intermediate

Peroxide effect:

Addition of hydrogen bromide (HBr) to an unsymmetrical alkene in the presence of organic peroxides such as benzoyl peroxide (C6H5CO)2O2, differ-butyl peroxide (Me3COOCMe3) etc., or oxygen, takes place contrary to Markownikoff’s rule (antiMarkownikoff addition), i.e., Br” is added to that carbon atom of the double bond which contains greater number of H-atoms.

This abnormal addition in the presence of a peroxide is known is the peroxide effect or Kharash effect.

Example:

Addition reaction of propene with HBrin presence of an organic peroxide leads to the formation of 1- bromopropane as the major product.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Bromopropane Product

Mechanism of the reaction:

The reaction of HBr with unsymmetrical alkene, e.g., propene (CH3CH=CH2), in the presence of an organic peroxide, follows free radical mechanism. The reaction takes place in four steps—

First step: Homolytic fission of benzoyl peroxide gives rise to phenyl radical

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Peroxide Mechanism Reactions

The reactive bromine radical (Br)thus produced uses itselfin the third step to continue the chain reaction.

1. The exception to Markownikoff’s rule in the presence of peroxide is observed only in the case of HBr.

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Important Topics

2. HF, HCI and HI do not exhibit peroxide effect:

Only if the two reactions of the third and fourth steps ofthe reaction mechanism described above are exothermic, then this additional reaction becomes possible. However, if any step becomes endothermic, the reaction will not occur.

It has been observed experimentally that onlyin the case of HBr both the steps are exothermic but in the case of HF, HCI or HI, one or the other of these steps is endothermic. For these reasons, HF, HCI, and HI do not respond to peroxide effect.

3. Alternative explanation:

The H—Cl bond is stronger than H—Br bond so the former is not cleaved by the free-radical. On the other hand, H—I bond is weaker than the H—Cl bond but iodine free radicals combine with each other rapidly to form iodine molecules instead of being added to carbon. Thus, HCI and HI do not exhibit a peroxide effect.

Addition of sulphuric acid:

Alkenes are absorbed by cold and concentrated sulphuric acid to form alkyl hydrogen sulfate (an inorganic ester)

(Alkene) RCH=CHR + H→OSO3H(Sulphuric acid) → RCH2CHR—OSO33H (Alkyl hydrogen sulphate)

Example:

H2SO4 is an unsymmetrical addendum. So the additional reaction of unsymmetrical alkene,

For example: Propene (CH3CH=CH2) with H2SO4 takes place according to

Markownikoff’s rule. Consequently, isopropyl hydrogen sulfate is formed as the predominant product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isopropyl Hydrogen

 

Alkyl hydrogen sulphates, when heated with water, undergo hydrolysis to give alcohols.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkyl Hydrogen Sulphtes

Addition of water (hydration):

Water adds to alkenes in the presence of acid catalysts to produce alcohols.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Adddition Of Water

Example:

As H2O is an unsymmetrical addendum, an unsymmetrical alkene like 2-methylpropene reacts with water to form fert-butyl alcohol following Markownikoff’s rule.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpropene Reacts With Water Form Tert Butyl

Addition of hypogeous acid:

The addition of hypohalous acid (HOδ -δ+Cl or HOδ -δ+Br ) to an alkene occurs when the alkene is treated with chlorine (Cl2) or bromine (Br2) in the presence of water. As a result, a vicinal halohydrin (a compound that contains both an —OH group and a halogen atom bonded to adjacent carbons) is produced. A small amount of vicinal dihalide is also obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vicinal Dihalide Reaction And Examples

Hydroboration (Reaction with diborane):

When alkene reacts with diborane (B2H6), trialkylborane, an addition compound of BH3, is produced.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydroboration

When trialkyl borane is subjected to oxidative hydrolysis by treating with H2O2/NaOH, alcohol is produced. As a result of hydroboration and oxidative hydrolysis, antiMarkownikoff hydration of an unsymmetrical alkene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Unsymmetrical Alkane

Oxymercuration-demarcation:

The reaction between an alkene and an aqueous solution of mercuric acetate leads to the formation of p -hydroxyalkylmercuric acetate (an addition compound). This reaction is known as oxymercuration. In this reaction, tetrahydrofuran is used as a solvent

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxymercuration Demercuration

When the compound produced is reduced with alkaline sodium borohydride, the —HgOCOCH3 group is replaced by hydrogen to yield an alcohol. This is called demercuration.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Demarcuration

Oxymercuration-demarcation is an alternative process for the addition ot water molecule to an alkene:

  • In this method, the addition of water to unsymmetrical alkenes takes place by Markownikoff’s rule.
  • As there is no possibility of a rearrangement reaction in this process of hydration, it is more effective than the conventional process of acid-catalysed hydration.

Ozonolysis:

The complete process of preparation of ozone by reacting with an alkane and then allowing ozone to decomposition of the resulting ozonide to give carbonyl compounds (aldehyde and/or ketone) Is called ozonolysis.

1. First step:

When ozone gas or a mixture of ozone and oxygen is passed through an alkene dissolved in a solvent with which ozone does not react

For example:

Chloroform, carbon tetrachloride or glacial acetic acid), ozone adds on to the alkene to form an addition compound, called alkene ozonide

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkene Ozonide

2. Second step:

If alkene ozonide is heated with water or acetic acid in presence ofzinc dust, it decomposes (hydrolysis) to give aldehyde or ketone or a mixture of both depending on the structure of alkene. This decomposition of ozonide is referred to as reductive decomposition

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reductive Decomposition

Reason for using Zn-dust:

If the ozonide is decomposed by water alone (without zinc dust), the aldehyde formed is oxidised by H2O2 (another product of hydrolysis) to carboxylic acid. As zinc dust destroys (reduces) HO , the possibility of this oxidation reaction can be avoided and hence, aldehyde is obtained

RCHO + H2O2RCOOH + H2

H2O2 + Zn → ZnO + H2O

At present, ozonide is decomposed by dimethyl sulphide (Me2S). As a result of this reaction, dimethyl sulphoxide (Me2S= O) and carbonyl compound arc were produced. This reaction also provides no scope for the oxidation of aldehyde

Dissociation of C=C bond by ozonolysis:

In ozonolysis, the C=C bond of an alkene dissociates and as a result, two molecul of carbonyl compound are produced from one molecule of alkene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons C Double Bond By Ozonolysis

Prediction about the nature compounds to be obtained on ozonolysis: if the structure of an alkene is known, the carbonyl compounds to be obtained on its ozonolysis can be easily determined.

After writing the structure of the alkene, the molecule is divided into two parts by causing fission of the double bond and by adding an oxygen atom to each carbon atom of the double bond. Thus, the nature of the carbonyl compounds to be obtained on ozonolysis can be ascertained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prediction About The Nature Of Compounds To Be Obtained On Ozonolysis

Different products of ozonolysis depending an the nature of alkene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxymercuration Demercuration Different Products Of Ozonolysis

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxymercuration Demercuration Different Products Of Ozonolysi

Determination of the structure of an alkene from the products obtained on its ozonolysis:

The structures of the two carbonyl compounds formed by ozonolysis are written side by side, their carbonyl groups facing each other. The two oxygen atoms are then removed and finally, the two carbonyl carbon atoms are joined by a double bond.

Example:

If ozonolysis of an alkene forms acetaldehyde and acetone as products, it may by concluded that the alkene is 2-methyI-2-butene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ozonolysis Of An Alkene Form Acetaldehyde And Acetones

Some important points related to ozonolysis:

1. If formaldehyde is obtained on ozonolysis, then the double bond of the alkene lies at the terminal position of the carbon chain i.e., the alkene must contain a terminal methylene group (=CH2).

2. When ozonolysis gives rise to two molecules of the same carbonyl compound, the original alkene must be a symmetrical one but if two different carbonyl compounds are formed, then the alkene must be an unsymmetrical one.

3. If an alkene, on ozonolysis, leads to the formation of only one dicarbonyl compound, then the original alkene must be a cyclic alkene.

For example, cyclobutene on ozonolysis gives butanediol:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclobutane On Ozonolysis Gives Butanedial

4. Any compound having two double bonds (an alkadiene) on ozonolysis produces one molecule of a dicarbonyl compound and two molecules of carbonyl compound.

For example:

1, 3 -pentadiene, when subjected to ozonolysis, gives one molecule of acetaldehyde, one molecule of glyoxal and one molecule of formaldehyde.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Glyoxal And One Molecule Of Formaldehyde

5. When two geometrical isomers are subjected to ozonolysis, they yield the same compounds. For example, both the cis-and trans-isomers of 2-pentene, when subjected to ozonolysis, give acetaldehyde and propanal.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ozonolysis Give Acetaldehyde And Propanal

6. If CO2 is evolved on ozonolysis, then the original alkene must be an allene, i.e., an alkadiene in which the double bonds are adjacent to each other.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carbon Dioxide Is Envolved On Ozonolysis

7. In the process of ozonolysis, carbon-carbon double bond undergoes fission to yield carbonyl compounds. So ozonolysis is an example of cleavage reaction of alkene

8. Ozonides on being reduced by LiAlH4or NaBH4 gives alcohols instead of carbonyl compounds.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Ozonide Reduced On Methanol

9. When ozonides are decomposed by water in the absence of Zn, c-atom of the double bond, bonded to two h-atoms is ethylene converted into CO2 whereas die doubly bonded c, bonded to one H-atom and one alkyl group, is converted to carboxylic acid. however, if any doubly bonded c atom bears two alkyl groups, it is converted to a ketone. this decomposition is referred to as oxidative decomposition

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidative Decomposition

Ozonolysis of alkynes:

Alkynes on ozonolysis yields 1,2-dicarbonyl compounds.

For example:

Glyoxal is obtained on ozonolysis of acetylene. 2-oxopropanal is’ obtained on ozonolysis of propyne and butanedione is obtained on ozonolysis of but-2-yne

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ozonolysis Of Alkynes

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Important Topics

2. Oxidation reaction

1. Oxidation by alkaline KMnO4:

1. Cold and alkaline potassium permanganate solution oxidizes an alkene to yield a 1,2-diol or vicinal diol by attaching one hydroxyl group to each of the doubly bonded carbon atoms. This reaction is called hydroxylation of alkenes. In this case, cis-hydroxylation occurs because the addition of two OH groups takes place from the same side of the double bond.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidation By Alkaline

Baeyers test:

Dilute alkaline solution (1-2%) of potassium permanganate is known as Baeyer’s reagent. The colour of the reagent is purple which disappears when it is allowed to react with any compound belonging to the class of alkenes or alkynes. So this reaction is used to test the presence of unsaturation, i.e., carbon-carbon double or triple bond in an organic compound. This is known as Baeyer’s test.

2. A hot and concentrated solution of alkaline KMnO4 oxidises alkenes to give acid or ketone or a mixture of both. In this case, cleavage of the double bond occurs to yield the products.

  • If =CH2 group is present in the alkene, then it is oxidised to CO2 and H2O. If the alkene contains =CHR group, then it is oxidised to RCOOH
  • If the alkene.contains =CR2 group, then the group gives rise to R2C=O by oxidation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hot And Concentrated Solution Of Alkaline

By osmium tetroxide (0sO4):

Osmium tetroxide (OsO4) adds on to the double bond of an alkene to form osmic ester (a cyclic compound). When this cosmic ester is hydrolysed by the aqueous ethanolic solution of sodium bisulphite, 1,2- diol or vicinal diol is obtained.

Therefore, it is also a hydroxylation reaction. In this case, cis-hydroxylation preferentially because the two hydroxyl (—OH) an occurs groups add on to the doubly bonded carbon atoms from the same side of the double bond

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Osmium Tetroxide Reaction And Examples

2. Epoxidation (Formation of epoxide):

1. Alkene oxides or epoxides are formed when alkenes react with per acids

For example:

Perbenzoic acid, chloroperbenzoic acid etc.) This reaction is called Prileschaiev’s reaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Epoxidation Or Formation Of Epoxide Reaction

The resulting epoxide oh hydrolysis with dilute acid or alkali yields 1,2-diol. Epoxidation followed by hydrolysis causes the addition of two OH groups from the opposite sides of the double bond, i.e., in this case, trans-hydroxylation occurs.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Epoxidation Followed By Hydrolysis

Formation of carbonyl compounds (Wackcr process): when a mixture of alkene vapours and oxygen, at high pressure and 50°C, is passed through a solution of palladium chloride containing CuCl2, the corresponding carbonyl compound is formed. Pd(II) ion is reduced to metallic Pd

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Silver Catalyst And Alkanes Oxidised By Air Or Oxygen

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Silver Catalyst Example

3. Polymerisation

Polymerisation Definition:

The reaction in which two or more molecules of a simple compound unite together under the influence of suitable pressure, temperature and catalyst to produce a single large molecule, i.e., a macromolecule of high molecular mass (whose molecular mass is a multiple of the molecular mass of the simple compound) is called polymerization (Greek word poly = many, meros = unit, member, or part).

The product obtained by the reaction is called polymer and the simple small molecules from which the polymer is formed are called monomers. Alkenes possess a tendency to polymerize.

Polymerization of ethylene:

Depending on the reaction conditions and catalyst used,

Two types of polyethylene or polythene may be obtained.

1. Low-Density Polythene (LDPE):

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Low Density Polythene

It is used for making waterproof covers, toys, sheets used in construction work etc

2. High-Density Polythene (HDPE):

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons High Density Of Polythene

The tensile strength of this type of polythene is much higher. It is used in making pipes, bottles, water tanks, and as insulation for electric wires and cables.

Polymerisation of propylene:

Polymerisation of propene or propylene leads to the formation of polypropylene

Hydrocarbons Polymerisation Of Propylene

Polypropene is much harder than polyethylene and its tensile strength is also higher. It is used for making ropes, buckets, automotive moulding, seat covers, containers for storing oils and gasoline, carpet fibers and packing.

Polymerization of substituted ethenes:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Polymerisation Of Propylene

Teflon is inert towards acids, alkalis and other chemicals. It is used in making chemically resistant pipes and surgical tubes. Due to chemical inertness and high thermal stability, teflon is used for making non-stick utensils

5. Substitution reactions

Although addition reactions are the characteristic reactions of alkenes, yet alkenes also respond to substitution reactions under special condition, e.g., O when a mixture of ethylene and chlorine gas is heated at 350-400°C, vinyl chloride is formed through substitution reaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Substiution Reaction

6. Isomerisation

When alkenes are heated at 200 – 300°C in the presence of aluminium chloride as catalyst or at 500 – 700°C in absence of a catalyst, they yield isomeric compounds through change in the position ofthe double bond or alkyl groups. Example: When 1-butene is subjected to isomerisation, it gives 2-butene and 2-methyipropene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomerisation

Ethylene Or Ethene (C2H4)

Ethylene (CH2=CH2) is the first member of the olefin or 1 alkene series. The general formula of alkenes is CnH2n. The formula of ethylene can be obtained by putting n = 2.

1. Preparation of ethylene

Laboratory preparation:

Principle:

Ethylene is prepared in the laboratory by heating a mixture of ethyl alcohol and excess of concentrated sulphuric acid (about three times the volume of ethanol) at 165-170°C . Concentrated sulphuric acid being a strong dehydrating agent eliminates a molecule of water from ethanol to liberate ethylene. In this ethyl alcohol undergoes intramolecular dehydration.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Ethylene

Steps of the reaction:

The reaction takes place in two steps. In the first step ethyl hydrogen sulphate (an inorganic ester) and water are produced. In the second step, ethyl hydrogen sulphate decomposes at 165-170°C to yield ethylene and sulphuric acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Steps Of Reaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Overview

Collection:

  • Concentrated sulphuric acid being a strong oxidising agent oxidises ethyl alcohol to CO2 , itself being reduced to SO2 So, CO2 and SO2 thus produced remain as impurities in ethylene.
  • These acidic impurities are removed by passing the gas through NaOH or KOH solution.
  • The gas is collected by the downward displacement of water in a gas jar.

Drying:

Ethylene thus collected contains a little water vapour which is removed by passing through a tower filled with fused CaCl2 and the pure gas is collected over mercury

  • In the preparation of ethylene, concentrated sulphuric acid (H2SO4) acts as an acid catalyst and water absorbent.
  • In this process, if the quantity of cone. H2SO4 is not high or the quantity of alcohol taken is high and the temperature is less than 165 – 170°C, one molecule of water is removed from two molecules of alcohol, yielding diethyl ether (intermolecular dehydration).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Diethyl Ether

  • The use of syrupy phosphoric acid at 230°C instead of concentrated sulphuric acid improves the purity of ethylene (free from CO2 and SO ) formed.
  • Ethylene cannot be dried by concentrated sulphuric acid because it absorbs ethylene to form ethyl hydrogen sulphate

CH2=CH2 + H2SO4  →CH3— CH2 —OSO3H

Other methods of preparation of ethylene:

1. Ethylene Is prepared by heating ethyl alcohol In the presence ofstrong dehydrating agent like phosphorus pentoxide.

3C2H5OH + P2O5  → 3 [CH2=CH2] + 2H3PO4 ]

2. When ethyl alcohol vapours are passed over heated alumina at 350°C, ethylene Is produced (Industrial preparation of ethylene).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Industrial Preparation Of Ethylene

3. Ethylene gas is obtained when ethyl chloride, bromide or iodide is heated in the presence of a concentrated alcoholic solution of caustic potash

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Caustic Potash

[X= Cl,Br,I]

4. When alcoholic solution of ethylene dichloride or dibromide is heated with zinc dust, ethylene is produced.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Produced

5. Pure ethylene may be prepared from impure ethylene by using Oxidation reactions using this reaction. The impure ethylene is first converted into ethylene dibromide by allowing it to react with bromine. It is then washed with Na2 CO3 solution, dried by anhydrous CaCl2 and finally distilled to obtain pure ethylene dibromide. Pure ethylene dibromide thus obtained gives pure ethylene when heated with zinc dust

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pure Ethylene

6. By partial hydrogenation of acetylene: When a mixture of acetylene and hydrogen is passed over palladium on silica gel support at 200°C, ethylene is produced.

By Kolbe’s electrolytic Process:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Kolbes Electrolytic

By thermal decomposition of petroleum: To meet industrial demand

For example:

Manufacture of polythene, production of ethyl alcohol on industrial scale etc.), ethylene is required in large quantities. Industrial requirements of ethylene are mainly fulfilled by cracking of petroleum

2. Properties of ethylene

Physical properties:

  • Ethylene is a mild, sweet-smelling colourless gas.
  • Its boiling point Is -105°C and its melting point Is -IG9.5°C.
  • It Is almost as heavy as air. Its vapour density is 14.
  • It is liquefied at 0°C and 44atm pressure. h is sparingly soluble in water but is highly soluble in alcohol and ether.
  • It possesses anaesthetic properties.

Chemical properties:

In ethylene, the two C-atoms are linked by a double bond, one of which is a strong cr -bond and the other is a weak σ-bond. Hence, ethylene is easily oxidised and participates in an addition reaction. Due to the presence of π-bond, ethylene is more reactive than ethane. During the addition reaction,π -bond in ethylene is broken and two new σ -bonds are formed by which two monovalent atoms or radicals get attached to the C- atoms

General Reactions Of Ethylene

1. Oxidation reactions

Combustion:

Ethylene is a combustible gas but it is not a supporter of combustion. It bums with a sooty luminous flame with liberation of large amount of heat

C2H4 + 3O2→2CO2 + 2H2O + 337 kcal-mol-1

Due to the presence of unsaturation, the percentage of carbon in ethylene is more than that in ethane, having the same number of carbon atoms. So, as a result of its partial oxidation in air, some carbon particles are produced and the presence of hot carbon particles results in the emission of luminous flame. In excess of oxygen, ethylene undergoes complete combustion.

Reaction with potassium permanganate:

1. When ethylene gas is passed through cold and dilute (1-2%) alkaline KMnO4 solution, the purple (reddish-violet) colour of permanganate is discharged. Ethylene gets oxidised to form colourless ethylene glycol. This proves that ethylene is an unsaturated compound

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Potassium Permanganate

2. Ethylene is oxidised to CO2 entered alkaline solution of KMnO4 and H2° by hot an

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Is Oxidised Carbondioxide And Water

Formation of ethylene oxide:

When a mixture of air and ethylene is passed under pressure over silver catalyst at 250-400°C, ethylene undergoes partial oxidation by O2 to yield ethylene oxide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Ethylene Oxide

Formation of acetaldehyde:

At 50°c, when a mixture of ethylene and O2 under high pressure is passed through a solution of palladium chloride (PdCl2) containing cupric chloride (CuCl2), acetaldehyde is produced.

CH2 = CH2 + PdCl2 +H2O →CH3CHOI = Pd +2HCl

2. Addition reactions

1. Addition of hydrogen:

At ordinary temperature and pressure in the presence of Pt or Pd or Raney nickel catalyst or at 200-300°C in the presence of Ni catalyst, hydrogen combines with ethylene to form the saturated hydrocarbon, ethane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Hydrogen

2. Addition of halogen:

1. Chlorine combines directly with ethylene in the presence of sunlight to yield additional compound 1,2-dichloroethane. It is an oily liquid which is commonly known as Dutch oil.

CH2 = CH2 + Cl →ClCH2CH2Cl

  • When a mixture of ethylene and twice its volume of chlorine is ignited, ethylene bums with a red flame with the formation of carbon (soot) and hydrogen chloride. This reaction proves the presence of carbon in ethylene.

CH2 = CH2 + 2Cl2 → 2C + 4HCl

  •  At 350 – 450°C ethylene undergoes substitution reaction with chlorine to give vinyl chloride.

H2=CH2 + Cl2 → CH2 =CHCl (Vinyl chloride) + HCl

3.  When ethylene gas is passed through a red-brown solution of bromine in CCl4 or CHCl3, the solution becomes colourless due to the formation of colourless 1,2-dibromoethane. This reaction is used as a test for detecting ethylene and ethylenic unsaturation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylenic Unsaturation

3. The reaction of ethylene with iodine is very slow and in fact, the reaction is reversible.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Reaction Of Ethylene With Iodine

4. Fluorine is highly reactive, so it does not participate in addition reaction. It decomposes ethylene to give hydrogen fluoride and carbon

3. Addition of halogen hydracids:

The addition reaction of halogen hydracids with ethylene produces ethyl halides.

CH2=CH2 + HX → CH3CH2X [X = I, Br, Cl, F]

Order of reactivity of halogen hydracids: HI > HBr > HC1 > HF

4. Formation of halohydrin (addition of HOX):

When ethylene reacts with chlorine water or bromine water, ethylene chlorohydrin or 2-chloroethanol and ethylene bromohydrin or 2-bromoethanol are respectively formed the reaction with chlorine water, some amount of 1,2-dichloroethane (ClCH2CH2Cl) and with bromine water, (BrCH2CH2Br) are produced.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Halohydrin

In this reaction, the red colour of bromine water some amount of 1,2 dibromoethane is discharged. So it can be used as a test for the detection of ethylene or ethylenic unsaturation in an organic compound.

2. Addition of sulphuric acid:

When ethylene gas is passed through concentrated sulphuric acid (98%), it gets absorbed by sulphuric acid to form ethyl hydrogen sulphate.

Ethyl hydrogen sulphate, when heated with a dilute sulphuric acid solution, undergoes hydrolysis to give ethyl alcohol and H2SO4 alkaline solution, Baeyer’s reagent (a drop or two) is added. If the reddish-violet or purple colour of permanganate is discharged and brown-coloured MnO2 is precipitated, then it indicates that the compound contains ethylenic unsaturation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compound Contains Ethylenic Unsaturation

1. It is to be remembered that in the test for unsaturation in an unknown organic compound, the disappearance of ; the reddish-violet or purple colour of cold dilute KMnO4 solution does not necessarily confirm the presence of unsaturation in the compound. If the organic compound contains any group

For example:

—CHO ) which is easily oxidised by KMnO4, the purple colour of KMnO4 may be discharged in spite of the absence of unsaturation in the compound.

2. Again, while dissolving the test sample in an organic i solvent in place of water, it should be remembered that the solvent must not be oxidised by KMnO4.

For example: 

In this experiment, acetone can be used as a solvent but not ethanol because the latter is readily  oxidised by KMnO4

3. Test with bromine solution

Dilute solution of bromine (2%) in carbon tetrachloride or chloroform is added dropwise to the solution of the organic sample in the same solvent. If the reddish-brown colour of bromine solution is discharged and no HBr gas is evolved (moist blue litmus paper held over the mouth of the test tube does not turn red), then it indicates the presence of ethylenic
unsaturationin the organic compound under consideration

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Test With Bromine Solution

  • The above reaction is an addition reaction. HBr is not liberated in this reaction. The colour of bromine may also be discharged by substitution reaction, but in that case, the evolution of HBr takes place.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Phenol Reaction With HBr

  • Again, when an organic compound contains a group (e.g., —CHO group) which can be oxidised by bromine, then the colour of bromine gets decolourised with the liberation of HBr.

For example, glucose discharges the colour of bromine water

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Glucose Discharges The Colour Of Bromine Water.

  • In fact, for the detection of ethylenic unsaturation, both Baeyer’s test and Br2/CCl4 test are performed. If both the tests give positive results, then it can be concluded that the given organic compound contains ethylenic by unsaturation.

Alkynes Or Acetylenes

The unsaturated hydrocarbon containing carbon-carbon triple bond (C= C) are called alkynes. Each family member has four hydrogen atoms less than the corresponding alkane. The general formula of alkynes is CnH2n-2  where, n = 2, 3, 4, ••• etc.

The first member of the series is acetylene and so the other members of this series are also collectively known as acetylene

1. Nomenclature of alkynes

In trivial or common system of nomenclature, the name of the simplest alkyne is acetylene. The names of the higher alkynes are given as substituted acetylenes.

The IUPAC names of alkynes are derived from the names of the corresponding alkanes by replacing the suffix -ane by -yne. IUPAC nomenclature of alkynes has been discussed thoroughly in

Only the IUPAC names of some higher alkynes are mentioned here

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Higher Alkynes

2. Structure of the carbon-carbon triple bond

1. The C = C bond present in the simplest alkyne acetylene consists of one sigma (cr) bond and two pi (a-) bonds. Each carbon atom of acetylene has sp-hybrid orbitals. One sp -hybrid orbital of each C undergoes head-on (axial) overlap with sp -hybrid orbital of another carbon to form a C —C σ-bond. The second sp-hybrid orbital of each carbon overlaps axially with the ls-orbital of each of the two hydrogen atoms to form two C —H sigma bonds.

2. Each carbon atom has two unhybridised p -orbitals (let us assume, py and pz) which are perpendicular to each other as well as to the internuclear axis. The two parallel py orbitals, one on each carbon, overlap sideways to form a n -n-bond. Similarly, the sideways overlapping of two parallel pz orbitals, one on each carbon, leads to the formation of a second σ-bond. These two; r -electron clouds are perpendicular to each other.

3. The value of H —C= C bond angle in acetylene is 180° and therefore, the shape of the molecule is linear

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Molecule Is Linear

4. The C—H bond length is 1.06A and the C = C bond length is 1.20Å. The C = C bond length is shorter than the C=C bond (1.34Å) and C—C bond(1.54Å)

3. Isomerism in alkynes

Alkynes exhibit 4 types of structural isomerism:

1. Position isomerism:

Alkynes (except ethyne & propyne) exhibit position isomerism due to difference in position of the triple bond in the carbon chain. For example,

CH3CH2C = CH (But -1- yne) and CH3C= CCH2 ((But -2- yne)

CH3CH2CH2C (Pent-1-yne)= CH and CH3CH2C = CCH3 (Pent-2-yne)

2. Chain isomerism:

Alkynes having five or more carbon atoms show chain isomerism due to differences the type of carbon skeleton. For example,

CH3CH2CH2C (Pent-1-yne)= CH and (CH3)2CH – C≡ CH

3. Functional group isomerism:

Dienes, i.e., compounds containing two double bonds, and alkynes are functional isomers of each other.

For example:

CH3CH2C = CH (But -1- yne) and CH= CH-CH = CH2 (Buta – 1,3 – diene)

4. Ring-chain isomerism: Alkynes are ring-chain isomers of cycloalkenes.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ring Chain Isomers

4. Classification of alkynes

Alkynes are classified into two types

  • Terminal alkynes and
  • Non-terminal alkynes.

In terminal alkynes, the C = C bond is present at one end of the carbon chain and in non-terminal alkynes, the C= C bond is present in any position other than the terminal positions

Terminal alkynes:

CH3CH2 C ≡ CH (But -1- yne)

CH3CH2CH2C ≡ CH(Pent -1- yne)

Non-terminal alkynes: 

CH3C ≡ C CH3 (But -2- yne)

CH3C≡ C CH2 CH3 (Pent -2- yne)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Overview

General Methods Of Preparation Of Alkynes

Like alkenes, alkynes can also be prepared by elimination

1. By dehydrohalogenation of vicinal dihalides:

1. When vicinal dihalides are refluxed with ethanolic KOH solution, alkynes are obtained due to the removal of two molecules of hydrogen halide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vicinal Dihalides Are Refluxed With Ethanolic Solution

2. Alkynes are formed at lower temperatures when sodamide (NaNH2) dissolved in liquid NH3 is used instead of alcoholic KOH

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkynes Formed At Lower Temperatures When Sodamide

3. When vicinal dihalides are heated with ethanolic KOH solution, vinyl halides are obtained due to the removal of one hydrogen halide molecule. The resulting vinyl halides on treatment with NaNH2/liq. NH3 at lower temperatures lose another molecule of hydrogen halide to yield alkynes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vicinal Dihalides Heated With Ethanolic KOH

Mechanism:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vicinal Dihalides

When NaNH2/liq. NH3 Is used as the reagent, the alkyne is obtained as a salt because acetylenic hydrogen is weakly acidic. This salt, on acidification, liberates the alkyne.

For example: 

In the above reaction, propyno, as soon as it is produced, reacts with NaNH2 to form the corresponding salt. When dilute HCl is added to this salt, propyne is liberated.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propyne Is Liberated

Preparation of alkynes from alkenes:

Acetylene, for example, may be prepared from ethylene as follows:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Alkynes From Alkenes

2. By the dehydrohalogenation of gem-dihalides:

Dihalo compounds having two halogen atoms attached to the same carbon atom are called gem-dihalides.

1. When gem-dihalides are heated with ethanolic KOH solution, haloalkenes or vinyl halides are obtained. Alkynes are produced by treating the vinyl halides thus obtained with NaNH2 /liq. NH3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons First And Second Step Elimination Of One And Another Molecules

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Gem Dihalides Examples

2. When gem-dihalides are refluxed with ethanolic KOH, alkynes are obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Gem Dihalides Are Refluxed With Ethanolic KOH

3. By dehalogenation of tetrahaloalkanes:

When tetrahaloalkanes (each of two adjacent carbon atoms is linked to two halogen atoms) dissolved in ethanol are heated with zinc dust or vapours of tetrahaloalkanes are passed over zinc dust, then alkynes are formed by the removal of four halogen atoms (as two molecules of ZnX2).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Dehalogenation Of Tetrahaloalkanes

In fact, Tetra haloalkanes are generally prepared from alkynes and hence, this method loses its importance for the preparation of alkynes in general.

Preparation of higher alkynes from alkynes containing acetylenic hydrogen atom:

When vapors of acetylene or terminal alkynes (RC = CH) are passed over heated metallic sodium or made to react with soda mide dissolved in iquid ammonia, their sodium salts (sodium alkynes) are produced. When these salts are allowed to react with primary alkyl halides

For example:

CH3Br, CH3 CHBr etc) higher alkynes are formed. In the case of acetylene, both the H-atoms can be replaced by alkyl groups

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Higher Alkynes From Alkynes Containig Acetylenic Hydrogen Atom

Examples:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Acetylenic Hydrogen Atom

Higher alkynes can also be prepared from lithium salts of terminal alkynes. These lithium salts are prepared by the action of lithium amide (LiNH2) or n -n-butyllithium (n-BuLi) on terminal alkynes

General Properties And Chemical M Reactions Of Alkynes

1. General properties

The first three alkynes (ethyne, propyne, and butyne) are colorless gases at ordinary temperature and pressure, the next eight members (C5-C12) are liquids and higher alkynes are solids.

  • Alkynes are sparingly soluble in water but highly soluble in organic solvents like alcohol, benzene, acetone etc.
  • The melting and boiling points of alkynes are higher than those of the corresponding alkenes and alkanes.

Reason for higher melting and boiling points of alkynes:

Due to the presence of triple bonds, lower alkynes have linear structures. Hence, their molecules remain more closely packed in the crystal lattice as compared to those of the corresponding alkenes and alkanes.

Consequently, alkynes have higher melting and boiling points. Comparison of reactivities of alkenes and alkynes; Due to the smaller distance between the two triply bonded carbon atoms and better p -orbital overlap, the electrons in the triple bond are held more tightly. Therefore, they are poorly available to an electrophile as compared to that of a double bond.

Again, when electrophilic addition involves bridged-ion intermediates (a sin die case of Br2 addidon), those arising from triple bonds are more strained [i.e., less stable) than those arising from double bonds.

Hence, although there is a higher concentration of electrons between the carbon atoms of a triple bond than in a double bond, alkynes are in general less reactive than alkenes towards electrophilic addition reactions

2. Chemical reactions

  • The reactions of alkynes can be divided mainly into five classes, such as—
  • Combustion reaction,
  • Addition reaction,
  • Oxidation reaction,
  • Reactions due to acidic behaviour of acetylenic hydrogen and
  • Polymerisation reactions.

Acetylene Or Ethyne (C2H2)

Acetylene (HC = CH) is the first member of the alkyne series. The general formula of alkynes is CnH2n-2. When n = 2, the general formula reduces to C2H2 which is the formula of acetylene. In 1865, Edmund Davy discovered this gas. It is not available in nature. Coal gas contains a very littie amount (0.06%) of acetylene.

1. Preparation of acetylene

Laboratory preparation:

Acetylene Principle:

At room temperature, acetylene is prepared by the action of water on calcium carbide

CaC2 + 2H2O→Ca(OH)2 + C2H2

Acetylene Impurities:

Acetylene gas thus produced is not pure but contaminated with small amounts of phosphine (PH3 arsine (AsH3), hydrogen sulphide etc, Due to the presence of these gases, acetylene gas emits a foul smell.

Pure acetylene gas is sweet-smelling.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Acetylene

Acetylene Purification:

The impure gas is first passed through an acidified copper sulphate solution and then through a suspension of bleaching powder in water. As a result, lf 2S and NIL are absorbed in acidified copper sulphate solution and PH3 and AsH3 are absorbed in the suspension of bleaching powder in water. Acetylene gas thus obtained is moderately pure

Preparation of acetylene gas of high purity: 

1. Acetylene gas prepared in the laboratory is passed through ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution when a red precipitate of copper acetylide (CuC2) is obtained while the other gaseous Impurities escape without any reaction

C2H2+ 2CuCl +2 NH4OH Cu2C(Red)↓+2NH4Cl+2H2O

2. The precipitate thus obtained is filtered, washed thoroughly with water and then heated with concentrated hydrochloric acid or aqueous solution of potassium cyanide when acetylene gas is liberated.

The issuing acetylene gas, after drying over P2O, is collected over mercury.In this way, highly pure acetylene is obtained.

Cu2C2+2HCl 2CuCl + C2H2

Cu2C2+8KCN + 2H2O → 2K3 [Cu(CN)4]+ 2 KOH + C2H2

2. Other methods of preparation of acetylene:

1. By dehydrobromination of ethylene dibromide:

Acetylene may be prepared by boiling ethylene dibromide with an alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydrobromination Of Ethylene Dibromide

The reaction occurs in two steps. In the first step, vinyl bromide (CH2=CHBr) is produced. In the second step, the dehydrobromination of vinyl bromide results in the formation of acetylene.

However, for the second step, KOH is not a very effective reagent Sodamide (NaNH2) dissolved in liquid ammonia is a much better and effective reagent. So acetylene can be prepared easily from ethylene dibromide by using NaNH2 dissolved in liquid NH3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Dibromide

Similarly, acetylene may be prepared from ethylidene chloride (1,1-dichloroethane)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylidene Chloride

2. By debromination of tetrabromoethane:

When vapours of 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane are passed over heated zinc dust, the compound undergoes debromination to yield acetylene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Debromination Of Tetrabromoethane

3. By heating a haloform with Ag powder:

When iodoform lUMftl Physical properties (or any haloform) is heated with silver powder, acetylene gas is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Heating A Haloform With Ag Powder

4. By Kolbe’s electrolytic method:

Electrolysis of concentrated aqueous solution of Na or K-salt of maleic acid or fumaric acid liberates acetylene gas at the anode

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons By Kolbes Electrolytic Method

5. Industrial preparation of acetylene: 

A mixture of coke and quick lime is heated to a very high temperature (2500- 3000°C) in an electric furnace when calcium carbide is produced. Acetylene is prepared by treating calcium carbide with water.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Industrial Preparation Of Acetylene

When natural gas, rich in methane, is heated at 1400-1500°C for a fraction of a second (0.1s) at ordinary atmospheric pressure, methane undergoes thermal decomposition (cracking) to yield acetylene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane Undergoes Thermal Decomposition

Acetylene can be prepared by passing a stream of pure hydrogen gas through an electric arc struck between two carbon electrodes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pure Hydrogen

General Properties And Chemical Reactions Of Acetylene

1. Acetylene Physical properties

  • Pure acetylene is a colourless sweet-smelling gas having boiling point -84°C .
  • It is slightly lighter than air.
  • Acetylene is sparingly soluble in water but its solubility in acetone is much higher (at 15°C and 10-12 atmospheric pressure, 1 volume of acetone dissolves 300 volumes of acetylene).
  • Acetylene can be liquefied at 0°C and 26 atm pressure but on liquefaction It is converted into a highly explosive substance.
  • For this reason, acetylene is transported from one place to another in cylinders by dissolving in acetone under high pressure

2. Reactions of acetylene

Combustion:

  • Acetylene is a combustible gas but it does support combustion. It bums in air with a luminous flame. As the percentage of carbon content in acetylene.
  • Is higher than that in the corresponding alkane, it undergoes incomplete combustion which leads to the formation of hot carbon particles for which a luminous flame is produced
  •  It is for this reason acetylene Is used for illuminating purpose.
  • Acetylene forms an explosive mixture with air. Acetylene burns in excess of oxygen with an explosion, forming CO and H2O. In this luminous flame is produced which has a high temperature (3300°C). This flame is known acetylene flame

2C2H2 + 5O2→4CO2 + 2H2O + 312kcal .mol-1

Addition reactions:

1. Addition reactions of acetylene are:

Addition of hydrogen (hydrogenation): At 200 – 300°C in the presence of powdered nickel catalyst or at ordinary temperature and pressure, in the presence of Raney nickel or powdered platinum or palladium catalyst, the reaction of acetylene with hydrogen gas occurs in two steps. In the first step, one molecule of hydrogen adds to acetylene to give ethylene and in the second step, another molecule of hydrogen adds to ethylene to form ethane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Hydrogen Reaction

2. Partial hydrogenation:

  • In the presence of Lindlar’s catalyst, acetylene combines with only one molecule of hydrogen to form ethylene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cis 2 Butene

  • Partial hydrogenation of acetylene can also be affected in the presence of nickel boride (Ni2 B), commonly known as P-2 catalyst
  • Lindlar’s catalyst is finely divided palladium deposited on calcium carbonate Pd-CaCO3, partially poisoned by lead acetate, Pb(CH3COO)2 and quinoline.
  • 2-butyne reacts with hydrogen gas in the presence of Lindlar’s catalyst to produce mainly cis-2-butene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Trans 2 Butene

  • Catalytic hydrogenation is an exception to the generalisation that alkenes are more reactive than alkynes towards addition reaction. The reason is as follows. Alkenes are adsorbed on the surface of the catalyst only when the plane of the n -bond approaches perpendicularly. Due to the cylindrical nature of the n bond of alkynes, any approach along the axis of the cylinder can be successful.

3. Addition of halogen (halogenation):

  • Addition of chlorine:
    • Direct combination of chlorine with acetylene may occur with explosion, HC = CH + Cl2 → 2C + 2HCl. If the reaction is carried outin the presence of kieselguhr (a silicate compound) and iron powder, the heat liberated is absorbed and no explosion takes place. In this case, the reaction takes place in two steps.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addtion Of Halogenation

    • Westron is a poisonous substance. It is used as a solvent for oils, fats and resins. When it is made to react with steam and lime, trichloroethylene (aerosol) is obtained on the elimination of a molecule of HCl. Westrosol is also used as a solvent

Hydrocarbons Westrosol

  • Addition of bromine:
    • The reaction of acetylene with bromine takes place at a comparatively slower rate. When acetylene gas is passed through red-coloured brominewater, 1, 2-dibromoethene or acetylene dibromide is produced and as a result, the colour of bromine-water is discharged. The reaction confirms the presence of unsaturation in acetylene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Bromine

    • When acetylene is made to react with gaseous bromine or liquid bromine, it combines with two molecules of bromine to form 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane or acetylene tetrabromide

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Tetrabromide

  • Addition of Iodine:  Acetylene reacts extremely slowly with iodine. It combines with only one molecule of iodine dissolved in ethanol to form 1,2-diiodoethene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Iodine

4. Addition of halogen hydracids (HX):

Halogen hydracids react with acetylene in two steps. The reactivity of halogen hydracids in this reaction follows the order: HI > HBr > HCl.

In the first step, the addition of one molecule of HX gives vinyl halide (1-haloethene). The second step involves the addition of one more molecule of HX to vinyl halide to yield ethylidene halide (1,1-dihaloethane). This second step of the reaction occurs according to Markownikoff’s rule

Reaction with HBr:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With HBr

Reaction with Hl:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With HI

Reaction with HCl:

At 65°C, in the presence of mercuric chloride (HgCl2) catalyst, acetylene forms vinyl chloride with hydrochloric acid by addition reaction.

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 NCERT Notes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With HCl

5. Addition of hypochlorous acid (HOCl):

When acetylene is passed through a cold HOCl solution, in first, combines acetylene with one molecule of HOCl to produce 2-chloroethenoI. In the second step, another molecule of HOCl is added to the resulting enol to yield an unstable addition compound that readily eliminates a molecule of water to give dichloroacetaldehyde

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Hypochlorous Acid

6. Addition of water or hydration:

When acetylene gas is passed through a dilute H2SO4 solution (20%) containing 1% HgSO4 at 60 – 80°C, it combines with one molecule of water to form the unstable addition compound vinyl alcohol which rapidly tautomerises to yield stable acetaldehyde.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Water Or Hydration

In case of higher alkynes, this reaction follows Markownikoff’s rule, and ketone is obtained as the major product,

For example: Acetone is obtained from propyne

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Markowinkoffs Rule And ketone

8. Addition of hydrocyanic acid (HCN):

In the presence of a barium cyanide catalyst, one molecule of hydrogen cyanide combines with acetylene to form the additional compound vinyl cyanide or acrylonitrile.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Water Or Hydration Of Mechanism

9. Addition of acetic acid (CH3COOH): 

When vapours of acetic acid and acetylene are passed over zinc acetate placed on charcoal at 170°C, vinyl acetate is obtained. Polyvinyl acetate, an important plastic, is prepared by the polymerisation of vinyl acetate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vinyl Cyanide Or Acrylonitrile

  • When acetylene gas is passed through hot acetic acid in the presence of Hg2+ catalyst, in the first step one molecule and in the second step, another molecule of acetic acid is added to it to form ethylidene diacetate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpropene Addition Of Acetic Acid Of Ethylidene Diacetate

  • Acetaldehyde and acetic anhydride are obtained when ethylidene diacetate (liquid) is heated at 300 – 400°C.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylidene Diaceate Heated On Acetaldehyde And Acetic Anhydride

10. Addition of arsenic trichloride (AsCl3):

Acetylene combines with arsenic trichloride AsCl3 in the presence of AlCl3 or HgCl2 to give the poisonous gas 2-chlorovinyl dichloramine or lewisite

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 3 Dimercapto 1 Propanol

Addition of CH3OH:

CH3OH adds on to acetylene in the presence of potassium methoxide (CH3OK) to form methyl vinyl ether. This is a nucleophilic addition reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nucleophilic Addition

Oxidation reactions

1. Oxidation by potassium permanganate:

When acetylene is treated with dilute alkaline potassium permanganate solution, it is oxidised first into glyoxal and then into oxalic acid (which exists as potassium salt) and the reddish-violet or purple colour of permanganate is discharged.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidation Reactions

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidation Reactions.

Ozonolysis:

When a stream of ozonized oxygen is passed through acetylene dissolved in an inert solvent

For example:

Chloroform, carbon tetrachloride etc.), acetylene ozonide is formed. The ozonide on decomposition (hydrolysis) is converted into glyoxal and hydrogen peroxide. H2O2 oxidises glyoxal partially into formic acid. Consequently, a mixture of both glyoxal and formic acid is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons OZonolysis And Formic Acid

If the decomposition of the ozonide is carried out in the presence of zinc dust, H2O2 is no longer available (reduced by zinc) to convert glyoxal into formic acid and hence, glyoxal is obtained as the only product.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Glyoxal Reactions

The acidic nature of acetylene

The H-atom attached to a triply bonded carbon atom (= C —H) is called an acetylenic hydrogen atom. Since the acetylenic carbon atom is sphybridised, its s -character is much higher (50%) and consequently electronegativity of acetylenic carbon is relatively higher.

For this reason, the Csp-H bonding electrons are strongly attracted by the carbon nucleus and the hydrogen atom can be removed as aproton (H+), i.e., an acetylenic hydrogen atom can exhibit mild acidic character.

The acidic character of acetylenic hydrogen may also be explained by the fact that the conjugate base (HC = C-) is considerably stable and this is because the unshared electron pair lying in an sp-hybrid orbital remains tightly held by the carbon nucleus. The acetylenic hydrogen atom can, therefore, be replaced by some metal atom to form metal acetylides.

Since the s-character decreases from sp→ sp² → sp³ – hybridised carbon atoms, the acidic character of hydrocarbons follows the order:

HC = CH (Ka = 10-25) > , CH2=CH2 (Ka = 10-35) >CH3– CH3 (Ka = 10-40)

1. Reaction with sodium:

When acetylene gas is passed over molten sodium at 180°C, both mono and disodium acetylide are produced and H2 gas is liberated. However,if excess acetylene is used, monosodium acetylide is obtained as the major product.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With Sodium

2. Reaction with sodamide:

Acetylene reacts with sodamide in liquid ammonia to form monosodium acetylide. However, when excess sodamide is used, disodium acetylide is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reactions With Sodamide

Sodium acetylide undergoes rapid hydrolysis in the presence of water to give acetylene and NaOH

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sodium Acetylide

3. Reaction with lithium amide:

Lithium amide dissolved in liquid NH3 reacts with acetylene to form lithium acetylide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With Lithium Amide

4. Reaction with butyllithium:

When n -n-butyllithium reacts with acetylene, lithium acetylide is produced quantitatively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With Butyllithium

Reactions of NaNH2, LiNH2 and BuLi with acetylene are acid-base reactions in which acetylene acts as an acid and other compounds act as bases. These reactions occur because acetylene is more acidic than NH3.

5. Reactions with heavy metal cations (Cu+, Ag+):

Acetylene and the terminal alkynes

For example:

CH3C = CH, CH3CH2C= CH etc.) react with heavy metal cations like Cu+ and Ag+ to form insoluble salts. These salts, when absolutely dry, are explosive.

When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution, a red precipitate of insoluble cuprous acetylide (Gu2C2) is obtained. With the help of this reaction, acetylene present even in trace amounts can be detected.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ammoniacal Cuprous Chloride Solution

Again, when cuprous acetylide is boiled with aqueous solution of potassium cyanide, pure acetylene is regenerated.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Potassium Cynaide And Pure Acetylene Regenerated

Moreover, if cuprous acetylide is boiled with concentrated hydrochloric acid, acetylene is again obtained but not in pure form

CuC≡CCu + 2HCl →HC ≡ CH ↑ + 2CuCl

When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal stiver nitrate solution, an insoluble white precipitate of Ag2C2 is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Silver Aceytlide

Silver acetylide is also produced when acetylene is allowed to react with an alcoholic silver nitrate solution.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alcoholic Silver Nitrate Solution

Again, when silver acetylide is boiled with aqueous solution of potassium cyanide or nitric acid, pure acetylene is regenerated

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aqueous Solution Of Potassium Cyanide Or Nitric Acid

Propyne also exhibits acidic characteristics similar to that of acetylene.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acidic Characters And Similar Acetylene

Acetylene can be regenerated from the metal derivatives by taking advantage of the weak acidic property of acetylene.

The corresponding reactions are as follows:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acidic Property Of Acetylene

1. With the help of the above reactions (formation of cuprous and silver acetylides):

  1. Acetylene and terminal alkynes:
    • For example: CH3C = CH ) can be detected,
  2. Terminal and non-terminal:
    • For example CH3C≡ CH3 ) alkynes can be distinguished from each other and

3. Acetylene and any terminal alkyne can be separated and purified from a mixture containing alkane, alkene and non-terminal alkyne.

2. Purification o( impure 1-pentyne):

Aqueous solution of silver nitrate is added to a sample of impure 1-pentyne dissolved in 95% ethyl alcohol. As a result of the reaction, a white precipitate of silver 1 -pentoxide is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Purification Of Impure 1 Pentyne

The white precipitate is filtered, washed with ethanol, and refluxed with an aqueous solution of sodium cyanide when 1-pentyne is regenerated. Pure 1-pentyne is separated from the mixture by distillation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mixture By Distillation

6. Formation of Grignard reagent:

Acetylene reacts with ethyl magnesium bromide in ether to yield the corresponding Grignard reagent. This is an acid-base reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Grignard Reagent

Polymerisation reactions

Acetylene molecules may polymerise to form cyclic or linear polymers.

1. Formation of cyclic trimer:

When acetylene gas is passed through Fe or Cu-tube heated at 600°C, 3 molecules of acetylene combine to form a benzene molecule. Benzene is the cyclic polymer of acetylene. From this reaction, aromatic compounds can be prepared from aliphatic compounds

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Cyclic Trimer

Formation of cyclic trimers of propyne and 2-butyne:

When acetylene homologues are passed through red hot Fe or Cu tube, they polymerise to produce cyclic polymers.

For example:

1,3,5-trimethyl benzene and hexamethyl benzene can be prepared from propyne and 2-butyne respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Cyclic Trimers Of Propyne And 2 Butyne

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 NCERT Notes

2.  Formation of cyclic tetramer:

When acetylene gas is passed over nickel cyanide catalyst at high pressure, the cyclic tetramer, cyclooctatetraene is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Cyclic Tetramer

3. Formation of open-chain polymer:

When acetylene gas is passed through a mixed solution of cuprous chloride and ammonium chloride, the simple linear polymers, vinylacetylene and divinylacetylene, are produced.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation of Open Chain Polymer

In the additional reaction of vinylacetylene and concentrated hydrochloric acid in the presence of cuprous and ammonium chlorides, chloroprene (2-chlorobuta- 1,3-diene) is obtained. Polymerisation of chloroprene leads to the formation of the artificial rubber, neoprene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction Of Chloroprene And Neoprene

Identification And Uses Of Acetylene

1. Proof of unsaturation in acetylene

  • Acetylene discharges a reddish-brown color of bromine in carbon tetrachloride without the liberation of hydrogen CH3 bromide (HBr)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Liberation Of Hydrogen Bromide

  • Acetylene decolorises reddish-violet or purple-colored cold dilute alkaline solution of KMnO4
  • Acetylene reacts with ozone to form the additional compound acetylene ozonide

2. Identification of acetylene

  • A red precipitate of cuprous acetylide is obtained when acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution.
  • A white precipitate of silver acetylide is obtained when acetylene is passed through ammoniacal silver nitrate solution.
  • Acetylene can be identified by the above-mentioned tests along with the tests for unsaturation.

3. Uses of acetylene

  • Acetylene is used for producing oxy-acetylene flame (temperature nearly 3300°C), and used for welding and cutting steel and other metals.
  • It is used for producing bright illuminating flame in
    carbide lamp or Hawker’s lamp.
  • It is used in the manufacture of acetaldehyde, acetic acid, ethyl alcohol, acetone etc
  • It Is also used in the manufacture of industrial noninflammable solvents like acetylene tetrachloride (western, C2H2Cl4) and trichloroethylene (aerosol, Cl2C=CHCl ), used for dissolution of fats, oils, resins etc.
  • It is an important raw material for the large-scale production of vinyl plastics, synthetic rubber such as buna-N and synthetic fibre such as orlon.

Separation of methane, ethylene and acetylene from their mixture: 

1. The mixture of methane (CH4), ethylene (C2H4) and acetylene (C2H2) gases is at first passed through ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution. Acetylene is absorbed in ammoniacal cuprous chloride (Cu2Cl2) solution with the formation of red precipitate of cuprous acetylide. Methane and ethylene pass out without undergoing any reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Red Precipitate Of Cuprous Acetylide

2. The red precipitate is filtered, washed with alcohol and then boiled with concentrated HCl or KCN solution when acetylene gas is evolved. It is dried by P2O5 and collected.

CCu ≡CCu + 2HCl →HC = CH↑ + Cu2Cl2

3. The gas mixture (CH4, C2H4) which escapes is then passed through fuming sulphuric acid. CH4 comes out without any reaction. It is collected after removing acid vapours by passing through KOH.

4. Ethylene reacts with fuming sulphuric acid to form ethyl hydrogen sulphate. Ethyl hydrogen sulphate thus produced is heated at 170°C when ethylene gas is liberated. It is collected after removing acid vapours bypassing through KOH

H2C=CH2 + H2SO4  →CH3CH2OSO3H

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Gas Mixture Escapes Is then Passed through Fuming Sulphuric Acid Reactions

Comparison among methane, ethylene and acetylene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Comparision Among Methane Ethylene And Acetytlene

Alkadienes

Unsaturated hydrocarbons containing two carbon-carbon double bonds (C=C) are called alkadienes. An alkadiene molecule contains four H-atoms less than the corresponding alkane. Therefore, general molecular formula for an alkadiene isCnH2n2 (n = 3, 4–). These are isomeric with alkynes

1. Classification of alkadienes

Depending on the relative positions of the two double bonds,

Alkadienes are classified into three types:

1. Isolated dienes:

Dienes in which two double bonds are separated from each other by more than one single bond are called isolated dienes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isolated Dienes Reactions

2. Conjugated dienes:

Dienes in which the two double bonds are separated by one single bond are called conjugated dienes i.e., there are alternate single and double bonds in the compound.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Conjugated Dienes

3. Cumulated dienes:

Dienes in which two double bonds are adjacent to each other, i.e., two double bonds are attached to the same carbon atom are called cumulated dienes. These are also called allenes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cumulated Dienes

The cumulated dienes or allenes have the general structural formulaCBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cumulated Dienes Or Allenes General Stractural Formula molecules and are always optically active.

2. Relative stabilities of dienes

The heat of hydrogenation of a conjugated diene is less than that of an isolated diene having the same molecular formula. Therefore, a conjugated diene is relatively thermodynamically more stable than the corresponding isolated diene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of Dienes

Reasons for greater stability of conjugated diene:

There are two reasons for additional stability of conjugated dienes as compared to isolated dienes. These are as follows:

1. Carbon-carbon single bond between two double bonds in a conjugated diene is derived from the overlap of two sp² – orbitals of carbon, i.e., it is sp²-sp² single bond. This is a shorter and stronger bond than one formed by sp³-sp² overlap. As a conjugated diene has one stronger single bond than an isolated diene, the conjugated diene is more stable

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Greater Stability Of Conjugated Diene

2. Second factor that causes a conjugated diene to be more CH2—CH=CH-CH2stable than an isolated diene is resonance, which means diene has delocalised electrons, n -electrons in each of the double bonds in an isolated diene are localised between 2 carbon atoms.

But in a conjugated diene, the 2p-orbitals on the 4 carbons are in parallel alignment which is necessary for overlap; the 4 electrons are delocalised over 4 carbon atoms. Due to such electron delocalisation, a conjugated diene is relatively more stable than an isolated diene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Resonance Structures Of 1 And 3 Butadiene

The resonance hybrid shows that in 1,3-butadiene, the single bond flanked by two double bonds is not a pure single bond but has a partial double bond character

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Partial Double Bond

3. Electrophilic addition reaction of1,3-butadiene 

1. Reaction with bromine (1:1 molar ratio):

In this case, two types of addition compounds are formed. These are 3,4-dibromo but-l-ene (1,2-addition product) and l,4-dibromo but-2-ene (1, 4-addition product)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With Bromine 1 Ratio 1Molar Ratio

Mechanism of the reaction:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Bromine Mechanism Of The Reaction

Carbocation obtained in the first step is a hybrid of two resonance structures. The positive charge of the carbocation exists partially on two carbon atoms. In the second step, (Br®) (the nucleophile) attacks either of the positive carbon atoms to yield two different dibromo compounds

2.  Reaction with HBr (1:1 molar ratio):

In this reaction also, two addition compounds, 1-bromobut-2-cne and 3-bromo but-1-ene, are formed.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction With HBr Molar Ratio

Mechanism to the reaction:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons HBr Mechanism Of The Reaction

3. Diels-Alder reaction:

When 1,3-butadiene is heated with acetaldehyde, an addition reaction leading to the formation of a six-membered ring occurs due to the formation of two different C—C bonds.

This type of reaction is called the Diels-Alder reaction. It is an example of 1,4-addition. The conjugated diene is referred to as a diene, the compound containing the double is called a dienophile and the product is called an adduct

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dienophile

Preparation of Methane, Ethylene and Acetylene and their Reactions

Preparation of Methane Reactions :

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane Preparation And Reactions

Preparation of Ethylene Reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Reaction Of Ethylene

Preparation of Acetylene Reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Preparations And Reactions

Transformation

Synthesis of organic compounds is one of the main objectives of organic chemistry and for this, one compound is to be transformed into another. Soit is necessary to devise a suitable transformed into another. Soit is necessary to devise a suitable These conversions are carried out with the help of different reactions. During writing each reaction, the necessary conditions are mentioned.

In case, if any preparation involves multistep reactions, then the yield of the desired product is increased by minimising the number of steps. However, if the desired product is contaminated with other side products, the separation of which is difficult or the end product further participates in a reaction and gets partially converted into other substance(s) or the yielding any step is very low, then the route of the preparation with more number of steps is selected. The relation between different homologous series and their inter¬conversions are shown by the following flow charts.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Chemistry Solutions

Conversion of methane and ethylene into different compounds

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methane And Ethane Different Compounds

Conversion of acetylene into different compounds:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Into Different Compounds

Various transformations obtained from the chart:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Various Transformations Obtained From The Chart

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Various Transformations Obtained From The Chart.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Various Transformations Obtained From The Chart..

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Various Transformations Obtained From The Chart...

The distinction between two compounds chemical tests:

Acetylene and ethylene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Difference Between Acetylene And Ethylene

1-butyne and 1-butene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Difference Between 1 Butyne And 1 Butene

2-butene and 1-butene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Difference Between 2 Butene And 1 Butene

Butane and 1-butene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Difference Between Butane And 1 Butene

1-butyne and 2-butyne:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Difference Between 1 Butyne And 2 Butyne

Problems related to alkanes, alkenes and alkynes and their solutions

1. A gaseous hydrocarbon decolourises bromine i in CCI4. One molecule of acetone and one molecule of acetaldehyde are obtained as a result of its ozonolysis. Determine the structural formula of the compound and write its IUPAC name. Give all reactions involved
Answer:

  1. The given hydrocarbon decolourises the bromine solution. Hence,it is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
  2. The hydrocarbon, on ozonolysis, produces 1 molecule of acetone and1 molecule of acetaldehyde. So, the structure of the unsaturated hydrocarbon may be obtained by writing the formula of the two carbonyl compounds side by side facing formula of the two carbonyl compounds side by side facing formula of the two carbonyl compounds side by side facing formula of the two carbonyl compounds side by side facing hydrocarbon is 2-methyl but-2-ene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbut 2 ene

The reactions are as follows:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reactions Of 2 Methylbut 2 Ene

2. One molecule of an olefinic compound, on ozonolysis, produces one molecule of acetone, one molecule of glyoxal and one molecule of formaldehyde. Identify the compound and write its IUPAC name
Answer:

The structure of the olefinic hydrocarbon may be obtained by arranging the carbonyl compounds obtained on ozonolysis properly (each of the two oxygen atoms of acetone and formaldehyde placed in front of the 2 oxygen atoms of glyoxal) followed by eliminating the four oxygen atoms and joining the carbonyl carbons by double bonds. Thus, the IUPAC name ofthe starting olefinic compound is 4-methylpenta-1,3-diene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 Methylpenta 1 And 3 Diene

3. An organic compound having the molecular formula C5H10O3, on hydrolysis in the presence of Zn, gives acetone and acetaldehyde. Write the structure of the organic compound
Answer:

The molecular formula of the compound is C5H10O3 = CnH2nO3 (n = 5)> ie-the compound is an addition compound of an alkene and O3 The compound reductive hydrolysis, produces acetone and acetaldehyde Hence, the compound must be an alkene ozonide.

The structure of the alkene is obtained by writing the carbonyl compounds side by side facing their carbonyl groups for each other followed by removing the two oxygen atoms and joining the two carbonyl carbons by a double bond. So the compound is 2- methyl but-2-ene

Hence, the starting compound is 2 methylbut – 2 – ene ozoined and its structure is:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbut 2 Ene Ozonide Its Structure

4. A gaseous hydrocarbon (A) is converted into another (B) by consuming 2 mol H2 in the presence of Ni catalyst. B can be prepared by the reaction between methyl iodide and metallic sodium in a dry ether medium. Identify the two hydrocarbons (A andB) and mention the reactions involved.
Answer:

In the hydrogenation (H2/Ni) reaction, one mole of the hydrocarbon (A) accepts two moles of hydrogen. So, the n hydrogenation (H2/Ni) reaction, one mole of the hydrocarbon (A) accepts two moles of hydrogen. So, the contains two double bonds or one triple bond.

In either medium, the reaction between methyl iodide and metallic sodium yields the hydrocarbon (JB) . This is the Wurtz reaction and in this reaction, ethane (CH3CH3) is formed,

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Wurtz Reaction In This Reaction Ethane

Therefore, the hydrocarbon (B) is ethane. Since the hydrocarbon (A) gives ethane by absorbing 2 moles of H2, it must contain a triple bond (two double bonds cannot be formed between two carbon atoms) and obviously, it is acetylene (H—C = C—H)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbon Gives Ethane

5. An alkene (A) having formula C4H8, on ozonolysis, gives propanal & methanal. A reacts with HBr to produce a compound of molecular formula, C4H9Br. This compound, when heated with alcoholic KOH, produces another alkene (B) which is isomeric with A. Identify the alkenes (A) and (B).
Answer:

The products of ozonolysis of the alkene (A) are propane (CH3CH2CHO) and methanal (HCHO). Hence, the alkene(A) is 1-butene (CH3CH2CH=CH2)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propanal And Methanal Gives 1 Butene

1-butene, being an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with HBr according to Markownikoff’s rule to give 2-bromobutane. Its molecular formula is C4H9Br.

CH3CH2CH=CH2+ HBr → CH3CH2CHBrCH3 (2- Bromobutane)

When 2-bromobutane is heated with alcoholic KOH solution, it undergoes dehydrobromination and according to Reaction: Saytzeff’s rule, 2-butene (an isomer of 1-butene) is obtained as the major product. Therefore, the alkene (B) is 2-butene (CH3CH=CHCH3).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Bromobutane Is hated With alcoholic KOH Solution

6. A compound (A) having molecular formula C4H9Cl, on heating with alcoholic KOH solution, gives two isomeric alkenes (B) & (C). The mixture of (B) & (C), on ozonolysis, produces three compounds:

  1. HCHO
  2. CH3CHO
  3. CH3CH2CHO.

Ascertain the structures of(A), (B) and (C).
Answer:

The compound (A), when heated with alcoholic KOH solution, undergoes dehydrochlorination to give two isomeric alkenes (B) and (C). So, the molecular formula of these two alkenes is C4H8

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Compound A When Heated With Alcoholic KOH

A mixture of (B) and (C), on ozonolysis, produces three carbonyl compounds (HCHO, CH3CHO & CH3CH2CHO). Now, the total number of carbon atoms of the compound of compounds obtained by ozonolysis must be equal to the number of carbon atoms present in the compound undergoing ozonolysis. So, letus suppose that as a result of ozonolysis of the alkene B, 1 molecule of CH3CH2CHO and 1 molecule of HCHO (totalnumber of carbon atoms of the two compounds = 4) are obtained and the ozonolysis of( C) produces 2 molecules of CH3CHO (total number of carbon atoms of the two molecules = 4).

So, the structure of the alkene B is CH3CH2CH=CH2 (1-butene) & the structure of alkene C is CH3CH=CHCH3 (2-butene)

CH3CH2CH= O + O = CH2  ⇒ CH3CH2CH=  CH2

CH3CH= O +O = CHCH⇒ CH3CHCH = CHCH3

Since the compound (A), on dehydrochlorination produces 1 – butene and 2 – butene , the structure of (A) is:

CH3CH2CH(Cl)CH3( 2- chlorobutane)

Reaction:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Chlorobutane

7. A hydrocarbon containing two carbon atoms decolourises bromine water and undergoes hydration by H2SO4 in the presence of H2SO4 to produce a compound which produces chloroform when heated with solution of bleaching powder. Write the name of the hydrocarbon and mention the reactions in support of your arguments.
Answer:

The hydrocarbon decolourises bromine water. Hence, it is an unsaturated hydrocarbon. Since the hydrocarbon undergoes hydration by H2SO4 in the presence of H2SO4 it is an alkyne. The compound obtained on hydration of the hydrocarbon reacts with bleaching powder solution to produce chloroform.

This reaction is a haloform reaction and the compounds containing the CH3CO —group participate in the haloform reaction. Now, acetylene is the only hydrocarbon containing two carbon atoms which reacts with H2SO4/HgSO4 to form acetaldehyde (CH3CHO) having a CH3CO —group.

Acetal dehyde, on reacting with bleaching powder, produces chloroform

Therefore, the hydrocarbons acetylene (HC = CH).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbon Is Acetylene

8. A sweet-smelling organic liquid (A) consisting of C, H and O boils at 78°C. (A) on heating with a cone. H2SO4 liberates a gaseous substance (B). The empirical formula of (B) is CH2. (JB) decolourises bromine water and alkaline KMnO4 solution. Again, each mole of(B) absorbs one mole of H2 at high temperature in the presence of Ni catalyst. Identify A and B.
Answer:

Since the gaseous substance (B) decolourises bromine KMnO4 water and alkaline KMnO4 solution and consumes one mole of H2 permolein catalytic hydrogenation, it must be alkene.

Since the empirical formula of (B) is CH2, it may be the gaseous alkene ethylene, (CH2), or C2H4. Ethylene may be obtained when the sweet-smelling organic liquid ethyl alcohol (CH3CH2OH) hating a boiling point 78°C is dehydrated by heating with concentrated H2SO4. Therefore, the organic liquid (A) is ethyl alcohol

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Organic Liquid A Is Ethyl Alcohol

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Chemistry Solutions

9. Ahydrocarbon having the molecular formula C6H10, on catalytic hydrogenation, absorbs one mole of H2. The product obtained on ozonolysis of the compound is OHCCH2CH2CH2CH2CHO. Determine the structure of the compound
Answer:

As the compound absorbs one mole of hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst, the compound is an alkene. On ozonolysis, it gives a dicarbonyl compound. So, the alkene is cyclic.

The structure of the alkene is obtained by writing the 2 O-atoms of hexanedial (OHCCH2CH2CH2CH2CHO) face to face followed by removing the two oxygen atoms and joining the two carbonyl carbons by a double bond. Hence, the hydrocarbon (C6H10) is cyclohexene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclohexene

10. A hydrocarbon (A) (molecular formula C5H10), on catalytic hydrogenation, produces 2- methylbutane. The compound (A) combines with HBr according to Markownikoff’s rule to form the compound (B) which reacts with silver hydroxide to produce an alcohol (C) having the molecular formula C5H12O. On oxidation, the alcohol (C) yields a ketone (D). Identify A,B,C, and D and give the reactions involved
Answer:

The given changes are as follows:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrogenation Produced By 2 Methylbutane

The molecular formula, C5H10 agrees with the general formula of alkenes (CnH2n) and on catalytic hydrogenation, (A) produces the saturated hydrocarbon, 2- methylbutane. Therefore, the compound (A) is an alkene. Now, the alcohol (C), on oxidation, produces the ketone (D). So, the alcohol must be a secondary (2°) alcohol. Again, this alcoholis obtained the reaction of (B) with AgOH.

So, (B) is a secondary bromide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Secondary Bromide

Now, (B) is produced by the reaction of (A) with HBr according to Markownikoff’s rule. So, the structure of(A) is

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structure of 3 Methylbut 1 ene

Reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structure Of 3 Methylbutane Reactions

11. A hydrocarbon (X) discharges the colour of cold (reddish violet) HgS04 alkaline KMnO4 solution and reacts with warm dilute sulphuric acid containing HgSO4 to form another compound (Y). (Y) gives a positive iodoform test but does not react with Tollens’ reagent. (Y), when distilled with 80% H2SO4, gives sym-trimethylbenzene. Identify the compounds (X) and (Y) and write the reactions involved with proper reasons.
Answer:

The compound (X) discharges the colour of cold dilute 80% H2SO4 alkaline KMnO4 solution. So it may be an unsaturated hydrocarbon. Since (X) reacts with dilute H2SO4 to yield a carbonyl compound ( Y) which gives a positive iodoform test but does not react with Tollens’ reagent, the carbonyl compound must be a ketone containing a CH3CO— group.

And the unsaturated hydrocarbon (X) is a terminal alkyne (R- C = CH) which, on hydration, produces a methyl ketone (RCOCHg). Now, the alkyne, when distilled with 80% H2SO4, gives jym-trimethylbenzene. Hence, the terminal alkyne (X) is propyne. Naturally, the ketone (Y) is acetone, CH3COCH3

Reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Naturally Ketone Y And Acetone

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Hydrocarbons

The Greek word aroma means fragrance and so the term ‘aromatic compounds’ was originally applied to various fragrant organic compounds. Chemical analysis of most of the natural fragrant organic compounds has shown that they are made of one or more benzene rings containing six carbon atoms and the carbon content in them is higher than the corresponding aliphatic compounds. Moreover, these aromatic compounds can be converted into benzene and benzene derivatives by chemical reactions. Similarly, different aromatic compounds can be synthesised from benzene. Thus, benzene is called the parent hydrocarbon of aromatic compounds and all aromatic compounds are considered as benzene derivatives. Hence, it may be simply said that the aromatic compounds are benzene and benzene derivatives.

Aromatic compounds containing benzene ring are also called benzenoids. Later on, some polycyclic compounds like naphthalene, anthracene, etc., and some heterocyclic compounds like pyrrole, furan, pyridine etc., are also considered as aromatic compounds. Again, some 3, 4, 5 or 7-membered cyclic polyenes (cations, anions or neutral compounds) are also included in the aromatic group. These aromatic compounds are called non-benzenoids. Therefore, the presence of benzene ring in an aromatic compound is not essential. All aromatic compounds do not necessarily possess sweet smell. Many aromatic compounds are odourless while some have bad odour. There is also a large number of non-aromatic compounds having characteristic sweet smell. Hence, the concept that all sweet-smelling organic compounds are aromatic compounds and all aromatic compounds must possess sweet smell is baseless.

Arenes

Aromatic hydrocarbons containing one or more benzene rings are called arenes. If arenes contain more than one benzene ring, then the rings may remain fused or isolated.

Some examples of arenes containing only one benzene ring are as follows:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Arenes Containig Only One Benzene Ring

Aromatic hydrocarbons containing fused rings

Two benzene rings are said to be fused when they remain attached through a common bond. For example, in naphthalene molecule, the two benzene rings A and B are attached through the common bond C9 — C10. So, this is a fused bicyclic arene. Similarly, anthracene and phenanthrene are two examples of used tricyclic arenes. In these compounds, the benzene rings A and B are attached with each other through a common bond and the benzene rings B and C are attached with each other through a common bond

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbon Aromatic Hydrocarbons Containg Fused Rings

Aromatic hydrocarbons containing fused rings are also called polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons. Their general formula is CnHn2n-6m, where n = the number of carbon atoms and m = the number of rings. For the bicyclic arene naphthalene, n = 10 and m = 2. For tricyclic arenes such as anthracene and phenanthrene, n = 14 and m = 3

Arenes containing isolated rings:

These are also polynuclear hydrocarbons

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Arenes Containing Isolated Rings

Structure Of Benzene Molecule

1. The molecular formula of benzene is C6H6 , but the molecular formula of the corresponding open-chain saturated hydrocarbon (alkane) is C6H14. It means that, benzene has eight hydrogen atoms less than the corresponding saturated hydrocarbon. Therefore, benzene is expected to be a highly unsaturated compound which will easilyform addition compounds.

2. It has been observed in practice that benzene undergoes addition reactions only under drastic conditions

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzene Undergoes Addition Reactions

These reactions suggest that benzene is an unsaturated compound containing 3 double bonds. However, from the conditions of these reactions, it is clear that benzene does not contain a high degree of unsaturation

3. In spite the presence of three double bonds, benzene does not discharge the reddish-violet colour of cold alkaline KMnO4 solution, does not decolourise bromine in carbon tetrachloride solution and does not react with halogen acids.

Therefore, the type of unsaturation present in benzene is quite different from that of aliphatic unsaturated compounds.

4. Like saturated compounds, benzene undergoes substitution reactions

For example: Chlorination, nitration, and sulphonation) easily. In these reactions, one or more H atoms of benzene are substituted by different atoms or groups.

For example:

 

So, it can be said that in spite of the presence of three double bonds, benzene behaves mostly like a saturated compound.

1. Kekule structure of benzene

The first acceptable ring structure for benzene was proposed by Friedrich August Kekule (1865). He proposed that the six carbon atoms of benzene molecule are joined to each other to form a ring resembling a regular hexagon, with each carbon atom carrying one H-atom. In order to satisfy the fourth valency of each carbon atom, he proposed the presence of three double bonds at the alternate positions in the ring Presence of three double bonds and the equivalency of six supported by this structure of benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kekule Structure Of Benzene

Drawbacks of Kekule Structure:

There are two drawbacks of the Kekule structure of benzene and these are as follows:

1. In spite of the presence ofthree double bonds, benzene is a very stable molecule and behaves like a saturated compound.

2. Two disubstituted compounds (I & II) should result from benzene when H-atoms attached to two adjacent carbon atoms in a benzene molecule are substituted bytwo similar or different groups. The reason is that in one of the isomer, the bond between the substituted C-atoms is a single bond while in the other isomer, it is a double bond. However, in fact, only one 1,2-disubstituted compound is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 2 Disubstituted Compound

To account for the non-existence of two types of ortho-disubstituted benzene derivatives, Kekule slightly modified his proposed structure for benzene. He proposed a dynamic equilibrium between two structures (III & IV)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dynamic Equilibrium Between Two Structures

Positions of carbon-carbon double and single bonds in benzene are not static but oscillate back and forth between adjacent positions. That means each C— C pair has a single bond for half of the time and a double bond for the other half. In other words, each molecule spends half of its time in (III) and the other half in (IV)

This new proposition of Kekule was known as the Oscillation theory. According to this theory, the two ort/io-disubstituted benzenes (1 and II) are identical, i.e., benzene will form only one type of ortho -disubstituted compound.

2. Valence bond or resonance theory regarding the structural formula of benzene

The relative stability of tire double bonds and the unusual behaviour of benzene as a whole have been explained with the help of valence bond theory.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Resonance Hybrid

According to this theory— 

  •  Neither of the two Kekule structures (1 & 2) represents the actual structure of benzene. None of these structures of benzene can individually give the exact identity of the benzene molecule. They do not have any real existence.
  • The real structure of benzene is a resonance hybrid of these two structures. Since the two structures, I and II are equivalent and equally stable, they contribute equally to the resonance hybrid, Le., the contribution of each of these resonance or canonical structures is 50%.
  • Consequently, the resonance hybrid becomes highly stable. Due to resonance stability, the chemical reactivity of benzene due to unsaturation decreases and stability increases. The resonance energy of benzene is 36 kcal-mol-1 (calculated value)

Previously benzene was considered as a resonance hybrid of two Kekule structures (1 & 2) and three Dewar structures (3, 4 & 5). However, benzene having a Dewar structure has been prepared later on in the laboratory. So structures 3, 4 and 5 are excluded from the resonance hybrid of benzene. It is to be noted that structures involved in resonance has no real existence.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dewar Structures

Explanation of the abnormal behaviour of benzene, by resonance:

1. The three double bonds of benzene are not active in forming addition compounds like the olefmic double bonds because their participation in addition reaction causes loss of resonance stability of benzene. However, in substitution reaction there is no net effect on the hybrid structure of benzene. So, benzene prefers to participate in substitution reaction than in addition reactions.

2. Due to the hybrid structure, all the carbon-carbon bonds In benzene arc equivalent. So, there is no difference between two apparently different disubstituted ortho- isomers— 1,2 and 1,6. Two H-atoms of benzene, on being replaced by the same or different atoms or groups, can form three isomers (ortho, meta & para).

3. Since benzene exists as a resonance hybrid, there is no real existence of carbon-carbon double bonds (C=C) or carbon-carbon single bonds (C —C) in the molecule. All the carbon-carbon bonds are equivalent. It has been observed experimentally that in a benzene molecule all the carbon-carbon bonds are equal in length and its value (1.39A) is intermediate between carbon-carbon single bond length (1.54 Å) and carbon-carbon double bond length (1.34 Å).

4. Orbital structure of benzene

1. Each carbon atom in benzene molecule is sp2 – hybridised, i.e., to form  -bond, each carbon atom uses three sp2 -hybrid orbitals.

2. Out of these three hybrid orbitals, one orbital forms a C—H cr-bond by axial overlapping with ls-orbital of hydrogen atom and the other two overlap axially with two sp2 -hybrid orbitals of two adjacent carbon atoms to form two C —C tr -bonds. So, in the benzene molecule, there are six carbon-carbon (sp2 – sp2) and six carbon-hydrogen (sp² -s) cr -bonds.

3. Since all the carbon atoms in benzene forming the ring system are sp2 -hybridised, the benzene molecule has a planar regular hexagonal structure.

Calculation of resonance energy:

The resonance energy of benzene can be calculated from heat of hydrogenation data. When one mole of an unsaturated compound is hydrogenated, the amount of heat liberated is called heat of hydrogenation. The resonance energy of benzene can be calculated by the process as follows

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Calculation Of Resonance Energy

Heat of hydrogenation involving one double bond,

ΔH = -28.6 kcal-mol-1

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Calculation Of Resonance Energy.

The calculated heat of hydrogenation involving three double bonds is given by, All = -28.6 ×3 = -85.8 kcal-mol-1

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Calculation Of Resonance Energy..

Experimentally observed heat of hydrogenation of benzene is given by, ΔH = -49.8 kcal-mol-1

∴ Resonance  energy

Observed heat of hydrogenation – calculated heat of hydrogenation

= -49.8(85.8- 49.8)(-85.8)kcal-mol-1kcal-mol-1

= 36.0 kcal-mol-1

4. One carbon atom resides at each corner of the hexagon.

Each C —C — C and C — C — H bond angle is 120°.

5. Each carbon atom contains one unhybridised 2pz -orbital. Each 2pz -orbital contains one electron and the six 2pz orbitals are perpendicular to the plane of the hexagon, i.e., they are parallel to each other

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Perpendicular To The Plane Hexagon

6. Each pz -orbital can overlap laterally with either of the adjacent pz -orbitals. So, overlap can occur in two different ways as shown below. As the extent of overlap of each pz -orbital on both sides is equal, ;r -electrons remain no longer localised, but undergo delocalisation.

These six n -n-electrons form two continuous rings of n -electron clouds—one lying above and the other below the plane of the hexagonal ring. This ring-like electron cloud formed by six 2pz -orbitals is called aromatic sextet The benzene molecule acquires its stability due to this delocalisation of electrons coupled with the presence of an aromatic sextet

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Sextet

X-ray and different spectral analysis (UV) IR, NMR and Mass spectroscopy) have offered a complete idea about the structure of benzene and now it is known that —

  • Benzene is a planar cyclic compound consisting of six carbon atoms
  • Each of its carbon-carbon bonds are equal in length and its value is 1.39A
  • All the six H-atoms are equivalent and each C— H bond length is 1.09A and
  • All H— C — C and C— C—C bond angles are equal and the value is 120°

Representation of benzene molecule

The hexagonal structure of benzene is known as benzene ring. Benzene ring is generally represented by any one of the two Kekule structures. Benzene ring is also represented by drawing a circle inside a regular hexagon. While representing benzene molecule, C & H-atoms are not generally written

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzene Molecule

Aromatic Character Or Aromaticity

Aromatic character or aromaticity is the collective representation of the characteristic properties of aromatic compounds, which are responsible for the different behaviour of such compounds from their aliphatic or alicyclic analogues.

These are as follows:

1. All aromatic compounds are relatively more stable than the system of the corresponding aliphatic compounds of similar molecular formula. They are resistant to oxidation. Low heat of combustion and hydrogenation gives an idea about their unusual stability.

2. Although aromatic compounds contain several double bonds, yet they do not easily participate in addition reactions like aliphatic unsaturated compounds. However, aromatic compounds undergo substitution reactions easily. Therefore, the nature of unsaturation associated with aromatic compounds is different from that in aliphatic compounds.

3. Aromatic rings containing — OH group exhibit acidic property

For example:  Phenol, but aliphatic compounds containing — OH group possess alcoholic properties and alcohols are neutral in nature

4. Aromatic rings containing — NH22 group exhibit weak basic properties

For example: Aniline), but aliphatic compounds containing the — NH2 group are relatively stronger bases

5. In the molecules of aromatic compounds, planar or almost planar rings composed of carbon atoms (in some cases, formed by C, N, O etc., atoms) are present. Such rings are called aromatic rings. Generally, the cyclic compounds which have conjugated systems of double bonds and have very high resonance stability are called aromatic compounds. However, all conjugated monocyclic polyenes are not highly stable.

For example:

Although benzene is extremely stable, cyclobutadiene and cyclooctatetraene are not similarly stable. Therefore, it is found that the special stability of aromatic compounds is not only due to π -electron delocalisation but also due to the presence of a definite number of it -electrons. Huckel’s rule gives a clear idea about this matter

1. Huckel’s rule for aromaticity or (4n+2) rule

According to German scientist Huckel, monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems (cation, anion or neutral species) containing (4n + 2) delocalised it -electrons [n = 0, 1, 2, 3,…) exhibit aromatic properties. Therefore, monocyclic conjugated polyene systems containing 2(n = 0), 6(n = 1), 10 (n = 2), 14 (n = 3), ••• etc., delocalised 7T -electrons possess aromatic character and they are unusually stable

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Huckles Rule For Aromaticity Of Rule

From Huckel’s rule, it is evident that the following conditions must be fulfilled by a compound to be aromatic:

  • The molecule must have planar ringsystem.
  • Each atom involved in the formation of ring system must have an unhybridised p-orbital.
  • These p -orbitals must be parallel and undergo continuous overlap to cause the delocalisation of it -electrons.
  • Each p -orbital may contain 1 electron, 2 electrons or even no electron.
  • The delocalised it -electron system must contain 2, 6, 10, 14… etc., electrons.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic And Aliphatic

It must be remembered that due to such it -electron delocalisation, the electronic energy of an aromatic compound decreases and hence, stability increases. Aromatic compounds are more stable than their open-chain analogues.

The general formula of monocyclic conjugated polyenes is CnHn (where n = 4, 6, 8, 10, etc.). The general formulas of cationic & anionic polyenes are CnH+ & CnHn (where ” ~ 3’5, 7’ etc….)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Summary

Classification Of Aromatic Compounds

The compounds that exhibit aromatic properties are two Types.

These are:

  1. Benzenoid aromatic compounds and
  2. Non-benzenoid aromatic compounds.

1. Benzenoid aromatic compounds:

Aromatic compounds containing one ormore benzene rings are called benzenoid aromatic compounds or simply benzenoids.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzenoid Aromatic Compounds

2. Non-benzenoid aromatic compounds

Some compounds, where n = 3] in (Antiaromatic)Less stable c spite of having no benzene ring in their molecules, are able to display aromatic properties. These are called nonbenzenoid aromatic compounds or simply non-benzenoids

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Non Benzenoid Aromatic Compounds

1. Antiaromatic compounds

If a compound contains 4nπ -electrons (where n – 1, 2, 3, … etc.) in its planar ring system with a continuous overlap of p-orbitals, it becomes an antiaromatic compound.

Antiaromatic compounds Definition:

Monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems ions) containing delocalised π -electrons (n = 1, are called antiaromatic compounds.

Therefore, the compounds having 4(n = 1), 8(n = 2), 12(/i = 3)… etc., delocalised π -electrons in their planar ring m system behave as antiaromatic compounds

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Antiaromatic Compounds

It should be remembered that due to the delocalisation of π -electrons, electronic energy of antiaromatic compounds increases and consequently stability decreases. Antiaromatic compounds are less stable than their open-chain analogues.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Less Stable And More Stable

2. Non-aromatic compounds

Non-aromatic compounds Definition:

Cyclic compounds which do notpossess delocalised system of π -electrons, i.e., compounds which are neither aromatic nor antiaromatic, are called non-aromatic compound

The stabilities of non-aromatic compounds are similar to that of their open-chain analogues.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Non Aromatic Compounds

Isomerism Of Benzene Derivatives

When one or more H-atoms of benzene are substituted by any other atom or group, the product obtained is known as benzene derivative. All the six H-atoms of benzene are equivalent. So, if one H-atom of benzene is replaced by a monovalent atom or group, only 1 monosubstituted benzene derivative is obtained.

Monosubstituted benzene has no isomer, i.e., it exists in one form only.

For example: Chlorobenzene (C6H5Cl) or nitrobenzene (C6H5NO2) exists in one form only

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monosubstituted Benzene Has No Isomer

1. When two H-atoms in a benzene molecule are substituted by two atoms or groups (same or different), depending on the relative position of the two substituents, three positional isomers are possible.

For example: Three isomers each of dibromobenzene (C6H4Br2) and nitrotoluene (CH3C6H4NO2) are known

Isomeric dibromobenzenes:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomeric Dibromobenzenes

Isomeric Nitrotoluenes:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomeric Nitrotoluenes

2. In the case of trisubstituted benzene derivatives, the number of isomers depends on the nature of the substituents. O If the three substituents are identical then three isomers are possible.

For example: Trinitrobenzene [C6H3(NO2)3], tribromobenzene (C6H3Br3), etc., are known to exist in three isomeric forms. When two substitutents are identical and one is different, then six isomers are possible.

For example: Dibromophenol (Br2C6H3OH), dichlorobenzoic acid (Cl2C6H3COOH) etc., are found to exist in sixisomeric forms.

When all the three substituents are different, ten isomers are possible.

For example – Bromochlorotoluene (CH3CgH3ClBr) , bromochlorobenzoic acid (BrClC6H3COOH) etc., are found to exist in ten isomeric forms

Isomeric Tribromobenzenes:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomeric Tribromobenzenes

Nomenclature Of Benzene Derivatives

1. Monosubstituted benzene derivatives

1. In the IUPAC system, some monosubstituted benzene derivatives are named by their trivial names which may have no resemblance to the name ofthe substituent

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monosubstituted Benzene Derivatives Trivial Names

2. For many of these derivatives, the name of the substituent is simply added to the word ‘benzene’, as a prefix leaving no gap between the name of the substituent and the word, benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons No Gap Between The Name Of The Substituent And The Word

3. In some cases, the names of the substituents are written as suffixes after the word benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monosubstituted Benzene Derivatives Trivial Names

4. In some cases, the phenyl group, originated from the benzene molecule, is considered as the substituent to write the IUPAC names.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monosubstituted Benzene Derivatives Phenyl Group Originated From Benzene Molecule

2. Disubstituted benzene derivatives

In disubstituted benzene, when two substituents are attached to adjacent carbon atoms, the compound is called ortho-isomer, if the substituents are on the alternate carbon atoms, then the compound is called meta-isomer and if the substituents are attached to diagonally opposite carbon atoms, the compound is called para-isomer, ortho, meta and para- are abbreviated as o-, m- and p-respectively.

Nomenclature according to nature & position of substituent:

When the two substituents are identical, then their relative positions are indicated by the prefix ortho, meta or para followed by the word to denote two substituents. Then the name of the substituent along with the word ‘benzene’ are written. In that case, 1,2- disubstituted benzene is called ortho, 1,3-disubstituted benzene is called meta-and 1,4-disubstituted benzene is called para.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nature And Position Of Substituent

Alternatively, relative positions ofthe substituents are also indicated by using numbers. In that case, any one of the carbon atoms having a substituent attached to it is marked as number ‘1’ carbon atom. The other carbon atoms of the benzene ring are numbered consecutively (clockwise or anticlockwise) in such a way as to give lowest number to the carbon atom carrying the second substituent

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lowest Number To The Carbon Atom Carrying

3. If the substituents are different, the ring containing a substituent is considered as parent, and using its name as the root name, the position of the second substituent is indicated by ortho-, meta- or para- or alternatively by 2, 3 or 4.

The name of the second substituent, in this case, comes before the root name. In the given compound, the benzene ring containing —OH group (out of —OH and — NO2 ) i.e., phenol, is taken as the parent compound. Now, since the substituent — NO2 exists in para-position with respect to —OH, so the compound is named as p-nitrophenol. Alternatively, the carbon atom to which the —OH group is attached is taken as number-1 carbon atom, and then the other carbon atoms of the ring are marked with numbers in succession in a clockwise or anticlockwise manner in such a way that the carbon atom containing the second substituent — NO2 is assigned the lowest possible number. Now, the substituent — NO2 is attached to the number-4 carbon atom. Hence, the name ofthe compound is 4-nitrophenol.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons P Nitrophenol And 4 Nitrophenol

Order of priority of groups for determining root name:

—COOH > —SO3H > —CONH2 > — CN > —CHO > NC=O> -CH2OH > -CH3 > -OH > -NH2 > — NO2> Halogens (F, Cl, Br, I)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Order Of Priority Of Groups For Determining Root Name

If the substituents are two different halogen atoms, then theyare mentioned alphabeticallyfollowing the English spelling of their names. The relative positions of the substituents are indicated bynumbers orwith the prefix ortho-, meta- or para-. Substituent whose name comes first (alphabetically) is considered to be attached to carbon number-1, and the other carbon atoms are so numbered as to give the lowest possible number to the carbon carrying the second substituent

Examples:

In naming the first compound given below, at first bromo and then chloro have been written and this is because alphabetically the initial letter ‘b’ ofbromo comes before the initial letter ‘d of chloro. The carbon to which bromine is attached has been marked with number-1 and the other carbon atoms have been numbered serially in the clockwise direction because, as a result ofsuch method of marking the carbon atom containing Cl gets the lowest possible number.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons First Bromo And Then Chloro

3. Tri- or polysubstituted benzene derivatives

1. When more than two (same or different) substituents are present in the benzene ring, their relative positions are indicated by numbers. Carbon atom containing principal substituent (according to relative preference order is othercarbon atoms are denoted by serial numbers 2, 3. 4, 5. 6. The name of the benzene ring containing principal substituent is takenas the root name

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 6 Bromo 3 Iodo 2 Nitrotoluene Structure.

2. Except die principal substituent other substituents are expressed by position numbers and this is done insuch a way that the first difference between the possible position numbers assumes the lowest value. Their positions in die benzene ring are indicated by writing these numbers before the names ofthe substituents.

3. The substituents are mentioned according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters in the English spelling of their names and finally the word benzene or the root name of benzene derivative is added to the substituent concerned.

For example: In the compound shown above, principal substituent is —CH3. So, correct name of the compound is 6-bromo-3-iodo-2-nitrotoluene.

4. 2-bromo-5-iodo-6-nitrotoluene is not correct nomenclature because in the first nomenclature, the numbers assigned to the carbon atoms containing substituents are 1, 2, 3 and 6 while in the second nomenclature, numbers assigned to the carbon atoms earning substituents are 1,2, 5 and 6. So, in the first nomenclature, the third number is ‘3’ while in the second nomenclature, it is ‘5’. Since ’3′ is less than‘5’ the first nomenclature is correct.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons tri Or Polysubstituted Benzene Derivatives

Common and IUPAC names of some typical compounds:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Common And IUPAC Names Of Some Typical Compounds

Homologous Series Of Aromatic Compounds

Like aliphatic compounds, depending on the nature of the functional group present, the aromatic compounds are also classified into different homologous series.

1. Aromatic hydrocarbons

Hydrocarbons derived by replacement of one or more H-atoms of the benzene ring by hydrocarbon substituents such as alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aryl groups are called aromatic hydrocarbons or arenes. They can be divided into two categories

1. Arenes containing one benzene ring

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Arenes Containing One Benzene Ring

2. Arenes containing more than one benzene ring are called polynuclear hydrocarbons

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Poly Nuclear Hydrocarbons

2. Aromatic halogen compounds

Compounds obtained by replacing one or more H-atoms of benzene ring by halogen atoms are called aromatic halogen compounds or aryl halides

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Halogen Compounds

3. Aromatic nitro compounds

Compounds obtained by replacing one or more H-atoms of benzene ring by -NO2 group are called aromatic nitro compounds.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Nitro Compounds

4. Aromatic amino compounds

Compounds obtained by replacing one or more H-atoms of benzene ring by — NH2 group or substituted amino group ( — NHR, — NR2) are called aromatic amino compounds

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Amino Compounds

5. Aromatic hydroxy compounds

Aromatic hydroxy compounds are of two types—

1. The compounds in which the hydroxyl (—OH) group is attached directly to the benzene ring are called phenols

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Hydroxy Compounds

2. When the —OH group, instead of being directly linked to the benzene ring, is attached to the side chain, then the compounds are called aromatic alcohols

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzyl Alcohol

It is better not to consider aromatic alcohols as aromatic hydroxy compounds because their properties are similar to those of aliphatic alcohols. So, they are usually considered as aryl derivatives ofaliphatic alcohols

6. Aromatic carbonyl compounds

1. Aromatic aldehydes: The compounds in which a —CHO group is directly linked to the benzene ring are known as aromatic aldehydes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Aldehyde Compounds

2. Aromatic ketones: When an aryl group and an alkyl group aryl groups are joined to a carbonyl group (>C=O), the compounds so obtained are called aromatic ketones

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Ketones

7. Aromatic carboxylic acids:

Compounds containing  (one carboxyl (—COOH) group directly attached to the aromatic ring are called aromatic carboxylic acids.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Carboxylic Acids

1. Aryl groups: The groups obtained by expulsion of one H -atom from arenes are called aryl (Ar — ) groups,

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aryl Group

2. Aralkyl groups: The groups obtained by expulsion of one or more H-atoms from the side chain of arenes are called aralkyl groups,

For example: The groups that may derived from toluene are:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aralkyl Group

Nucleus And Side Chain Of Aromatic Compounds

An aromatic compound consists of two parts

  1. Nucleus and
  2. Side chain.

1. Nucleus: The benzene ring present in an aromatic compound is called the nucleus.

2. Side chain: If one or more hydrogen atoms of benzene are substituted by alkyl groups, different types of alkyl benzenes are obtained. These alkyl groups are known as side chains.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic Compound Is Called Nucleus

For example:

The benzene ring in the toluene molecule is its nucleus and the —CH3 part is the side chain. The carbon chains directly attached to the benzene ring are called side chains. Both the nucleus and side chain of aromatic compounds take part in substitution reactions.

Oxidation of the side chain

When an aromatic compound is subjected to oxidation, only the side chain is oxidised but the benzene ring or the nucleus, being sufficiently stable, remains intact.

1. Oxidising agents:

Commonly used oxidising agents dilute HNO3, alkaline KMnO4 solution, K2Cr2O7 acidified with sulphuric acid etc.

For example:  Toluene, on oxidation by alkaline KMnO4 and subsequent acidification, yields shining white crystals of benzoic acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Crystals Of Benzoic Acid

2. Special feature:

Any side chain (saturated, unsaturated or substituted) containing benzylic hydrogen (i.e., the hydrogen atom attached to the carbon atom directly linked to the benzene ring), on oxidation, becomes converted into a carboxyl ( —COOH) group.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Special Feature Of Alkylbenzene

The side chain of test-butylbenzene cannot be oxidised because it does not contain any benzylic hydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzylic Hydrogen

Benzene rings containing two side chains give dicarboxylic acid on oxidation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dicarboxylic Acid On Oxidation

Using mild oxidising agent such as chromyl chloride (CrO2Cl2), toluene gives benzaldehyde. This reaction is called the Etard reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Etard Reaction

Oxidation of the benzene ring or nucleus:

The benzene ring or nucleus of any alkylbenzene can be oxidised to a carboxyl group by ozonolysis (oxidative workup)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Oxidation Ofthe Benzene Ring Or Nucleus

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Summary

Orientation Of Substituents In The Benzene Ring

1. Ortho/para-directing groups

Ortho/para-directing groups Definition:

Substituent groups present in the benzene ring which direct the incoming group to the ortho- and para-positions of the ring are called ortho-/para- directing group

Groups:

—CH3, —C2H5, — C6H5, —Cl, —Br, —I, —OH,

-OCH3, -NH2, —NHR, —NR2, —NHCOCH3

Examples:

In phenol molecule, an —OH group is already present in the benzene ring. So, phenol on nitration produces mainly a mixture of o- and p -p-nitrophenols.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ortho Para Directing Groups

Similarly, chlorination of toluene in which a — CH3 group is already present in the benzene ring results in the formation of mainly mixture of o – and p -chlorotoluenes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ortho Para Directing Nucleus

One characteristic feature of ortho-para- directing groups except alkyl and aryl groups ( —CH3, —C2H5 , —C6H6 ) is that the atom, through which these groups are attached to the benzene ring, contains one or more lone pair of electrons. In fact, due to presence of these unshared pairs of electrons, these groups become ortho-/ para- orienting.

Increase in the activity of the benzene ring :

The ortho/ para directing groups (except halogen atoms), by increasing the electrondensity of the benzene ring, activate the ring more concerning unsubstituted benzene in electrophilic substitution reactions. Thus these groups are called activating groups. In fact, due to an increase in the electron density of the ring by the activating group, the electrophile (E) is more easily attracted by the ring to form a covalent bond (o’ -complex) than the unsubstituted benzene ring. As a result, the electrophilic substitution reaction of the aromatic compound containing activating group occurs at a faster rate than benzene’

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Increase In The Activity Of The Benzene Ring

2. Meta-directing groups

Definition: Substituent groups present in the benzene ring

Groups:

—NO2, — CN, — CF3, — CHO, — COR,

— COOH, —COOR, —SO3 H etc.

Example: In the nitrobenzene molecule, a nitro (— NO2) group is already present in the benzene ring. So, nitration of nitrobenzene yields mainly m-dinitrobenzene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mainly Enters The Meta Positions

One characteristic feature of these groups is that the atom which is directly attached to the ring is usually linked to another more electronegative atom by a double or triple bond. In fact, due to the displacement of electrons of the multiple bonds towards the more electronegative atom, these groups become meta-orienting.

Decrease in activity of the benzene ring:

The meta-directing groups, under their electron withdrawing effect, decrease the electron density in the benzene ring and make the ring less reactive towards further electrophilic substitution than unsubstituted benzene.

Thus, these groups are called deactivating groups. As the deactivating group decreases the electron density of the ring, the electrophile (E+) is less easily attracted by the ring than the unsubstituted benzene ring and consequently, the formation of σ -complex, rather the electrophilic substitution reaction occurs at a much slower rate compared to benzene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Decrease In Activity Of The Benzene Ring

Ortho-/ Para And Meta Directing Groups:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ortho Para And Meta Directing Groups

3. Theory of orientation

The position occupied by the incoming group In monosubstituted benzene is determined by the electronic character, i.e., inductive effect, hyperconjugation effect and resonance effect of the substituent already present In the ring.

Orientation in case of phenol (C6H5 :O:H)

Due to the participation of an unshared pair of electrons of the —:O:H group In resonance (+R effect), the electron density at ortho-and para-positions of the ring increases. For this reason, the —OH group acts as an ortho-/para- directing group in the second electrophilic substitution

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Orientation In Case Of Phenol

Since oxygen is more electronegative than carbon, —OH group in phenol withdraws electrons from the ring by -1 effect. Again, the group donates electrons to the ring by + R effect.

As + R is a more effective than-I effect, —OH group by net electron release activates ring towards further electrophilic substitution, i.e., it is an activating group.

Orientation in the case of toluene (C6H5CH3):

Carbon atom in —CH3 group of toluene contains no lone pair of electrons and therefore, — CH3 group cannot release electrons by + R effect. However, it increases electron density at ortho and para-positions of the ring by hyperconjugation effect. For this reason, the — CH3 group acts as an ortho-/para directing group in the second electrophilic substitution.

 

+1 effect of —CH3 group has also some contribution in playing the role ofortho-/para- directing group. This can be explained in terms of the relative stabilities of different cr complexes. — CH3 group by its +1 and hyperconjugation electron release activates the ring towards further electrophilic substitution, i.e., it is an activating group

Orientation in case of halobenzene (C6H5 X):

Halogens behave abnormally in electrophilic substitution reactions ofhalobenzenes. In spite of being deactivating groups, they are undoubtedly ortho-/para- directing groups. Halogen atoms withdraw electrons from the ring by -I effect and donate electrons by +R effect 1. However, in case of halobenzene, -I > + R.

Thus the net electron displacement occurs from the ring towards the halogen atom. So, the benzene ring, as a whole, becomes deactivated towards further electrophilic substitution. In fact, halogen atoms withdraw electrons from all positions of the ring by -I effect and send electrons to ortho-Zparapositions by +R effect. Thus, electron densities of ortho-/ para- positions are less reduced, i.e., these positions are comparatively electron-rich and naturally these positions are attacked more easily by electrophiles. So, halogens, in spite of being deactivating groups, are eventually o-/pdirecting. In this case, +R effect of halogen governs the orientation.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Orientation In Case Of Halobenzene

Orientation in the case of nitrobenzene (C6H5NO2):

As tlie N=O moiety of — NO2 group in nitrobenzene remains conjugated with the nucleus, the —NO2 group decreases the electron density in the benzene ring by -R effect. Again, it also reduces the electron density of the ring by-1 effect.

In fact, — NO2 group decreases the electron density of all positions of the ring by -I effect but reduces the electron density of only the ortho- and para- positions by -R effect. As a result, the electron density at the meta-position becomes relatively higher and naturally, this position becomes more susceptible towards electrophilic attack. Thus, in the second substitution, the —NO2 group acts as a meto-directing group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Orientation In The Case Of Nitrobenzene

In this case, displacement of electrons caused by -R and -I effects occurs from the ring towards the group. Hence, the —NO2 group is a deactivating group.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nitrobenzene And Meta Substituted Product

Almost in each of the substitution reactions of monosubstituted benzene, a mixture of ortho-, meta- and para- isomer is obtained. For ortho-/para- orienting groups, the ortho- and para-isomers are the chief products, the metaisomer being produced in negligible amounts. However, in I the case °i meta- directing groups, the meta-isomer is the major product and the yields of ortho-and para-isomers are negligible. Again, for ortho/para-directing groups, the ortho/ para- isomers are frequently obtained in different amounts

Substitution Reactions Of Aromatic Compounds

Like aliphatic compounds, aromatic compounds undergo three types of substitution reactions:

  1. Electrophilic substitution reactions: In this type of reaction, the benzene ring is attacked by electrophilic reagents or electrophiles in the first step.
  2. Nucleophilic substitution reactions: In this type of reaction, the benzene ring is attacked by nucleophilic reagents or nucleophiles in the first step.
  3. Free radical substitution reactions: This type of reaction involve the attack of free radicals on the benzene ring.

Cause of participation of aromatic compounds in substitution reactions:

  • Aromatic compounds gain extraordinary stabilisation due to the resonance and delocalisation of n –electrons. In the formation of an additional product, the aromaticity of the parent aromatic compound is no longer retained due to loss of conjugation and consequently, the extra stability of the compound is lost.
  • For this reason, the tendency of aromatic compounds to undergo addition reactions is much lower. On the other hand, in the substitution product, the’ aromatic stability or aromaticity of the starting organic compound remains intact. For this reason, benzenoid aromatic compounds prefer to undergo substitution rather than addition reaction.
  • Aromatic compounds prefer electrophilic substitution rather than nucleophilic substitution: The substitution reactions of aromatic compounds are mainly ionic.
  • Due to the presence of π -electron cloud above and below the plane of the system, the aromatic rings serve as a source of electron-rich centre and so welcome any attacking electrophile. On the other hand, the benzene ring being electron-rich repels any approaching nucleophile. For this reason, the tendency of aromatic compounds to undergo electrophilic substitution is much higher than nucleophilic substitution.

Mechanism type of reactions of electrophilic take place substitution in two steps reaction:

First step:

The electrophilic reagent or the electrophile (E+) being attracted by the n -electron cloud of the benzene ring forms a sigma (σ) bond with any one of the ring carbon atoms. As a result, a carbocation is formed and in forming this carbocation, the benzene ring loses its aromatic character. The carbocation, however, is stabilised by resonance. It is a resonance hybrid of three resonance structures 1, 2 and 3.

It is generally represented by a single non-Lewis structure 4. As it Is produced by the formation of a sigma bond, it is called σ -complex. It is also known as cyclohexadienyl cation, benzeniumi on or Wheland intermediate. As this step involves loss of aromatic character of the benzene ring, it is slow and hence it is the rate-determining step of the reaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mechanism Of Electrophilic Substitution First Reaction

Second step:

Although the carbocation produced attains some degree of stability through resonance, yet it is less stable than benzene. For this reason, the σ -complex, by rapid expulsion of a proton from the carbon bonded to the electrophile, reverts to the more stable substituted product. Any base (B”) present in the reaction medium helps in the formation of substituted benzene by accepting a proton. In this step, benzene regains its aromatic character or aromaticity

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mechanism Of Electrophilic Substitution Second Step Reaction

This type of reaction pathway is called bimolecular electrophilic substitution (aromatic) or SE2(Ar) pathway

Electrophiles involved in various electrophilic substitution reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophiles Involved In Various Electrophilic Substitution Reactions

Benzene (C6H6)

Michael Faraday discovered benzene in 1825. In 1845,

Hof&nann was able to recover benzene from coal tar. 80-110°

1. Fractional distillation of coal tar: Isolation of benzene

When coal is subjected to destructive distillation, coal gas, coal tar (black liquid having high viscosity), ammoniacal liquor and coke are obtained. It is a mixture of about 200 compounds, the majority of which are aromatic compounds. Coal tar consists of compounds which are acidic, alkaline and neutral. Isolation of benzene from coal tar: when coal tar is subjected to fractional distillation, the fraction collected upto 170°Cis called light oil.

Its colour is yellow. Light oil contains mainly neutral hydrocarbons like benzene, toluene, xylene etc. Besides these, it contains small amounts of acidic phenol, basic aniline, pyrrole, pyridine, neutral sulphur-containing compound, thiophene and water.

Preparation of 90% benzol from light oil:

  •  At first the light oil is fractionally distilled and the fractions which are distilled out at temperatures above 70°C are collected.
  • The distillate is shaken with cold cone. H2SO4 when the basicsubstances like aniline and pyridine get converted into their sulphate salts and dissolve in acid. A portion of thiophene also dissolves in the acid after being converted into thiophene sulphonic acid. The mixture forms two separate layers. The acid layer is separated from the organic layer.
  • The organic layer is then shaken with 10% NaOH solution when acidic phenol dissolves in an alkali solution forming phenatesalt. Excess H2SO4 being neutralised also dissolves in an alkali solution. Two separate layers are formed. The aqueous layer containing caustic soda is then separated from the organic layer.
  • The upper organic layer is repeatedly washed with water to remove .excess alkali. The washed fight oil thus obtained is subjected to fractional distillation and the fractions obtained at different range of temperatures are collected

Fractions obtained at different temperatures by fractional distillation of light oil:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Fractions Obtained At Different Temperatures By Fractional Distillation

Preparation of pure benzene from 90% benzol:

  • When 90% benzol is subjected to fractional distillation, the fraction that is collected at 80-82°C is impure benzene. This benzene is contaminated with a small amount of toluene and thiophene.
  • When it is cooled in a freezing mixture, benzene is converted into a solid mass at 5.5°C. It is separated from liquid toluene by filtration. When this solid benzene is kept at room temperature, liquid benzene is obtained. Benzene, thus obtained, is not absolutely pure. It contains traces of thiophene (0.05%).
  • Test for the presence of thiophene in benzene:o addition of a yellow solution of isatin (dissolved in H2S04 ) to a sample of benzene causes the development of a blue colour, then it indicates that the sample is contaminated with thiophene. This test is very sensitive even to very small amounts of thiophene.
  • Alternatively, on shaking a sample of benzene with a cone. H2SO4 two layers are formed. If the lower layer assumes a yellow colour, then it indicates that the sample is

Removal of thiophene from benzene:

  • The boiling point of benzene is 80.4°C. So, thiophene (b.p. 84°C) cannot be removed completely from benzene by fractional distillation. i] When benzene containing thiophene is shaken with cold and cone. H2SO4 thiophene sulphonic acid (a yellow liquid) is formed. It dissolves in sulphuric acid. contaminated with thiophene
  • Benzene does not react with cold and cone. H2SO4  This process of washing with cone. H2SO4 is repeated several times till the layer of H2SO4 becomes no longer yellow. It suggests the complete removal of thiophene from the sample of benzene.
  • Benzene thus obtained is washed with water thoroughly to make it free from acid. It is then dried with fused CaCl2 & redistilled when pure benzene is obtained.

1. Preparation of benzene

Industrial preparation:

The chief source of benzene is coal tar. Besides this, benzene is also obtained from mineral petroleum. Manufacture of benzene from coal tar has been discussed earlier

Laboratory preparation: 

1. From acetylene:

When acetylene gas is passed through red hot copper tube (600°C) , three molecules of it combine to form benzene (polymerisation reaction)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons From Acetylene

2. By decarboxylation of sodium benzoate:

Anhydrous sodium benzoate, on being heated in the presence of soda lime, yields benzene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Decarboxylation Of Sodium Benzoate

3. Benzene From phenol:

Phenol, when distilled in the presence of zinc dust or the vapours of phenol, when passed over zinc dust, produces benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons From Phenol

4. From diazonium salts:

When a solution of benzene diazonium salt,  C6H5N2Cl  is heated with hypophosphorous acid or dry alcohol, benzene is produced.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Diazonium Salts

5.  From benzenesulphonic acid :

When benzenesulphonic acid is heated to 150-200°C under pressure in the presence of dilute HCl or H2SO4 , benzene is obtained (This reaction is used for the removal of
—SO3H group from benzene ring is called desulphonation)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Removal Of Benzenesulphonic Acid

2. Physical properties of benzene

  • Benzene is a colourless liquid with a characteristic smell. Its boiling point is 80.4°C. When cooled by freezing mixture, it forms a crystalline solid.’Hie melting point of crystalline benzene is 5.5°C
  • Benzene is lighter than water (specific gravity : 0.B7). It is insoluble in water but dissolves In alcohol, ether and acetone.
  • Benzene is a good solvent for oils, fats, rubber, resin, iodine, sulphur, phosphorus etc.
  • Benzene is a highly inflammable substance.lt burns with a sooty luminous flame. Due to the high percentage of carbon, elementary carbon is produced during the burning of benzene. Due to this black smoke is formed. The presence of hot
    carbon particles in a flame makes the flame luminous.
  • Benzene is a highly toxic substance. At present, it has been identified as a carcinogenic compound.

All aromatic compounds bum with sooty flame but aliphatic compounds do not bum with such sooty flame. r So, aliphatic and aromatic compounds can be distinguished with the help of an ignition test.

Two special precautions: 

Benzene is highly

It is highly injurious to inhale benzene vapours. So, it should never be allowed to vaporise in open air and for this purpose, fume chamber must be used.

3. Chemical properties and reactions of benzene

  • Despite the presence of three double bonds, the chemical properties of benzene are quite different from those of olefins.
  • Although in some cases benzene takes part in addition reactions
  • Its chief and characteristic reactions are substitution reactions because in substitution products, aromaticity of the ring system is preserved.

Substitution Reactions Of Benzene

1. Halogenation of benzene

1. Chlorination:

The reaction in which an H-atom of benzene ring is displaced by a Cl-atom is known as chlorination reaction. When benzene is allowed to react with chlorine at ordinary temperature in the presence of Lewis acid catalysts such as FeCl3 , AlCl3 , I2 etc., (act as halogen carrier), chlorobenzene is obtained.

Iron (catalyst) is most commonly used, being converted to the Lewis acid FeCl3 by chlorine. In the absence of halogen carrier, such a substitution reaction does not take place

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Halogenation Of Benzene

Reaction mechanism:

It is an electrophilic substitution reaction. The electrophile involved in this reaction is a positive chlorine ion (Cl+) or the chlorine-iron (3) chloride complex which leads to the formation of that ion. This Cl+ ion displaces H+ from the ring.

Formation of electrophile:

Fe reacts with Cl2 to form Lewis acid, FeCl3. The Lewis acid then forms a complex with excess CI2. The complex finally dissociates to give Cl+ and FeCl+ ions:

2Fe + 3Cl2  → 2FeCl3 (Lewis acid)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile

Substitution:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Substitution Reactions

The number of  H-atoms of the ring that will be displaced by chlorine depends on the quantity of chlorine used. For   For example, 1 mole of Cl2 (in addition to that consumed by Fe to form FeCl3) leads to the formation of monochloro benzene (C6H5Cl) . When the reaction is continued for a long period using 2 moles of Cl2 , a mixture of maple ortho- and para- dichlorobenzenes (C6H4Cl2) is obtained. In this case, chlorobenzene is formed first. Chlorine atom of chlorobenzene is ortho-/para-directing. So, the second chlorine atom enters the ortho- or para-position with respect to the first Cl-atom

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ortho Para Positions To The First Cl Atom

2. Bromination:

Like Cl2,Br2 also reacts with benzene in the presence of iron filings, AlBr3 or iodine (halogen carrier) to form bromobenzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Bromination

The reaction mechanism of the bromination reaction is similar to the chlorination reaction

3. Iodination:

Iodination of benzene cannot be accomplished like chlorination or bromination because iodine is the least active of the halogens. Iodination may, however, be carried out smoothly in the presence of an oxidising agent like nitric acid, mercuric oxide etc. When a mixture of benzene, iodine and cone. HNO3 is refluxed, and one H-atom of benzene ring is substituted by one I-atom to give iodobenzene in good yield

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Iodination

Removal of a halogen atom from the benzene ring:

A halogen atom present in the benzene ring may be removed through the i formation of Grignard reagent i.e., halobenzene can be converted into benzene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Removal Of Halogen Atom From Benzene Ring

2. Nitration of benzene

Nitration of benzene Definition:

The reaction in which a hydrogen atom of benzene is displaced by nitro (-NO) group is called a nitration reaction. 05 tot. (C6H4Cl2)

Reagent:

Generally a mixture of cones. HNO3 and H2SO4 is used as nitrating agent. This mixture of two acids is called mixed acid.

1. Preparation of nitrobenzene:

When benzene is heated at 50 – 60°C in the presence of a mixture of one. HNO3 and cone. H2SO4 one H-atom ofbenzene ring is replaced by a nitro (— +NO2) group to produce nitrobenzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Nitrobenzene

Reaction mechanism:

It is an electrophilic substitution reaction. The electrophile involved in this reaction is nitronium ion ( NO2 ) & it is the actual nitrating agent in this reaction.

Formation of the electrophile:

HNO3 accepts a proton from H2SO4 to form its conjugate acid (O2N—OH2). It then dissociates to form a nitronium ion

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of The Electrophile

If only hot and cone. HNO3 is used, and the reaction takes place at a relatively slower rate. Again aromatic compounds which are susceptible to oxidation, the explosion may take place.

Substitution:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Substitution Reactions Steps

2. Preparation of dinitrobenzene :

Whenandbenzenecone. H2SO4 is heated at boiling water bath), and m-dinitrobenzene is produced. At first, nitrobenzene is formed. Since the ( —NO4) group is meta-directing, the second nitro group mainly enters the meta-position

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mainly Enters The Meta Positions

Nitro group, being an electron-attracting group, decreases the electron density of ring. So, incoming ion cannot be easily attracted by the ring and consequently, the nitration reaction becomes somewhat difficult. For this reason, in the case of second nitration, higher temperature and fuming nitric acid are used

3. Preparation of trinitrobenzene:

When benzene is refluxed with fuming HNO3 and fuming H2SO4 for 5-6 days, 1,3,5-trinitrobenzene (TNB) is produced. It is an explosive. The third nitro group takes the meta-position with respect to the two nitro groups already present in ring

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepartion Of Trinitrobenzene

  • The two nitro groups present in m-dinitrobenzene cause a decrease in the electron density of the ring to such an extent that the introduction of the third nitro group becomes extremely difficult.
  • For this reason, the third nitration requires much higher temperature and a mixture of fuming nitric acid and fuming sulphuric acid becomes necessary.
  • Nitration of benzene can also be carried out by using stable nitronium salts like nitronium tetrafluoroborate  (NO2BF4), nitronium trifluoromethane sulphonate (NO2 CF3SO3 etc.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Removal Of Nitro Group From The Benzene Ring

3. Sulphonation of benzene

Sulphonation of benzene Definition:

The reaction in which a hydrogen atom of the benzene ring Is substituted by sulphonic acid (-SO3H) group is known as the sulphonation reaction. Reaction and conditions: At ordinary temperature, cone. H2SO4 does not react with benzene. However, when a mixture of benzene and cone. H2SO4 is heated at 80°C about hours, benzene sulphonic acid Is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sulphonation Of Benzene Reaction And Conditions

Sulphonation with fuming H2SO4 (7% SO3 dissolved in cone. H2SO4) can be carried out even at ordinary temperature. Sulphonation may also be affected by chlorosulphonic acid (C1S03H).

Sulphonation of benzene Reaction mechanism :

This electrophilic substitution reaction is reversible. In this reaction, sulphur trioxide (SO3) acts as the electrophile. In some cases, protonated sulphur trioxide (HSO3+) acts as an electrophile.

Formation of electrophile:

Two molecules of sulphuric acid interact in the following way to form sulphur trioxide

Substitution:

It occurs through three steps.

First step: Formation of carbocation (σ-complex).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Substitution First Step

Second step: Expulsion of proton

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Substitution Second Step

The second step occurs at a slower rate than the first step. Thus, the second step is the rate-determining step

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Substitutin Third Step

Preparation of di- & tri-sulphonic acid:

Benzene, on sulphonation with fuming H2SO4 at 200-245°C gives benzene-m-sulphonic acid which on further heating at 280-300°C produces1,3,5-benzenetrisulphonic acid

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Di And Tri Sulphonic Acid

At first benzene sulphonic acid is formed. The sulphonic acid group(—SO3H) is meta-directing. So, the second

—The SO3H group occupies the meta-position and the third

—SO3H group takes the meta-position concerning the other two sulphonic acid groups. The sulphonic acid group is a deactivating group. So, the introduction of second and third

—SO3H group becomes more and more difficult.

Thus, to introduce the second and third

—SO3H groups, the reaction temperature is to be gradually increased.

Removal of —SO3 H group from benzene sulphonic acid:

  • When benzene sulphonic acid is heated to 150°C with dilute HCl or H2SO4 or is brought in contact with superheated steam, the
  • —SO3H group is replaced by hydrogen to form benzene. The reaction is called desulphonation reaction. In this reaction, proton (H+) acts as the electrophile.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Removal Of Benzenesulphonic Acid

  • If superheated D2O is used instead ofsuperheated steam, the —SO3H group is replaced by D to produce C6H5D. O Importance: ‘Sulphonation-de-sulphonation’ may serve as a useful tool for synthesis of various organic compounds.
  • This may well be illustrated in the synthesis of o-nitroaniline from aniline. To avoid oxidation, aniline is first converted into acetanilide. The para-position of acetanilide is then blocked by the —SO3H group.

Due to steric reason, the —SO3H group enters mainly the para-position. In the next step, the — NO2 group enters the position ortho to -NHCOCH3

Finally, —SO3H group is removed from the ring. The sulphonic acid group here acts as a blocking group.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Blocking Group

If para-position of acetanilide is not blocked by the —SO3 H group, — NO2 enters mainly para- position instead of the sterically more crowded ortho-position to give p-nitroaniline.

4. Friedel-Crafts reaction:

The reaction in which a H-atom of the benzene ring is Q) + CH3CH2CI Anhyd. AlCl3 substituted by alkyl (R— ) or acyl (RCO— ) group in the presence of a catalyst is called Friedel-Crafts reactions

Catalysts used: The best catalyst used for this reaction is anhydrous aluminium chloride (AlCl2). Lewis acids such as boron trifluoride (BF3) , ferric chloride (FeCl3) , zinc chloride (ZnCl2) etc., and protonic acids like HF, H2SO4, H2PO4 etc., may also be used as catalyst

Solvents used:

Suitable solvent for this reaction is nitrobenzene. Nitrobenzene with highly deactivated ring (due to -R and -I effects of -NO2 group) does not take part in this reaction as the relatively weak electrophile R+ cannot attack the ring i.e., substitution or Fridel-Crafts reaction does not take place. Being polar, nitrobenzene dissolves anhydrous AICI3. Again, benzene and alkylating or acylating reagents also dissolve in it. As all the reagents remain dissolved in liquid phase, the reaction takes place smoothly.

Moreover, as the boiling point of nitrobenzene is high (211°C), the reaction may be conducted atappreciably high temperature. Sometimes, carbon disulphide (CS2) is also used as a solvent for the reaction.

Friedel-Crafts alkylation:

When benzene is allowed to react with alkyl halide (RX) in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride as a catalyst, a hydrogen atom of benzene ring is replaced by alkyl group to produce alkylbenzene. This reaction is called the Friedel-Crafts alkylation. The different homologues of benzene can be prepared with the help of this reaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkylation Reaction

Examples: 

  • Methylbenzene (toluene) may be prepared by allowing benzene to react with methyl iodide in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3.
  • Methyl chloride may also be used, but as methyl iodide is a liquid at ordinary temperature, it is generally preferred

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Iodide Is A Liquid At Ordinary Temperature

Similarly, ethylbenzene is obtained when benzene reacts with ethyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylbenzene

Friedel-Crafts Reaction mechanism:

The effective electrophile in this electrophilic substitution reaction is a carbocation (R+). Although 2° or 3  alkyl halide reacts with the Lewis acid, AICI3 to form R, the reaction of

alkyl halide or methyl halide with AICI3 does not produce R+ ion. This is because the 1° carbocation and CH2 are relatively very unstable. In that case, the initial complex formed in the reaction between the alkyl halide and AlCl3 acts as the electrophile.

Formation of the electrophile:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of The Electrophile Reactions.

Substitution: It occurs in two steps

First step: Formation of carbonation(-complex)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of The Electrophile Reactions First Step

Second step: Explusion of Proton

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of The Electrophile Reactions Second Step

In this reaction, besides alkyl halides, aliphatic alcohols, may also be used as alkylating agents. Apart from AlCl3, BF3, HP, cone. H2SO4 etc., are used as catalysts.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkylating Agents

Limitations of the Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction:

1. In this reaction, there is always a possibility of polyalkylation of the benzene ring because, once an alkyl group enters the benzene ring, the electron density of the ring increases due to electron-repelling effect of the alkyl group. Consequently, the ring becomes activated towards further electrophilic substitution. Now, all the molecules of benzene and alkyl halide do participate in the reaction simultaneously.

So, the alkyl halide molecules present in the reaction medium reacts with the resulting alkylbenzene molecules at a rate faster than benzene. As a result, more than one alkyl group enters the benzene ring, i.e., polyalkylation occurs. Thus, for the preparation of monoalkyl benzenes, the Friedel-Crafts reaction is not suitable.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Limitations Of The Friedel Crafts Alkylation Reaction

Polyalkylation in Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction may be considerably reduced by using excess of substrate (benzene).

2. If alkyl halide used in the Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction is a primary alkyl halide containing three or more carbon atoms, then instead of the corresponding alkyl benzene, the alkyl benzene containing a secondary or tertiary alkyl group is obtained as the major or the sole product by rearrangement ofthe alkyl group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkyl Halide Used In Friedel Crafts Alkylation

Reaction mechanism: 

Lewis acid-Lewis base complex obtained in the reaction of AlCl3 with the 1° alkyl chloride undergoes dissociation and rearrangement simultaneously to form a stable 2° or 3° carbocation. These carbocations participate in substitution reactions and as a result, alkyl benzenes isomeric with the expected alkyl benzene are obtained as the major or the sole product.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction Of Mechanism Of Lewis Acid And Lewis Base

3. The following compounds do not participate in FriedelCrafts alkylation and acylation reactions:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Friedel Crafts Alkylation And Acylation Reactions

Groups such as nitro, carboxyl, acyl and trimethyl-ammonium (— +NMe3) etc., withdraw electrons from the benzene ring and deactivate the ring to such an extent that it cannot be attacked by tyre relatively weak electrophile (R+). So, the substitution reaction does not take place.

Aniline does not react because the —NH2 group gets converted into a powerful electron-withdrawing group by coordinating with the Lewis acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lewis Acid

Any vinyl halide, vinyl chloride (CH2=CH—Cl) ] or halobenzene [e.g., chlorobenzene (C6H5Cl) ] cannot be used as an alkylating agent. As, due to resonance, the C—X bond acquires some double bond character, AlCl3 cannot snatch the halogen atom to form the corresponding carbocations.

Friedel Crafts Acylation:

When benzene is treated with acyl chloride (RCOCl) in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride as catalyst, the H-atom of benzene ring is substituted by the acyl (RCO— ) group to form acylbenzene (aromatic ketone).

This reaction is called Friedel-Crafts acylation. Besides acyl chlorides, acid anhydrides are also used as acylating agents.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Friedel Crafts Acylation Reactions

Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT Notes

Friedel Crafts Acylation Reaction mechanism:

The electrophile involved in this electrophilic substitution reaction is an acylium ion (R —C=O) substitution reaction is an acylium ion (R —C=O)

Formation of the electrophile:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formation Of Electrophile Reactions

Two special synthetic advantages of acylation reaction:

1. Although polyalkylation is a common feature of benzene, its polyacylation never occurs. An electron-attracting acyl (RCO— ) Group decreases the electron density of the ring.

As a result, despite the presence of excess RCOCl in the reaction medium, the second acylation does not take place, i.e., not more than one RCO— Group can enter the benzene ring. Therefore, pure aromatic ketone can easily be synthesised with the help of this reaction.

2. During the acylation reaction, the carbon chain of the acyl halide does not rearrange. So, there is no possibility of formation ofa ketone isomeric with the desired ketone. Due to such an advantage, the acylation reaction is used to prepare alkyl benzenes containing 3 or more carbon atoms.

For example:

The alkylation reaction for preparing propylbenzene leads to the formation of iso propyl benzene as the major product. However, if benzene is first allowed to form a ketone and the ketone is then reduced (Clemmensen reduction), the desired propylbenzene is obtained as the only product

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Clemmensen Reduction

Removal of alkyl or acyl group from benzene ring:

Toluene or acetophenone on oxidation by alkaline KMn04 solution followed by acidification produces benzoic acid which, when heated with soda lime, gives benzene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Removal Of Alkyl Or Acyl Group From Benzene Ring

If the alkyl group is tertiary (Me3C— ), then it cannot be removed in this way because the tertiary alkyl group cannot be oxidised. However, the tertiary alkyl group can easily be removed from the ring

By the following reaction:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkyl Group Is A Teritary Alkyl Group

Chloromethylation:

When benzene is heated with HCHO and HCI in the presence of anhydrous zinc chloride, H-atom of the benzene ring is replaced by the chloromethyl (—CH2Cl) group to form benzyl chloride. This reaction is called chloromethylation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chloromethylation

CH2Cl group may be removedfrom benzene ringbythe same process applied for removal ofalkyl (—R) group.

Gattermann-Koch aldehyde synthesis:

When a mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen chloride is passed through benzene dissolved in nitrobenzene or etherin the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 and small amount Cu2Cl2 as catalyst, benzaldehyde is obtained. This reaction is known as Gattermann-Koch aldehyde synthesis

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Gattermann Koch Aldehyde Synthesis

—CHO group may be removed from benzene ring by the same procedure applied for the removal of an alkyl group.

Gattermann aldehyde synthesis:

Benzene reacts with hydrogen cyanide and hydrogen chloride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 to produce an imine which on hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde. This reaction is known as Gattermannaldehydesynthesis

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Gattermann Aldehyde Synthesis

Addition Reactions Of Benzene

1. Reduction—addition of hydrogen

1. Reduction into cyclohexane:

When a mixture of benzene vapour and hydrogen gas is passed through powdered nickel catalyst heated at 200°C, benzene combines with three molecules of hydrogen to form hexahydrobenzene or cyclohexane.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Gattermann Koch Aldehyde Synthesis

In this reaction, cyclohexadiene CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclohexadiene and cyclohexane CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclohexane are not obtained as intermediates because these compounds are more reactive than benzene.

2. Birch reduction:

Benzene is reduced by Na, K or Li in liquid ammonia in presence ofmethanol or ethanol to give 1,4-cyclohexadiene. This reaction is called Birchreduction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Birch Reduction

2. Addition of halogen

When chlorine gas is passed through boiling benzene or through benzene in the presence of

UV-rays, benzene combines with three molecules of chlorine to form benzene hexachloride or 1,2,3,4,5,6- hexachlorocyclohexane

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Halogen

Like chlorine, bromine also reacts with benzene to form benzene hexabromide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzene Hexabromide

lodine doesn’t undergo such additional reaction with benzene. benzen

BHC is used as an insecticide. It is a mixture of eight geometrical isomers and out of them the y-isomer (overall 18%), known as gammexane or lindane, possesses insecticidal property. So, BHC too possesses insecticidal property. However, because of its many adverse effects, its use is gradually declining.

3. Addition of ozone

When ozonised’ oxygen is passed through benzene at ordinary temperature, benzene combines with three molecules of ozone to form an unstable addition compound known as benzene triozonide. When the triozonide is hydrolysed in the presence of zinc, three molecules ofglyoxal and H2O2 are obtained. H2O2 thus produced is reduced by zinc to give water

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Addition Of Ozone

The formation of 3 mol glyoxal from 1 mol benzene suggests that benzene is a six-membered carbocyclic compound containing 3 double bonds in alternate positions

Oxidation Of Benzene

When a mixture of benzene vapour and air is passed over a vanadium pentoxide (V2O5) catalyst heated at much higher temperature (450°C), benzene is oxidised to maleic anhydride

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Maleic Anhydride

Effect of high temperature on benzene 

When benzene vapours are passed through a hot (600-800) iron tube packed with pumice stones, biphenyl or diphenyl is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Effect Of High Temperature On Benzene

Uses of benzene

The preparation of ethyl benzene is an important use of benzene because, ethyl benzene is used in the preparation of styrene (C6H5CH=CH2), the starting material for the manufacture of polystyrene and artificial rubber.

It is used to prepare many important compounds,

For example: Nitrobenzene, aniline, phenol, etc., and detergents (alkyl benzenesulphonates).

It is used as a solvent for fats, oils, resins, rubber, sulphur, iodine, phosphorus etc..

Carcinogenicity And Toxicity

Benzene and polynuclear hydrocarbons containing fused rings or are highly toxic. Many of these are carcinogenic substances. These are formed by Incomplete combustion of organic materials such as coal, petroleum, tobacco etc. and extensively mix with the surrounding air, These compounds enter our body during inhalation and destroy our DNA by performing various biochemical reactions. This ultimately leads to cancer.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carcinogenicity And Toxicity

Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT Notes

Action of carcinogenic substances in the human body:

  • From experimental results, it has come to our knowledge that these polynuclear hydrocarbons (PNH) after entering the human body are first converted into epoxides and then into dihydroxy epoxides.
  • The resulting dihydroxy epoxides react with the purine bases such as guanine present in DNA and RNA of the human cells.
  • Due to the attachment of the hydrocarbon part, the purine bases become large in size and can no longer accommodate themselves in the double helix of DNA.
  • This damage in the double helix of DNA causes mutation and ultimately leads to cancer. Carcinogenic effect of polynuclear hydrocarbons (PNH)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carcinogenic Effect Of Polynuclear Hydrocarbons

Preparation of benzene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Preparation Of Benzene

Special reactions of benzene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Special Reactions Of Benzene

Flow chart for substitution reactions of benzene:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Flow Chart For Substitution Reactions Of Benzene

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Very Short Answer Questions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Very Short Questions And Answers

Question 1. Which hydrocarbon is obtained on hydrolysis of Al4C3?
Answer: CH4

Question 2. Name an alkane that cannot be prepared by the Wurtzreaction.
Answer: CH4

Question 3. Which alkane is expected to be formed when ethyl magnesium bromide is allowed to react with water?
Answer: Ethane

Question 4. How many acyclic isomers of C5H12 are possible?
Answer: Isomer

Question 5. What is the main constituent of CNG?
Answer: CH4

Very Short Answer Questions for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6. Which type of aliphatic hydrocarbon undergoes substitution reaction?
Answer: Saturated

Question 7. What is the name of the alkene obtained when an aqueous solution of potassium succinate is electrolyzed?
Answer: Ethylene

Question 8. CH3CH=CH2HCl/peroxlde?
Answer: CH3CHClCH

Question 9. Which alkene on ozonolysis yields only acetaldehyde?
Answer:  2-butene

Question 10. What is Baeyer’s reagent? What is its use?
Answer:  Alkaline KMnO4 ,it is used to identify C=C and C=C;

Question 11. What is Lindlar’s catalyst?
Answer: Pd-CaCO3/ (CH3COO)2Pb

Question 12. What is Teflon?
Answer: Polytetrafluoroethylene

Question 13. 2-butanone and ethanal are obtained when an alkene containing five carbon atoms is subjected to ozonolysis. State the position of the double bond in the alkene.
Answer: Doublebondis at C-2 of the alkene containing five carbon atoms

Question 14. What is mustard gas?
Answer:  2,2′- dichloro-diethyl sulfide;

Question 15. Name a reagent which can be used to distinguish between 2-butyne and 1-butyne.
Answer: Ammoniacal Cu2Cl2

Question 16. Which alkyne is used in Hawker’s Lamp?
Answer: HC=CH

Question 17. Mention the name of the compound obtained when acetylene reacts with arsenic chloride.
Answer: Lewisite

Question 18. What is the chemical name of Westron?
Answer: 1, 1,2,2- tetrachloroethane

Question 19. Mention one use ofWestrosol.
Answer: As an organic solvent

Question 20. What is obtained when acetylene is passed through a hot iron tube?
Answer: C6H6

Question 21. Give an example of an anti-knock compound.
Answer: Tetraethyl lead

Question 22. Which of the following cannot produce white precipitate by the action of ammoniacal AgNO3—Acetylene, dimethyl acetylene, methyl acetylene, ethyl acetylene. one acts as the base
Answer: Dimethyl acetylene

Question 23.  Name the reagent which is used to carry out dihydroxylation of a double bond.
Answer: OsO4 followed by hydrolysis;

Question 24. Which polymer is used to make carry bags? Name its monomer.
Answer: 5. Polyethylene or Polythene, ethylene;

Question 25. Which compound is formed as the major product when propyne reacts with 20% H2SO4 in the presence of 1% HgSO4 at 80°C?
Answer: . Acetone (CH3COCH3)

Hydrocarbons VSAQs Chapter 13 NCERT Solutions for Class 11 Chemistry

Question 26. What is the state of hybridization of each carbon atom in an aromatic ring?
Answer: sp²

Question 27. Name the compound obtained by ozonolysis of benzene.
Answer: Glyoxal

Question 28. Give an example of a group that increases the rate of aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction.
Answer: —NH2

Question 29. Give an example of a group that decreases the rate of aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction.
Answer: —NO2

Question 30. Name an ortho-/para-orienting group.
Answer: Methyl (-CH3)

Question 31. Name a meta-orienting group.
Answer: Nitro ( —NO2)

Question 32. Give an example of a reversible electrophilic substitution reaction.
Answer: Sulphonationreaction

Question 33. Which is the smallest aromatic molecule/ion?
Answer: cyclopropenyl cation

Question 34. What is the orientation of the deactivating halogen atoms?
Answer: Ortho-/para

Question 35. Which heterocyclic compound remains as an impurity in benzene obtained from fractional distillation of coal tar?
Answer: Thiophene

Question 36. Which reagent is used in Birch reduction?
Answer: Na / liquid NH3, ethanol

Question 37. Which type of flame is observed during the combustion of benzene?
Answer: Sooty flame

Question 38. Nitration occurs at which position of the compound
Answer: Predominantly para position

Question 39. Which electrophile is involved in the desulphonation reaction
Answer:  Proton (H+);

Question 40. Give an example of a carcinogen
Answer: 1, 2-benzpyrene

Question 41. Between HNO3 and H2SO4 which one acts as the base during the formation of N02 ion?
Answer: HNO3

Question 42. Which is the rate-determining step in an aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction?
Answer: First step, i.e., formation of σ -complex;

Question 43. Which step in aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction is exothermic?
Answer: Second step i.e., formation of substituted compound;

Question 44. Give an example of a neutral electrophile that participates in an electrophilic substitution reaction.
Answer: Sulphur trioxide;

Question 45. Give an example of a polynuclear hydrocarbon.
Answer: Anthracene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Anthracene

Question 46. Which compound other than anhydrous AlCl3 can be used for the ethylation of benzene?
Answer: FeCl3

Question 47. What is gamm exane? Mention its use.
Answer: BHC (Benzene hexachloride); as an insecticide

Question 48. What is the electrophile involved in the nitration reaction?
Answer: NO2

Question 49. Name the products obtained on pyrolysis of propane.
Answer: Propene, ethene, methane, and H2

Question 50. Which compound out of 1-butene, 1-butyne, and 2-butyne is most acidic?
Answer: 1-butyne is the most acidic.

Question 51. Write the name of the compound obtained when n-heptane is subjected to aromatization
Answer: Toluene (C6H5—CH3).

NCERT Solutions for Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons VSAQs

Question 52. Which alkane cannot be prepared by Kolbe’s method?
Answer: Methane (CH4).

Question 54. Write the names of the compounds obtained on ozonolysis of o-xylene.
Answer: Glyoxal, methyl glyoxal, and dimethyl glyoxal

Question 55. What is lindane?
Answer: Benzene hexachloride (BHC), C6H6Cl6.

Question 56. What is picric acid?
Answer:  2,4,6-trinitrophenol is known as picric acid

Question 57.  What is the name of the compound obtained when benzene is oxidized by air (02) in the presence of a V205 catalyst heated at 500°C?
Answer: Maleic anhydride

Question 58. Which group out of -NO, and -CgHg is an o-/p directing group and which one is an o-/p-directing group?
Answer: NO2→m -directing; —C6H5→o-/p -directing

Question 59.  Which will undergo nitration at a faster rate: C6H6 or C6H5Cl?
Answer: C6H6 undergoes nitration at a comparatively faster rate

Question 60. Name a group that is o -/p -directing but is also a deactivating group.
Answer: Chloro(-Cl)

Question 61. A hydrocarbon on ozonolysis produces ethanal and methanal. 
Answer:  CH3CH =CH2

Question 62. Mention the product: NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mention The Product
Answer: CH3CHO

Question 63. Write the structure of an organic compound which reacts with water to yield methanal and hydrogen peroxide
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrogen Peroxide

Question 64.  Benzene reacts with CH3COCl in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 to form (an organic compound).
Answer: Acetophenone.

Question 65. Which reagent can be used for the following conversion?  HC≡CH→HC=CH2
Answer: H2,Pd-CaCO3/Pb(OAc)2 (Lindler’s catalyst)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The formula of marsh gas is _______________
Answer: CH4

Question 2.  _______________ are called paraffins.
Answer: Alkanes

Question 3. Beryllium carbide yields _______________
Answer: CH4

Question 4. Dutch oil is _______________
Answer: 1,2-dichloroethane;

Question 5. Wurtz reaction is suitable for the preparation of _______________alkanes.
Answer: Symmetrical

Question 6. CHgCOCHg undergoes Clemmensen reduction to yield _______________
Answer: Propane

Question 7.___________ can be identified by Schryver’s colour test
Answer: CH

Question 8. Peroxide effect is applicable only for _______________
Answer: HBr

Question 9. _______________ is obtained when. a solution of sodium butanoate is electrolyzed
Answer: n-hexane

Question 10. Isobutylmagnesium bromide reacts with water to form _______________
Answer: Isobutane

Question 11. _______________ on ozonolysis produces formaldehyde and acetaldehyde.
Answer: Propene

Question 12. _______________ is obtained as the major product when 2- butanol is dehydrated.
Answer: But 2 ene

Question Benzene is a polymer of _______________
Answer: Acetylene

Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons Very Short Answer NCERT Solutions

Question 14. The simplest hydrocarbon which reacts with ammoniacal silver nitrate to produce a white precipitate is _________
Answer: Acetylene

Question 15. _______________ is obtained when 2-butyne is passed through a mixture of 20% H2SO4 and 1% H2SO4
Answer: 2 – butanone

Question 16. Hexamethylbenzene is the trimer of _______________
Answer: 2 butyne

Question 17. When a mixture of _________ and Ag – powder is heated ________________ is obtained as the product
Answer: Chloroform, acetylene

Question 18. The values of boiling and melting points of alkadienes are _ than the corresponding alkanes and alkenes containing a same number of carbon atoms.
Answer: Higher

Question 19. Ozonolysis of acetylene forms _______________
Answer: Glyoxal

Question 20. Two molecules of HBr react with acetylene to form _______________
Answer: 1,1 dibromomoethane

Question 21. If an alkene forms only one type of carbonyl compound on ozonolysis, then it can be concluded that the alkene is _______________
Answer: Symmetrical

Question 22. CxHy _______________ xCO2 + + y/2 H2O Heat
Answer: \(\left(x+\frac{y}{4}\right) \mathrm{O}_2\)

Question 23. The number of isomeric tribromobenze is _______________
Answer: Three

Question 24. 1,3,5-trinitrobenzene is an_ compound. _______________
Answer: Explosive

Question 25. The resonance-stabilised carbocation formed in the first step of the electrophilic substitution reaction is called _______________
Answer: Sigma complex

Question 26. _______________ of benzene is carried out by using N+O4 BF4 salt.
Answer: Nitration

Question 27. When benzene is oxidized by atmospheric oxygen in the presence of V2O5 at high temperature, _______________ is obtained.
Answer: Maleic anhydride

Question 28. The product obtained due to Birch reduction of benzene when subjected to ozonolysis forms only _______________
Answer: Propanediol

Question 29. —COOH is a/an ______________ Group but COO is an __________ group
Answer: Deactivating, activating;

Question 30. NH2 group _______________ electron density at ortho-/para positions of the rin
Answer: Increases;

Question 31.  —NO2 group ______________ electron density at the meta position of the ring
Answer: Decreases

Question 32. C —C bond lengths of benzene are _________________
Answer: Equivalent

Question 33. Fill in the blank __________(organic compound) is obtained when an aqueous solution of potassium succinate is electrolyzed.
Answer: Ethylene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Introduction

The word ‘environment’ derived from the French word ‘environment can be defined at an assembly of physical, chemical and biological factors, which act upon an organism or an ecological community to determine its form and mode of survival.

Environment mainly consists of three major components:

  1. Biotic or living: 
    • For example – All living creatures)
  2. Abiotic or non-living:
    • For example –  Lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere) and
  3. Energy components: 
    • For example – Solar energy, thermochemical energy, nuclear energy etc.)

Environmental Chemistry

Environmental Chemistry Definition

The branch of science, which deals with the sources of the chemical components of the environment, the chemical reaction occurring among them, the products formed in the reaction and their impact on the living world is called environmental chemistry.

Environmental Chemistry Class 11 NCERT Notes

The study of environmental chemistry is important because

  • It makes us aware of the adverse effects of various chemical constituents on the environment.
  • It gives us an idea about the toxic effects of various chemical substances and their by-products which are extensively used to fulfill our requirements.
  • It gives us an idea about the sources of various toxic chemicals, their adverse effects and the antidotes to combat their toxicity.

1. Some terms used in environmental chemistry

1. Pollutant:

A pollutant is a solid, liquid or gaseous substance (produced either by natural sources or by human activity) which is present in the environment to such an extent that it causes harmful or detrimental effects on living organisms (plants, animals and human beings) or nonliving components.

Example:

Air contains trace amounts of CO (0.1 ppm). If, for any reason, the amount of CO increases to 40 ppm or more, then it is regarded as pollutant

Pollutants are of two kinds :

  1. Primary pollutant:  The pollutants which are emitted from any source, directly escape into the environment without sustaining any change are called primary pollutants.
  2. Example: S, NO, NO2, CO, CO2, hydrocarbons etc.
  3. Secondary pollutant: There are some pollutants which do not appear in the environment directly from their source. They are produced as harmful substances by Interaction with pollutants), already present in the environment. Tills type of pollutants are called secondary pollutants.
  4. Example: Peroxyacyl nitrate (PAN), dimethyl mercury [(CH3)2Hg]

2. Biodegradable pollutants

The pollutants which are decomposed by bacteria or germs are known as biodegradable pollutants.

Examples: Household garbage, cow dung and other biomass etc.

3. Non-biodegradable pollutants:

The pollutants which are not decomposed by bacteria or germs or decomposed very slowly are known as non-biode gradable pollutants.

Example:

Mercury, DDT, Gammaxene etc. The presence of these substances even in trace amounts is injurious to human beings and other animals.

4. Contaminant:

A contaminant is a substance which does not occur in nature under normal conditions but is introduced into the environment either accidentally or through indiscriminate human use.It may or may not be harmful to the living organisms or non-living components. The contaminant is considered as a pollutant when it has some harmful effect

Examples:

  • In Delhi pyrosulphuric acid (H2S2O7) leakage from a defective tank killed many persons and caused skin and breathing problems to many others. As pyrosulphuric acid does not occur in the atmosphere, therefore it is a contaminant. Again, because of its dangerous effect, it is also regarded as a pollutant.
  •  In Kerala, in 1953, 108 people died after consuming wheat flour contaminated with parathion (an agricultural pesticide).

5. Source:

The source ofany contaminantis a chemical substance or the place from whereitis produced.

Example:

A source of the pollutants like CO, NO etc., is the gas 2 emitted from petrol or diesel automobile engines

6. Sink:

If any medium continuously reacts with a pollutant for a long period and causes destruction to it, then it is said to be the sink of that particular pollutant.

Examples:

1.  Sea water acts as a sink of CO2 present in the atmosphere

⇒ H2O (sink) +CO2 (Pollutant ) H2CO3

2. An automobile wall or memorial acts as a sink of sulfuric acid, present as an atmospheric pollutant.

⇒ (Sink )CaCO3+ (polluntant)H2SO4→CaSO2↓ + H2O + C2O

7. Receptor or target:

If any plant or animal body or any biotic component is adversely affected by a pollutant, then that particular body or component is called a receptor or the target of that pollutant.

Examples:

  •  Smoke or smog causes a burning sensation in our respirator tract and eyes.In this case, man is the receptor or target of smoke or smog.
  • The aquatic animals are the receptors of the oil layer, floating on the surface of seawater.

8. Pathways Of pollutants:

The mechanism by which any pollutant is liberated from its source, spreads in the environment and ultimately gets destroyed, is called the pathway of that pollutant.

Example:

Nitric oxide, a pollutant, liberated from petrol or diesel engine reacts with oxygen present in the air to form nitrogen dioxide. Nitrogen dioxide reacts with rainwater and falls on the surface of the earth as nitric acid.

2NO + O2 → 2NO2; 2HNO2+O2→2HNO3

2NO2 + H2O→HNO3 + HNO2

9. Threshold Limit Value (TLV):

Anypollutantin in the environment is considered to be harmful to living organisms if its concentration exceeds a particular limit. This particular limit (of concentration) is called ‘threshold limit value’ (TLV) ofthat particular pollutant.  Atmosphere

Examples: Threshold limit values for CO and CO2 are. 40 ppm and 5000 ppm respectively. Ho However, the TLV for phosgene (COCl2) is only 0.1 ppm.

Threshold limit value for factory workers: It is the maximum limit of a pollutant present in the environment maximum limit of a pollutant present in the environment hours per day without suffering from health hazards Examples: Threshold limit values for SO2 and CO2 are 5 mg-3. m-3 and 5000 mg m-3 respectively

Environmental Chemistry Class 11 NCERT Notes

Environmental Components Of Earth

Earth’s environment is composed of the following four components—

  1. Atmosphere,
  2. Hydrosphere,
  3. Lithosphere and
  4. Biosphere.

Among these, the first three components are abiotic while the fourth one is biotic.

  1. Atmosphere: The invisible gaseous layer that surrounds and protects the Earth is called the atmosphere.
  2. Hydrosphere:  It includes all sources of water such as seas, oceans, rivers, fountains, lakes, polar regions, glaciers, groundwater etc.
  3.  Lithosphere:  It comprises the solid crust of the earth, made of rocks, forming the outer mineral cover.It includes soil, minerals, organic matter etc., and extends up to a depth of about 30 km from the earth’s surface.
  4.  Biosphere: It is the part of the earth where living organisms exist and interact with each other and also with the non-living components. The biosphere consists of all three zones,
    • Example: Soil, water, air etc., where living beings exist.

Atmosphere

The invisible blanket of gaseous layer that surrounds the earth is called atmosphere. It extends upwards to about 1600km. It is the gravitational attraction of the earth that holds this gaseous layer closely in space around the earth’s surface. The total mass of gaseous substances in the atmosphere is nearly 5.5×1015 ton. On the basis of temperature gradients and altitude,

The atmosphere has been divided into four distinct zones.

These are

  1. Troposphere,
  2. Atmosphere
  3. Mesosphere and
  4. Thermosphere

Different zones of atmosphere

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Different Zones Of Atmosphere

Again according to the proportion of different gases from the surface of the earth towards the vacuum of interstellar space, and

Atmosphere can be divided into two categories:

  1. Homosphere
  2.  Heterosphere

The homosphere extends from the surface of the Earth up to about 100 km height. In this layer, the proportions of different gases are more or less identical. Thus, this layer is called the homosphere.

The layer next to it is known as the heterosphere because the proportion of the gases in the different parts of this layer are found to be dissimilar. Gravity holds most of the air molecules close to the Earth’s surface and hence the troposphere is much more denser than the other layers.

50% of the total mass of the atmosphere exists within a height, of5.5 km from the Earth’s surface, and 99% exists within a height of 30 km from the Earth’s surface

Average gaseous composition in the homosphere

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Average Gaseous Composition In Homosphere

Functions of gases present in the atmosphere

Oxygen:

  • The most significant gaseous constituent of the atmosphere is oxygen. Oxygen is indispensable for any kind of combustion.
  • Oxygen is also used for the oxidation
    of food taken by plants and animals to produce heat and energy.
  • Oxygen is a necessary component of life as all living beings (except some microorganisms) and plants take oxygen from the atmosphere for respiration.
  • Plants give up oxygen to the atmosphere during the process of photosynthesis. As a result, the balance of oxygen is maintained in the atmosphere.

Nitrogen:

The major constituent of the atmosphere is nitrogen. Proteins and nucleic acids present in living bodies are nitrogenous compounds.

  • But most of animals including human beings and even plants cannot utilise atmospheric nitrogen direedy for the production of proteins and amino acids.
  • However, some nitrogen-fixing bacteria can take nitrogen directly from air and produce nitrate salts in the soil. These are used by plants in the synthesis of amino acids and nucleic acids.
  • Herbivorous animals meet their protein demand by eating those plants. Similarly, carnivorous animals get proteins from herbivorous animals.
  • After the death of plants and animals, nitrogenous compounds present in their bodies are decomposed by some bacteria releasing nitrogen gas that returns to the atmosphere.

Carbon dioxide (CO2):

Combustion of fossil fuels and carbonaceous compounds, and respiration of plants and animals increase carbon dioxide content in the atmosphere.

  • Again plants, during photosynthesis, absorb carbon dioxide from the atmosphere for the preparation of food.
  • As a result, the balance of carbon dioxide is maintained in the atmosphere.
  • But due to excessive … combustion of carbonaceous fuels and indiscriminate deforestation, the quantity of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere is increasing constantly leading to a constant increase in the average temperature of the earth (See greenhouse effect).

Ozone:

The quantity of ozone gas present in the atmosphere is negligible.

  • Almost the entire amount of ozone (=90%) is present in the stratosphere which is about 15-35 km above the earth’s surface.
  • The presence of ozone gas close to the earth’s surface hurts mankind and other animals.
  • But the presence of ozone in the upper layer of tire atmosphere is beneficial since it absorbs the harmful ultraviolet rays ofthe sun

Air Pollution

When one or more undesirable chemical substances produced by natural phenomena or uncontrolled human activity get mixed with the air to bring about health hazards to human or any other living being and affect their life processes, then air pollution is said to have occurred. The substances which cause air pollution are called air pollutants

Examples:

Sulphur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), nitric oxide (NO), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), hydrogen sulphide (H2S), hydrocarbons (CxHy), ammonia (NH3), fly ash, dust particles, smoke, fumes etc., are some air pollutants

Causes of air pollution

Natural causes of air pollution:

  • Emission of SO2, CO, H2S gases etc., due to volcanic eruption.
  • Gases are liberated due to the decomposition of living bodies.
  • Dust storms, forest fires and the fall of a meteorite.
  • Spreading of viruses, bacteria, fungi, pollen-grain of flowers in air etc

Causes of air pollution due to human activities:

  • Sulphur dioxide gas, carbon monoxide gas and fly ash are produced by thermal power plants.
  • Gases such as sulphur dioxide, sulphur trioxide, oxides of nitrogen, hydrogen chloride, chlorine etc., from acid manufacturing factories.
  • Ammonia gas is liberated from fertiliser factories and cold storage.
  • Sulphur dioxide, carbon monoxide and different metallic oxides were obtained during the extraction of metals.
  • Fine and bulky solid particles are produced in cement and asbestos factories.
  • Carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, sulphur dioxide and other such gaseous substances evolved from petroleum refineries.
  • Dust and sand in the region of coal mines.
  • CO, SO2 and oxides of nitrogen are released from motor vehicles.
  • Extensive deforestation affects the balance of oxygen and carbon dioxide and increases the quantity of carbon dioxide.
  • Highly poisonous gas evolved from destructive weapons used in warfare.0 Emission of radioactive rays due to accidents in nuclear reactors, nuclear power plants etc.
  • The extensive use of fossil fuel results in the evolution of gaseous pollutants.

Major Air Pollutants

Major air pollutants are divided into two classes:

  1. Inorganic and organic gaseous substances and
  2. Particulates.

Inorganic and organic gaseous substances

1. Carbon monoxide (CO):

Natural sources:

  • During volcanic eruptions,
  • Due to decomposition of dead plants and animals in marshy land,
  • During forest fires,
  • During the extraction of petroleum and natural gases,
  • During lightning, carbon monoxide is produced.

Man-made sources:

  • Incomplete combustion of fuel in automobile engines,
  • Incomplete combustion of carbonaceous matter in industrial furnaces,
  • Incomplete combustion of agriculture and slash materials,
  • Heating of carbon dioxide at a high temperature in the presence of coke in the blast furnace produces carbon monoxide. Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

Harmful effects:

This colourless, odourless gas is very harmful

Natural sources:

For human beings and animals. It has a greater affinity towards haemoglobin than of oxygen. So, it readily combines with haemoglobin to give a stable compound, carboxyhaemoglobin

(HbO2 + CO ⇌ HbCO + O2 ).

  • Consequently, oxygen carrying capacity of haemoglobin decreases which ultimately results in death.
  • The presence of CO even in small amounts may result in nausea, headache, dizziness etc.
  • Cigarette smoke contains a considerable amount of CO which ultimately increases CO content in the smoker’s blood.
  • Thus, chain smokers often suffer from mental imbalance, headaches, heart attacks etc. Acute oxygen starvation in the body due to poisoning by CO is called anoxia or asphyxiation.

Sink of carbon monoxide:

  • Some bacteria present in the soil absorb CO and convert it to CO2.
  • Inorganic radicals like HO and HOO, atomic oxygen and ozone oxidise CO to CO2

Control of CO pollution: 

  1. One of the main sources of CO pollution is the use of internal combustion engines in automobiles. These engines emit a mixture of CO, NOx, hydrocarbons and particulates.
    • To control the CO emission suitable modifications have to be done in internal combustion engines
    • The carburettor is to be adjusted to give a proper air-fuel ratio
    • Catalytic converters can be fitted into the exhaust pipe which may bring about oxidation of CO to CO2.
    • Internal combustion engines should be modified and improved. Some automobile makers have improved automobile engines by the use of an extra combustion chamber so that fuel undergoes complete combustion and the exhaust gas does not contain CO.
  2. CNG, LNG, LPG and LHG (liquefied hydrogen gas) should be used instead of gasoline.
  3. Alternative power sources such as fuel cells, solar energy etc., be used.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry

2. Oxides of sulphur (SOx):

Two oxides of sulphur, sulphur dioxide (SO2) and sulphur trioxide (SO3) are represented by the general formula SOx. Both of them are colourless gases having suffocating odour.

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

Natural sources of  SO2:

SO2 gas is liberated in the atmosphere due to volcanic eruptions. 67% of the total SO2 content of the atmosphere is contributed from this source.

Sources created by human activities:

  1. Combustion of coal in thermal plants produces SO2 gas in abundant quantities.
  2. SO2 gas is evolved during roasting of sulphide ores
  3. For example:  FeS, CuFeS2, Cu2S, ZnS, PbS etc.) in the extraction of metals.
  4. Smoke emitted from oil refineries and automobile engines contains a large quantity of SO2

Harmful effects of SO2 :

SO2 is a gas having extremely pungent and suffocating odour. It adversely affects the respiratory system and causes a burning sensation to eyes.

  • If inhaled, it may lead to breathing problems, asthma and bronchitis.
  • The presence of excess SO2 in the atmosphere may result in lung cancer.
  • SO2 also causes allergies.
  • In the presence of metallic oxide or other catalysts,  SO2 reacts with oxygen present in the air and water vapour to form H2SO4.
  • This sulphuric acid is much more harmful since it corrodes building materials such as marble or limestone, and metals like iron, steel, aluminium etc.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Metallic Oxide Or Other Catalysts

The presence of SO2 hampers the production of chlorophyll and the leaves turn colourless. This is known as chlorosis.

Control of SO2 pollution:

  • Removal of sulphur from fuel i.e., desulphurisation of fuel by using chemical scrubbers
  • Use of fuel containing less amount of sulphur
  • For example: Natural gas.
  • Removal of SO2 from gaseous fuels.
  • Production of electricity in nuclear power plants instead of thermal powerplants

Sulphur Trioxide (SO3)

1. Sources of SO3

A significant amount of SO2, emitted from natural sources or man-made processes is oxidised to sulphur trioxide (SO3)

1. SO3 molecules get activated by absorbing radiations having a wavelength of 300-400 run and react with aerial oxygen to give SO3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Sulphur Dioxide Molecule Get Activated

2. SO2 is also oxidised to SO3 by ozone, hydrogen peroxide and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) present in the atmosphere

⇒ \(\mathrm{SO}_2+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{SO}_3+\mathrm{O}_2 ; \mathrm{SO}_2+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{SO}_4\)

 Harmful effects of SO3:

SO3 reacts with water vapour present in the atmosphere to yield sulphuric acid (H2SO4). Produced H2SO4 combines with water droplets present in air to form an aerosol and ultimately come down as acid rain.

Historical buildings For example:

Tajmahal, Victoria Memorial, monuments, sculptures etc., made up of limestone, marble etc., are adversely affected by

Acid rain*: CaCO3+ H2SO4→ CaSO4+H2O + CO2

Apart from these, metallic (aluminium and iron) structures, bridges, etc., are severely damaged by acid rain. Acid rain increases the acidity(i.e., decreases the pH level of ponds, lakes etc., and in consequence, aquatic plants and animals get dangerously affected.

Acid rain also decreases the stability and glossiness of paint and varnishes.

Sink of SOx:

Edifices, historical memorials, monuments, and sculptures made of marble, limestone and natural sources of ammonia act as a sink of SOx.

2. Oxides of nitrogen (NOx)

Nitrogen forms five oxides—N2O, NO, N2O3, NO2 and N2O5. Out of these, NO and NO2 act as chief air pollutants. NO and NO2 are designated

Natural sources of NOx:

1. During lightning discharge nitrogen and oxygen combine together to form nitric oxide (NO) and this nitric oxide on reaction with excess oxygen, produces nitrogen dioxide (NO2 ).

N2 + O2 → 2NO ; 2NO + O2 →2NO2

2. Decomposition of ammonium salts in the soil by some bacteria leads to the formation of oxides of nitrogen (NOx), mainly NO.

Sources of NOx created by human activities:

In thermal power plants and different industries, atmospheric N2 and O2 combine to produce large amounts of nitric oxide (NO). This NO reacts with aerial oxygen to give NO2.

  • The high temperature produced during the burning of fuels in petrol and diesel engines also favours the formation of NO by mutual interaction of atmospheric N2 and O2
  • NO thus formed is subsequently converted to NO2 by aerial O2
  • An abundant quantity of NOx gas escapes into the atmosphere from industries producing organic acid.
  • Atomic explosions also add to NOx in the air.

Harmful effects of NOx:

1. NO2 gas is relatively toxic but its adverse effect depends on its concentration in the air and the extent of the reaction.

  • Higher concentration of NO2 in the air produces diseases like inflammation of the lungs, bronchitis, pneumonia etc.
  • If NO2 of higher concentration is inhaled, pulmonary oedema and haemorrhage of the lungs may occur.

2. The most harmful effect of NOx in the atmosphere is the formation of photochemical smog.

  • In the presence of sunlight, hydrogen, nitrogen dioxide and oxygen in the atmosphere, on reaction, gives a mixture of ozone, peroxyacyl nitrate (PAN) and aldehyde.
  • All these substances unitedly form photochemical smog. Photochemical smog irritates the eyes and nose and induces sneezing, cough and difficulty in breathing (dyspnoea). If photochemical smog persists for a long period, it may cause death.

3. NOx drastically reduces the rate of the photosynthesis of plants. Leaves and fruits start shedding due to the presence of NOx in the air.

4. NO and NO2 present in the atmosphere react with ozone to form NO2 and NO3 respectively. From the latter (z’.e., NO2 and NO3), N2O5 is obtained. N2O5 thus produced, on reaction with rainwater, forms nitric acid

NO +O3→NO2+ O2 ; NO2+ O3→NO3 + O2

NO2 + NO3→N2O5; N2O5+ H2O→2HNO

Sink of NOx:

In the atmosphere, the maximum stability of NO and NO2 are of four days and three days respectively. After that, they are converted to nitric acid (HNO3). This transformation may occur in two ways following path 1 and path 2 . Ozone plays a major role in the transformation that occurred by Path 2

Path 1: 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Ozone Plays The Major Role In The Transformation

4NO2+ 2H2O(water vapour or water) + O2→ 4HNO3

Path 2:

NO2 + O3 → NO3 + O2

NO2 + NO3 → N2O5 ; N2O5+ H2O → 2HNO3

Nitric acid thus produced comes down during the rain. A part of it falls on waterbodies

For example: Ponds, rivers, lakes etc

The remaining part, on reaction with different basic Compounds belonging to hydrocarbon series (organic substances {e.g., ammonia, lime etc.) present in the soil, Is pollutants): The main air-polluting hydrocarbons are converted into nitrate salts. Here, water and the different basic materials in the soil work as the sink of NOx.

Control of pollution caused by NOx:

When the gas released from automobile engines is passed through a catalytic converter in the presence of Pt-catalyst, oxides of nitrogen (NOx) are reduced to produce mainly N2 and a small amount of NO3.

Production of NOx may be reduced by conducting the combustion at a lower temperature in the presence of excess air.

Before releasing the gas mixture containing NOx, produced in the factories, it is passed over the metallic oxide catalyst

For example:  Cr2O3, ZnO, CuO etc.)

Heated to 500°C, thus nitric oxide (NO) is reduced to N2 and O2: 2NO ⇌ N2 + O2.

In the chemical absorption process, NOx can be removed from the waste gas mixture. In this case,

  1. Acidic For example H2SO4
  2. Basic substances For example: Ca(OH)2 or Mg(OH)2 are used

3. Hydrogen sulphide (H2S)

Natural sources:

  • H2S gas is liberated from volcanoes.
  • Due to the decomposition of proteinaceous compounds containing sulphur, H2S has evolved. Thus, rotten fish or eggs smell like H2S gas.

Sources created by human activities:

  • In oil refineries, during the production of paper and paints (containing sulphur) appreciable amount of H2S is produced. Harmful effects of H2S .’H2S is a poisonous gas.
  • It has severe harmful effects on man. It causes headache, nausea, irritation to the eyes, throat and nose, loss of appetite and diarrhoea.
  • When taken in higher doses, it may lead to respiratory problems like bronchial pneumonia or even death.
  • The reaction of H2S with essential proteins is the primary cause of its toxic effects on human bodies. H2S binds with iron in the mitochondrial cytochrome enzymes, thus preventing cellular respiration.

Sink of H2S : H2S undergoes slow oxidation to SO2 in the atmosphere

2H2 S + 3O2→  2SO2 + 2H2O

H2S + O3 → SO2 + H2O

It also combines with various metallic salts to form insoluble metallic sulphides

4. Compounds belonging to the hydrocarbon series (organic pollutants)

The main air-polluting hydrocarbons are methane, benzene etc. Beiides thiete,
acetylene, ethylene, propylene, 1,3 butadiene etc., act as air pollutants. Among the gaseous air pollutants, the one which Is present In maximum quantity In air Is methane

Natural sources:

  • In paddy fields and other muddy marshy lands, bacterial decomposition of plants, almost In the absence of air, produces plenty of methane.
  • Putrefaction of animal excreta produces an abundant quantity of methane.
  • The anaerobic decomposition of animal bodies produces methane.
  • Forest fires and the evaporation of hydrocarbons of the terpenoid class from plants In forests are also important sources of hydrocarbon.

 Sources created by human activities:

  • Hydrocarbons are produced due to the incomplete combustion or evaporation of the liquid fuels used in vehicles.
  • Hydrocarbons also escape into the atmosphere as a result of incomplete combustion of fuels used for different purposes

For example: Cooking, lighting etc

  • Liquid substances such as benzene, toluene etc., used as solvents in different chemical industrial units get easily evaporated and pollute the atmosphere
  • Gaseous hydrocarbon, 1,3-butadiene used in the preparation of rubber and other polymers causes air pollution.
  • During destructive distillation of coal, some air pollutants [e.g., benzopyrene) escape into the atmosphere.

Harmful effects of hydrocarbons: 

  • Methane is a greenhouse gas.
  • Due to photochemical reactions with oxygen and oxides of nitrogen, hydrocarbons form photochemical oxidants and photochemical smog, which are responsible for irritating eyes, nose and lungs and also cause breathing problems.
  • Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH)
    • For example: Benzopyrene are carcinogenic and its presence in the atmosphere in large amounts may cause cancer.

Sink of hydrocarbon:

Hydrocarbons are sufficiently stable. However, they undergo slow oxidation or photochemical reactions involving several steps and ultimately form products like CO2 or other water-soluble compounds which are then washed away by rain.

Control of pollution caused by hydrocarbons:

Since automobiles are the main sources of hydrocarbon pollution, so such pollution can be controlled by following those steps which are taken to control CO pollution.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry

Particulates

Generally, finely divided solid and liquid particles, suspended in air are referred to as particulates. The diameter of the particulates varies from 0.0002μ to 500μ (1 micron or 1 μ= 10-4cm).

The particles of this dimension, being dispersed in air, form aerosol. Depending on the diameter, density of the particles and the intensity of air current, these particles exist in the atmosphere for a period ranging from a few seconds to a few months.

Particulates can be of two types:

  • Viable (living microorganisms such as bacteria, viruses, fungi etc.) and
  • Non-viable (non-living matters such as mist, smoke, dust etc.)

1. Suspended particulate matter

Smoke, soot, dust particles, metallic oxides and chlorides, fly ash, asbestos dust, acid mist(H2SO4, HNO3)etc.

Natural sources of particulates:

Small particles on the surface of the earth are scattered into the atmosphere by air currents, cyclones, volcanic eruptions etc.

Sources created human activities:

  • Soot:  These are fine carbon particles formed by incomplete combustion of carbonaceous fossil fuels.
  • Metal particles: These are generated in the metal extraction involving processes like grinding, calcination, smelting of ores etc.
  • Particles of metal oxides: During the combustion of fuels containing metal oxides, fine particles of metal oxides are generated.
  • For example: Coke containing FeS2, on combustion, produces fine particles of Fe3O4.

3FeS2 + 8 O2 → Fe3O4+ 6SO2

  • PbCI2 and PbBr2Compounds like tetraethyl lead (TEL), dichloroethane, dibromoethane etc., are used in petrol as anti-knocking agents. The Pb-compound during combustion of petrol produces PbO which later turns into volatile PbCl2 and PbBr2. These further escape into the air and exist as small particles.
  • Inorganic silicates: Fine particles of silicates are scattered into the atmosphere from cement industries.
  • Asbestos particles: Asbestos is a fibre-like silicate mineral. During the formation of the asbestos sheet, fine particles of asbestos arÿÿatteredinto the atmosphere.
  • Sulphuric and nitric acid mist: The SOx and NOx  vapours present in the atmosphere react with water vapour and form their corresponding acid mists
  • Particles of metal oxides: During the combustion of fuels containing metal oxides, fine particles of metal oxides are generated.
    • For example: Coke containing FeS2, on combustion, produces fine particles of Fe3O4
  • Organic particulates: These are mainly the particles of alkane, alkene and aromatic hydrocarbons
    • For example: PAH.
  • The formation of such particles is associated with the combustion of petrol and petroleum refining. PAH particles get attached to the soots floating in the air easily and create severe health hazards.

2. Harmful effects Of particulates

The harmful effects of particulates depend on the particle size and the nature of the substances from which these particles originate. Generally, finer particles are more harmful. This is because, the particles with a diameter greater than 5μ get trapped in the nostril but particles having a diameter less than 5μ enter the lungs through the nostril.

The magnitude of the surface area of extremely fine particles being exceedingly high, carcinogenic particulates

For example:

Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons, asbestos etc.) can easily find their shelter on these particles and cause cancer, asthma, tuberculosis and different lung diseases. Apart from this, finely divided suspended particles in the air, enter the body through the eyes, ears, nose etc.,

Leads to different types of diseases:

  • Smoke released from automobiles contains lead particles which adversely affect the child’s brains and cause nerve diseases.
  • The normal production and development of red blood corpuscles (R.B.C.) are disturbed in the presence of lead particles. If an excess amount of lead particles are inhaled regularly, haemoglobin disintegrates and is eliminated through urine
  •  Accumulation of cadmium particles in the body during respiration even in trace amounts, may cause breathing trouble and heart disease.
  • Beryllium compounds
    • For example: BeCl2, BeSO, ) affect the lung and create berylliosis disease.
  • Workers of coal mines and cotton mills are prone to be attacked by diseases like black lung and white lung.
  •  Workers of cement factories are susceptible to five attacks of silicosis due to the intake of SiO2 particles during respiration.
  • Inhalation of asbestos particles results in asbestosis and it leads to cancer in the case of workers of asbestos factories.
  • The cause of arsenicosis is due to inhalation of arsenic compounds. In this disease, the skin becomes rough and wounds appear on the skin.

The harmful effects of particulates also extend to the plants present in the atmosphere react with the Water kingdom. Accumulation of dust and other particles on the vapours and their corresponding acid mists. leaves of plants close to the stomata. As a result, transpiration as well as photosynthesis of plants get severely affected. Naturally, the growth of plants and the production of crops also get depreciated

Ozone Layer

In the lower region of the stratosphere (the region at the height of 15 km to 35 km from the ground), there exists a layer of ozone gas. This layer is known as the ozone layer or ozonosphere.

Almost 90% of total ozone gas exists in this layer. In the absence of the ozonosphere, the existence of living beings would have been at stake. It is this ozone layer in the stratosphere which absorbs the harmful ultraviolet radiations coming from the sun. Thus it prevents most of the ultraviolet rays from reaching the Earth’s surface

1. Formation of the ozone layer

Oxygen molecules (O2) present in the stratosphere absorb ultraviolet radiations coming from the sun and decompose to form oxygen atoms (O). This atomic oxygen combines with oxygen molecules to form ozone molecule

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Formation Of Ozone Layer

⇒ \(\stackrel{*}{\mathrm{O}}_3+\mathrm{M} \longrightarrow \mathrm{O}_3+\stackrel{*}{\mathrm{M}}\) [*Asterisk sign indicates excited state]

M  denotes a neutral colliding species

For example:

O2 or N2 with which O on collision, releases its excess energy] On the other hand, the ozone molecule ( O ) also absorbs UVradiation and gets converted into oxygen molecule ( O2 )

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry UV Radiation And Gets Converted Into Oxygen Molecule

In the ozone layer of the stratosphere, these two opposite processes (i.e., the formation of ozone molecule and the decomposition of ozone molecules) occur in a cyclic order and finally attain a state of equilibrium. Due to the existence of such an equilibrium state, the quantity of ozone in the stratosphere remains fixed.

2. Role of ozone layer in the environment

The ozone sphere works as a protective layer for the fitting world. Acting as a protective umbrella, the ozone layer absorbs most of the harmful UV radiation emitted by the sun because these rays are utilised in the production and decomposition of ozone.

In the absence of the ozone layer, the earth’s surface and the adjacent air would be so heated by the UV-radiation that the existence of the plants and the animals including bacteria in land and water would have been impossible.’

Ultraviolet radiation:

  • Causes cancer in human skin
  • Damages the cornea of the eyes and develops premature cataracts
  • Decreases immunity against diseases and fertility in living beings. Genetic diseases are also the consequence of the harmful effects of ultraviolet radiation

3. Depletion of ozone layer: Ozone hole

In 1982, the British scientist Jo Foreman first observed that the ozone layer of the stratosphere above the Antarctic (the south polar regions) was gradually getting thinner. Extensive research in the subsequent years has revealed that the ozone layer is gradually becoming thinner not only in Antarctica but almost everywhere in the stratosphere. The phenomenon of thinning of the ozone layer of the stratosphere is known as depletion of the ozone layer or the ozone hole.

Depletion of the ozone layer signifies that the equilibrium between! the two contradictory’ Processes i.e., the formation and the decomposition of ozone has been disturbed somehow. Due to the influx of several foreign substances into the atmosphere, the rate of decomposition of ozone has far exceeded than the rate of its formation. This has resulted in the thinning of the ozone layer almost every where in the stratosphere

Ozone layer before formation of hole:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Ozone Layer Before Formation Of Hole

Ozone layer after formation of hole:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Ozone Layer After Formation Of Hole

Causes of depletion of ozone layer (formation of ozone hole):

1. Scientists believe that some chemical substances belonging to the class of chlorofluorocarbons (Freons or CFCs) are mainly responsible for the formation of ozone hole. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) are the different chloro and fluoro derivatives of methane and ethane.

Environmental Chemistry Class 11 Notes PDF

Some examples of CFCs are given below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Some Examples Of CFCs

The above-mentioned chemicals were extensively used as

  • Refrigerants
  • Propellants in aerosols,
  • Foaming agent in plastic production,
  • Ingredients of fire extinguisher,
  • Solvents for various purposes etc. In the troposphere, these gases are non-corrosive, non-toxic, non-inflammable and chemically inert.

As a result, these gases after being liberated from the field of their applications, gradually reach the upper stratosphere after a long period of time.

In the stratosphere, they absorb the UV radiation coming from the sun and decompose to produce highly active chlorine atoms which subsequently with O3 of the ozone layer to liberate oxygen and chlorine monoxide free radical (CIO) which, on further reaction with ozone, forms O2 molecules and active chlorine atoms. The chlorine atoms again combine with O3 molecules to form O2 molecules. In this way, a cyclic process continues, which eventually causes depletion of the ozone layer.

⇒ \(\mathrm{CFCl}_3(\mathrm{~g})+h \nu \longrightarrow \dot{\mathrm{C} F C l} 2 \text { (free radical) }+\dot{\mathrm{Cl}} \text { (active) }\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{CF}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2(\mathrm{~g})+h \nu \longrightarrow \dot{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{F}_2 \mathrm{Cl} \text { (free radical) }+\dot{\mathrm{Cl}} \text { (active) }\)

⇒ \(\dot{\mathrm{Cl}}+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cl} \dot{\mathrm{O}}+\mathrm{O}_2 ; \mathrm{Cl} \dot{\mathrm{O}}+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{O}_2+\dot{\mathrm{Cl}}(active)\)

It has been experimentally found that a single Cl -atom is capable of decomposing millions of O3 molecules.

2. Experiments head revealed that halons widely damage the ozone layer. Halons are halocarbons. Most of them contain bromine as halogen. These are mainly used as fire extinguishers

For example: Halon—1211 (CF2BrCl, bromochlorodifluoromethane),

Halon: 1301 (CF3Br, bromotrifluoromethane) etc.

Halons are stable in the troposphere. But in the stratosphere, they absorb UV-radiations and decompose to produce active bromine atoms. These active bromine atoms combine with O3 of the ozone layer to liberate oxygen and bromine monoxide free radical (BrO).

The produced BrO again reacts with ozone to evolve O2 molecules and active bromine atoms. Bromine atoms thus obtained, in reaction with O3, give O2 molecule. In this way, the entire process proceeds continuously in a cyclic manner which leads to the decay of the ozone layer.

Environmental Chemistry Cyclic Manner Leads To The Decay Of The Ozone Layer

3. Extensive studies have unquestionably proved that increase in quantity of die oxides of nitrogen in the stratosphere adversely affect the ozone layer. The main source of these oxides are the supersonic aeroplanes which emit plenty of NO gas while flying through the stratosphere. Like Cl and Br-atoms, NO molecule brings about catalytic decomposition of O3 into O2

NO + O3→NO2 + O2 ; NO2 + O → NO + O2

The reaction of O3 with NO yields NO2 yields. This NO2 combines with the oxygen atom (which ”highways produced in the stratosphere due to the decomposition of O3 and O2 under the influence of UV-radiation) to regenerate NO. This explains why the O3 molecules undergo continuous decomposition although the quantity of NO is not diminished.

4. Effect of ozone hole on the environment

Effect on climate:

If the ozone layer in the stratosphere is destroyed, the UV radiation emitted by the sun, instead of being absorbed by this region, will be incident on the earth’s surface. Consequently, the temperature of the earth’s surface will increase. Owing to this rise in temperature the earth will be continuously heated and the ice in the polar regions will melt, resulting in a rise in
the water level of the sea.

Effect on mankind:

In the absence of ozone layer in the stratosphere, the UV radiation will directly reach the earth’s surface. This radiation is extremely harmful to human beings. It causes skin cancer and premature cataract in the eyes. Exposure to the UV-radiation damages the immune system which thereby increases susceptibility to viral infections. Moreover, this radiation motivates the photochemical reactions which increases the tendency of smog formation. This in turn creates severe respiratory problems such as bronchitis, tracheal irritation, lung diseases etc.

Effect on plants, animals and other living organisms:

The incidence of UV radiation on the earth’s surface will hinder the process of photosynthesis. As a result, the production of crops will decrease. UV radiation would naturally increase the earth’s average surface temperature. Water bodies will dry up and water from the soil will evaporate. Consequently, agriculture will be greatly affected and the production of crops will fall drastically.

Also, UV radiation precludes photosynthesis. Therefore plants and aquatic phytoplanktons will die. Thus, marine life which depends on phytoplankton will also perish. Therefore, UV radiation disrupts the entire ecological system and composition of the sea

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Environmental Chemistry Summary

Greenhouse And Greenhouse Effect

What is a greenhouse?

Greenhouse means a glass room or glass chamber. Plants of the tropical region cannot adapt themselves to the climatic conditions of the cold countries. So for sustaining plant life (particularly for plants of tropical regions in cold countries), this type of chamber made of glass is used. Sun rays enter the glass chamber through the transparent glass roof and walls and due to this the soil gets heated.

The heated soil inside the chamber radiates infrared rays of longer wavelengths which cannot pass through the glass. The glass absorbs a part of these rays and the rest are reflected to the soil inside the chamber. As a result, the temperature inside the chamber always remains higher than that of the outside temperature. Thus, proper growth of these plants becomes possible.

In fact, some gaseous substances present in the earth’s atmosphere such as CO2 water vapour etc., together act like a glass of the greenhouse and keep the atmosphere adjacent to the earth’s surface warmer and create a favourable environment for the living world.

Greenhouse effect and its importance

Greenhouse Effect Definition:

The natural process by which CO water vapour and some other gases are present in the atmosphere, prevents the return of the radiation emitted by the earth’s surface to outer space, thereby keeping the surface of the earth and the adjacent environment suitable for the effect.

‘ Some gases like CO2, water vapour etc., present in the atmosphere allow sun rays of smaller wavelengths to be incident on the earth’s surface but prevent the rays of longer wavelength (infrared rays) emitted from the hot earth’s surface, from returning to the outer space. Those gases absorb a significant portion of the reflected radiation of longer wavelength and arc heated.

The rest of the infrared rays fall on the earth’s surface and remain in the adjacent atmosphere to keep the surface of the earth and the adjacent atmosphere warm and make it favourable for the existence of the living world. due to indiscriminate deforestation, the quantity of CO2 absorbed by the plants is gradually decreasing.

Greenhouse gases like CO2, water vapour etc., help to keep the atmosphere warm to a certain level of temperature (average as 5°C) which is essential for the existence of life on earth. If those gases were not present in the atmosphere then the average temperature of the earth’s surface and that of the surrounding atmosphere would have dropped to about -30°C and eventually, survival of life on earth would have been impossible

Greenhouse gases, their sources and contribution towards the greenhouse effect

The gases that absorb a significant portion of radiation of longer wavelengths (infrared rays) emitted by the hot earth’s surface and reflect the rest to the earth’s surface, to keep the adjacent environment warm, are referred to as greenhouse gases. Some greenhouse gases are—carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4), chlorofluorocarbon (CFCs), ozone (O3), nitrous oxide (N20), water vapour (H2O) etc.

1. Carbon dioxide:

Out of all the greenhouse gases, CO2 is present in the largest amount in the atmosphere. Naturally, CO2 plays the most vital role in absorbing the radiation emitted by the earth’s surface. The contribution of CO2 towards the greenhouse effect is approximately 50%.

During respiration, plants and animals take in O2 and give up CO while plants accept CO2 for the preparation of their food. In this way, the CO -level in the environment is maintained. But at present, due to the progressive increase in the quantity of CO in air, the equilibrium of CO gas in the atmosphere has been disturbed. The possible reasons for the continuous

Increase in the percentage of COz gas are as follows:

  1. 1.  Due to the indiscriminate use of fossil fuels in factories, motor vehicles etc., the quantity of CO2 released in the atmosphere is not being used up completely by different natural processes.
  2. Consequently, the concentration of CO in the atmosphere keeps on increasing.
  3. In industrial regions, particularly during the manufacture of cement, a large &ftU>unt of CO2 gas is released into the atmosphere.
  4. During the process of photosynthesis, plants absorb CO2 from the air. But due to indiscriminate deforestation, the quantity of CO2 absorbed by the plants is gradually decreasing.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Quantity Of Carbon Dioxide Absorbed By The Plants Is Gradually Decreasing

2.  Methane:

The role of methane gas in preventing the outflow of the heat emitted from the earth’s surface is worth mentioning. Due to the bacterial decomposition plants in paddy fields and other marshy lands, putrefaction of dung and other excreta and anaerobic decomposition of dead animals, methane gas is produced. Besides these, different waste organic compounds, oil mines etc., are the other sources of methane gas.

The capacity of each methane molecule to prevent the outflow of heat is 25 times a much as that of a molecule of CO gas. But the quantity of methane gas in the atmosphere being less than that of CO2 gas, its contribution to the greenhouse effect is about 16-20%.

3. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs):

CFCs are widely used as refrigerants, propellants in aerosol sprays, fire extinguishing agents, solvents for cleaning electronic types of equipment and foaming agents. These compounds destroy the ozone layer in the stratosphere and act as greenhouse gases in the troposphere.

The capacity of the chlorofluorocarbon molecules to prevent the release of heat emitted from the earth’s surface is 15000-20000 times greater than that of CO2 molecules. These compounds are extremely stable. So, they can exist in the atmosphere for a long time. The contribution of these compounds towards the greenhouse effectis found to be 13-18%.

4. Tropospheric ozone:

Ozone gas present in the troposphere acts as a greenhouse gas. The combustion of fossil fuels in automobile engines, thermal power plants and different chemical industries gives rise to a profuse quantity of oxides of nitrogen (NOx). The combination of ; different hydrocarbons and oxygen present in the atmosphere with these oxides results in the formation of ozone gas. The contribution of ozone gas to the greenhouse effect is about 7-8%.

5. Nitrous oxide:

Extensive combustion of fossil fuels, motor vehicles, and bacterial decomposition of nitrogenous chemical fertilisers in agricultural lands generates nitrous oxide. Again, its heat retention capacity per molecule is 200 times greater than that of CO2 per molecule. The contribution of this gas towards the greenhouse effect is about 4-5%.

Global warming

For tire last few centuries, the average temperature of Tire Earth has been gradually increasing.

For example: During the period from 1800-1900 AD, the average temperature of the earth has increased by nearly 0.4°G. Again, in the following century i.e., 1900-2000 AD., this increase in temperature has been almost of 1°C. So it cannot be denied that the natural environment is gradually becoming warmer.

The phenomenon of this progressive rise in temperature all over the world is called global warming. The reason for this global warming can be attributed to the increased concentration of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere, caused by various human activities

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Notes

Harmful effects of global warming: 

1. Because of global warming 2100 AD, the polar ice caps will melt, thereby releasing an enormous amount of water. Then the situation will be almost similar to what it was 1,30,000 years ago, when the surface water level of the sea was 6 years ago, when the surface water level of the sea was 6 coastal regions like Holland, America, New Orleans, Florida, Bangladesh etc., will be inundated and will go under water forever.

2. Global warming is a great threat to human health. Respiratory problems occur frequently due to human health.

Respiratory problems occur frequently due great concern. Global warning would initiate a favourable temperature for the breeding of microorganisms resulting in the epidemic spread of dreadful diseases such as dengue, malaria, encephalitis etc. If the CO2 content in the air becomes twice that of the present value, then many species will become extinct from the earth

Consequences of the greenhouse effect

Scientists have predicted about the effect of increased concentration of greenhouse gases such as

  • The temperature of the earth’s surface and the troposphere will go to increase day by day and by the middle of this century, the temperature of the earth will be increased by at least of 2°-4°C.
  • Due to the increase in earth’s temperature, the polar caps, accumulated in tyre polar regions (Greenland and Antarctica) will melt and this will cause an increase in the water level of the sea. As a consequence, vast coastal regions like India, Bangladesh, Myanmar, Maldives etc., will sink, causing colossal devastation. If the populated area be inundated in this way, the resettlement of the affected people will pose a great problem to many countries
  • Owing to the increased greenhouse effect, droughts will be more frequent during summer in the countries of the mid¬ latitudes in the northern hemisphere. As a result, crop production in the fertile lands of North America and the previous Soviet Russia will be reduced.
  • More devastating cyclones, supercyclones, tornados or hurricanes will occur with an increase in temperature.
  • Increase in temperature may lead to the destruction of forests due to forest fires.
  • Due to the inability to sustain at high temperatures, living beings will die. Consequently, the ecosystem will be severely affected. In the marshy lands, due to increased decomposition of plants, methane will be liberated.

In a word, it can be said that by the middle of this century, man will have to face severe natural calamities.

Measures to check global warming

Global warming cannot be eradicated or reduced overnight. A concerted effort is necessary to attain this goal. In overnight. A concerted effort is necessary to attain this goal.

In measures are mentioned below:

  • The addition of CO2 to the atmosphere should be minimised by reducing the use of fossil fuels such as wood, coal, petroleum etc.
  • Unlawful cutting of trees should be stopped and the forests should be saved from destruction.
  • Afforestation ought to be encouraged so that plants absorb more CO2 (for the preparation of their food). Koiget !r ’Boron
  • Use of unconventional forms of energy
  • For example: Solar energy, wind energy, tidal energy etc.) is to be increased.
  • Use of CFCs is to be prohibited

Smog Or Classical Smog

In December 1952, the city of London was covered with a dense layer of fog continuously for five days. The people, irrespective of age and sex, fell ill and 4000 people ultimately lost their lives.

Subsequently, it was found that the fog contained poisonous gases emitted from automobile engines and factories and the constituent which was present in the largest quantity, was found to be sulphur dioxide gas (SO2). A British physician named it smog (smog = smoke + fog). As the horrible effect of such smog was first observed in London, it was called London smog

Several accidents caused by such smog (of course of less alarming proportions), occurred in different cities. Smog is frequently observed in big cities

For example:

Delhi, Mumbai Kolkata) of India, during the winter season. Mixture of particulates with gaseous oxides of Mixture of particulates with gaseous oxides of the presence of SO2 and carbon (soot) particles, classical smog possesses a reducing character. Thus it is also called reducing smog

1. Formation of smog

During winter, particularly after evening or early in the During winter, particularly after evening or early in the earth’s surface becomes heavier If it is suddenly cooled down earth’s surface becomes heavier ifit is suddenly cooled down cannot go upwards and remains confined in that layer. Impure cannot go upwards and remains confined in that layer. Impure finely divided particles liberated from local factories motor vehicles, mix with that confined air to create finely divided particles liberated from local factories motor vehicles, mix with that confined air to create and and

Harmful effects of smog:

  • Smog irritates the nose, eyes and throat, resulting in sneezing and coughing.
  • It affects the respiratory system, causing bronchitis, asthma, heart disease etc.
  • It lowers visibility level, posing great problems while driving cars. So, accidents are likely to happen.
  • It also has adverse effects on electronic systems and plants

2. Photochemical smog or Los Angeles smog

This type of smog was first observed in the city of Los Angeles in America, in the year 1950. So, it is called Los Angeles smog. Highly poisonous substances like nitrogen dioxide(NO2) and ozone (O3). peroxyacyl nitrate (PAN), smog was formed due to chemical reactions in the presence of bright sunlight, it is commonly known as photochemical smog. Generally, during the mid-days of the summer when the sun shines brightly, (i.e., the intensity of solar radiation is very high) this kind of smog is observed

In big cities, where there is considerable vehicular traffic on the roads throughout the whole day and night, the atmosphere contains the oxides of nitrogen particularly, nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in the largest proportions.

Apart from these, hydrocarbons (produced by evaporation or incomplete combustion of liquid fuels) and other gaseous substances

For example: SO2> CO2  are present.

In the presence of bright substances like ozone (O3), peroxyacyl nitrate (RCO3NO2), aldehyde and ketone. These gaseous substances and the particulates mix together in the air to form photochemical smog.

It formation of smog is to be noted that, it is not real smog, because it contains particulates mix in air to form photochemical smog. The formation of smog is to be noted that, it is not a real smog, because it contains Hence it is also known as oxidising smog

Mechanism for the formation of photochemical smog:

In the presence of sunlight, nitrogen dioxide (NO2) molecule decomposes into nitric oxide (NO) molecules and atomic oxygen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Molecule And Atomic Oxygen

In the reaction of hydrocarbons with this atomic oxygen, at first highly reactive free radical RCO is produced and this radical again combines with oxygen molecule to give peroxyacetyl radical

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Hydrocarbon

Peroxyacyl radical is highly reactive. It combines with hydrocarbon,O2 and XO2 to form a mixture of aldehyde, ketone, ozone and peroxyacyl nitrate respectively. This peroxyacylnitrate is extremely harmful for eyes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Peroxyacyl Nitrate Reaction

Harmful effects of photochemical smog:

  • Presence of large amounts of ozone (O3), peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN), acetaldehyde, ketone etc., causes
    • Irritation of eyes, nose, and throat but it sill effect on the eyes is much more intense
    • Congestion of nostrils, sneezing and cough
    • Respiratory problems and chest pain.
  • By brown colour, it reduces visibility and hence the car drivers and pilots face extreme difficulties.
  • PAN and other oxidising materials damage plant cells and produce white spots on leaves.
  • PAN hinders the process of photosynthesis.
  • Rubber goods lose elastic properties and become brittle.

To control or suppress the formation of photochemical smog, the following methods can be adopted.

  • Certain chemical compounds, which are capable of generating free radicals, are sprayed into the atmosphere. The free radicals readily combine with the free radicals responsible for the formation of photochemical smog (such as O, R, RO, H etc.) and hence nullify their effects.
  • Efficient catalytic converters are being developed for installation in automobiles so that emission of nitrogen oxides and hydrocarbons can be prevented or minimized

Certain plants such as Pinus, Juniperus, Pyrus, Vritis etc., can directly assimilate oxides of nitrogen for their metabolic activity. So their plantation could be helpful.

Comparison between ordinary smog and photochemical smog:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Comparision Between Ordinary Smog and Photochemical Smog

NCERT Solutions for Environmental Chemistry Class 11

Acid Rain

Ordinary water is slightly acidic (pH = 5.6) because a portion of carbon dioxide gas present in the air gets dissolved in water and forms carbonic acid

CO2 + H2O→H2CO3 .

But if rainwater contains an excess amount of dissolved acid, then it is called acid rain. Acid rain is mainly a mixture of H2SO4, HNO3 and HCl. The pH of such rainwater generally lies within the range of 5.6 to 3.5. The proportion of the above acids in the rainwater of different localities depends upon the quantities of sulphur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen oxides (NOx) and hydrogen chloride (HCl) present in the air of that particular locality

1. Origin of Acid Rain

Huge quantities of the oxides of sulphur, nitrogen and carbon (SOx, NOx, COx etc.) are released In the air due to natural processes as well as tyre human activities. These oxides combine with oxygen, ozone and water vapour present in air to give different acids. These acids float in the air in the form of fine particles as an aerosol. Moreover, HCl gas is also liberated in sufficient quantity from the factories. These acids come down to the earth through dew, snow and rainfall

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 14 Environmental Chemistry Acids Rain Of Snow And Rainfall.

H2SO4 has the highest contribution (60-65%) to acid rain followed by HNO3 having 30-35% contribution.

2. Harmful effects of acid rain

Effect on soil and plants:

Acid rain increases the acidity of the soil, changes the solubility of different metals and metallic oxides present in the soil. Thus, living creatures and bacteria living inside the soil are severely affected or die. As a result, the fertility of the soil decreases and the production of crops Is drastically reduced. Due to increased acidity of the soil, leaf pigments get spoiled, the process of photosynthesis and as a consequence the growth of plants and their immunity drastically fall, i.e., agricultural productivity is reduced.

Effect on aquatic plants and animals:

Due to acid rain, the pH of different water bodies decreases significantly. As a result, the production of spawn of fish is reduced. The biological processes of fishes are affected. An increase in acidity results in the elimination of many species of algae and zooplankton, aquatic insects, fishes etc. That is, polluted water disrupts the aquatic food chains and consequently disturbs the ecosystem. In countries like America, Sweden etc., in a large number of lakes, virtually no fish exists due to acid rain.

Effect on mankind:

Acid rain dissolves different metallic substances. These dissolved substances enter human bodies through water and result in severe health hazards. Acid rain has profound ill effects on human skin, hair and cells. H2SO4 and HNO3 present in acid rain enter the human body and adversely affect the nervous, respiratory and digestive systems.

 Effect on architecture and edifice:

Because of acid rain buildings, monuments of historical importance

For example:

Tajmahal, Victoria Memorial, British Parliament House), states, sculptures etc., made of marble;, limestone, dolomite, mortar and slate suffer irreparable damages

Marble, limestone etc., react with H2SO4 to form an insoluble layer of CaSO4 and lose its glossiness

CaCO3+ H2SO4 → CaSO4 ↓+ CO2↑ + H2O

Few years ago, scars developed on the surface of Tajmahal Few years ago, scars developed on the surface ofTajmahal Few years ago, scars developed on the surface of Tajmahal

CBSE Class 11 Environmental Chemistry Important Topics

Slone cancer:

  • The scars that are developed on the surface of architectural edifices, memorials, sculptures etc., are termed stone leprosy or stone cance
  • Metallic surfaces,
    • For example: Aluminium, steel or iron structures, bridges etc., exposed to acid rain, suffer steady.
  • Textile materials, leather and paper products are also not spared from the ill effects of acid rain

3. Measures to check acid rain

Only the drastic reduction in the quantities of SOx and NOx in the environment can eliminate the apprehension rather than the threat of acid rain.

The following measures can be adopted to check acid rain:

Use of fossil fuels is to be decreased as far as practicable. Fuels of low sulphur content should be used so that the emission of SO2 can be controlled.

Suitable technological devices should be developed for the removal of those gases

For example: SOx, NOx etc.)

Released from the thermal plants, factories, furnaces for metal extraction and various other sources

Vehicles involving engines with improved technology must be launched so that the emission of NOx can be controlled

 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Group 1 Elements (Alkali Metals) Introduction

All the alkali metals have one valence electron ( ns¹ ) outside the noble gas core. The loosely held s -electronin the outermost valence shell makes them the most electropositive metals.

  • To get the stable electronic configurations of noble gases, they readily lose the valence electron to generate the monovalent (M+) ions. Hence, they are never found in a free state but in the combined state of nature.
  • Since the last electron enters ns -orbital, these are called s -block elements.
  • Since all these elements have similar valence shells or outer electronic configurations, all the alkali metals exhibit a striking resemblance in their physical and chemical properties and they are placed in a definite group (Gr-1).
  • Lithium shows some abnormal behavior as its electronic configuration is slightly different from the rest of the members of Gr-1 and also because of its extremely small atomic and ionic radii.

Again, lithium shows some similarities with magnesium present in the group- 2 of the third period

Electronic configuration of alkali metals: 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electronic Configuration Of Alkali Metals

Occurrence Of Alkali Metals

  • Since the alkali metals are highly reactive, they do not exist in a free state. In nature, they mostly occur as compounds like halides, oxides, silicates, borates, and nitrates.
  • According to abundance, lithium is placed at the 35th position. It mainly occurs in nature in the tire form of silicates,
  • For example: Spodumene: LiAl(SiO3)2 and Lepidolite: Li2Al2(SiO3)3(F, OH)2
  • Sodium and potassium are respectively placed at 7th and 8th position in order of their abundance. Sea water is a major source of NaCl and KCl.
  • Sodium is abundantly present in the form of rock salt (NaCl). Other important minerals are Chile salt petre: NaNO3, borax: Na2B4O7.10H2O, mirabilite: Na2SO4, and trona: Na2CO3-NaHCO3-2H2O.
  • Important ores of potassium are sylvite: KCl, carnallite: KCl-MgCl2-6H2O, and feldspar: (K2O-Al2O3-6SiO2).
  • Rubidium and cesium are much less abundant than lithium. Radioactive francium does not occur appreciably in nature. It is obtained from the radioactive decay of actinium
  • 227Ac 89223Fr87  +4HeIts longest-lived isotope 223Fr87  has a half¬life period of only 21 minutes.
  • Since most of the compounds of alkali metals are water soluble, they are found in adequate amounts in seawater.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 10 S Block Elements

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Flv Properties Of Alkali Metals

The alkali metals show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties with an increase in atomic number. Some important atomic and physical properties of alkali metals are given in the following table:

Atomic and physical properties of alkali metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkali Metals

General trends in different atomic and physical properties of alkali metals and their explanations:

1. Atomic and ionic radii 

The atomic and ionic radii of alkali metals are the largest in their respective periods and these values further increase on moving down the group from Li to Cs.

Atomic and ionic radii  Explanation:

On moving from left to right in a period, the number of electronic shells remains the same but the nuclear charge increases with each succeeding element Thus, the valence shell electrons experience a greater pull towards the nucleus and this results in successive decreases in atomic and ionic radii with an increase in atomic number

  • Thus, the atomic and ionic radii of alkali metals are the largest in their respective periods.
  • On moving down the group, a new electronic shell is ) added to each element and the nuclear charge increases with an increase in atomic number.
  • The addition of an electronic shell tends to increase the size of the atom but the increase in nuclear charge tends to decrease the atomic radii by attracting the electron cloud inward. Thus, the two factors oppose each other.
  • However, the increase in the number of shells increases the screening effect of the inner electrons on the outermost s -electron and as the screening effect is, quite large, it overcomes the contractive effect of the increased nuclear charge.
  • The net result is an increase in atomic and ionic radii down the group from Li to Cs.

2. Ionization enthalpy

The first ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are the lowest in their respective periods. Explanation: Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily.

1. Ionization enthalpy of group-1 alkali metals decreases down the group.

Explanation:

Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily.

2. Ionisation enthalpy7 of group-1 alkali metals decreases down the group

Explanation:

On moving down the group from Li to Cs, the distance of the valence s-electron from the nucleus progressively increases due to the addition of a new shell with each succeeding element With an increase in the number of inner shells, the screening effects progressively increase and as a result, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the valence electron progressively decreases and hence, the ionization enthalpies decrease down the group.

3. The second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high.

Explanation:

The monovalent cation formed by the removal of an electron from the alkali metal atom has a very stable noble gas configuration,

For example – 

  1. Li+: 1s2 or [He], Na+: 1s22s22p
  2. [Ne], k+: 1s22s22p63s23p6 or [Ar] etc.

Removal of another electron from the monovalent ion having a stable noble gas configuration is very difficult and requires a huge amount of energy. For this reason, the second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high.

3. Hydration of ions, hydrated radii, and hydration enthalpy

The salts of alkali metals are generally ionic and are soluble in water because the cations get hydrated in water to form hydrated cations: M+ + aq —> [M(aq)]+.

1. The degree of hydration of ions and the hydrated radii decrease as we move down the group

Explanation:

The smaller the cation, the greater its degree of hydration. Since ionic radii increase down the group, the degree of hydration decreases, and consequently, the radii of die-hydrated ions decrease from Li+ to Cs+.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Hydrated Ions

2. The order of mobilities of die alkali metal ions in aqueous solution is: Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+

Explanation:

Smaller ions are more easily hydrated. As Li+ is the smallest ion among the given ions, it is most easily hydrated and has the least ionic mobility in an aqueous solution whereas Cs+ is the largest and is least hydrated. So its mobility is die highest.

3. Ionic conductance of the hydrated ions increases from [Li(m7)]+ to [Cs(aq)]+.

Explanation:

The ionic conductance of these hydrated ions increases from [Li(aq)]+ to [Cs(ag)]+ because die size decreases and mobility increases in this order. Hydration of ions is an exothermic process. The energy released when 1 gram-mol of an ion undergoes hydration is called hydration energy or hydration enthalpy,

4. Hydration enthalpy of alkali metal ions decreases from Li+ to Cs+.

Explanation:

The hydration enthalpy of an ion depends upon the ratio of charge to radius (q: r). Since the radii of alkali metal ions increase down the group, the hydration enthalpies decrease from Li+ to Cs+. Li+ ion has the maximum degree of hydration and for this reason, most of the lithium salts are found to be hydrated

For example: LiCl-2H2O, LiClO4-3H2O etc.

4. Oxidation State

Alkali metals exhibit a +1 oxidation state in their compounds and it remains restricted in a +1 state only.

Oxidation State Explanation: 

Alkali metals have low ionization enthalpies and by losing their valence s -electrons they acquire the stable electronic configurations of the nearest noble gases. Thus, they have a strong tendency to form M+ ions and exhibit a +1 oxidation state in their compounds.

The second ionization enthalpies required to pull out another electron from M+ ions having very unstable noble gas electronic configuration are very high indeed and are not available under the conditions of chemical bond formation. Hence,v the alkali metals do not form M2+ ions, i.e. their oxidation state remains restricted to +1 state.

5. Metallic character

The elements of this group are typical metals that are soft (can be easily cut with a knife) and light. When freshly cut, they are silvery white but on exposure to air, they turn tarnished. The metallic character, which refers to the level of reactivity of a metal, increases on moving down the group.

Metallic character Explanation:

As the ionization enthalpy decreases down the group,  the tendency to lose the valence electron increases, and consequently, the metallic character increases.

6. Photoelectric effect

Alkali metals (except Li) exhibit a photoelectric effect. The emission of electrons from the surface of a metal exposed to electromagnetic radiations of suitable wavelength is called the photoelectric effect.

S Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

Photoelectric effect Explanation:

Due to low ionization enthalpies, the alkali metals exhibit a photoelectric effect. It is to be noted that lithium having the highest ionisation enthalpy does not exhibit a photoelectric effect. Cesium having the lowest ionisation enthalpy possesses the highest tendency to exhibit a photoelectric effect.

Potassium anti-cesium, rather than lithium is used in photoelectric cells:

The ionization enthalpies of potassium and cesium are much lower than that of lithium. For this reason, these two metals on exposure to light easily emit electrons from their surface but lithium does not. Hence, potassium and cesium rather than lithium are used in photoelectric cells.

7. Electronegativity

The alkali metals have low electronegativity which further decreases down the group.

Electronegativity Explanation:

The alkali metals having ns¹ electronic configuration preferably show electron releasing tendency rather than electron accepting. Thus, they have low electronegativities. Since the atomic sizes increase down the group, the tendency of atoms to hold their valence electrons decreases down the group, and consequently, electronegativity decreases down the group.

8. Conductivity

Alkali metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

Conductivity Explanation:

Due to the presence of loosely bound valence electrons (ns¹) which are free to move throughout the metal structure, the alkali metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

9. Melting and boiling points 

Melting and boiling points: Melting and boiling points of alkali metals are low and decrease down tire group.

Melting and boiling point Explanation:

The cohesive energy that binds the atoms in the crystal lattices of these metals is relatively low (weak metallic bonding) due to the presence of only one valence electron (ns¹) which can take part in bonding. Hence, their melting and boiling points are low. These further decrease down the group as the strength of the metallic bonds and cohesive energy decrease with increasing atomic size.

10. Nature of bonds formed

Alkali metals form ionic compounds and the ionic character of compounds increases down the group from Li to Cs.

Nature of bonds formed Explanation:

For low ionization enthalpies, alkali metals readily form monovalent cations by losing their valence electrons. As ionization enthalpies decrease down the group, the ionic character of the compounds increases down the group.

11. Density

The densities of alkali metals are quite low and increase down the group from Li to Cs.

Density Explanation:

Due to their large atomic size and weak metallic bond, alkali metals have low density. Both the atomic volume and the atomic mass increase down the group but the corresponding increase in atomic mass is not balanced by the increase in atomic volume. As a result, the densities of alkali metals increase down the group. However, the density of K is less than that of Na because the atomic size and atomic volume of potassium are quite higher than that of sodium. As a result, the ratio of mass/ volume decreases.

Li is the lightest metal having a density of 0.53 g. cm-3. It cannot be preserved in kerosene because it floats over it. Generally kept wrapped in paraffin wax.

12. Flame coloration

Alkali metals or their salts on heating in the flame of the bunsen burner, impart characteristic colors and they can be easily identified from the color of the flame

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Flame Colouration

Flame coloration Explanation:

Ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are not much higher. Thus, when an alkali metal or its salt (especially chloride due to its more volatile nature) is heated in a Bunsen burner flame, the electrons in the valence shell get excited and jump to higher energy levels by absorbing energy. When the excited electron drops back to its ground state, the emitted radiation falls in the visible region and as a result, alkali metals or their salts impart color to the flame.

Alkali metals can be detected by flame tests and can be estimated by flame photometry or atomic absorption spectroscopy.

13. Softness

Alkali metals are soft (can be cut easily with die help of a knife) and their softness increases down the group.

Softness Explanation:

The softness of alkali metals is due to their low cohesive energy and weak metallic bonding. Further, on moving down the group, the strength of metallic bonding decreases due to an increase in atomic size and as a result, the softness of the metals increases down the group.

Chemical Properties Of Alkali Metals

Alkali metals are highly reactive. Such reactivity may be attributed to their large atomic size, low ionization enthalpies, and low heats of atomization. –

Action of air and moisture

Alkali metals, being highly reactive, react readily with atmospheric oxygen to form oxides. These oxides further react with moisture to form hydroxides which in turn produce carbonates by reacting with atmospheric CO2

Metal oxides also react with CO2 to form carbonates.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Air And Moisture

These metals lose their glossiness and become tarnished due to the formation of carbonate layers on their surface. To protect from atmospheric oxygen and moisture, these metals are always stored in inert hydrocarbon solvents such as kerosene, petroleum ether, etc.

Reaction with oxygen

When the alkali metals are heated with oxygen or excess air, they form different types of oxides depending upon the nature of the metal involved. Lithium mainly forms monoxide (Li2O), sodium forms peroxide (Na2O2), and the other alkali metals (K, Rb, and Cs) mainly form superoxides having the general formula MO2. The temperature required for the reaction decreases down the group from Li to Cs.

4Li + O2 → 2Li2 O2 (Lithium monoxide)

2Na + O2 → Na2O2 (Sodium peroxide)

M +O2 → MO2 (Superoxide) [here, M = K, Rb, Cs]

 Oxygen Explanation

A smaller cation can stabilize a smaller anion while a larger cation can stabilize a larger anion. If both the ions are similar in size, the coordination number will be high and this results in higher lattice energy.

A cation having a weak positive electric field can stabilize an anion having a weak negative electric field. Li ion and oxide ion (O2-) have small ionic radii and high charge densities. Hence, these small ions combine to form a very’ stable lattice of Li2O.

Sodium forms peroxide (Na2O2) but potassium forms superoxide (KO2), even though the peroxide ion,  CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Peroxide is larger in size than the superoxide ion, CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements SuperoxideThis can be explained in terms of charge densities. Due to the bigger size

Na+ ion has a weaker positive field around It and therefore it can stabilise peroxide Ion which also has a weaker negative field around it. Thus, Na+ forms peroxide. K+ ion is still bigger in size and the magnitude of the positive field around it is much weaker so it can’t stabilize superoxide ion which also has a much weaker negative field around it. Hence, K forms superoxide.

According to valence bond theory, two O-atoms in superoxide ion (O2) are attached by a 2- 2-electron bond (common covalent bond) and a 2-electron bond. As the unpaired electron is present in the 2-electron bond, the superoxide ion is paramagnetic and all tire superoxides are colored (LiO2 and NaO2 are yellow, KO2 & CsO2 are orange, RbO2 is brown).

According to MO theory, there is an unpaired electron in one of the n antibonding orbitals and because of this, the superoxide ion is paramagnetic. The electronic configuration of O2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Paramagnetic In Nature Of Electronic Configuration

O2 ion present in common oxides [For example,  Li2O, NaO2etc.) and the 02~ ion in peroxides (For example,  Na2O2), contain no unpaired electron and for this reason, these are diamagnetic and colorless.

Reaction with water

The alkali metals having high negative reduction potentials (E°) can act as a better-reducing agent than hydrogen. Hence, they react with water to form water-soluble hydroxides and liberate hydrogen gas.

2M + 2H2O → 2MOH + H2T [M = alkali metal]

Reactivity with water increases down the group as the electropositive character of the metals increases clown the group. Lithium decomposes water slowly. Sodium reacts with water vigorously. K, Rb, and Cs react with water explosively and the evolved hydrogen gas catches fire.

Alkali metals also react with compounds containing acidic H-atoms

For example:  halogen halides (HX), alcohols (ROH), acetylene HC=CH, etc., to form their corresponding salts and H2

2Na + 2HX → 2NaX  (Sodium halide) + H2

Li + 2C2H5OH → 2 C2 H5 OLi (Lithium ethoxide) + H2

2Na + 2HC=CH →  2NaC = CH (Sodium acetylide)+ H2

The standard electrode potential of Li is most negative while that of sodium is least negative i.e., in the reaction with water, Li releases a greater amount of heat than sodium. Despite that, Li reacts less vigorously with water than Na. j This can be explained concerning chemical kinetics. Na has a low melting point and the heat of the reaction is sufficient j to melt it. Molten metal spreads out and exposes a relatively large surface to water and as a result, it reacts with water 1 readily and violently. On the other hand, the melting point of Li is much higher and the heat of the reaction is not sufficient to melt it. Hence, its surface area does not increase and it reacts slowly with water.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements

Reaction with dihydrogen

All alkali metals react with dihydrogen at about 673 K (Li at 1073 K) to form colorless, crystalline hydrides (MH). These hydrides have a high melting point.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Dihydrogen

1. The reactivity of the alkali metals towards dihydrogen decreases down the group.

Explanation:

As the size of the metal cation increases down the group, the lattice energy of the hydrides decreases down the group. Consequently, the reactivity of the alkali metals towards hydrogen decreases down the group,

2. The ionic character of the alkali metal hydrides increases from Li to Cs.

Explanation:

Since the ionization enthalpy of alkali metals decreases down the group, the tendency to form cations as well as the ionic character of the hydrides increases.

Reaction with halogens

All alkali metals react vigorously with halogens to form crystalline halide compounds having the general formula MX. Lithium halides are covalent due to the very high polarising power of the Li+ ion. Halides of other alkali metals are ionic in nature’

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{M}+\mathrm{X}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{M}^{+} \mathrm{X}^{-}\) ( X = F, Cl, Br or I)

The reactivity of the alkali metals towards a particular halogen increases down the group.  Due to a decrease in ionization enthalpies or an increase in the electropositive character of the metals down the group, the reactivity increases down the group.

The reactivity of halogens towards a particular alkali metal decreases in the order:

F2> Cl2 > Br2 > I2

Reducing nature

The alkali metals act as strong reducing agents because of their low ionization enthalpies. Since the ionization enthalpies decrease on moving down the group, therefore, in the free state the reducing power also increases in the same order, i.e., Li  < Na < K < Rb < Cs.

The tendency of a metal to lose an electron in solution is measured by its standard electrode potential (E°). The alkali metals have low values (higher negative values) of E° and so they have a strong tendency to lose electrons and can act as strong reducing agents. Lithium, although, has the highest ionization enthalpy, is the strongest reducing agent in solution (E° = -3.04 V). On the other hand, Na is the weakest reducing agent and the reducing character increases from Na to Cs, i.e., Na < K < Rb < Cs.

Explanation of anomalous behavior of lithium

The anomalous behavior of lithium can be explained because the ionization enthalpy is the property of an isolated atom in the gaseous state while the standard electrode potential is concerned when the metal atom goes into solution.

The ionization enthalpy involves the change:

M(g) → M++(g) + e, while the standard electrode potential involves the change: M(s) → M+(aq) + e.

The latter change occurs in three steps as follows:

  1. M(s)→ M(g) – sublimation enthalpy
  2. M(g)→ M+(g) + e – ionisation enthalpy
  3. M+ (g) + H9O → M+(aq) + hydration enthalpy

The overall tendency for the change depends on the net effect of these three steps. Among the alkali metal cations, Li+ ion has the maximum tendency to get hydrated due to its very small size. The high hydration enthalpy compensates the energy required in the first two steps to a large extent and the overall energy required to convert M(s) to M+ (aq) is minimum for lithium.

Thus, small size and high hydration enthalpy are responsible for the strong reducing character of lithium.

The solution in liquid ammonia

Alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia to give highly conducting deep blue solutions which are highly reducing and paramagnetic. As the concentration increases (> 3M), the color of the solution changes to copper-bronze. These concentrated solutions are diamagnetic.

Solution in liquid ammonia Explanation:

1. When an alkali metal is dissolved in liquid v ammonia, ammoniated cations, and ammoniated electrons are formed as shown below:

M + (x+ y)NH3 →  [M(NH3)x]+ (Ammoniated cation) + [e(NH3)y](Ammoniated electron)

2. The blue color of these solutions is due to the excitation of the free ammoniated electrons to higher energy levels by absorbing energy corresponding to the red region of visible light.  The transmitted light is blue which imparts a blue color to the solutions.

3. With the increase in the concentration of the alkali metal, the formation of clusters of metal ions starts and because of this, at a much higher concentration (> 3M) the solutions possess metallic luster and attain the color of copper-bronze.

4. These blue solutions are highly conducting because of the presence of ammoniated electrons and ammoniated cations but the conductivity decreases with increasing concentration as the ammoniated cations get attached to the free unpaired electrons.

5. These blue solutions are paramagnetic due to the presence of unpaired electrons. However, tire paramagnetism decreases with increasing concentration due to the association of ammoniated electrons to yield diamagnetic species.

6. The free ammoniated electrons make these solutions very powerful reducing agents.

7. These solutions when kept, form metal amides and release H2. However, these solutions can be stored in anhydrous conditions in the absence of impurities like Fe, Pt, Zn, etc.

M+(am) + e(am) + NH3(l)→ MNH2(am) + ½H2(g)

Where ‘am’ stands for ‘solution in ammonia

2M + 2NH3→ 2MNH2 (metal amide)+ H2

Extraction of alkali metals

Alkali metals cannot be extracted by applying common processes used for the extraction of other metals.

Alkali metals Explanation:

  • The alkali metals are strong reducing agents. Hence, they cannot be extracted by reduction of their oxides or other compounds.
  • Since they are highly electropositive, the method of displacing them from their salts by any other element is not possible.
  • The aqueous solution of their salts cannot be used for extraction by electrolytic method because hydrogen, instead of the alkali metal is discharged at the cathode (discharge potentials of alkali metals are much higher).
  • However, by using Hg as a cathode, the alkali metals can be deposited but in that case, the alkali metals readily combine with mercury to form amalgams from which the recovery of metals becomes quite difficult.
  • The electrolysis of their fused salts (usually chlorides) is the only successful method for their extraction, Another metal . ‘ chloride is generally added to lower its fusion temperature

General Characteristics Of The Compounds Of Alkali Metals

The compounds of alkali metals are predominantly ionic. Some of the general characteristics of these compounds are described below.

1. Oxides and hydroxides

1. Typical oxides or monoxides of alkali metals

For example: Li2O and Na2O are white ionic solids and basic. These oxides react with water to form strong alkalis (MOH).

Example:  Na2O + HO → 2NaOH

2. All peroxides are strong oxidizing agents. They react with water or acid to give hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) and the corresponding metal hydroxide. Na2O2 is widely used as an oxidizing agent in inorganic chemistry.

M2O2 + 2H2O →  2MOH + H2O2

Example: Na2O2 + 2H2O2→ 2NaOH + H2O2

3. Superoxides are stronger oxidizing agents than peroxides and react with water or acid to give both H2O2 and O2 along with metal hydroxide.

2MO2 + 2H2O→  2MOIH + H2O2+ O2

Example: 2KO2 + 2H2O2 →2KOH + H2O2 + O2

The alkali metal hydroxides (MOH) are all white crystalline solids and corrosive. They are the strongest of all bases and readily dissolve in water. Due to excess hydration, a large amount of heat is released. These hydroxides are thermally stable except Li OH. The basic strength of alkali metal hydroxides increases on moving down the group from Li to Cs.

Explanation:

The ionization enthalpies of alkali metals decrease on moving down the group and this causes a weakening of the bond between the alkali metal and the hydroxyl group (M —OH). This results in an increase in the concentration of hydroxyl ions in the solution, i.e.,  the basic character of the solution increases on moving down the group.

Thus, the basic strength of the hydroxides follows the order:

CsOH > RbOH > KOH > NaOH > LiOH

2. Halides

The alkali metal halides can be prepared by combining metals directly with halogens or by reacting appropriate oxides, hydroxides or carbonates with aqueous halogen acids (HX).

2M + X→  2MX ; M2 O + 2HX↓ 2MX + H2 O

MOH + HX→ MX + H2 O

M2 CO3+ 2HX→ 2MX + HO2 + CO2

The enthalpy of formation (ΔH°f) of alkali metal halides is highly negative. For a given metal, AHj values decrease from fluoride to iodide. These halides are colorless crystalline solids having high melting and boiling points.

1. The melting point of halides of a particular alkali metal decreases as:

Fluoride > Chloride > Bromide > Iodide.

Explanation:

For a particular alkali metal ion, the lattice enthalpies decrease as the size of the halide ion increases.

Lattice enthalpies of NaP, NaCl, Nalir, and Nal are 893, 770,730, and 685 kJ. mol-1 respectively, A.s the lattice enthalpy decreases, the energy required to break the crystal lattice decreases, and consequently, the melting points decrease. Thus, the melting points of NaF, NaCl, NaBr, and Nal are found to be 1201K, 10IMK, 1028 K, and 944 K respectively.

2. For a particular halide ion, the melting point of IJX is less than that of

NaX and thereafter the melting points decrease on moving down the group from Na to Cs.

Explanation:

The melting point of LiCl (887K) is less than that of NaCl (I084K), because LiCl is covalent (for smaller atomic size of Li compared to that of Na), but NaCl is ionic. Thereafter, the order of melting point is:

NaCl(1084K)>KCl(1039K)>RbCI(988K)>CsCl(925K) This is observed because the lattice enthalpies decrease as the size of the alkali metal atom increases.

3. Solubilities of the alkali metal halides (except fluorides) decrease on moving down the group since the decrease in hydration enthalpy is more than the corresponding decrease in the lattice enthalpy.

For example, the difference in lattice enthalpy between NaCl and KCl is 67kJ. mol-1 whereas the difference in hydration enthalpy between Na+ and K+ ion is 76 kj -mol-1 Thus, KCl is relatively less soluble in water compared to NaCl.

Explanation:

The solubility of a salt in water depends on its lattice enthalpy as well as its hydration enthalpy. In general, if hydration enthalpy > lattice enthalpy, the salt dissolves in water but if the hydration enthalpy < lattice enthalpy, the salt does not dissolve.

Further, the extent of hydration depends on the ionic size. The smaller the size of the ion, the more it will get hydrated and the greater will be its hydration enthalpy. LiF, for example, is almost insoluble in water because of its higher lattice enthalpy (-1005 kJ . mol-1 ).

On the other hand, the low solubility of Csl in water is due to smaller hydration enthalpies of the two large ions [-276(Cs+)-305(I) = -581 kJ.-mol-1]. o Due to the smaller size and relatively higher electronegativity of Li, lithium halides except LiF are predo¬minantly covalent and hence, are soluble in organic solvents such as acetone, alcohol, ethyl acetate etc.

In contrast, sodium chloride, being ionic, is insoluble in organic solvents.

3. Soils of oxoacids

Alkali metals react with c to acids such as carbonic acid (H2CO3), nitric acid (HNO3), sulphuric acid (H8SO4), etc., to form corresponding salts and release H2. Due to the high polarising power and lattice energy of small Li ions, lithium salts behave abnormally.

4. Nature of carbonates and bicarbonates

All alkali metals form carbonates of the type M2CO3. Since the alkali metals are highly electropositive, their carbonates are remarkably stable up to l000°C above which they first melt and then decompose to form oxides. These salts are readily soluble in water. As electropositive character increases down the group, the stability of carbonates increases in the same order:

Cs2CO3 > Rb2CO3 > K2CO3 > Na2CO3 > Li2CO3

Li2CO3 is insoluble in water and unstable towards heat. It decomposes readily to give Li2O and CO2.

Explanation:

1. The very small L ion exerts a strong polarising power on the large carbonate (CO32-) ion and distorts the electron cloud of its nearby oxygen atom.

This results in the weakening of the C—O bond and the strengthening of the Li — O bond. This eventually facilitates the decomposition of Li2CO3 leading to the formation of Li2O and CO2. %

2. The crystal lattice formed by a smaller Li+ ion with a smaller O2 ion is more stable than that 2  formed by a larger CO3 ion and a smaller Li+ ion. This also favors the decomposition of Li2CO3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Li Exerts A Strong Polarising Power On The Large Carbonate

3. The aqueous solution of carbonates is alkaline. This is because carbonates being the salts of strong bases and weak acids (H2CO3) undergo hydrolysis.

M2CO3 + 2H2O  ⇌  2MOH (strong base) + H2CO3 (weak acid)

4. Bicarbonates or hydrogen carbonates (MHCO3) of the alkali metals except LiHCO3 are obtained in the solid state. These bicarbonates are soluble in water and stable towards heat. On strong heating, all the bicarbonates undergo decomposition to yield carbonates with the evolution of carbon dioxide.

2MHCO3 (heat)→ M2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

As the electropositive character of the metals increases down the group from Li to Cs, the stability of the bicarbonates increases in the same order.

5. Nature of nitrates

The alkali metal nitrates (MNO3) are prepared by the action of HNO3 on the corresponding carbonates or hydroxides. They are ionic crystalline solids having low melting points and are highly soluble in water. On strong heating, they (except LiNO3 ) decompose into nitrites and at higher temperatures oxides.

S Block Elements Chapter 10 NCERT Notes

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nitrites And At High Temperatures

LiNO3 decomposes readily on heating to give

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Decomposes Readily An Heating

6. Nature of sulphates

The alkali metals form sulfates of the type M2SO4. All the sulfates except Li2SO4 are soluble in water. The sulfates when fused with charcoal, form sulphides.

M2SO4.+ 4C→  M2 S + 4CO

Sulfates of alkali metals form double salts with the sulfates of trivalent metals like Fe, Al, Cr, etc. These double salts crystallize with a large number of water molecules to form alum. A typical example is potassium aluminum

[K2SO4→ Al2(SO4)3 -24H2O].

Lithium sulfate (Li2SO4) is not known to form alum.

Anomalous Behaviour Of Lithium (Li) And Similarity Between Li And Mg

Although lithium, the first element of group 1, exhibits most of the characteristic properties of this group, yet it differs from other members of this group in several respects.

Reasons for anomalous behavior of lithium

  1. Both Li- atom and Li+ ion have very small sizes.
  2. Much higher polarising power of very small Li+ ion results in increased Points of difference between lithium and other alkali metals covalent character of its compounds.
  3. Lithium has the lowest electropositive character, the highest ionization enthalpy, and the highest electronegativity compared to the rest of the members.
  4. Non-availability of d -d-orbital in its valence (outermost) shell.
  5. Strong intermetallic bonding (cohesive force) due to its small size. On the other hand, lithium shows a diagonal relationship with magnesium

Points of difference between lithium and other alkali metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Lithium And Other Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Lithium And Other Alkali Metals.

Reasons for the similarities between lithium & magnesium:

Lithium exhibits a diagonal relationship with the 3rd-period group-2 element, magnesium. Reasons for the similarities between lithium and magnesium

  • The atomic as well as ionic radii of Li and Mg are almost the same (Li+ = 76 pm and Mg2+ = 72 pm).
  • Both lithium and magnesium have almost similar electronegativities (Li = 0.98 and Mg = 1.2).

Similarities between lithium and magnesium:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Similarities Between Lithium And Magnesium

Uses Of Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkali Metals.

Preparation, Properties, And Uses Of Some Important Compounds Of Sodium

1. Sodium carbonate (washing soda), (Na2CO3-10H2O)

1. Manufacture: Ammonia-soda or Solvay process

Sodium carbonate is commonly known as washing soda. It is generally manufactured by the Solvay process or ammonia-soda process.

Principle: When carbon dioxide is passed through an aqueous solution of NaCl (brine, 28% NaCl solution) saturated with ammonia, sodium bicarbonate is formed.

NH3 + CO2 + H2O > NH4HCO3

NH4HCO3 + NaCl  ⇌ NaHCO3 + NH4Cl

Due to the common ion effect of Na+ ion, sodium bicarbonate so formed gets precipitated. Such removal of solid NaHCO3 shifts the reaction more and more towards the right. This results in a greater yield of NaHCO3.  In this way, a nearly two-thirds portion of NaCl is converted into NaHCO3. The precipitated NaHCO3 is then filtered off, dried, and heated at 150°C to get sodium carbonate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Heated On Sodium Carbonate

Evolved CO2 is reused to saturate the ammoniated brine.

Raw materials:

  1. Brine solution (28% aqueous solution of NaCl),
  2. Limestone or calcium carbonate (CaCO3) it is the source of CO2 and
  3. Ammonia.

2. Description of the process

Preparation of ammoniated brine: 

1. This process is carried out in the absorption tower made of iron

2.  From an overhead tank, brine is allowed to trickle down slowly along the tower and ammonia gas from the ammonia recovery tower which is mixed with a small amount of CO2 is allowed to pass through a tube situated near the bottom of the tower. As a result, the brine solution gets saturated with ammonia while calcium chloride and magnesium chloride are present as impurities in commercial.

3. Sodium chloride gets precipitated as their corresponding insoluble carbonates.

2NH3 + CO3 + H2O → (NH4)2CO3

CaCl2 + (NH4)CO3 → 2NH4Cl + CaCO3

MgCl2 + (NH4)2CO3 → 2NH4Cl + MgCO3

4. The ammoniated brine is then filtered to remove the precipitated calcium and magnesium carbonates and the filtrate thus obtained is passed into the carbonation tower.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Manufacture Of Sodium Carbonate

Carbonation of ammoniated brine:

1. This operation is carried out in a long cast iron tower (carbonation or Solvay tower). The tower is fitted with several horizontal plates.

2. The ammoniated brine solution is trickled down from the top of the tower while CO2 gas from the lime kiln is introduced into the tower under high pressure through a pipe fitted at the base of the tower.

3. In this way, CO2 comes in contact with the descending stream of ammoniated brine and they react with each other to form ammonium bicarbonate which subsequently combines with NaCl to produce sodium bicarbonate and ammonium chloride.

NH3 + CO2 + H2O →  NH4HCO3

NaCl + NH4HCO3 →  NaHCO3↓ + NH4Cl

Separation of sodium bicarbonate:

1. The solution coming out of the carbonation tower contains crystals of NaHCO3. These are separated by passing the solution through vacuum filters.

2. The separated sodium bicar¬bonate is washed with water to remove any sodium or ammonium chloride that may adhere to it and then dried.

3. The filtrate containing NH4Cl and a small amount of NH4HCO3 is taken to the ammonia recovery tower where it comes in contact with Ca(OH)2.

Calcination:

When the dry NaHCO3 is heated strongly in a furnace at 180°C, it decomposes to form anhydrous Na2CO3. It is called soda ash. It is nearly 99.5 % pure.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Calcination

Evolved CO2 is reused in the carbonation tower or absorption tower

Recovery of ammonia:

The filtrate from the carbonation tower which contains ammonium chloride and a little ammonium bicarbonate is made to flow down the ammonia recovery tower. NH4HCO3 is decomposed by the heat of steam and NH4Cl reacts with calcium hydroxide to form ammonia, carbon dioxide, and CaCl2. The mixture of NH3 and CO2 is used for tire saturation of brine while calcium chloride is obtained as a by-product.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Recovery Of Ammonia

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Recovery Of Ammonia.

Potassium carbonate (K2CO3) cannot be prepared by the Soh’ay process. This is because unlike sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate (KHCO3) which is fairly soluble in water does not get precipitated when CO2 is passed through the ammoniated solution of KCl.

 Properties of Sodium carbonate: 

1. State:

Sodium carbonate is available either as anhydrous salt or as hydrated salt. The hydrated salts are white crystalline substances and are mainly of two types

  1. Decahydrate (Na2CO3-10H2O) and
  2. Monohydrate (Na2CO2-H2O).

The decahydrate is also called washing soda. The anhydrous salt commonly known as soda ash, is a white powder. When sodium carbonate is crystallized from water, the decahydrate is obtained as white transparent crystals. These crystals are efflorescent. When exposed to air for a long time, crystals of decahydrate partially lose their water of crystallization and is converted to monohydrate, a powdery substance which is known as crystal carbonate.

⇒ \(\mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3 \cdot 10 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3 \cdot \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+9 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

2. Action of heat:

When the decahydrate is heated up to 100°C, it slowly loses nine molecules of water of crystallization and gets converted into monohydrate. When the monohydrate is heated above 100°C, the anhydrous salt (Na2CO3) is produced as a white powder which melts at high temperatures but never undergoes decomposition.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Heat

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Heat.

Anhydrous Na2CO3 or soda ash melts at higher temperatures (melting point 852°C) but does not decompose. It turns to monohydrate when kept in the air.

3. Hydrolysis:

It dissolves in water with the evolution of a considerable amount of heat. Being a salt of a weak acid (HCO3) and a strong base (NaOH), it undergoes hydrolysis in water to give an alkaline solution.

⇒\(\mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons 2\left[\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3\)

4. Reaction with acid:

At ordinary temperature, Na2CO3 reacts with dilute mineral acids to form the corresponding sodium salts and water along with the evolution of CO2

Na2CO3 + 2HCl→2NaCl + CO2↑ + H2O

Na2CO3 + 2CH3COOH→2CH3COONa + CO2↑ + H2O

Reaction with slaked lime: When a solution of Na2CO3 is heated with slaked lime (milk of lime) at 80°C, sodium hydroxide with insoluble calcium carbonate is obtained.

Na2CO3  + Ca(OH)2 → CaCO3↓+ 2NaOH

Uses of sodium carbonate:

  • Sodium carbonate is mainly used for softening hard water and for washing clothes.
  • It is used in fire extinguishers.
  • It is largely used in the manufacture of soap, glass, borax, and caustic soda.
  • It is used in the paper, paint, and textile industries.
  • A mixture of Na2CO3 and K2CO3 is used as a fusion mixture.
  • It is used as an important laboratory reagent both in qualitative and quantitative analysis.

2. Sodium bicarbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate (baking soda), NaHCO3

Preparation of sodium bicarbonate:

Sodium hydrogen carbonate is obtained as the intermediate product in the Solvay process of manufacturing sodium carbonate.

It can also be prepared by passing CO2 through a saturated solution of sodium carbonate. Being less soluble, the white crystals of sodium hydrogen carbonate can be filtered out and dried at room temperature.

Na2CO3 + H2O+ CO2 ⇌ 2NaHCO3

Properties of sodium bicarbonate:

1. State: It is a white crystalline solid and is sparingly soluble in cold water. It is also stable in air.

2. Hydrolysis: Being a salt of weak acid (H2CO3) and strong base (NaOH), it hydrolyses to give a faintly alkaline solution.

NaHCO3 + H2O ⇌  [Na+ + OH] + H2CO3

3. Action of heat: On heating, it decomposes to form CO2, water, and sodium carbonate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sodium Bicarbonate Of Action Of Heat

4. Reaction with acids: At ordinary temperature, it reacts with mineral acids to form CO2, water, and the sodium salt of the acid:

NaHCO3 + HCl→ NaCl + CO2 ↑ + H2O

Uses of sodium bicarbonate:

  • It is used as an antacid (known as soda bi-carb). It is also used as a mild antiseptic for skin infections.
  • It is the chief ingredient of ‘baking powder’ which is used in preparing breads, biscuits, cakes etc.
  • It is used in the preparation of soft drinks like soda- water, lemonades, etc.
  • It is also used in fire extinguishers.

3. Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda), NaOH

Manufacture of sodium hydroxide:

Sodium hydroxide is industrially prepared by the electrolysis of an aqueous solution of NaCl (brine) in a specially designed cell called the Castner-Kellner cell or mercury cathode cell.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements Notes PDF

Sodium hydroxide Principle:

When a brine solution is electrolyzed in a cell using a mercury cathode and graphite anode, metallic sodium discharged at the cathode combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam. Now, electrolysis of slightly alkaline water in the cell using sodium amalgam as anode and iron rod as cathode produces NaOH. The reaction between sodium amalgam and water also produces NaOH.

Sodium hydroxide  Procedure:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Castner Kellner Cell For The Manufacture Of NaoH

1.  The cell consists of a large rectangular iron tank divided into three compartments by two slate partitions which do not touch the bottom of the tank but remain suspended in mercury placed in the grooves

2. The graphite anodes are fixed in the two outer compartments and the cathode which consists of several iron rods is fitted in the central compartment.

3. The layer of mercury at the bottom serves as an intermediate electrode as a cathode in the outer compartment and as an anode in the central compartment by induction.

4. The brine solution is taken in the two outer compartments and a very dilute NaOH solution is taken in the central compartment.

5. The mercury layer is made to flow from one compartment to another by rocking the cell with the help of an eccentric wheel.  On passing electric current, the following reactions take place in the outer and central compartments.

6. In the outer compartment, NaCl undergoes electrolysis. Cl2 gas formed at the anode comes out from the outlet tube while sodium liberated at the cathode combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam.

NaCl → Na++ Cl ; H2 O → H+ + OH

  • At cathode: Na+ + e →Na; Na + Hg→ Na/Hg
  • At anode,: Cl→ Cl + e; Cl + Cl→ Cl2

7. In the central compartment, sodium amalgam (Na/Hg) acts as an anode by induction.

⇒ \(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}, \mathrm{NaOH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)

  • At cathode: \(\mathrm{H}^{+}+e \longrightarrow \mathrm{H} ; \mathrm{H}+\mathrm{H} \longrightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)
  • At anode: \(\mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{Hg} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+e+\mathrm{Hg}\)

Net reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{Hg}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2\left(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{+}\right)+2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

The concentration of NaOH in the central compartment gradually increases with the progress of electrolysis and when it becomes 20%, the solution is withdrawn, evaporated and converted into pellets or flakes of NaOH.

Properties of sodium hydroxide:

1. State: It is a white, crystalline hygroscopic solid having a melting point of 318°C.

2. Solubility: It dissolves in water with the evolution of heat, giving a strong alkaline solution. It also dissolves in alcohol.

3. Hygroscopic and corrosive nature:

The crystals of NaOH are deliquescent (hygroscopic). When exposed to air they absorb moisture from air and dissolve in the absorbed water. Moist caustic soda generally absorbs CO2 from air to form sodium carbonate which forms a coating over the surface of the material. As Na2CO3 is non-hygroscopic, wet sodium hydroxide becomes dry again.

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{NaOH}+\mathrm{CO}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

It is corrosive. When its concentrated solution comes in contact with the skin it produces a burning sensation. It breaks down the proteins of the skin and because of this property, it is commonly called caustic soda,

4. Reaction with acids, acidic oxides, and amphoteric oxides: Being a strong alkali, it reacts with acids, acidic oxides, and amphoteric oxides to form corresponding salts.

NaOH + HCl→ NaCl +H2O

2NaOH + SO2→ Na2SO3 +H2O

Al2O3 + 2NaOH →2NaAlO2 (Sodium aluminate) + H2O

ZnO + 2NaOH → Na2ZnO2 (Sodium zincate) + H2O

Uses of sodium hydroxide:

It is used

  • In the manufacture of soap, paper, artificial silk, dyes, and several chemicals
  • In the refining of [etroleum and vegetable oil,
  • In the purification of bauxite,
  • As a cleaning agent for greasy machines and metal NItoots,
  • As a laboratory reagent etc.

4. Sodium chloride (common salt), NaCI

Preparation of sodium chloride:

  • The main source of sodium chloride Is seawater which contains 2.7-2,9% of the salt by mass. In tropical countries like India, common salt is generally obtained by the evaporation of seawater.
  • Crude sodium chloride obtained by this process contains calcium sulfate (CaSO.), sodium sulfate (Na2SO4), calcium chloride (CaCl2), magnesium chloride (MgCl2), etc as impurities.
  • Since MgCI2 and CaCl2 are deliquescent (absorb moisture from the air), impure common salt gets wet in the rainy season.
  • For purification, a saturated solution of crude NaCI is prepared and the insoluble impurities are removed by filtration.
  • The filtrate is then saturated with hydrogen chloride gas and crystals of pure NaCI separate out due to the common ion effect.
  • Chlorides of Ca and Hg being more soluble remain dissolved in the solution. NaCI can also be prepared from rock salt.

Properties of sodium chloride:

  • NaCI is a white crystalline solid that melts at 1081K.
  • 36 g of NaCI is soluble in 100g of water at 373K. However, solubility does not increase much with an increase in temperature.

Uses of sodium chloride:

  • It is used as common salt or table salt for domestic purposes.
  • It is used in the manufacture of sodium, caustic soda (NaOH), chlorine, washing soda, sodium peroxide, sodium sulfate, etc.
  • It is used in soap industry, in softening hard water, in freezing mixtures, and for regenerating ion exchange resins.

Biological Importance Of Sodium And Potassium

Sodium and potassium ions are the most common cations present in biological fluids. A person weighing 70kg contains about 90g of Na and 170g of K along with 5g of Fe and 0.06 g of Cu.

The daily requirement of Na and K for the human body is about 2 g each.

  1. The Na+ ions are mainly found outside the cells, in blood plasma, and in the interstitial fluid that surrounds the cells. These ions take part in the transmission of nerve signals, in regulating the flow of water across the cell membranes, and in the transportation of various amino acids and sugars into the cells.
  2.  K+ ions are the most abundant cations in the cell fluids, where they activate a variety of enzymes, and promote the oxidation of glucose into ATP (adenosine triphosphate), and Na+ ions promote the transmission of nerve signals.
  3. The Na+ and K+ ions differ considerably in concentration on the opposite sides of the cell membrane. In blood plasma, for example, the concentrations of Na+ and K+ ions are 143 million-L-1 and 5 million-L-1 respectively.
  4. Within the blood cells, however, the concentrations of these ions are 10 millimol-L-1 and 105 millimol-L-1 respectively.
  5. The activities in a nerve cell depend upon the sodium-potassium ion gradient. These ionic gradients are maintained by an ion transport mechanism that operates the active inclusion of K+ ions and active exclusion of Na+ ions across the cell membrane.
  6. The transportation of ions requires energy which is obtained by hydrolysis of ATP. The hydrolysis of one ATP molecule to ADP provides enough energy to move three Na+ ions out of the cell two K+ ions and one H+ ion back into the cell.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Group-2 Elements (Alkaline Earth Metals) Introduction

The outermost shell of these elements contains two electrons and the penultimate shell contains eight electrons except forthe first member beryllium which contains two electrons.0 Since the last electron enters the ns orbital, these are also called s-block elements.

Their outermost electronic configuration may be represented as ns², where n- 2 to 7. Due to their similarity in electronic configuration, they are placed in the same group (Group- 2) of the periodic table and closely resemble each other in physical and chemical properties. Two valence electrons are always involved together giving rise to uniform bivalency of the elements.

Beryllium shows some abnormal properties as its electronic configuration is slightly different from the rest of the members. The main reason is that both the beryllium atom and Be2+ ion are extremely small. Beryllium also shows some similarities with aluminum of group 13. Like alkali metals, the compounds of these metals are also predominantly ionic. The electronic configurations of alkaline earth metals are given in the following table

Electronic configuration of alkaline earth metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electronic Configuration Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry S Block Elements Summary

Occurrence Of Alkaline Earth Metals

Due to low ionization enthalpies and high electropositive character, the alkaline earth metals are chemically very reactive and hence, do not occur in the free state but are widely distributed in nature as silicates, carbonates, sulfates, and phosphates.

  • Relative abundance of Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, and Ra in the earth’s crust is 2, 27640, 46600, 384, 390, and 1.3 x 10-6 ppm respectively. 0 Beryllium, the fifty-first most abundant element by mass in the earth’s crust, is found as silicate minerals like beryl (Be3Al2Si6O18) and phenacite (Be2SiO4).
  • Magnesium, the sixth most abundant element is found as carbonate, sulphate, and silicate. Its two important minerals are magnesite (MgCO3) and dolomite [MgCO3.CaCO3].
  • It is also found in seawater at 0.13% as MgCl2 and MgSO4.
  • Calcium, the fifth most abundant element by mass found in the earth’s crust, occurs mainly as CaCO3 in the form of limestone, marble and chalk. Its other important minerals are fluorspar (CaF2), fluorapatite, [3Ca3(PO4)2-CaF3], gypsum (CaSO4-2H2O) anhydride, (CaSO4).
  • Strontium and barium are respectively the fifteenth and sixteenth most abundant element. Strontium occurs principally as the mineral celestite (SrSO4) and strontianite (SrCO3) while barium occurs mainly as the mineral barytes (BaSO4).
  • Radium is radioactive and extremely scarce. It occurs in very small amounts (1 gin 7 ton) in pitchblende as the decay product of uranium.

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals

The alkaline earth metals show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties with an increase in atomic number. Some important atomic and physical properties of alkaline earth metals are given in the

Atomic and physical properties of alkaline earth metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals

General trends in different atomic and physical properties of alkali metals and their explanations

1. Atomic and ionic radii

The atomic and ionic radii of alkaline earth metals are fairly large but smaller than those of the corresponding alkali metals and these increase on moving down a group.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation:

The electrons of alkaline earth metals having a higher nuclear charge are more strongly attracted towards the nucleus.  On moving down the group, the atomic as well as ionic radii increase. The addition of new shells and the increasing screening effect jointly overcome the effect of increasing nuclear charge down the group

2. Ionization enthalpy

1. The first and second ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are quite low and decrease down the group from Be to Ra

Explanation:

The low ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are due to their smaller nuclear charge and larger atomic size (compared to the other succeeding elements of the same period) which result in weaker forces of attraction between valence electrons (ns2) and nucleus. On moving down the group, atomic size increases and the screening effect of the inner shell electrons also increases

Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily. These two effects jointly overcome the effect of increasing nuclear charge down the group. Thus, first and second ionization enthalpies decrease down the group.

2. The first ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are higher than those of the corresponding alkali metals but their second ionization enthalpies are lower than those of the corresponding alkali metals.

Explanation:

The alkaline earth metals have higher values of first ionization enthalpy than those of the corresponding alkali metals because they have smaller size and higher nuclear charge which result in stronger forces of attraction between the valence electrons and the nucleus.

The second ionization enthalpy values of alkaline earth metals are much lower than those of the corresponding alkali metals because the loss of the second electron from an alkaline earth metal cation (M+) leads to the attainment of a stable noble gas configuration (ns2np6) while the loss of the second electron from an alkali metal cation (M+) causes loss ofits stable noble gas configuration

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nobel Gas Configuration

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nobel Gas Configuration.

3. Electropositive or metallic character

The alkaline earth metals are highly electropositive and possess high metallic character. However, they are less electropositive than the alkali metals. Their electropositive or metallic character increases on moving down the group.

Electropositive Explanation:

  • Due to their relatively low ionization enthalpies, alkaline earth metals have a strong tendency to lose both valence electrons to form dipositive ions. Thus, they exhibit high electropositive or metallic character.
  • As their atoms have smaller sizes and higher ionization enthalpies compared to those of the corresponding alkali metals, their tendency to lose valence electrons is less than that of alkali metals. Hence, alkaline earth metals have less electropositive or metallic character as compared to tine alkali metals.
  • On moving down the group from Be to Ra, ionization enthalpies decrease due to an increase in atomic radii. Therefore, the tendency to lose electrons increases and so does the electropositive character

4. Hydration enthalpy

Hydration enthalpies of alkaline earth metal ions are much greater than that of the alkali metal ions & decrease down the group from Be2+ to Ba2+

Be2+ > Mg2+ > Ca2+ > Sr2+ > Ba2+

Hydration enthalpy Explanation:

Due to the smaller size of alkaline earth metal ions, their hydration enthalpies are much greater than those of the alkali metal ions. Therefore, the compounds of alkaline earth metals are found to be more extensively hydrated than those of alkali metals. Magnesium chloride and calcium chloride, for example, exist as hexahydrates (MgCl2-6H2O and CaCl2-6H2O) while sodium chloride and potassium chloride do not form such hydrates.

The ionic conductance of hydrated alkaline earth metal ions increases from [Be(H2O)x]2+ to [Ba(HO)2x]2+ due to a decrease in the extent of hydration. The hydration enthalpy of an ion is directly proportional to its charge/radius ratio {q/r). On moving down a group, the radii of the alkaline earth metals increase. As a result, the hydration enthalpies of these metals decrease.

5. Oxidation State

Alkaline earth metals exhibit an oxidation in their compounds. Although the second date of +2 in their compounds. Although the second ionization enthalpy of these elements is nearly double that of the first ionization enthalpy, yet they exist as divalent ions (M2+) in most of their compounds.

NCERT Solutions for S Block Elements Class 11 Chemistry

Oxidation State Explanation:

1. The divalent ions (M2+) of alkaline earth metals have stable noble gas configurations. Thus, M2+ ion is more stable than M+ ion.

M ([Noble gas] ns2) → M2+ [Noble gas] + 2e

2. Due to greater charge and smaller size, the divalent cations lead to the formation of very stable lattices, and hence, a huge amount of energy is released. The high lattice enthalpy easily compensates for the high second ionization enthalpy.

3. Divalent cations for their smaller size get hydrated in water to a greater extent and the energy thus released (hydration enthalpy) is large enough to compensate for the second ionization enthalpy

The ΔHi(3) values of alkaline earth metals are very high because the electron now has to be removed from the stable noble gas configuration. For this reason, the alkaline earth metals do not exhibit an oxidation state of more than +2.

6. Melting & boiling points

Alkaline earth metals have higher melting & boiling points than that of alkali metals. However, on moving down the group, no regular trend is observed.

Melting & boiling points Explanation: 

  • Due to their smaller size, the atoms of alkaline earth metals form a more close-packed crystal lattice. Moreover, alkaline earth metals have two electrons in their valence shell whereas alkali metals have only one.
  • The larger number of valence electrons leads to the formation of stronger metallic bonds.
  • No regular trend in melting and boiling point is observed down the group because the atoms adopt different crystal structures.

7. Nature of bonds formed:

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals predominantly form ionic compounds. However, these are less ionic than the corresponding alkali metal compounds. Beryllium, the first member of this group, is an exception as its compounds are covalent. Magnesium also tends to form covalent compounds to some extent. On moving down the group, the tendency to form ionic compounds increases.

Nature of bonds formed Explanation:

Alkaline earth metals form ionic compounds because they have low ionization enthalpies. Their compounds, however, are less ionic because their ionization enthalpies are higher than those of the corres¬ ponding alkali metals. Due to its much smaller size and much higher ionization enthalpy, beryllium forms compounds that are predominantly covalent. Down the group, the tendency to form ionic compounds increases because ionization enthalpy decreases.

8. Density and hardness

The alkaline earth metals are denser and harder than the corresponding alkali metals. However, on moving down the group, no regular trend is observed. It initially decreases from Be to Ca and then increases from Ca to Ba.

Density and hardness Explanation:

The extent of cohesive energy determines the density and hardness of metals and this depends on the number of electrons involved in metallic bonding and the size of the atom. In alkali metals, one electron per atom (the valence electron) is involved in metallic bonding while in alkaline earth metals, two electrons per atom (the valence electrons) are involved. Moreover, the atoms of alkaline earth metals are heavier and smaller in size.

Therefore, the extent of cohesive energy is relatively higher in the case of alkaline earth metals & consequently, the atoms in alkaline earth metals are packed more closely in their lattices. Cohesive energy decreases from Be to Ca due to a gradual increase in size while it is found to increase from Ca to Ba due to the formation of different crystal lattices.

9. Conductivity

The Gr-2 metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

Conductivity Explanation:

Due to the presence of two loosely bound valence electrons (per atom) which can move freely throughout the crystal lattice, the alkaline earth metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

10. Flame coloration

When the alkaline earth metals and their salts, except beryllium and magnesium, are heated in the flame of a bunsen burner, they impart characteristic color to the flame.

These colors are as follows:

  • Ca: Brickred
  • Ba: Apple green
  • Sr & Ra: Crimson red

Flame coloration Explanation:

  • When the alkaline earth metals or their salts are put into a flame, the electrons of their valence shell absorb energy and get excited to higher energy levels.
  • When they drop back to the ground state, the absorbed energy is emitted in the form of visible light having characteristic wavelengths.
  • Depending upon the wavelength of light emitted, different colors are imparted to the burner flame.
  • Due to their smaller size, the valence electrons in Be and Mg are too strongly bound to get excited by the energy available from the flame. Therefore, they do not impart any color to the flame.

Alkaline earth metals (except Be and Mg) can easily be identified by flame test in qualitative analysis. Further, they can be estimated by flame photometry or atomic absorption spectroscopy.

11. Magnetic property

The alkaline earth metals and their salts are diamagnetic.

Magnetic property Explanation:

Since the divalent ions (M2+) of alkaline earth metals have noble gas configurations with no unpaired electrons, their salts are diamagnetic. The metals are also diamagnetic as all the orbitals are filled up with paired electrons.

Chemical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals (Group-2 Metals)

Due to their low ionization enthalpies and high electropositive character, alkaline earth metals have a strong tendency to lose their valence electrons. Therefore, they are highly reactive and do not exist in the free state in nature.

1. Reducing nature

The alkaline earth metals are strong reducing agents. However, they are weaker reducing agents than alkali metals. Again, like alkali metals, their reducing strength increases down the group.

Reducing nature Explanation:

The alkaline earth metals except Be, have a fairly strong tendency to lose two valence electrons to form dipositive ions (M→ M2+  2e) i.e. they possess low ionization enthalpies and hence, they are strong reducing agents.

This is indicated by their high negative values of reduction potentials (E°). Their reducing strength, however, is less than the alkali metals as their atomization enthalpies and ionization enthalpies are relatively higher. Reducing strength increases on moving down the group as their ionization enthalpies decrease & electrode potentials become progressively more negative from Be to Ba.

2. Action of air

  • Being fairly reactive, the alkaline earth metals are oxidized by the oxygen of the air and get tarnished due to the formation of a fine layer of oxide on their surface. With increasing atomic numbers, the effect of air on the metals gradually increases.
  • Be and Mg being less reactive are not much affected by air. Ca and Sr get easily tarnished in air while Ba readily burns when exposed to air. Hence, Ca, Ba, and Sr are usually stored in paraffin.

3. Reaction with oxygen

Alkaline earth metals burn in oxygen to form oxides. Be, Mg, and Ca form monoxides while Sr and Ba form peroxides when they react with oxygen. This is because larger cation stabilizes a larger anion and hence the tendency to form peroxide increases as the size of the metal ion increases

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Oxygen (M = Be, Mg or Ca)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Oxygen. (M = Ba, Sr)

4. Reaction with water

  • Alkaline earth metals except beryllium react with water to form the corresponding hydroxides along with the liberation of H2 gas.
  • Beryllium having the lowest negative standard electrodepotential (E° of Be2+/Be = -1.97V) among all

The group-2 metals is the least electropositive and hence, do not react with water or steam even at red hot conditions.

Ca, Sr, and Ba have relatively higher negative standard electrode potentials similar to those of the corresponding Gr-1 metals and hence, react even with cold water.

Mg has an intermediate value of E° and does not react with cold water but decomposes in boiling water.

M + 2H2O→M(OH)2 + H2↑ (M = Mg, Ca; Sr or Ba)

Thus, the reactivity of the alkaline earth metals towards water increases on moving down the group. However, they are less reactive towards water as compared to the corresponding alkali metals.

5. Reaction with nitrogen

1. All alkaline earth metals burn in nitrogen to form nitrides of the type M3N2. However, Li forms Li3N.

3M + N2 →M2N2 (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr and Ba)

2.  The ease of formation of nitrides decreases from Be to Ba. Since N2 molecule is very stable, it requires very high energy to form nitride ions (N3-). This large amount of energy is supplied from the lattice enthalpy evolved when crystalline solids containing ions with high charges (M2+ and N3-) are formed.

Be3N2 is volatile because it is covalent. Other nitrides of this group are not volatile as they are ionic crystalline solids.

6. Reaction with halogens

The alkaline earth metals directly combine with halogens at higher temperatures to form halides having the general formula, MX2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Halogens

Halides can also be obtained by the action of halogen acids on metals, their oxides, hydroxides, or carbonates

M + 2HX→ MX2 + H2; MO + 2HX→MX2 + H2O

M(OH)2 + 2HX→MX2 + 2H2O

MCO3 + 2HX→MX2 + CO2 + H2O

BeCl2 is, however, conveniently prepared by heating BeO with Cl2 in the presence of charcoal at 1073K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Conveniently Prepared By Heating In The Presence Of Charcoal

7. Reaction with hydrogen:

All the elements of group-2 except Be, form metal hydrides of the general formula MH2 when heated with hydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Hydrogen

Beryllium hydride can be prepared indirectly by reducing beryllium chloride with lithium aluminum hydride.

2BeCl2 + LiAlH4→ 2BeH2 + LiCl + AlCl3

Both beryllium hydride (BeH2) and magnesium hydride (MgH2) are covalent compounds. In these molecules, both Be and Mg have four electrons in their valence shell. Therefore, these molecules are electron deficient. To make up for their electron deficiency, these two compounds exist as polymers, (BeH2)n and (MgH2)n in which each Be or Mg -atom forms four three-centre two-electron (3c-2e) bonds or hydrogen bridge bonds or banana bonds.

The structure of polymeric beryllium hydride is shown below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Structure Of Polymeric Berylium Hydride

CaH2, SrH2, and BaH2 are ionic compounds in which a hydride ion (H) exists as an anion. Calcium hydride (CaH2 ) which is also called hydrolith is used for the production of H2 by the action of HaO on it.

8. Reaction with carbon

When the alkaline earth metals except for Be, are heated with carbon in an electric furnace or when their oxides are heated with carbon, carbides of the type MC2 are obtained. These carbides are also called acetylides (containing discrete C2 ions) as on hydrolysis they form acetylene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Carbon

(M = Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

At much higher temperatures ( ~ 1700°C), beryllium reacts with carbon to form Be2C. This carbide is called methanide (containing discrete C4- ion) as on hydrolysis it produces methane. On heating, MgC2 forms Mg2C3, which is called allylide (containing discrete C34- ion) as hydrolysis yields allylene (methyl acetylene).

CaC2 + 2H2O → HC≡ CH + Ca(OH)2

Be2C + 4H2O →  2Be(OH)2 + CH4

Mg2C3+ 4H2O →  CH3C ≡ CH + 2Mg(OH)2

When calcium carbide (CaC2), an important chemical intermediate, is heated in an electric furnace with atmospheric nitrogen at 1375K, it produces calcium cyanamide (CaNCN).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Calcium Carbide

The mixture of CaNCN and carbon is called nitrolim. It is used as a slow-acting nitrogen fertilizer as it undergoes very slow hydrolysis and evolves NH3 gas for a long period.

CaC2 + 3H2O → CaCO3 + 2NH3

9. Reaction with acids

The alkaline earth metals react with dilute acids to form the corresponding salt with the liberation of H2 gas.

M + H2SO4 → MSO4 + H2↑ (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

Beryllium is the only group-2 metal which reacts with alkali to form H2 and beryllate salt.

Be + 2NaOH + 2H2O → Na2 [Be(OH)4] (Sodium beryllate)+ H2

This is observed due to the diagonal relationship between aluminum and beryllium.

10. Solutions in liquid ammonia

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals dissolve in ammonia to give deep blue-colored solutions containing ammoniated cations and ammoniated electrons.

M + (x+ 2y)NH3 → [M(NH3)x]2+ + 2[e(NH3)y ]

Evaporation of ammonia from these solutions leads to the formation of hexammoniates M(NH3)6 which slowly decompose to yield the corresponding metal amides, M(NH2)2 and H2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Solutions In Liquid Ammonia

11. Tendency to form complexes

The group-2 elements tend to form stable complexes and it is found to be greater than that of alkali metals because their ions have smaller size and higher charge. The tendency to form complexes decreases down the group and this is due to the decrease in ion-dipole interaction with increasing size of the metal ion. Be and Mg have the maximum tendency to form complexes.

Examples of two stable complexes of Be and Mg are \(\left[\mathrm{BeF}_4\right]^{2-}\&\left[\mathrm{Mg}\left(\mathrm{NH}_3\right)_6\right]^{2+}\) respectively

  1. Complexation of Ca2+ by EDTA and polyphosphates plays an important role in the removal of the metal in water softening.
  2.  In chlorophyll, the complex formed by the combination of Mg and the tetrapyrrole system (porphyrin) is very crucial in photosynthesis.

12. Extraction of alkaline earth metals

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals are also very reactive and strong reducing agents. So they cannot be extracted by ordinary chemical reduction methods. These metals also cannot be prepared by electrolysis of aqueous solutions of their salts because in that case, hydrogen is discharged at the cathode instead of the metal which has a much higher discharge potential. However, electrolysis can be carried out using a Hg-cathode, but in that case, recovery of the metal from amalgam becomes difficult. These metals are best isolated by electrolysis of their fused salts, usually chlorides.

S Block Elements Class 11 Important Topics

General Characteristics Of The Compounds Of Alkaline Earth Metals

Compounds of group-2 elements are predominantly ionic but are less ionic than the corresponding compounds of group 1 elements and this is due to their increased nuclear charge and smaller size. The general characteristics of some of the compounds of alkaline earth metals are discussed below.

1. Oxides of alkaline earth metals

1. Crystal structure:

Except for BeO (covalent solid), the oxides of the remaining alkaline earth metals are crystalline ionic solids and possess a rock-salt (NaCl) structure with coordination number 6. BeO though covalent, is an extremely hard solid because of its polymeric nature. BeO possesses a covalent lattice with coordination number 4. Both BeO and MgO have several properties that make them useful as refractory materials (for lining furnaces).

These properties are:

  • They have high melting points (BeO-2500°C and MgO – 2800°C),
  • They have very low vapor pressures,
  • They are good conductors of heat, O they are chemically inert and
  • They can act as electrical insulators.

2. Stability:

Due to much higher lattice enthalpies, the oxides are very stable towards heat. The lattice enthalpies decrease with an increase in the size of the metal ion.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Stability Of Higher Lattice Enthalpies

3. Basic character:

Beryllium oxide, BeO reacts with both acids and alkalis, i.e., it is amphoteric while the oxides of other group-2 metals are basic.

BeO + 2HCl→BeCl2 + H2O

BeO + 2NaOH → Na2 BeO2 (Sodium beryllate) + H2O

The basic strength of the oxides increases on moving down the group.

BeO (Amphoteric) < MgO (Weakly basic) < CaO (Basic ) < SrO, BaO( Strongly basic)

4. Reaction with water:

All these oxides except BeO and MgO, react with water to form sparingly soluble hydroxides. These reactions are exothermic.

MO + H2O→M(OH)2 + heat, M = Ca, Sr or Ba

2. Hydroxides

1. Basic character:

All the alkaline earth metal hydroxides are basic except Be(OH)2 which is amphotericin nature. Their basic strength increases on moving from Be(OH)2 to Ba(OH)2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Hydroxides

The alkaline earth metal hydroxides are, however, less basic than the alkali metal hydroxides.

Basic character Explanation:

Due to low ionization enthalpies of the alkaline earth metals, the M — O bond present in their hydroxides is weak and breaks up easily to give OHions. For this reason, their hydroxides exhibit basic character. On moving down the group, the tendency of the M — OH bond to break heterolytically increases because ionisation enthalpies decrease and consequently, the basic character of the hydroxides increases.

Due to larger ionic sizes and lower ionization enthalpies of alkali metals, the M — OH bonds in their hydroxides are still weaker than those in alkaline earth metal hydroxides. Thus, the alkali metal hydroxides are more basic than the alkaline earth metal hydroxides.

2. Solubility in water:

Hydroxides of alkaline earth metals are less soluble in water than the hydroxides of alkali metals. Again, the solubility of these hydroxides increases markedly on moving down the group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Solubility In Water

Solubility in water Explanation:

On moving down the group, both the lattice enthalpy and the hydration enthalpy decrease with increasing ionic size. However, the lattice enthalpy decreases more rapidly than the hydration enthalpy, and consequently, their solubility increases down the group.

3. Thermal stability:

The alkaline earth metal hydroxides decompose on heating to give the metal oxide and water.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sulphates Of Thermal Stability

Thermal stability Explanation:

Thermal stability of these hydroxides increases down the group as the polarising power of the M2+ ion and the lattice enthalpy of the oxide formed decreases with increasing ionic size down the group.

3. Halides

  • Due to the high polarising power of the Be2+ ion, beryllium halides have a covalent nature having low melting points.
  • All other alkaline earth metal halides are ionic and their ionic character increases as the size of the metal ion (M2+) increases down the group. These ionic halides are non-volatile solids having high melting points.
  • Due to its covalent nature, beryllium halides are sparingly soluble in water but readily soluble in organic solvents. The halides of other group-2 alkaline earth metals are readily soluble in water.
  • Except for BeCl2, all other anhydrous halides of the alkaline earth metals are hygroscopic in nature and form hydrates.
  • For example: MgCl2-6H2O, CaCl2-6H2O, SrCl2-2H2O and BaCl2-2H2O
  • The tendency to form hydrate decreases down the group. Thus, anhydrous calcium chloride is used as a dehydrating agent in the laboratory.
  • The dehydration of the hydrated chlorides, bromides, and iodides of Ca, Sr, and Ba can be achieved by heating. However, the corresponding hydrated halides of Be and Mg on heating suffer hydrolysis.
  • BeF2 is highly soluble in water due to the much higher hydration enthalpy of the very small Be2+ ion.
  • All other fluorides (MgF2 > CaF2, SrF2, and BaF2 ) are almost insoluble in water because their lattice enthalpies are higher than their hydration enthalpies.
  • Except for BeCl2 and MgCl2, all other alkaline earth metal chlorides impart characteristic color to a flame.
  • For example: CaCl2: is brick red, SrCl2:  Is crimson red, BaCl2: Is grassy green, etc.

Structure of BeCl2 In the solid state, beryllium chloride has a polymeric chain structure with chlorine bridges as given below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Beryllium Chloride

Which are bonded by two covalent bonds while the other two by coordinate bonds. The Be -atoms in (BeCl2)n sp³ -hybridized.

In the vapor phase, BeCl2 exists as a chlorine-bridged dimer which dissociates into linear triatomic monomer at about 1200K. In the dimer, Be is sp² -hybridized while in the monomeric is sp² -hybridized

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Monomer And Dimer

CaF2 an industrially important compound, is the main source of both F2 and HF

CaF2 + H2SO4→ 2HF + CaSO4

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electrolysis

  • CaF2 is also used for making prisms and cell windows for spectrophotometers, an important instrument used in the spectroscopic analysis of compounds.
  • In cold countries, CaCl2 is Used for treating ice on roads, because 30% eutectic mixture of CaCl2 +H2O freezes at  – 55%C.

4. Salts of Oxoacids

Trends in the properties of some salts of group-2 elements are discussed below

1. Carbonates:

Solubility in water:

The carbonates of the alkaline earth metals are practically insoluble in water. Their solubilities decrease on moving down the group. BeCO3 is sparingly soluble in water while BaCO3 is insoluble in water.

Solubility in water Explanation:

On moving down the group, lattice enthalpy of carbonates remains almost unchanged” (the size of the metal ion is much smaller compared to CO32-  ion) but hydration enthalpies of cations (M2+) decrease. Consequently, the solubilities of carbonates decrease down the group.

The extremely low solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonates in water is very important in the precipitation of Ba2+, Sr2+, and Ca2+ ions as their carbonates, in Gr-IV qualitative analysis of basic radicals.

Thermal stability: Carbonates of gr.-2 metals decompose on heating to give metal oxide and carbon dioxide

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Salts Of Oxoacids Of Thermal Stability

Thermal stability of the carbonates increases down the group with increasing cationic size

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Thermal Stability Of Carbonates

Thermal stability Explanation:

The trend can be explained in terms of the stability of the monomeric is sp –hybridized. of the resulting metal oxides. With increasing stability of  Cl the metal oxide, the carbonate becomes more unstable BeCl2 [monomer] towards heat. The stability of metal oxides decreases down the group due to a decrease in lattice enthalpy with increasing cationic (M2+) size. Hence, the stability of the carbonates towards heat increases down the group.

2. Bicarbonates:

The bicarbonates of alkaline earth metals do not exist in the solid state but are found in solutions. When such solutions are heated, bicarbonates decompose to form carbonates with the evolution of CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Bicarbonates

3. Sulfates

1. Solubilityin water:

The sulfates of alkaline earth metals are relatively less soluble in water than the corresponding sulfates of alkali metals. Further, their solubilities decrease down the group. For example, BeSO4 and MgSO4 are more soluble in water, CaSO4 is less soluble in water and SrSO4, BaSO4, and RaSO4 are practically insoluble in water.

Solubilityin water Explanation:

On moving down the group, the hydration enthalpies decrease with increasing cationic size but the lattice enthalpy remains almost unchanged because the anion, SO4 is much larger as compared to the metal ions (M2+). For this reason, the solubilities of sulfates decrease down the group.

2. Thermal stability: The alkaline earth metal sulfates white solids which dissociate on heating to give the metal oxides and sulfur trioxide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sulphates Of Thermal Stability

The thermal stability of the sulfates increases down the group due to an increase in ionic character. This is due to a decrease in the polarising power of the metal ions with increasing ionic size. It becomes evident from the dissociation temperatures of the sulfates given below

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Thermal Stability Of Sulphates

4. Nitrates

Nitrates of alkaline earth metals are prepared by heating corresponding metal carbonate with dilute HNO3

MCO + 2HNO3→ M(NO3) + H2 O + CO2 (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

Magnesium nitrate crystallizes as Mg(NO3)2. 6H2O whereas barium nitrate crystallizes as an anhydrous salt. This again shows that the tendency to form hydrates decreases with increasing ionic size and decreasing hydration enthalpy as we move down the group. Upon heating, all nitrates decompose to give the corresponding oxides with the evolution of NO2 and O2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nitrates Decompose To Give Corresponding Oxides

The nitrates of all these metals are soluble in water. Beryllium is unusual for the fact that it forms a basic nitrate in addition to the normal salt.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Basic Beryllium Nitrate

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Basic Beryllium Nitrate.

Anomalous Behaviour Of Be And Similarities Between Be And Al

Beryllium, the first member of group 2, shows some anomalous behavior, i.e.,it differs from the rest of the members of its family.

Reasons for anomalous behavior of beryllium:

  • The extremely small size of the Be atom and Be2+ ion,
  • Much higher polarising power of Be2+ ion,
  • Higher ionization enthalpy and electronegativity as compared to the other members, absence of vacant d -d-orbitals in its valence shell.
  • Again, beryllium resembles its diagonally placed element aluminum, the second typical element of group 13 and period 3, in several properties

Difference between beryllium and other alkaline earth metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Difference Between Beryllium And Other Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Difference Between Beryllium And Other Alkaline Earth Metals.

Reasons for the similarities between beryllium and aluminum:

  • They have approximately the same polarising power. The polarising power of Be2+ is 0.064, while that of Al3+is 0.060.0
  • The standard electrode potentials of Be and A1 are much closer i.e. Be2+/Be = -1.85V and Al3++/Al = -1.66V.0
  • The electronegativity of both the elements i.e., beryllium and aluminum are the same (1.5in the Pauling scale).

Similarities between beryllium and aluminium:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Beryllium And Aluminium

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Beryllium And Aluminium.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements Overview

Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals.

  • and different milk products.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Group-13 Elements (Boron Family) Introduction

The valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of group-13 is ns²np¹ where n = 2-6.  It becomes clear from the electronic configurations that boron (B) and aluminium (Al) have noble gas cores, gallium (Ga) and indium (In) have noble gas cores plus 10 d-electrons and thallium (Tl) have noble gas cores plus 14 F -electrons and 10 d-electrons. Thus electronic configuration of the elements of group 13 is more complex compared to those of groups and 2.

This difference in electronic configuration affects the chemistry of the elements of this group.

Electronic configuration of group 13 – elements:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element Electronic Configuration Of Group 13 Elements

Occurrence Of Group-13 Elements

1. The elements present in group 13 of the periodic table are boron (B), aluminium (Al), gallium (Ga), indium (In) and thallium (Tl). Except for horon, which is a non-metal, all other elements of this group are metals. The non-metallic character of boron is due to its small atomic size, high ionization enthalpy and comparatively high electronegativity.

2. Boron is a fairly rare element which occurs to a very small extent (0.0001% by mass) in the earth’s crust Natural boron consists of two isotopes: 10B (19%) and 11B (81%). Boron does not occur in a free state as it is highly reactive. It occurs mainly as orthoboric acid & as minerals like

Borax –  Na2(B4O5(OH4).8H2O -8H2O

Kernite – Na2(B4O5(OH4).2H2O

Colemanite – Na2(B3O4(OH3)2.2H2O

3. Aluminium is the most abundant metal, and the third most abundant element (8.3%by mass) in the earth’s crust after oxygen (45.5%) and silicon (27.7%). The important minerals of aluminium are:

Bauxite – (Al2O3 – 2H2O)

Cryolite -(Na3AlF6)

Orthoclase (feldspar) – KAlSi3O8

Mica (Muscovite)-  KAl 2(AlSi3O10)(F, OH)2 etc.

4. Gallium, indium and thallium are quite less abundant and occur in traces in sulphide minerals.

5. The highest concentration of Ga (0.1-1%) is found in a rare mineral known as germanite (a sulphide complex of Zn, Cu, Ge and As).

6. Traces of and Tl are available in sulphide ores of zinc and lead respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Properties Of Group-13 Elements

Some important atomic and physical properties of group-13 most elements are given in the following table

Some atomic and physical properties of group-13 elements:

Atomic And Physical Properties Of Group 13 Elements

Trends in different atomic and physical properties of group-13 elements with explanations:

Atomic and ionic radii

1. Atomic and ionic radii of group-13 elements are smaller as compared to the corresponding elements of group-2.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation 1:

On moving from left to right in the periodic table, i.e., on moving from group-2 to group-13in a given period, the magnitude of nuclear charge increases but the new electron is added to the same shell. Since the electrons in the same shell do not screen each other and the effective nuclear charge increases, the outermost electrons experience greater nuclear charge and are pulled more strongly towards the nucleus. As a result, atomic size decreases. The same is true in the case of ionic radius.

2. On moving down the group, both atomic and ionic radii are expected to increase due to the addition of new electronic shells. However, the observed atomic radius of Ga = 135pm is slightly lesser than that of Al = 143pm.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation 2:

On moving from Al (Z = 13) to Ga (Z = 31), the d-orbitals are filled by electrons. Since the d-orbitals are larger, these intervening electrons in d-orbitals do not screen the nucleus effectively. As a result, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the electrons in Ga is greater than that experienced by the electrons in Al. Hence, the atomic radius of Ga is slightly less than that of Al. The Ionic radii, however, increase regularly on moving down the group

Ionisation enthalpy

1. First ionisation enthalpies (ΔiH1) of group-13 elements are lower than the corresponding elements ofgroup-2.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 1:

  • The first electron, in the case of group-13 elements (ns²np¹), is to be removed from a p-orbital, while in the case of group-2 elements, it is to be removed from an s-orbital.
  • Due to greater penetration of the s-orbital, the s-electron is nearer to the nucleus and is more tightly held by the nucleus than a p-electron of the same principal shell.
  • The removal of the s-electron requires a greater amount of energy compared to p- the electron and because of this, the values of first ionisation enthalpies (ΔiHi) of the elements of group-13 are low as compared to the corresponding elements of group-2.
  • The second and third ionisation enthalpies of these elements are, however, quite high because the second and third electrons are to be removed from ns-orbital.

2. On moving down the group from B to Al, the first ionisation enthalpy, (Aÿ) decreases sharply. However, the value of (ΔiH1) of Ga is slightly higher than that ofAl, while that ofTl is much higher than that of.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 2:

1. The sharp decrease in (ΔiH1) value from B to Al is expected because an increase in atomic size and screening effect (caused by to addition of a new shell) outweighs the effect of ‘increased nuclear charge.

2. The element Ga has ten 3d-electrons which do not screen as  N, much as s- and p-electrons. Therefore, due to poor shielding of 3d-electrons, the effective nuclear charge acting on Ga is slightly higher than that on Al.  Due to this, the (ΔiH1) value of Ga is slightly higher than that of Al, even though a new shell has been added on going from Al to Ga.

3. The same explanation can be offered on going from Into Tl. Tl has fourteen 4 f-electrons having a very poor screening effect and because of this, there occurs an unexpected increase in tyre effective nuclear charge, for which (ΔiH1) of Tl becomes much higher than that of In.

4. The order of (ΔiH1) values of group-13 elements is B > Al < Ga > In < Tl. However, this trend is not observed in the (ΔiH2) and (ΔiH3) values of these elements and this is because once the outermost p-electron is removed, it is not easy to remove the second and third electrons due to a large increase in effective nuclear charge. As expected, the first three ionisation enthalpies of these elements follow the order: ΔiH1< ΔiH2 < ΔiH3

Oxidation states

The atoms of group-13 elements have three valence electrons, two in the s -s-subshell and one in the p -subshell. Therefore, it becomes clear from their electronic configurations that +3 is expected to be the most common oxidation state of these elements. Therefore, the group oxidation state of the group-13 element is +3.

Due to the small size of the boron, the sum of its first three ionisation enthalpies is very high. Therefore, it cannot lose its valence electrons to form B3+ ion rather it forms covalent bonds with other atoms, for example, BH3 or B2H6.

The sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies of Al is much lower than that of B so, it can form an Al3+ ion, for example, AlCl3. Al is a highly electropositive metal.

B and Al exhibit only a +3 oxidation state but Ga, In and Tl show a +3 as well as a +1 oxidation state and on moving down the group the stability of the +3 oxidation state decreases while that of the +1 oxidation state progressively increases.

The stability of the +1 oxidation state follows the order:

Al < Ga <In < Tl. In the case of Tl, the +1 oxidation state is very much more stable than the +3 oxidation state.

Oxidation states Explanation:

The stability of the +1 oxidation state that increases down the group can be explained in terms of the inert pair effect. On moving down the group, the tendency of electrons of the valence shell to participate in bond formation decreases due to poor shielding of these electrons from the attraction of the nucleus by the intervening d- and f- electrons.

This reluctance or inertness ofthe s-electrons to participate in bond formation is called the inert pair effect. Since the magnitude of this effect increases down the group, the +1 oxidation state becomes more and more stable down the group as compared to the +3 oxidation state. The inert pair effect is maximum in the case of Tl and therefore, it shows mainly a +1 oxidation state. Due to lesser stability, Tl3+ salts act as strong oxidising agents. This is evident from its electrode potential data:

Tl3+(aq) + 2e → Tl+(aq);E° = +1.25V

The inert pair effect may also be explained by the fact that as the size of the atom increases from Al to Tl, the energy required to unpair the ns² -electrons is not compensated by the energy released due to the formation of two additional bonds.

Electropositive and metallic character

The elements of group- 13 are less electropositive or metallic as compared to the elements of group 2. On moving down the group, the electropositive character of the elements first increases from B to Al and then decreases from Al to Tl.

Electropositive and metallic Explanation:

1. Elements of group-13 are smaller in size and the sum of the three ionisation enthalpies ΔiH1+ ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 needed to form M3+ ions is much higher than the sum of two ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1+ ΔiH2 < ΔiH3 for the corresponding bigger-sized elements belonging to alkaline earth metals needed to form M2+ ions. For this reason, the elements of group 13 are less electropositive than the elements of group 2.

2. Boron has the highest sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies among the elements of group 13. Because of this, it has very little tendency to lose electrons and hence it is the least electropositive among group-13 elements. It is a non-metal and a poor conductor of electricity.

3. On moving from B to Al, the sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies decreases considerably (6887 to 5137kJ-mol-1 ) due to an increase in atomic size and hence, Al has a much higher tendency to lose electrons, i.e., Al is sufficiently electropositive. All is a metal and a good conductor of electricity.

4. Because of the increasingly poor shielding effect of 3d -electrons in Ga, 4d -electrons in and 4 f-electrons in Tl, the effective nuclear charge gradually increases and as a consequence, they exhibit lesser electropositive and metallic character.

Density

Because of smaller atomic and ionic radii, the elements of group 13 have a higher density as compared to the elements of group 2. On moving down the group, density increases.

Density Explanation:

On moving down the group, the density of these elements increases because the extent of the increase in atomic mass is greater than the extent of the increase in atomic size.0 On moving from B to Tl, both atomic mass and no. of electrons in the inner d- and f- subshell increases. Due to the lower shielding effect of d-and f— electrons, the effective nuclear charge increases from B to Tl. As a result, from B to Tl, the atomic size does not increase much.

P Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

Melting and boiling points

Elements of group 13 do not show a regular trend in their melting points. The melting points decrease from B to Ga and then increase from Ga to Tl.

Melting and boiling points Explanation:

This irregular trend is probably due to unusual crystal structures of B and Ga. The much higher melting point of B is due to its giant covalent polymeric crystal structure consisting of icosahedral units with B-atoms at all 12 corners and each B-atom is bonded to five equidistant neighbours resulting in much stronger attractive forces. In contrast, Ga consists of discrete Ga2 molecules so its melting point is exceptionally low (303K). However, the boiling points of these elements decrease regularly on moving down the group.

Gallium remains liquid over a vast range of temperatures and no other low-melting metal can compare with it. Molten Ga begins to boil only when heated to a temperature of 2276K. Due to this unusual property, gallium is used in thermometers required for measuring very high temperatures (>1000°C).

Electronegativity

Elements of group-13 are more electronegative than the elements of group-1 (alkali metals) and group-2 (alkaline earth metals). On moving down the group, the electronegativity first decreases from B to Al and then increases marginally.

Electronegativity Explanation:

  •  Because of the smaller atomic size and higher nuclear charge, the electronegativities of group-13 elements are higher than the corresponding elements of group-1 and 2.0 On moving down the group from B to Al, the atomic size increases considerably and as a result, the attraction of the nucleus for the electrons decreases and hence the electronegativity decreases.
  • On moving from Al to Tl, the atomic size increases but at the same time effective nuclear charge increases due to poor shielding of the inner d and f-electrons. As a result, the attractive force of the nucleus for the electrons increases and hence the electronegativity increases

Chemical Elements Properties Of Group-13

The members of group-13 elements have three electrons in their valence shells. Except for the last member Tl, all other members use these electrons to form three bonds and thus exhibit an oxidation state of +3. In the +3 oxidation state, the members of the boron family are expected to form covalent bonds for the following reasons:

  • Small size and high charge (+3) cause high polarisation of the anions leading to the formation of covalent bonds.
  • The large value of the sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1 + ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 of these elements also suggests that the bonds will be largely covalent.
  • The difference in electronegativity between the elements
    of group 13 and those ofthe higher groups is not very high.

This fact also agrees with the formation of covalent bonds. Because of its small size and high ionisation enthalpies, it is not possible for boron to form B3+ ions by losing its three valence electrons.

Therefore, 113 Boron does not form ionic compounds. It always forms covalent compounds by showing its valence electrons. The sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1 + ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 is also higher but less than that of B. So A1 also has a strong tendency to form covalent compounds,

Example:  AlCl3 , AlBr3 and AlCl3. Like Al, compounds of the rest of the members such as GaCl3, In Cl3 etc. are covalent when anhydrous.

However, all the members except B form metal ions in solution. This change from covalent to ionic nature may be explained by the fact that in aqueous solutions these ions undergo hydration and the amount of hydration enthalpy exceeds the ionisation enthalpy.

Ga, In and TI show two oxidation states of +1 and +3 due to the inert pair effect. The compounds in the +1 oxidation state are more ionic than the compounds in the +3 oxidation state. In a trivalent state, the number of electrons in the valence shell of the central atom in a molecule of these elements is only six (two electrons less than the octet) and therefore, such electron-deficient molecules behave as Lewis acids. For example, BCl3 (Lewis acid) readily accepts an unshared pair of electrons from ammonia (Lewis base) to form the adduct, BCl3-NH3.

Reaction with dioxygen or air

1. All the members of group 13 react with dioxygen at higher temperatures to form trioxides of the general formula M2O3. T1 forms both T1203 and some amount of Tl2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Dioxygen

The reaction of Al with 02 is known as a thermite reaction which is highly exothermic (AH0 =-1670kJ mol-1 ). A very strong affinity of Al for oxygen is used in the extraction of other metals from their oxides (thermite process). For example, Mn and Cr can be extracted from Mn3O4 and Cr2O3 respectively by this process.

2. The reactivity of group-13 elements towards dioxygen increases on moving down the group. Pure crystalline boron is almost unreactive towards air at ordinary temperature. Al does not react with dry air.

However, it gets tarnished readily in moist air even at ordinary temperatures due to the formation of a thin oxide (Al2O3) layer on the surface which prevents the metal
from further reaction. When amorphous boron and aluminium metal are heated in air, they form boron trioxide and aluminium trioxide (Al2O3) respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Aluminium Trioxide

Ga and In are not affected by air but T1 forms an oxide on
its surface in the presence of air.

3. B and Al react with dinitrogen at high temperatures to form
the corresponding nitrides.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nitrides

Ga, In and T1 do not react with N2 to form the corresponding nitrides.

Boron nitride is a white slippery solid which melts under pressure at 3246K. It is chemically inert towards the air, oxygen, hydrogen, chlorine, etc. even on heating. The total number of valence electrons of one B and one N- -atom is equal to the number of valence electrons of two C-atoms.

Therefore, the structure of boron nitride is almost the same as that of graphite having a layer lattice. In each layer, alternate B and N-atoms (both sp2 -hybridised) form
a planar hexagon. The layers are stacked over one another in such a way that the N-atom of one layer is directly over the B-atom of another layer. Because of its structural similarity with graphite, boron nitride is also called inorganic graphite.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boron Nitride

When boron nitride is heated at 1800°C under very high pressure, it gets converted to a cubic form comparable to diamond. This extremely hard variety known as borazon is used for cutting diamonds.

The acid-base character of oxides and hydroxides:

1. Trioxides of the elements of the boron family react with water to form their corresponding hydroxides.

M2O3 + 3H2O→  2M(OH)3

2. The nature of these oxides and hydroxides changes on moving down the group. Both B203 and B(OH)3 are weakly acidic. They dissolve in alkali to form metal borates.

B2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaBO2(sodium metaborate) + H2O

B(OH)3 + 3NaOH → Na3BO3(sodium borate) + 3H2O

Aluminium oxide and hydroxide are amphoteric. Both of them dissolve in alkalies as well as acids.

1. Al2O3(s) + 3H2SO4(s)→ Al2(SO4)3(aq) + 3H2O(l)

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Aluminate

Similarly, Al(OH)3(s) + NaOH(s)→Na[Al(OH)4](aq)

Al(OH)3(aq) + 3HCl(aq)→ AlCl3(aq) + 3H2O(l)

The oxide and hydroxide of Ga are also amphoteric while those of In and TI are basic.

Therefore, the basic character of oxides and hydroxides increases down the group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hydroxides Increases

3. Thallium forms two types of hydroxides:

Thallic hydroxide [Tl(OH)3] and thallous hydroxide (TlOH). Al(OH)3 is insoluble in H20 but TlOH is soluble and is a
strong base like alkali metal hydroxides.

Thallium Explanation:

On moving down the group, the magnitude of ionisation enthalpy decreases. As a result, the strength of the M— O bond also decreases and therefore, its cleavage becomes progressively easier resulting in the increased basic strength down the group

An extremely hard crystalline form of aluminium oxide called corrundum is used as an abrasive. It can be made by heating amorphous aluminium oxide at about 2000K. Aluminium forms a series of mixed oxides with other j metals, some of them occurring naturally as semi-precious stones. These include ruby (Cr3+) and blue sapphire
(CO2+, Fe2+, Tl4+).

Reaction with hydrogen

1.  Group-13 elements form hydrides of the type MH3. The members of the boron family do not combine directly with hydrogen. However, several hydrides are known
which can be prepared indirectly. Boron forms several stable covalent hydrides which are collectively called boranes.

The two most important types of boranes are as follows:

  1. Boraness with general formula BnHn+4 are called nido-boranes 
    • Examples: Diborane (B2H6) pentaborane-9 (B5H9).
  2. Boranes with the general formula BnHn+6 are called arachnoid-boranes
    • Examples:  Tetraborane (B4H10), and pentaborane-11 (B5H11).

2. The simplest hydride is diborane (B2H6) which is prepared by the reaction of BF3 with lithium hydride industrially.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Lithium Hydride

3. The other members of group 13 also form several hydrides which are polymeric,

Example:

(AlH1)n, (GaH3)n, (InH3)n

The stability of these hydrides decreases down the group and thallium hydride is quite unstable. Boron, aluminium and gallium also form complex anionic hydrides such as NaBH4 (sodium borohydride), LiAlH4 (lithium aluminium hydride) and LiGaH4 (lithium gallium hydride). These complex hydrides act as powerful reducing agents

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hydrides As Power Full Reducing Agents

4. The hydrides are weak Lewis acids and readily form adducts with strong Lewis bases to form compounds of the type MH3:B (B = base).

For example, AlH3:NMe3, GaH3:NMe3 etc.

NMe3 + AlH3→[Me3N:→AlH3]

Reaction With Acids And Alkalies

The action of acids:

1. Boron remains inert in the presence of non-oxidising acids such as HCl. However, it undergoes oxidation by strong oxidising acids such as a mixture of hot concentrated H2SO4 and HNO3 (2: 1) to form boric acid (H3BO3) at very high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Boric Acids

2.  The remaining elements of this group react with both oxidising and non-oxidising acids. For example, Al dissolves in dilute HCl and liberates dihydrogen.

2Al(s) + 6HCl(aq)→ 2Al3+(a<7) + 6Cr(a<jr) + 3H2(g)

3. Concentrated nitric acid renders aluminium passive by forming a protective layer of its oxide (AlO3) on the surface ofthe metal. Thus aluminium vessels can be used
to store concentrated HNO3.

2Al + 6HNO3→Al2O3+ 6NO2 + 2H2O

Ga, In and TI react with dilute acids to liberate H2

Action of alkalies:

1. When boron is fused with alkalies (NaOH or KOH) at a temperature greater than 775K, it forms borates and liberates dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borates And Liberates Dihydrogen

2. Boron dissolves in a fused mixture of Na2CO3 and NaNO3 at 1123K to produce borate and nitrite salt and liberate carbon dioxide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borate And Nitrite Salt And Liberates Carbon Dioxide

Al and Ga also react with aqueous alkalies with the evolution of dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Aqueous Alkalies With The Evolution Of Dihydrogen

In and TI does not react with alkalis.

Reaction with halogens

Elements of group-13 react with halogens at high temperatures to produce trihalides ofthe general formula, MX3. However, thallium (III) iodide does not exist.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogens

Trihalides of boron:

Due to its small atomic size and high ionisation enthalpy, boron forms covalent trihalides

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boron Trihalides

BX3. BF3 is a gas, BCl3 and BBr3 are liquids and BI3 is a solid. All these are trigonal planar molecules in which the central B -atom is sp² -hybridised. The three unpaired electrons of p -orbitals of three halogen atoms overlap with the three sp² -orbitals of boron to form three sp²-p, B—X cr -bonds. The unhybridised empty p-orbital remains perpendicular to the plane of the molecule.

Since there are only six electrons in the valence shell of the central boron atom in boron trihalides, they can accept two more electrons to acquire a stable octet, i.e., boron trihalides can behave as Lewis acids.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 P Block Elements

The Lewis acid character, however, decreases in the order:

BI3 > BBr3 > BCl3 > BF3

Explanation: This order of relative Lewis acid strength of boron trihalides, is just the reverse of what may be expected based on the electronegativities of the
halogen atoms can well be explained based on the tendency of the halogen atom to donate its lone pair of electrons to the boron atom through pn-pn back bonding.

Since the vacant 2p -orbital of B and the 2p-orbital of Fatom containing a lone pair of electrons are equal in size, therefore, the tendency of the F -atom to donate the unshared
pair by pπ-pπ back bonding is maximum. BF3 can well be represented as a resonance hybrid of four resonating structures. As a result of resonance involving pn-pn back bonding, the electron density on the boron atom increases effectively and so its strength as a Lewis acid decreases considerably.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Of Boron Trihalides

As the size ofthe halogen atom increases on going from Cl to I, the extent of overlap between the 2p -orbital of boron and a large p -orbital of halogen (3p of Cl, 4p of Br and 5p of I] decreases. As a consequence, the electron deficiency of boron increases and thus, the Lewis acid strength decreases on going from BF3 to BI3.

Halides of aluminium:

The halides of aluminium in the vapour state as well as in an inert solvent such as benzene exist ns dimers.

For example, Al2Cl3 exists as Al2Cl3.

Halides of aluminium Explanation:

In AlCl3, there are six electrons (two electrons less than tyre octet) around the central Al-atom. In the dimeric structure, each Al completes its octet by accepting a lone
pair of electrons from the Cl-atom of another AlCl3 molecule. The dimeric form exists lit vapour state at < 473K.

However, at higher temperatures, it dissociates to trigonal planar AlCl3 molecule. In polar solvents such as water, the dimer dissociates and it is the high hydration enthalpy which helps this dissociation leading to the formation of Al3+ ion

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Dimeric Structure Of Aluminium Chloride

Al2Clg + 6H2O ⇌ 2[Al(H2O)6]3+(aq) + 6Cl(aq)

Therefore, anhydrous AlCl3 is covalent but, hydrated aluminium chloride is ionic. Some important points of distinction between boron and
the other members of its family (especially the next member Al) are discussed in the given table. Anomalous properties of boron

Unlike aluminium halides, boron halides exist as monomers and this is because the boron atom is so small that it cannot accommodate four large-sized halogen atoms around it.

Boron

  • Boron is the first member of group 13 of the periodic table. There are three electrons in its valence shell (ls²2s²2p¹).
  • It exhibits anomalous behaviour and differs from the other members of its family. The reasons behind its exceptional behaviour can be attributed to the
  • Exceptionally small atomic size as compared to other elements of its group,
  • Much higher ionisation enthalpy and absence of d orbitals in its outermost or valence shell. Boron forms electron-deficient compounds which act as Lewis acids

Anomalous behaviour of boron:

Some important points of distinction between boron and the other members of its family (especially the next member Al) are discussed in the given table

Anomalous properties of boron:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Boron

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Boron.

1. Occurrence

Boron does not exist in a free state in nature. It is always found in the combined state as boric acid and borates. Boron occurs in two isotopic forms, 10B (19%) and 11B (81%). Its abundance in the earth’s crust is very low (about 0.001%)

Important minerals of boron:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Important Minerals Of Boron

Boron may be obtained from the jets of steam which erupt from the volcano as boric acid and also from the water of the hot spring of Tuscany in small amounts as boric acid.

2. Properties of boron

Boron Physical properties:

1. Boron is an extremely hard solid (next to diamond) having a much higher melting point (2450K) and this is because of its three-dimensional network structure. Its boiling point is 3923 K.

2. Boron exists in two allotropic forms namely:

  1. Amorphous,
  2. Crystalline.

Crystalline boron is of three types:

  1. α – Rhombohedral
  2. β – Rhombohedral and
  3. ϒ – Tetragonal.

The building units of all these forms are B12 icosahedral units with 20 faces and boron atoms at all the 12 comers or vertices.

The melting and boiling point of boron is 2450K and 3923K respectively. The reason behind such high melting and boiling points is attributed to very strong attractive forces among the B12 units as well as its closely packed stable crystal structure.

Chemical properties of crystalline boron

  • Crystalline boron is chemically very inert. It is not oxidised even when heated with oxygen Crystalline boron is not attacked by HCl or HF. It is not affected by various oxidising acids such as shot and cone. HNO3, H2SO4 etc.
  • When it is fused with Na2O2 or Na2CO3 and KNO3 at high temperatures, sodium borate (Na3BO3) is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Crystalline Boron

Chemical properties of amorphous boron

1. Reaction with air:

When amorphous boron is heated in air at 700°C, it bums with a red flame and undergoes oxidation to form boron trioxide. Boron nitride is also formed by its reaction with N2 gas of air

4B + 3O2 → 2B2O3; 2B + N2 → 2BN

2. Reaction with strong alkali:

When amorphous boron is fused with NaOH or KOH at a temperature greater than 773K, it forms borate salts and liberates H2 gas

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Strong Alkali

3. Reaction with oxidising adds:

Boron is not affected by non-oxidising acids such as hydrochloric add. However, it reacts with oxidising adds like cone. H2SO4 and HNO3 form boric add.

3H2SO4 + 2B → 2H2BO2 + 3SO2

6HNO3 + 2B→2H3BO3 + 6NO2

4. Reaction with halogens:

Boron bums in fluorine gas to form boron trifluoride. Boron reacts with chlorine at high temperatures to form boron trichloride

2B + 3F2→ 2BF3 ;2B + 3Cl2→2BCl3

An aqueous solution of BC13 is addicting because it undergoes hydrolysis to form a mixture of HCl and boric acid.

BCl3+ 3H2O →  3HCl + H3BO3

5. Reaction with metals (oxidising property):

The binary compounds of boron with elements having electronegativity lower than boron itself (For example: Metal) are called borides. When boron is heated with a metal at high temperature in an electric arc furnace, borides are obtained (B acts as an oxidant). Borides are hard, inert and have special properties

3Mg + 2B→ Mg3B2; 3Ca + 2B→ Ca3 B2

6. Reaction with carbon:

When boron is heated with carbon having comparable size and electronegativity at high temperatures in an electric arc furnace, very hard covalent boron carbide (B4C) is obtained. It is even harder than diamonds. It is used as an abrasive. 4B + C→ B4C It can also be prepared by reducing B2O3with coke at high temperature (2500°C) in an electric furnace

2B3O3 → B4C + 6CO↑

Reducing property: When boron is heated strongly with SiO2 and CO2, it reduces these oxides to give Si and C respectively.

2B2O3 + 7C →  B4C + 6CO↑

7. Reducing property:

When boron is heated strongly with SiO2 and CO2, it reduces these oxides to give Si and C respectively.

8. Reaction with water: Red hot boron reduces steam to yield B2O3 and dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Water

Uses of boron

  • Boron, an extremely hard refractory solid with a high melting point, low density and very low electrical conductivity, finds many applications which are as follows:
  • Boron fibres having enormous tensile strength are used in making bullet-proof vests and as reinforcement materials in space shuttles and aircraft.
  • Because of the high tendency of isotopes to absorb neutrons, metal borides are used in nuclear reactors as protective shields and control rods.
  • It is used in the steel industry (instead of using expensive metals like Mo, Cr and W) for manufacturing special types of hard steel
  • Its compounds such as borax and boric add are used for making heat-resistant glass (i.e., p a mild antiseptic.
  • Boron compounds are used as rocket fuels because of their high energy/mass ratio.
  • Boron carbide (B4C) is used as an abrasive for polishing or grinding.
  • Boron is used as a semiconductor for making electronic devices glass), glass-wool and gÿre glass
  • An aqueous solution of orthoboric acid is used as

Some P Block Elements Chapter 11 NCERT Notes

Some Important Compounds Of Boron

1. Borax, Na2B4O7.10H2O or Na2[B4O5(OH)4] 8H2O

Borax or sodium tetraborate decahydrate which occurs naturally as tincal (sugar) in certain dried-up lakes is the most important compound of boron. Borax contains the tetranuclear units

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Borax

Therefore, its correct formula is Na2[B4O5(OH)4]-8H2O.

Borax Preparation

1. From tincal:

Naturally occurring borax or tincal, which contains about 50% borax is boiled with water, concentrated and then filtered to remove insoluble impurities. The filtrate is then concentrated and cooled when crystals of borax separate.

2. From colemanite:

Finely powdered mineral, colemanite (Ca2 B6O11) is boiled with sodium carbonate solution and CaCO3, Na2B4O7 and NaBO2 are obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Colemanite

Precipitate of CaCO3 is filtered off and the filtrate is then concentrated and cooled to get the crystals of borax. A current of CO2 is passed through the mother liquor when sodium metaborate presentient gets converted into borax

4NaBO2 + CO2→ Na2B4O7(Borax) + Na2CO3

3. From boric acid:

Borax may also be obtained by neutralising boric acid with sodium carbonate. Crystals of Na2B4O7.10H2O separate on cooling.

4H3BO3 + Na2CO3 →  Na2B4O7 + 6H2O + CO2

Borax Physical properties:

  1. It is a white crystalline solid.
  2. It is less soluble in cold water but more soluble in hot water.
  3. When ordinary borax is recrystallised from water at a higher temperature (≈60°C), crystals of sodium tetraborate pentahydrate (Na2B4O7.5H2O) separate. This is called ‘goldsmith’s sugar.

Borax Chemical properties

1. Nature of aqueous solution:

The aqueous solution of borax is alkaline in nature and this is because borax undergoes hydrolysis to form the strong alkali, NaOH and the weak acid, boric acid. It acts as a buffer.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nature Of Aqueous Solution

As the aqueous solution of borax is alkaline, it can be titrated against an acid using an orange indicator

Na2B4O7 + 2HCl + 5H2O→ 4H3BO3 + 2NaCl

When phenolphthalein is added to an aqueous solution of borax, the solution becomes pink in colour. However, when glycerol (a polyhydroxy compound) is added to the solution, it becomes colourless again.

Aqueous solution Explanation:

Since the aqueous solution of borax is alkaline in nature, it becomes pink when phenolphthalein is added to it. When glycerol is added to that solution, it combines with B(OH)4 and removes it from the equilibrium by forming a stable chelate complex. As a consequence, the equilibrium shifts to the right making boric acid a strong acid. Because of the increased concentration of H+ ions, complete neutralisation of OH ions occurs and the solution becomes colourless again.

H3BO3 + H2O  ⇌  H+ B(OH)4; Ka = 6 × 10-10

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Glycerol And Stable Chelate Complex

2. Reaction with caustic soda:

When a calculated amount of NaOH is added to borax, sodium metaborate is obtained.

Na2B4O7 + 2NaOH→4NaBO2 + H2O

Reaction with sulphuric acid: When a calculated quantity of concentrated sulphuric acid is added to a hot concentrated solution of borax, boric acid is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Sulphuric Acid

3. Reaction with ethanol and sulphuric acid:

When borax is heated with ethanol and concentrated H2SO4, vapours of triethyl borate are formed which on ignition bum with a green-edged flame.

Na2B4O7+ H2SO4 + 5H2O →  Na2SO4 + 4H3BO3

H3BO3 + 3C2H5OH→B(OC2H5)3 (Triethyl borate)+  3H2O

This reaction is used as a test for the detection of borate ion (BO3-3) in qualitative analysis.

4. Action of heat:

When borax is heated strongly in the flame of a Bunsen burner, it loses its water of crystallisation and swells up to form a puffy mass. On further heating, the

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borax Heat Strongly

mass turns into a transparent liquid which Nolldllics to form a bead that consists of sodium metaborate (NaBO2) and boric anhydride (B2O3)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Metaborate And Boric Anhydride

Preparation til boron from borax

A hot and concentrated solution of borax reacts with concentrated H2SO4 to form I boric acid (H3BO3). Boric added when heated tit high temperature, successively dissociates to form boron d ioxide, (B2O3). Boron trioxide when heated with Mg-powdor produces boron.

Na2B4O7 + H2SO4+ 5H2O→Na2SO4 + 4HaBO3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Preparation Of Boron From Borax

Borax bead test

The borax bead test is very Important In a qualitative analysis for the detection of coloured metal ions like Cu2+, Ni2+, Co2+, Cr2+ etc.

  • At first, a hot platinum loop is touched with borax and then heated in a Bunsen burner’s flame.
  • Borax at first swells up and finally melts to form a colourless bead in the loop.
  • The hot loop is touched with the salt under investigation and heated at first in the oxidising flame and then in the reducing flame.
  • The metal ion is identified from the colour of the bead. This test is called the borax bead test.

Borax Bead Test:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borax Bead Test

Reactions:

1. Metallic compounds undergo decomposition on heating to form metallic oxides.

2M(NO3)2 → 2MO + 4NO2 + O2

2MSO4 → 2MO + 2SO2 + O2

(M = Cu, Fe, Co, Ni, Mn, Cr)

2. The basic metallic oxides dissolve in the acidic diborane trioxide(BO) of the borax bead and form coloured metal metaborate salts

MO + BoO3 → M(BO2)2

3. Copper Iron and other metallic salts form -ic metaborate in oxidising flame and -metaborates in reducing flame

Examples:

1. Reactions with copper salt:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Copper Salt

In oxidising flame, cupric metaborate (blue) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Oxidising Flame

In reducing flame cuprous metaborate is formed

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Reducing Flame

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Reducing Flame.

2. Reactions with iron salt:

In oxidising flame, ferric metaborate (yellow) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Iron Salt In Oxidising Flame

In reducing flame ferrous metaborate (green) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Iron Salt In Reducing Flame

3. Reactions with cobalt salt: Both in oxidising and reducing flame, cobalt metaborate (blue) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Cobalt Salt

As the oxidation states of Co (+2) and Cr (+3) remain unchanged, the colour of the bead obtained from them is the same for both reducing and oxidising flame.

Uses of borax

Borax is used:

  • In the manufacture of heat-resistant borosilicate (pyrex) glass,
  • For preparing medicinal soaps,
  • As a flux in soldering metals.
  • In the candle industry as a stiffening agent,
  • In softening water
  • For the borax bead test,
  • In the manufacture of perborate
  • Na2(OH)2B(O — O)2B(OH)2 6H2O, is an important cleansing and bleaching agent used in washing powders.

Orthoboric acid or boric acid, H2BO3o r B(OH)3

The trivial name of orthoboric acid is boric acid

Orthoboric acid Preparation:

1. From colemanite:

Sulphur dioxide is passed through a hot concentrated solution of the mineral cole, Win’ll the resulting solution is concentrated and cooled, and crystals of boric add separate out. Calcium bisulphite being highly soluble In water remains dissolved In the mother liquor.

Ca2 B6O11  (Colemanite)+ 4SO2 + 11H2 O →  2Ca(HSO3)2 (Calcium bisulphite)+ 6H3BO3 ( Boric acid)

2. From borax:

When a hot concentrated solution of borax is treated with hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid, boric acid Is obtained. The resulting solution is concentrated and then cooled when crystals of boric acid separate out

Na2B4O7 + 2HCl + 5H2O →4H3BO3 + 2NaCI

Na2B4O7 + H2SO4 + 5H2O → 4H3BO3 + Na2SO4

3. From boron compounds by hydrolysis:

Certain boron compounds such as halides, hydrides and nitrides on boiling with water (hydrolysis) produce boric add.

BCI2 + 3H2O → H3BO3+ 3HCl

B2H6(dlborane) + 6H2O→2H3BO3 + 6H2

BN(boron nitride) + 3H2O→ H3BO3 + NH3

Orthoboric acid’s Physical properties

  • It Is a white needle-like crystalline solid with a soft soapy touch.
  • It Is sparingly soluble in cold water but highly soluble in hot water.
  • It Is steam volatile.

Orthoboric acid Chemical properties

1. Addle nature:

It Is a very weak monobasic acid (Ka = 6 × 10-10). It does not donate protons like most protonic acids. In fact, due to the small size of B and the presence of only six electrons Its valence shell B(OH)3 behaves as a Lewis acid and accepts a pair of electrons from OH” Ion water thereby releasing a proton.

H(OH)3 + 2H2O ⇌  [B(OH)4]+ H3O+

B(OH)3 behaves as a very weak acid (pKa  = 9.2) because it only partially reacts with water to form [B(OH)4]and H3O+ Ions. So, B(OH)3 or H3BO3 cannot be titrated satisfactorily with NaOH solution because no sharp end point Is obtained.

If some polyhydroxy compound such as glycerol, mannitol or catechol is added to the titration mixture, then boric acid behaves as a strong monobasic add.  This occurs due to the Removal of [B(OH)4] Ion from the equilibrium mixture by the formation of a stable complex with the polyhydroxy compound.

It can then be titrated with NaOH solution and the endpoint can be detected using phenolphthalein as an indicator. ‘

2. Action of heats:

When orthoboric acid is heated, it loses molecules of water in three stages at different temperatures thus forming different products

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Action Of Heat

3. Reaction with ethyl alcohol:

Boric acid reacts with ethyl alcohol In the presence of concentrated sulphuric acid to form triethyl borate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ethyl Alcohol

Vapours of triethyl borate burn with a green-edged flame. This test is used for detecting boric acid in qualitative analysis.

It is to be noted that this test can also be performed without using H2SO4 However, for detecting borate ions, the presence of H2SO4 is required. Therefore, boric acid and borate ions can be distinguished by this test.

4. Reaction with fluoride salt:

Boric acid reacts with fluoride salt in the presence of concentrated H2SO4 to form volatile boron trifluoride (BF3). This compound burns with a green-edged flame.

2H3BO3 + 3CaF2 + 3 H2SO4 → 3CaSO4 + 2BF3 + 6H2O

5. Reaction with ammonium bi fluoride:

When boric acid is heated with ammonium bi fluoride, no residue is obtained because all the resulting compounds are gaseous

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ammonium Bifluoride

B2O33(s) + 6NH4BF4(S)→  8BF3(G) + 6NH3(g) + 3H2O(g)

6. Reaction with potassium fluoride:

When the aqueous solutions of two acidic compounds, boric acid and potassium fluoride (KHF2) are mixed, an alkaline solution is obtained due to the formation of potassium tetrafluoroborate (KBF4) and potassium hydroxide (KOH).

B(OH)3+ 2KHF2→  KBF4 + KOH + 2H2O

Being a Lewis acid, B(OH)3 has a strong tendency to combine with relatively smaller (F) ions to form fluoroborate ion (BF) and for this reason, this unbelievable reaction takes place.

Uses of boric acid

Boric acid is used

  • As a mild antiseptic for washing eyes under the name Boric lotion
  • In the manufacture of heat-resistant borosilicate glass,
  • As a preservative for milk and foodstuffs,
  • In the manufacture of enamels and glazes for pottery.

Structure Of boric acid:

The shining white crystals of boric acid contain B(OH)3 units linked by H -bonds in infinite layers of nearly hexagonal symmetry. Since the adjacent layers in the boric acid crystal are held together with weak attractive forces, one layer can easily slide over the other and hence, boric acid is soft and slippery touch.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boric Acid

Diborane, B2H6

Boron hydrides are binary compounds of B and H. Although boron does not combine directly with hydrogen, several boron hydrides collectively called boranes, (in analogy with alkanes) are known. Depending upon their general formulae, these hydrides

Can be divided into several categories of which the following two are the most important:

  1. Nido-boranes: General formula: \(\mathrm{B}_n \mathrm{H}_{n+4} \text {, example} \mathrm{B}_2 \mathrm{H}_6\) (diborane), B5H9 (pentaborane-9), B6H10 (hexaborane- 10), B8H12(octaborane-12),B10H14 (decaborane-14) etc. 
  2. Arachno-boranes: General formula: \(\mathrm{B}_n \mathrm{H}_{n+6} \text {, example }\) B5H14 (pentaborane-11), BgH12 (hexa-borane-12), BgH14(octaborane-14) etc. The mostimportant hydride ofboron is diborane (B2Hg).

Preparation of diborane

1. Laboratory preparation:

Diborane is prepared by the oxidation of sodium borohydride (NaBH4) with I2 in a diglyme solution.

Diglyme is a polyether whose formula is CH3OCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Diglyme

2. From boron trifluoride etherate:

It may be prepared by the reduction of boron trifluoride etherate with lithium aluminium hydride (LiAlH4) in diethyl ether or sodium borohydride (NaBH4) in diglyme

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Boron Trifluoride Etherate

3. Industrial preparation:

On an industrial scale, diborane is prepared by reducing BF3 with LiH or NaH. 450K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Industrial Preparation

Diborane Physical properties

Diborane is a colourless, foul-smelling, highly toxic gas having a boiling point of 180K.

Diborane Chemical properties

1.  Thermal stability:

It is stable only at low temperatures. When it is heated at 373-523K in a sealed tube, several higher boranes are obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Thermal Stability
However, by controlling the temperature, pressure and reaction time, various individual boranes can be prepared.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Various Individual Boranes

2. Combustibility:

When it is exposed to air, it spontaneously catches fire because of the strong affinity of boron towards oxygen. This reaction forming boric anhydride and water is highly exothermic.

B2H6 + 3O2 →B2O3 + 3H2O; ΔH = – 1976 kJ -mol-1

The higher boranes also spontaneously in the air.

3. Hydrolysis:

It undergoes ready hydrolysis to produce boric acid.

B2H6(g) + 6H2O(aq)→2H3BO3(aq) + 6H2(g)↑

It reacts with methanol to form trimethyl borate.

B2H6 + 6CH3OH → 2B(OCH3)3 + 6H2

4. Reaction with Lewis bases:

When diborane is treated with Lewis base, it undergoes cleavage to form monoborane which then reacts with Lewis base to form an adduct.

B2H6 + 2NMe3→ 2BH3-NMe3; B2H6 + 2CO → 2BH3-CO

5. Reaction with ammonia:

When diborane is treated with ammonia, an additional compound is formed. The compound on further heating at about 473 K decomposes to give a volatile compound called borazine (or borazole).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ammonia

Borazine is isosteric (i.e., the same number of atoms) and isoelectronic (i.e., the same number of electrons) with benzene and its structure is similar to that of benzene. Like benzene, all the atoms in borazine are sp² -hybridised. The n -n-bonding of borazine is dative and it arises due to sideways overlapping of filled p-orbitals of N and empty p-orbitals of B. Because of its similarity with benzene, borazine is also called inorganic benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borazine And Inorganic Benzene

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Notes PDF

6. Formation of complex borohydrides:

Diborane reacts with several metal hydrides to form borohydrides containing tetrahedral [BH4]_ ion.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Complex Borohydrides

Both sodium and lithium borohydrides are used as very good reducing agents in the synthesis of organic compounds in the laboratory. These two compounds may also be used as starting material for the preparation of other borohydride compounds.

7. Reaction with alkalis:

Diborane dissolves in strong alkalies such as NaOH or KOH solution to form metaborates and H2 gas.

B2H6 + 2KOH + 2H2O→ 2KBO2 + 6H2(Potassium Metaborate)↑

8. Reaction with halogen acids:

Diborane reacts with halogen acids to form halodiborancs and hydrogen gas. The order of reactivity of halogen acids is: HI > HBr > HCl

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogen Acids

9. Reaction with halogens:

Diborane reacts with halogens to form corresponding halodiboranes. The order of reactivity of halogens is Cl2 > Br2 > I2. Thus, chlorine reacts with diborane explosively at room temperature, bromine reacts rapidly at 373 K but iodine reacts slowly at higher temperatures

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogens Of Chlorodiborane

Uses of diborane:

  1. Diborane is used in the preparation of several borohydrides such as LiBH4 NaBH4, etc.
  2. It is used as a reducing agent in organic synthesis.
  3. It is also used as a fuel for supersonic rockets.

Structure Of diborane, B2H6:

The structure and bonding of diborane seem to be very interesting. In the excited state, the B atom has the electronic configuration 2s¹2px¹ 2py¹ and therefore, it has only three electrons available for sharing. Now, 14 electrons (for six B—H and one B—B bond) are required if boron forms all conventional covalent bonds in ethane (C2H6)

But there are only 12 electrons (six from two B atoms and six from six H-atoms). Thus, the molecule is short of two electrons and its structure can not be similar to that of ethane (C2H6)

Based on electron diffraction study:

  • Diborane has a bridged structure as given in There are two types of hydrogen atoms in this bridged structure. The two boron atoms and four terminal hydrogen atoms (shown by thick lines) lie in the same plane, while the remaining two hydrogen atoms (shown by dotted lines) lying above and below the plane form bridges and these are called bridge hydrogen atoms.
  • The two B-H-B bridges lie in a plane which is nearly perpendicular to the plane containing the terminal B—H bonds.
  • There are two bonds in the diborane molecule:
    1. The four terminal B—H bonds are normal covalent bonds, each Being formed by sharing a pair of electrons between boron and hydrogen atoms. These are quite strong bonds and called two-centre electron pair bonds or two-centre two-electron bonds (2c-2e bonds),
    2. The two bridge bonds B …. H……B are quite different from the normal electron pair bonds. Each bridge H-atom is bonded to two boron atoms by sharing only one pair of electrons.
  • Such bridge bonds are called three centre electron pair bonds or three centres two-electron bonds (3c-2e bonds). Three-centre electron pair bonds or three-centre two-electron bonds are very weak bonds and are often called banana bonds as they resemble bananas in shape.
  • Molecules like diborane (B2H6) which do not have a sufficient number of electrons to form normal covalent bonds are called electron-deficient molecules.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diborane

Based on hybridisation:

Boron atoms (excited state electronic configuration: 2s¹2px¹ 2py¹ in diborane undergo sp³ -hybridisation.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hybridisation

1. The two half-filled sp³ -hybrid orbitals of each boron atom overlap with the half-filled orbitals of hydrogen atoms to form normal covalent bonds.

2. The third half-filled hybrid orbital of one of the two boron atoms and the vacant orbital of the remaining boron atom overlap simultaneously with the half-filled Is -orbital of a hydrogen atom to form a B……H….B bridge bond

3. This bond involves three atoms (two boron atoms and one hydrogen atom) and contains only two electrons because one overlapping orbital of boron is empty. Hence, this B–‘H-‘-B bond is called three centre electron pair (3c-2e) bonds. Because of its typical shape resembling a banana, it is also called a banana bond

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diborane Showing Overlapping Of Orbitals

Aluminium

Aluminium, the second member of the boron family (group-13), is the most abundant metallic element in the earth’s crust. It is found in a variety of aluminosilicate compounds such as clay, mica and feldspar. The only ore of aluminium from which the metallic aluminium can be extracted profitably (in industry) is bauxite. Bauxite is hydrated aluminium oxide whose molecular formula is Al2O3-2H2O

Aluminium Physical properties:

  • Aluminium is a bluish-white metal with a brilliant lustre. But aluminium easily gets tarnished by the formation of a thin layer of oxide on the surface.
  • It is a light metal whose density is 2.73g-cm-1. Aluminium possesses high tensile strength, yet it is malleable and ductile.

Aluminium is a very good conductor of heat and electricity.

Aluminium Chemical properties:

It is not as reactive as its high negative electrode potential (E° = -1.66V) would imply and this is because there is a very thin layer of oxide on its surface.

1. Action of air:

Al remains unaffected in dry air but in the presence of moist air, a thin film of oxide is formed over its surface. Hence, the metallic of disappears. When burnt in oxygen it produces brilliant light.

4Al + 3O2 → 2Al2 O3+ 772 kcal

The reaction is highly exothermic and the heat evolved is used for the reduction of oxides of Cr, Fe, Mn etc. (known as the thermite process).

2. Action of water: Aluminium decomposes boiling water thereby evolving hydrogen gas.

2Al + 6H2O→2Al(OH)3 + 3H2

3. The action of non-metals:

Besides oxygen, aluminium reacts with other non-metals such as nitrogen, sulphur and halogens to form nitride, sulphide and halides respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Actions Of Non Metals

4. Action of acids:

It dissolves both in dilute and concentrated hydrochloric acid and dilute sulphuric acid along with the evolution of hydrogen gas.

2Al + 6HCl→ 2AlCl3 + 3H2

2Al + 3H2SO4→Al2(SO4)3 + 3H3

The reaction with dilute sulphuric acid is very slow probably due to the insolubility of tyre oxide film over the metal in the acid. Hot and concentrated sulphuric acid dissolves aluminium with the evolution of sulphur dioxide (SO2) gas.

2Al + 6H2SO4→Al2(SO4)3 + 3SO2 + 6H2O

Dilute and concentrated nitric acid have no action on aluminium and this is due to the formation of an impenetrable oxide layer on its surface. Nitric acid may, therefore, be kept in the aluminium vessel.

5. Action of alkalis:

Aluminium dissolves in hot and cone. NaOH or KOH solutions form sodium aluminate with the evolution of hydrogen gas.

2Al + 2NaOH +2H2O → 2NaAlO(Sodium aluminate) (Soluble) +  3H2

Aluminium reacts with hot and concentrated sodium carbonate (Na2C03) solution to form sodium aluminate, carbon dioxide and hydrogen.

2Al + Na2CO2 + 3H2O  → 2NaAlO2 (Sodium aluminate) (Soluble) + CO2 + 3H2

Uses of aluminium:

  • Aluminium alloys (duralumin: Al, Mg, Cu and magnalium: Al, Mg) are light and strong and thus, are used in the construction of aircraft, ships and cars.
  • It is a better conductor than copper and is used for making electric power cables.
  • It is used for making doors, windows, building panels, mobile homes and household utensils.
  • Finely divided Al powder is used in preparing aluminium paint and as an ingredient in solid fuels in rockets.
  • Aluminium foils are used In wrapping soaps, cigarettes and confectioneries.
  • Al is used to extract metals such as Cr, Mn etc., from their ores (thermite process).
  • A mixture of ammonium nitrate and Al dust (ammonal) is used to make bombs and crackers.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Some P Block Elements Summary

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Group-14 Elements (Carbon Family)

  1. The valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of group 14 is ns²np², where n = 2-6.
  2. It becomes clear from these electronic configurations (given in the table below) that carbon and silicon have noble gas cores, germanium and tin have noble gas plus 10 d-electron cores and lead has noble gas cores in addition to 14/ and lOd -electron cores.
  3. Thus, the electronic configurations of group-14 elements are similar to that of group-13 elements. However, they contain one more p-electron as compared to group-13 elements.

Electronic configurations of a group of  elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element Electronic Configuration Of Group Of Elements

Occurrence Of Group-14 Elements

1. The members of group 14 are carbon (C), silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).

2. Carbon is the seventeenth most abundant element by mass in the earth’s crust It is widely distributed in nature in free as well as in combined states. In a free state, it occurs in coal, graphite and diamond. These are the main allotropes of carbon.

Carbon in the form of coal and coke is used mainly as fuel. In a combined state, it is present widely as metal carbonates, hydrocarbons (petroleum), carbohydrates and carbon dioxide (0.03%) in the air. Gases like propane and butane are the major constituents of LPG.

Moreover, the main constituent of all organic compounds is carbon. Two stable isotopes of carbon are present in nature namely 6C12 and 6C13 Another isotope of carbon (6C14) is radioactive. The age of antique articles is determined by the ratio of 6C12 and 6C14 present in them. This process is called radiocarbon dating.

3. Silicon is the second (about 27.7% by mass) most abundant element (next to oxygen) in the earth’s crust and is present in the form of silica and silicates. Germanium occurs only in traces (1.5 ppm). Both germanium and silicon in very pure form find applications as semiconductors.

4. The natural abundance of tin and lead is very low (2 and 13 ppm respectively). The principal ore of tin is tinstone or cassiterite (Sn02) and that of lead is galena (PbS). Both tin and lead form several alloys. Tin is also used for tin plating while some lead-containing compounds are used as the constituents of paints.

5. The first two elements of this group, carbon and silicon are non-metals, germanium is a semi-metal (metalloid) while tin and lead are metals

General Trends In Atomic And Physical

Properties Of Group 14 Elements

Some important physical and chemical properties of group-14 elements are given in the following table. The trend in properties may be largely understood from their electronic configurations. The effect of inadequate shielding by d – and f- electrons is prominent in the case of Ge and Pb.

Some atomic and physical properties of group-14 elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Physical Properties Of Group 14 Elements

Trends in various atomic and physical properties of group -14 elements and their explanation

1. Atomic radii

  1. The atomic radii of group-14 elements are smaller than the corresponding elements of group-13.

Atomic radii  Explanation 1:

On moving from a group-13 to a group-14 element within the same period, the magnitude of nuclear charge increases. As a result, the outermost electrons experience greater nuclear charge and are pulled more strongly towards the nucleus. Consequently, the atomic radius decreases.

2. On moving down the group, the atomic radii of the group- 14 elements increase regularly.

Atomic radii  Explanation 2:

The increase in atomic radii down the group is due to the addition of new electron shells. However, the increase in atomic radii from Si to Pb is small and this is because the effective nuclear charge somewhat increases due to ineffective shielding ofthe intervening d and /-electrons.

2. Ionisation enthalpy

1. First ionisation enthalpies of group-14 elements are higher than those of corresponding members of group-13.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 1:

This is because of the greater nuclear charge and smaller atomic size of group-14 elements as compared to the corresponding members of group-13.

2. In group 14, ionisation enthalpy decreases from C to Sn and then increases from Sn to Pb. The overall order is

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 2:

Because of the increase in atomic size and the screening effect of inner electrons which outweigh the impact of increased nuclear charge, the ionisation enthalpies decrease down the group from C to Sn. However, a small increase in ionisation enthalpy from Sn to Pb is because the effect of increased nuclear charge (82-50 = 32 units), in this case, outweighs the inadequate shielding effect of intervening d and /-electrons.

3. Electropositive or metallic character

The group-14 elements are less electropositive and hence less metallic than the elements of group-13. Again, on moving down the group, the metallic character increases from C to Pb.

Electropositive Explanation:

The less electropositive character of group-14 elements is due to the smaller size of their atoms and higher ionisation enthalpies as compared to those of the corresponding group-13 elements. On moving down the group, the electropositive character increases as the size of the atom increases and ionisation enthalpy decreases.

4. Electronegativity

Because of the smaller size, the elements of group 14 are more electronegative than the corresponding elements of group 13. Values of electronegativity, however, do not decrease regularly down the group.

Carbon is the most electronegative element (2.5) while the remaining elements possess almost die same value (1.8 to 1.9) because of poor shielding by d -and f-electrons.

5. Melting and boiling points

The elements of group 14 have higher melting and boiling points as compared to the corresponding elements of group 13.

This is because the atoms of group-14 elements form a greater number of covalent bonds (four) with each other as compared to group-13 elements (which form only three bonds) and hence there exist strong binding forces between their atoms both in the solid as well as in the liquid states. Further, the melting and boiling points decrease down the group due to an increase in atomic size and consequent decrease in the interatomic forces of attraction. However, the melting point of Pb is higher than that of Sn.

6. Catenation

The self-inking property of the elements by which their atoms mutually combine to form long open chains (straight or branched) and rings of different sizes is called catenation. Carbon has the maximum tendency to catenate and because of this carbon forms a vast number of organic compounds. The catenation property of group- 14 elements follows the order: C>>Si > Ge = Sn. Lead does not exhibit the property of catenation.

Catenation Explanation:

The tendency of an element to undergo catenation increases with an increase in the strength of the M—M bond, where M represents an atom of the given element. As the size of the carbon atom is very small, the C—C bond is quite strong and the formation of this bond is thermodynamically very favourable.

However, on moving down the group, the atomic size increases and the strength of the bond decreases and consequently, the tendency to exhibit the property of catenation decreases

C —C (348 kj-mol-1) > Si—Si  (297kJ-mol-1) > Ge —Ge  (260kJ-mol-1)> Sn—Sn (240kJ-mol-1)

7. Oxidation state

1. Carbon and silicon exhibit a +4 oxidation state. Due to the inert pair effect, the other three elements ofthe group (Ge, Sn and Pb) show +2 and +4 oxidation states. This is due to the weak shielding effect of- and- electrons.

2. On moving down the group from Ge to Pb, the number of d- and f- electrons increases due to which the inert pair effect increases gradually. As a result, the stability of the +4 oxidation state decreases. The increasing order of the +2 oxidation state is Ge < Sn < Pb. Lead is most stable at +2 oxidation state.

3. The compounds in which the group-14 elements are in a +4 oxidation state, are covalent since the charge on the element is high and its size is small. However, those compounds in which the oxidation state is +2, are ionic, since the charge of the element is small and its size is large. For example, SnCl2 is ionic whereas SnCl4 is a covalent liquid. On moving down the group, the tendency of forming covalent compounds decreases and that of forming ionic compounds increases.

8. Multiple bonding

Carbon, the first member of the carbon family, forms multiple bonds with carbon (C=C, C ≡ C), oxygen (C=O) and nitrogen (C=N, C≡ N ) and this occurs because of comparable sizes and energies of overlapping orbitals (2p ). However, Si and other members possess p -orbitals having comparatively bigger sizes and higher energies (3/7, 4p, 5p etc.) as compared to that of carbon.

Therefore, sideways overlap is not effective and consequently, multiple bonding does not take place. However, in some compounds, silicon becomes involved in multiple bonds with oxygen and nitrogen atoms and these are called pn-in bonds.

Example:

This can be illustrated by the structure of trisilylamlne, N(SiH3)3. The central N-atom of this molecule is sp² – hybridised. It is, therefore, a trigonal planar molecule. A lone pair of electrons present in the 2p -orbital of the N-atom becomes involved in sideways overlap with the vacant 3d orbitals of Si leading to the formation of pπ-dπ back-bonding (shown by dotted lines). Since the availability of the unshared pair of electrons on N (engaged in pn-dn backbonding) is reduced, the compound becomes weakly basic.

The central N-atom of trimethylamine, N(CH3)3, on the other hand, is sp3 -hybridised. The three hybrid orbitals are involved in the formation of cr -bonds with three carbon atoms and the unshared electron pair exists in the fourth sp³ -hybrid orbital. Carbon does not possess any low-energy vacant d -d-orbital suitable for -bonding. Therefore, the shape of the molecule is pyramidal. Since the availability of the unshared electron pair on N is much higher, the molecule is strongly basic

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Multiple Bonding Of Pyramidal

NCERT Solutions for P Block Elements Class 11 Chemistry

Chemical Properties Of Carbon Family

1. Nature of compounds

1. The general valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of the carbon family is ns²np². This indicates that their atoms have four valence electrons.

2. Compounds of these elements are normallynotionicin nature as the formation of both M4+ and M4- ions require a large amount of energy, thus making it unfavourable.

3. Compounds formed by the elements of this family are generally covalent, in which they complete their octets by sharing valence electrons with atoms of other elements.

4. Carbon and silicon exhibit a +4 oxidation state. The remaining three elements of this group, i.e., Ge, Sn and Pb, however, exhibit +4 as well as +2 oxidation states. This is due to the inert pair effect arising out of poor shielding of valence s -electrons by intervening d – or f-electrons.

5. As the number of d or f-electrons increases down the group from Ge to Pb, the inert pair effect becomes gradually more prominent. As a result, the stability of the +4 oxidation state decreases and the +2 oxidation state increases.

The stability of the +2 oxidation state follows the order:

1. Ge < Sn < Pb. Lead is most stable in the +2 oxidation state. vii] The compounds of group-14 elements in which these elements exhibit a +4 oxidation state are expected to be covalent because of their extremely high charge. However, the compound in which these elements exhibit an oxidation state of +2 is expected to be ionic because of its large size and a small charge

2. SnCl2, for example, is anionic compound while SnCl4 is a covalent compound. Again, on moving down the group, the tendency of the elements to form covalent compounds decreases whereas the tendency to form ionic compounds increases

3. Since carbon has no d -d-orbital, it cannot expand its valence shell and hence its maximum covalency or coordination number is four. However, due to the availability of vacant d -d-orbitals, Si, Ge, Sn and Pb can form hexa-coordinated complexes by increasing their coordination number from 4 to 6. For example, [SiF6]2-, [GeF6]2-, [Sn(OH)6]2-, [PbCl6]2-etc

2. Trends in oxidising and reducing properties

1. Because of the inert pair effect, elements like Ge, Sn and Pb exhibit +2 and +4 oxidation states. Therefore, these elements in the +2 oxidation state act as reducing agents (M→ M4++2e) while in the +4 oxidation state, they act as oxidation agents (M4++2e →M2+).

2.  The +4 oxidation state of get is most stable followed by Sn and Pb. It thus follows that in group -14, Ge(2) salts are the strongest reducing agents followed by Sn(2) salts. However, germanium is much less abundant in nature than tin and therefore, Sn(II) salts such as SnCl2 are largely used as reducing agents.

For example:

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{FeCl}_3+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow 2 \mathrm{FeCl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_4 \)

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{HgCl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow \mathrm{Hg}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_4 \)

⇒ \(\mathrm{Hg}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{SnCl}_4\)

3. The +2 oxidation state of Pb is most stable followed by Sn and Ge. Therefore, Pb(IV) salts such as lead tetraacetate, Pb(OCOCH3)4 and Pb02 are largely used as oxidising agents.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ethylene Glycol

Pb02 + 4HC1 (cone.)- PbCl2 + Cl2 + 2H20

Formation of oxides

When the elements of group 14 are heated in oxygen,

They form two types of oxides:

  1. Monoxides of the formula MO and
  2. Dioxides ofthe formula MO.

Lead also forms another oxide called trialled tetraoxide or red lead (Pb304) which can be obtained by heating litharge (PbO) more than O2 or air at 673 K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Formations Of Oxides

The acid-base character of the oxides:

1.  The oxides of these elements in higher oxidation states are generally more acidic than those in lower oxidation states.

2. Again, the acidic character of the oxides decreases on moving down the group. The dioxides such as CO2 and SiO2 are acidic, GeO2 is less acidic than SiO2 while SnO2 and PbO2 are amphoteric. Being acidic, the dioxides of mC, Si and Ge react only with bases.

CO2 + 2NaOH→Na2CO3+ H2O

CO2 + Ca(OH)2→CaCO3 + H2O

SiO2 + 2NaOH→Na2SiO3 + H2O

GeO2+ 2NaOH→Na2GeO3 + H2O

3. Being amphoteric, the dioxides of Sn and Pb react with both acids and bases

SnO2+ 2NaOH→Na2SnO3 (Sodium stannate)+ H2O

SnO2 + 4HCl→ SnCl4 + 2H2O

PbO2 + 2NaOH→Na2PbO3 (Sodium plumbate)+ H2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Atmospheric Nature

4. Among the monoxides of these elements, CO is neutral, GeO is acidic while SnO and PbO are amphoteric.

Oxidising and reducing the power of oxides:

1. Among the monoxides of group-14 elements, CO is the strongest reducing agent because the +4 oxidation state is the most stable for carbon. CO is used in the extraction of many metals from their oxides.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Oxidising And Reducing Power Of Oxides

2. Among the dioxides of group-14 elements, Pb02 is the strongest oxidising agent because of the inert pair effect. It oxidises HC1 to Cl2 and reacts with concentrated H2S04 or HN03 to liberate dioxygen.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Among The Dioxides Of Group 14 Elements

3. Formation of halides

The elements of group-14 combine with halogens to form halides of the formula MX4 and MX2 (X = F, Cl, Br or I). All the elements of this except carbon react directly with halogens under suitable conditions.

Tetrahalides ofgroup-14 elements:

1. All the elements of this group form tetrahalides of the formula MX4.

2. These tetrahalides are mostly covalent. The central atom of these halides is sp3 -hybridised and the molecules are tetrahedral shape. Thein two exceptions are SnF4 and PbF4 which are more.

3. IoThe ionic character and thermal stability of these halides decrease with an increase in n atomicnumbatomic number of halogen atoms. Example:

PbCl4 is a stable compound but PbBr4 is an unstable compound while Pbl4 is not known. Because of the strong oxidising power of Pb(+4) and the strong reducing power of I, Pbl4 does not exist. The unstable nature of PbBr4 is because Pb(+4) is strongly oxidising and Br is weakly reducing.In both the cases, the halide ion(I or Br ) reduces Pb4+ to Pb2+ (Pb4+ + 2X→Pb2++ X2)

Then on-existence of Pbl4 can be explained alternatively as follows— The amount of energy released by the initial formation ofthe Pb—I bond is not sufficient to unpair 6s² electrons and excite one of them to 6p -orbital to have four unpaired electrons around the Pb-atom

4.  Carbon tetrachloride (CCl4) does notundergo hydrolysis. However, the tetrahalides of other elements undergo ready hydrolysis. For example:

SiCl4 + 4H2O→Si(OH)4 + 4HCl

SnCl4+ 2H2O→SnO2 + 4HCI

Explanation:

That CCl4 does not undergo hydrolysis can be explained by the fact that carbon having no vacant d -d-orbital cannot expand its coordination number beyond 4. However, silicon can undergo ready hydrolysis because it can expand its octet (i.e., coordination number beyond four) due to the availability ofvacant d -orbitals. reaction

CCl4+ 2H2O → Noreaction

SiCl4 + 4H2O → Si(OH)4 (Silicic acid) + 4HCl

The reaction proceeds through the following steps:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction Proceeds Through The Following Steps

  1. In the first step, a lone pair of electrons from the oxygen atom of the H20 molecule is donated to an empty d -d-orbital of Si, forming a five-coordinate intermediate which has a trigonal bipyramidal shape.
  2. In the second step, the intermediate loses a molecule of HCl and in this way, one Cl-atom of SiCl4 is displaced by one OH group.
  3. The remaining three Cl-atoms are displaced successively by OH groups yielding silicic acid.

5. Since carbon has no vacant d -orbitals in its valence shell, its tetrahalides do not form complexes. However, tetrahalides of other elements of this group form complexes due to the availability of vacant d -d-orbitals in their valence shells. These can, therefore, increase their coordination number up to six.

In other words, the tetrahalides of carbon do not act as Lewis acids but the tetrahalides of the other elements act as strong Lewis acids. The tetrahalides of Si, Ge, Sn and Pb, for example, can form hexahalo complexes like [SiF6]2-_, [GeF6]2-, [SnCl6]2-_ and[PbCl6]2- with corresponding halide ions.

SiF4+ 2HF→H2SiF6 (hydrofluorosilicic acid) (or hexafluorosilicic acid)

SnCl4 + 2Cl→SnCl2-6 [Hexachlorostannate (IV) ion]

Dihalldes of group-14 elements:

All the elements of group-14 except carbon and silicon form dihalides of the formula MX2. On moving down the group, the stability of these dihalides increases steadily due to the inert pair effect, i.e., the stability follows the order:

GeX2<<SnX2 < PbX2

Anomalous Behaviour Of Carbon

Carbon, die first member of group 14, differs from the remaining members of its family in many properties.

Reasons for anomalous behaviour of carbon: 

  1. Its atomic size is exceptionally small.
  2. It has higher ionisation enthalpy and electronegativity.
  3. It has no vacant dorbital in its valence shell.
  4. It tends to form multiple bonds

Anomalous properties of carbon:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Carbon

Allotropic Forms Of Carbon

The phenomenon of the existence of an element in two or more forms having different physical but similar chemical properties i? called allotropy and the different forms are called allotropes.

Carbon exists in several allotropic forms which may be classified as:

  1. Crystalline and
  2. Amorphous.

The four crystalline allotropic forms of carbon are:

  1. Diamond
  2. Graphite,
  3. Fullerene
  4. Carbon nanotubes.

The four amorphous allotropic forms of carbon are:

  1. Charcoal
  2. Soot or lamp black
  3. Coke and
  4. Gas carbon.

Amorphous carbon is not pure and remains mixed with various elements and compounds. Finer X-ray studies have shown that the amorphous varieties of carbon are composed of very minute crystalline units like graphite which are distributed throughout their masses in a most disordered fashion.

A synopsis of various allotropes of carbon is given in the following chart:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements A Synopsis Of Various Is Allotropes Of Carbon

Crystalline Carbon Diamond

Diamond is a very precious substance which is availablein South Africa, New South Wales, Brazil, the Ural mountains and at Golconda in India. Two varieties of natural diamonds are available. One is the lustrous and colourless (or slightly coloured) variety which is generally used as precious gem¬ stones and the other is the black or deep-coloured opaque variety, known as the carbonado robot.

The weight of precious diamond is expressed in carats (1 carat = 200mg).

Some well-known diamonds are:

Cullinan (3032 carats), Kohinoor (present weight 106 carats), Pitt (136.25 carats), Regent (193 carats), Orloff (193 carats) and Great Mogul (186 carats). Diamond can also be prepared artificially but because of high cost and poor quality is seldom made artificially

Diamond Physical properties

  1. Diamond is transparent, lustrous and crystalline. It may be colourless or slightly yellow coloured although some black or dark coloured varieties are also available.
  2. It is the hardest naturally occurring substance known and it has a very high melting point (3843 K).
  3. It is the heaviest among all the allotropic forms of carbon; its density is 3.51 gem-3
  4. Diamond has a very high refractive index (2.417) and thus light passing through it, suffers total internal reflection innumerable times. For this reason, diamonds appear to be extremely bright and lustrous.
  5. It is transparent to X-rays and this property helps to distinguish a real diamond from an artificial one (made of glass).
  6. Diamond is a non-conductor of electricity but good conductor of heat

Chemical properties:

At ordinary temperatures, diamond is chemically inert. It does not react with acids, alkalies, chlorine, potassium chlorate etc. However, it reacts with certain substances at much higher temperatures.

1. It is oxidised by oxygen at 800-900°C to produce pure carbon dioxide:

C + O2 → CO2

2. Diamond is converted into graphite in the absence ofair at much higher temperatures

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element C Diamond And C Graphite

Molten diamond can be converted into graphite by applying heat but graphite cannot be converted into diamond by heating to a very high temperature. The change is, therefore, unidirectional and this is because graphite is thermodynamically more stable than diamond. This type of allotropy is known as monotropy.

3. When a diamond is reacted with molten sodium carbonate, sodium monoxide and carbon monoxide are produced

C + Na2CO3 → Na2O+2CO

4. It undergoes oxidation by fluorine at 700°C to form carbon tetrafluoride

C+ 2F2→ CF4

5. At about 250°C, diamond gets oxidised by a mixture of K2Cr2O7 and concentrated sulphuric acid (i.e., chromic acid) to CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sulphuric Acids

6. Diamond reacts with sulphur vapour at 1000°C to form carbon disulphide: C + 2S→ CS2

Structure of diamond:

1. In diamond, each C-atom is sp³ – hybridised and linked to four other C-atoms tetrahedrally by covalent bonds.

2. The value of each C—C—C bond angle is 109°28′ and each C —C bond distance is 1.54Å

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diamond

3. An innumerable number of such tetrahedral units are linked together to form a three-dimensional giant molecule containing very strong bonds extended in all directions. Because of such a three-dimensional network of strong covalent bonds, diamond is extremely hard.

4. Since a huge amount of thermal energy is required to break a large number of strong covalent bonds, its melting point is very high.

5. All 4 valence electrons of each sp3 -hybridised C-atom in diamond crystal participate in forming covalent bonds and there is no free electron on any carbon atom. Thus, a diamond is an anon-conductor of electricity. vi] Diamond has the highest known thermal conductivity because its structure distributes thermal motion in three dimensions very effectively.

6. Unlike graphite in which the C-atoms are arranged in different distant layers, the C-atoms in diamond are placed at a covalent bond distance (1.54A). Because of this, the density of diamond is higher than that of graphite

Diamond Uses:

  1. Because of its transparency, dazzling lustre and beauty, diamond is extensively used as precious gemstone.
  2. Because of its extreme hardness, it is used for cutting glass, polishing hard surfaces and drilling purposes. Black or dark-coloured diamonds are generally used for this purpose.

Graphite

Graphite is available as minerals in Sri Lanka, Mexico, Italy, California (U.S.A), Siberia, Korea, Spain and India. The word graphite originates from the Greek word ‘graph’ which

Preparation of artificial graphite: Acheson process:

  • In this process, coke dust mixed with silica is heated to a temperature of 3000-3500°C with the help of electrodes in an electric furnace made of fire bricks for 25-30 hours.
  • The mixture is kept covered by sand.
  • In the first stage of the reaction, silica reacts with carbon to form silicon carbide (SiC) and carbon monoxide (CO).
  • Silicon carbide thus formed decomposes to yield graphite and silicon. Q
  • At higher temperatures, silicon, on being vapourised, escapes from the furnace and graphite is left.

SiO2 + 3C→ SiC + 2CO↑; SiC→Si + C [graphite]

Graphite Physical Properties 

  1. Graphite is a dark greyish-coloured opaque, soft and slippery crystalline substance possessing metallic lustre.
  2. It is lighter (density 2.25 g-cm-3 ) than diamond.
  3. It is a good conductor of heat and electricity.

Graphite Chemical properties

1. Graphite is more reactive than diamond

2. When graphite is heated in air at 700°C, it is oxidised to carbon dioxide:

C + O→CO2

3. At 500°C, fluorine reacts with graphite to produce carbon tetrafluoride (CF4). The compound is a non-conductor of electricity. It is also called graphite fluoride.

4. Graphite is not attacked by dilute acid or alkali. However, when it is subjected to react with molten sodium carbonate, carbon monoxide is formed.

5. Graphite is oxidised to carbon dioxide with a mixture of K2Cr2O. and concentrated H2SO4 (chromic acid).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Chromic Acid

6. When graphite is heated in the presence of a mixture of cones. nitric acid and sulphuric acid containing a small amount of potassium chlorate, greenish-yellow-coloured solid graphitic acid (CnH4O5) is obtained. Its exact structural formula is not known yet. Graphite can be identified by this test (diamond does not respond to this test).

7. On complete combustion, graphite produces mellitic acid
[C6(COOH)6].

Structure of graphite

1. Each carbon atom in graphite is sp2 -sp2-hybridised and is linked to three other carbon atoms directly in the same plane forming a network of planar hexagons and these two-dimensional layers exist in different parallel planes.

2. In each layer, the C—C bond length is 1.42Å and the distance between two adjacent layers is 3.35Åwhich is greater than the C—C covalent bond distance. So, the layers are supposed to be held together by relatively weak van der Waals forces of attraction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Graphite

Some P Block Elements Class 11 Important Topics

3. As the distance between two parallel layers is sufficiently large, graphite is less dense than diamond.

4.  Since the layers are weakly held together, on application of pressure, one layer easily slides over the other. Thus, graphite is found to be soft and lubricating

5. In the formation of hexagons in a layer of graphite, only three of its four valence electrons are used to form three sigma bonds (Csp²-Csp²). The remaining electrons of each carbon atom present in an unhybridised p -p-orbital are utilised to form n -n-bonds.

6. The n -n-electrons are mobile and can move freely through the graphite crystal. Because of the presence of free mobile electrons, graphite is a good conductor of electricity and heat.

7. Of all the crystalline allotropes of carbon, graphite is thermodynamically the most stable one. Its standard enthalpy of formation (AfH°) is taken as zero.

Graphite Uses:

  • Graphite is largely used for lining and making electrodes for electric furnaces.
  • When mixed with oil and water, graphite is used as a lubricant in machinery.
  • It finds use in making crucibles resistant to high temperatures.
  • By mixing with desired quantities ofwax or clay, graphite is used for making cores of lead pencils
  • Graphite is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors

Fullerenes

Fullerenes or Buckminsterfullerene (named after the famous American designer of the geodesic dome, Robert Buckminster Fuller) is the latest allotrope of carbon discovered in 1985 collectively by three scientists namely R. E. Smalley, R. F. Curl and H. W. Kroto. It is a crystalline allotrope of carbon in which the carbon atoms exist in a cluster form. It is also known to be the purest form of carbon because, unlike diamond and graphite does not have surface bonds that are to be attracted by other atoms.

Structure of fullerenes C60:

Fullerenes are expressed by the general formula Cn, where n is an even number between 30-600, for example, C60, C70, C80….etc.

All these are cage-like spheroidal molecules having polyhedral geometry containing pentagonal and hexagonal planes. Number of hexagons in a C„ molecule =(n/2- 10),

Example:

In fullerene C60 molecule, number ofhexagons =(60/2-10) = 20. Structure of fullerene C60; The C60 molecule consists of twenty-six-membered rings and twelve five-membered rings of sp² -hybridised carbon atoms fused into each other

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Buckminsterfullerene

Each carbon atom forms three or -bonds with the other three carbon atoms and the remaining electron on each carbon is involved in the formation of the n -bond and as a result, the system is expected to be aromatic. However, it is not aromatic because the molecule is not planar and it does not have (4n + 2) electrons.

It is a non¬ aromatic system. This fusion pattern provides a marvellous symmetry to the structure in which the fused ring system bends around and closes to form a soccer ball-shaped molecule (“buckyball”). Of all the fullerenes, C60 is the most stable one.

Structure of fuUerene C70:

The molecule acquires the shape ofa rugby ball. It consists of twelve five-membered rings and twenty-five six-membered rings and their arrangement is the same as that of a C60 molecule.

C70 Preparation:

  • The preparation of fullerenes involves heating of graphite in an electric arc in the presence of an inert gas such as He or Ar.
  • A sooty material is recovered which consists mainly of C60 with a small amount of C70 and traces of other with an even number of C atoms up to 350 and above.
  • The C60 and C70 fullerenes can further be separated from the sooty material by extraction with benzene or toluene followed by chromatographic separation using alumina (Al2O3) as the adsorbent.
  • In Russia, America, Canada and New Zealand C60 and C70 fullerenes are isolated from natural sources. Fullerenes of this type are formed by the red giant star Antares.

Properties and applications: 

  • Fullerenes are solids with high melting points.
  • Being covalent, they are soluble in organic solvents.
  • They react with alkali metals to form solid compounds such as K3C60. This compound acts as a superconductor even at temperatures of the order of 10-40K.
  • Because of their spherical shapes, they exhibit wonderful lubricating property

Carbon Nanotubes

Carbon nanotubes are crystalline allotropes of carbon with cylindrical nanostructure. This allotrope was discovered by Sumio Iijima (Japan) in 1991. A carbon nanotube consists of a two-dimensional array of hexagonal rings of carbon just as in a layer of graphite or a chicken wire.

The layer is then rolled. into a cylinder and capped at each end with half of a C60  fullerene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Nanotubes

Properties and applications: 

The nanotubes are approximately 50000 times thinner than a human hair. These are very tough, about 100 times as strong as steel. They are electrically conducting along the length of the tube.

These cylindrical carbon molecules having unusual properties are valuable for nanotechnology, electronics, optics and other fields of material science and technology. They are also being used as probe tips for the analysis of DNA and proteins by atomic force microscopy (AFM). Many other applications have been envisioned for them as well, including molecular-size test tubes or capsules for drug delivery

Amorphous Carbon Charcoal

Vegetable charcoal

  1. Wood charcoal: When wood is subjected to destructive distillation in an iron retort, the volatile organic compounds present escape and the residue left in the retort is called wood charcoal.
  2. Sugar charcoal: It can be prepared by heating pure sugar in a closed vessel or by eliminating water from sugar by reacting it with concentrated sulphuric acid

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sugar Charcoal

Animal charcoal

1. Bone charcoal:

  • Small pieces of animal bones are treated with superheated steam to remove the adhering fat and marrow.
  • The dried bones are then subjected to destructive distillation in an iron retort when volatile substances are distilled out and a black residue containing carbon and about 90% impurities like calcium phosphate and calcium carbonate are left behind.
  • This is known as bone black or bone charcoal. These impurities are removed by dissolving the black material in dilute HCl.
  • The insoluble deep black powder thus obtained is almost pure charcoal and is called ivory black.

2. Blood charcoal:

  • Charcoal obtained by destructive distillation of blood is known as blood charcoal.

Charcoal Physical properties

Charcoal is black, soft and porous. It is a bad conductor of heat and electricity. Its specific gravity lies between 1.4 and 1.9. But because of its porosity, air enters in its pores.

  • As a result, its specific gravity gets reduced to 0.2 and hence charcoal floats on water. When porous charcoal b freed from entrapped air, it can retain any other ga In its pores, This phenomenon is known as adsorption.
  • The adsorbed gas escapes on heating and is much more reactive than the ordinary gas.

Activated charcoal:

Activated charcoal has high adsorption power as compared to ordinary charcoal.

Activated charcoal Preparation:

When the charcoal obtained by destructive distillation of coconut shell is heated to about 800-900°C in a limited supply of air or steam, activated charcoal is obtained.0 besides this, activated charcoal may also be obtained by the destructive distillation of sawdust soaked In aqueous solution of ZnCl2or MgCl,

Activated charcoal Properties:

Activated charcoal is not only a good adsorbent for gases but it also has the power of decoloursing a coloured substance and absorbing the taste of a substance. Moreover, a catalyst accelerates the rates of many chemical reactions.

Charcoal Chemical properties

1. At higher temperatures, charcoal burns in air or oxygen to form C02 gas. However, in a limited supply of oxygen, it’s combustion produces carbon monoxide.

C +O2 → CO2; 2C + O→2CO

2. Charcoal forms different compounds with sulphur, nitrogen and hydrogen at high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Disulphide

2C + N2 → (CN) (Cyanogen)

2C + H2 → C2H2 (Acetylene)

In the first reaction, two solids (C and S) react together to form a liquid (carbon disulphide

3. Charcoal combines with heated Ca, Al, Fe etc. to form their corresponding carbides.

Ca + 2C→CaC2; 3Fe + C→Fe3C; 4Al + 3C→Al4C3

4. When a mixture of silica (SiO2) and coke dust is heated at 1500’2000°Cin an electric furnace, silicon carbide (SiC) is formed. It is a black, bright and very hard solid. It is known as carborundum which is used for polishing metals

SiO2 +3C → SiC+2CO

5. When steam is passed over white-hot charcoal or coke, a mixture containing equal volumes of CO and H2, called water gas is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Water gas

6. Reducingproperty: Charcoal is a good reducing agent.

At higher temperatures, various metal oxides are reduced by charcoal to their corresponding metals.

CuO + C→ Cu + CO; PbO + C→ Pb + CO

Fe2O3 + 3C→2Fe + 3CO

At higher temperatures, charcoal reduces carbon dioxide to CO and sodium sulphate to sodium sulphide.

CO2 + C→2CO;

⇒ \(\mathrm{Na}_2 \stackrel{+6}{\mathrm{~S}} \mathrm{O}_4+4 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2S{ }^{-2}+4 \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{~C}} \mathrm{O}\)

Charcoal in the burning condition is oxidised by concentrated nitric acid or sulphuric acid to CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nitric Acid Or Sulphuric Acid

Charcoal Uses: 

  • Wood charcoal is used as fuel and as a reducing agent in the extraction of metals.
  • It is used in decolourising sugar syrup and refining oils, fats, glycerine etc.
  • It is used in the treatment of drinking water as it adsorbs excess chlorine after chlorination.
  • It is used in gas masks as it adsorbs poisonous gases.
  • It is also used for preparing gunpowder and black paint (Black Japan).

Lamp Black or carbon black

When organic liquids rich in carbon such as kerosene, petrol, turpentine oil, benzene etc. are subjected to bum in controlled air, a black sooty smoke is produced. This smoke on condensation in a cold container forms soot. This soot is called lamp black or carbon black. It may also be obtained when natural gas (methane) is subjected to albumin-controlled air. It is the purest form of all the amorphous allotropes of carbon.

Lamp Black Properties:

It is amorphous, black and non-conductor of heat and electricity.

Lamp Black Uses:

It is used in the preparation of printing ink, shoe polish and black paints

Coke and gas carbon

When anthracite coal (96% carbon) is subjected to destructive distillation, the solid residue left in the iron retort is called coke. At higher temperatures (1000 -1200°C), hard coke is called coke. At higher temperatures (1000 -1200°C), hard coke is obtained whereas at 600-650°C, we get soft coke. The black hard dense residue deposited on the relatively cooler upper part Qf returns as gas carbon. it possesses thermal water gas is produced. and electrical conductivity and electrical conductivity.

Coke Uses:

  • Hard coke is used as fuel and as a reducing agent for domestic fuel
  • Gas carbon is widely used as electrodes in batteries, arc lights and during electrolysis.

All the allotropic modifications of carbon consist of the same element:

When a fixed weight of a pure allotropic form of carbon is heated in a long hard combustion tube in the presence of pure oxygen, CO2 and CO are produced.

CuO, kept in the tube, converts CO into CO2. CO2 so obtained is absorbed in a previously weighed potash bulb attached to the exit end of the tube. An increase in the weight of the bulb increases the amount of CO2 formed.

When the experiment is performed separately with the same fixed weight of any other allotrope, the same amount of CO2 is obtained in each case. This experiment, thus, proves that the different allotropes consist ofthe same element, i.e., carbon.

Carbon Monoxide

Laboratory preparation:

1.  In the laboratory, carbon monoxide is prepared by dehydrating formic acid or oxalic acid after heating with concentrated sulphuric acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Oxalic Acid After Heatingh Concentrated Sulphuric Acid

2. When potassium ferrocyanide is heated with an excess of cone, sulphuric acid, pure carbon monoxide is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Pure Carbon Monoxide

CO cannot be fired by concentrated sulphuric acid:

Concentrated sulphuric acid is a strong oxidising agent. Thus when CO ( a reducing agent )is passed through concentrated H2SO4, it is oxidised by sulphuric acid to CO2

Other methods of preparation

From carbon:

When steam is passed over red hot coke, water gas or synthesis gas (CO + H2) is obtained. CO is separated from the mixture by liquefaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Red Hot Coke Water Gas Or Synthesis Gas

When air is passed over hot coke, producer gas (CO + N2) is formed. CO is separated by liquefaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Produce Gas

From carbon dioxide:

When CO2 is passed over red hot carbon, zinc, Iron etc., it is reduced to CO.

CO2 + C→2CO; CO2 + Zn→CO + ZnO

CO2+ Fe→FeO + CO

From metal oxides:

Carbon reduces die oxides of zinc, lead or iron to produce CO.

ZnO + C→ Zn + CO; Fe2O3+ 3C→2Fe + 3CO

From nickel tetracarbonyl:

Pure CO is obtained when nickel tetracarbonyl vapour is heated above 150°C

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nickel Tetracarbonyl

Carbon monoxide Physical properties:

1. Carbon monoxide is a colourless, tasteless, odourless gas which is lighter than air.

2. It is slightly soluble in water. It is a neutral oxide.

3. It is a highly poisonous gas. If only a volume of CO is present in 10,000 volumes of air, then that air is considered to be poisonous. Carbon monoxide molecule.

4.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Monoxide with a lone pair of electrons on carbon combined with Fe-atom present in the haemoglobin of the blood to form a very stable complex compound named carboxyhaemoglobin.

5. Hb + CO → HbCO; (Hb =Haemoglobin) As CO is almost 100 times more rigidly bonded to Fe-atom than O2, O2 can no longer combine with haemoglobin.

6. In other words, haemoglobin fails to act as an oxygen-carrier. As a consequence, the body tissues become slackened due to lack of ofoxygen ultimately causing death

7. In case of CO poisoning, the patient should immediately be taken to an open area and artificial respiration with carbogen (a mixture of oxygen and 5-10% CO2) should be started.

Carbon monoxide Chemical properties:

1. Combustion:

Carbon monoxide is itself a combustible gas but does not support combustion. It burns in the air with a blue flame and is oxidised to C02. Because of the evolution of a large amount of heat, CO is used as fuel.

2CO + O2 → 2CO2 + 135.2 kcal

The two important fuels containing carbon monoxide are water gas and producer gas. Water gas contains 50% of H2, 40% of CO, 5% of CO2 and 5% of CH4 and N2 while producer gas contains 25% of CO, 4% of CO2,70% of N2 and traces of H2, CH4 and O2

2. Reducing property:

Carbon monoxide is a powerful reducing agent. The oxidation number of carbonin CO is +2 and the highest oxidation number of carbon is +4. So, CO tends to be oxidised and behaves as a strong reducing agent. Various metal oxides are reduced by CO to the corresponding metal.

CuO + CO→Cu + CO2; PbO + CO→Pb + CO2

ZnO + CO→Zn + CO2; Fe2O3 + 3CO→2Fe + 3CO2

At 90°C, CO reduces iodine pentoxide (I2O5) to give violet-coloured iodine. This reaction is called the Ditte reaction.

I2O5 + 5CO→I2 + 5CO2

3. Reaction with sodium hydroxide:

Being a neutral oxide CO does not react with alkali or base under ordinary conditions. But at 200°C and under high pressure, it reacts with caustic soda solution to yield sodium formate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Hydroxide

4. Absorption of CO:

When CO is passed through an ammoniacal or acidified cuprous chloride solution, it gets absorbed in that solution to give a white crystalline addition compound as a precipitate. CO can be separated from a gas mixture by this process.

Cu2Cl2 + 2CO + 4H2O→2[CuCl.CO. 2H2O]↓

The addition compound evolves CO on heating.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Evolves CO On Heating

5. Formation of addition compounds:

1. In the presence of sunlight, CO combines direedy with chlorine gas to form carbonyl chloride or phosgene gas. It is a colourless poisonous gas:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements A Colourless Poisonous Gas

2. CO reacts with sulphur vapour to produce carbonyl sulphide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbonyl Sulphide

3. Combines with many transition metals to form metal carbonyl compounds. For example, CO reacts with nickel powder at 30-40°C under ordinary pressure to form nickel tetracarbonyl. Again, at 200°C and 100 atmosphere pressure, CO reacts with freshly reduced iron to form pentacarbonyl.

Ni + 4CO→Ni(CO)4; Fe + 5CO→Fe(CO)5

4. Formation of organic compounds:

Hydrogen reacts with CO at 350°C in the presence of Ni or Pt catalyst to yield methane. If the reaction is carried out at 300°C and 200 atmospheric pressure in the presence of ZnO and Cr2O3 catalyst, methyl alcohol is produced. The oxidation number of carbon in CO decreases from +2 to -4 in methane and to -2 in methyl alcohol.

Therefore, in these two cases, CO exhibits its oxidising property.

⇒ \(\stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{CO}}+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow \stackrel{-4}{\mathrm{CH}_4}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} ; \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{CO}}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow \stackrel{-2}{\mathrm{CH}_3^{-}}\mathrm{OH}\)

Identification of carbon monoxide:

1. Carbon monoxide burns in air with a blue flame and the gaseous product turns lime water milky [H2 also burns with a blue flame but in this case, steam is formed which turns white anhydrous copper sulphate blue.]

2. CO is completely absorbed by the Cu2Cl2 solution in a cone. hydrochloric acid or ammonium hydroxide and as a result, a white crystalline addition compound is precipitated.

3. When a filter paper soaked with a solution of platinum or palladium chloride is held in CO gas, the paper turns pink-green or black due to the reduction ofthe metal salts.

PtCl2 + CO + H2O→Pt + CO2 ((pink-green))+ 2HCl

PdCl2 + CO + H2O→Pd + CO2 ((black))+ 2HCl

4. When CO gas is passed through an ammoniacal AgN03 solution, the solution becomes brown

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Passed Through Ammonical Solution

5.  When a dilute solution of blood shaken with CO, is subjected to spectroscopic analysis, the observed band in the spectrum indicates the presence of CO. The presence of traces of the air can be detected by this experiment.

6. The presence of a very small amount of CO in the air can be detected with the help of a halamite tube or colour detector tube. When air containing CO is introduced into this tube I2 O5 present in the tube reacts with CO to liberate I2

Because of the violet colour of evolved I2, colour of the tube changes and the presence of COin air is indicated

I2O5 + 5CO→I2  (Ditte reaction)+ 5CO2

Structure of carbon monoxide:

Both the carbon and the oxygen atoms in a CO molecule are sp -hybridised. One of the sp -hybrid orbital of each atom is used to form a C —O cr -bond while the other sp -orbital ofeach contains a lone pair of electrons. The two unhybridised 2p -orbitals of each atom are involved in the formation of two pn-pn bonds. In terms of resonance, the CO molecule can be best represented as a resonance hybrid of the following two I resonance structures(1 and 2 ).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Hybrid

The resonance structure (1) is relatively more stable because of the fulfilment of the octet of both atoms.

Uses Of carbon monoxide: 

  • CO is used as fuel in the form of producer gas or water gas.
  • It is used as a reducing agent in the extraction of metals.
  • It is used for the preparation of pure nickel by Mond’s process.
  • It is used for the
  • Preparation of methanol, methane, formic acid and synthetic petrol (Fischer-Tropsch process).

Preparation of pure nickel:

Ni(CO)4 is prepared by the reaction between impure nickel and carbon monoxide. Ni(CO)4 is then allowed to decompose by heating to 1.50°C to get pure nickel.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Preparation Of Pure Nickel

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Overview

Carbon Dioxide

Carbon Dioxide Laboratory preparation:

At ordinary temperature, CO2 is prepared in the laboratory by the action of dilute HCl on calcium carbonate (CaCO3) or marble.

CaCO3 + 2HCl→CaCl2 + CO2↑ + H2O

The gas is collected in the gas jar by the upward displacement of air, as it is 1.5 times heavier than air. Carbon dioxide thus produced contains a small amount of HCl and water vapour. The gas is then passed successively through NaHCO3  solution and cone, sulphuric acid to remove HCl vapour and water vapour respectively.

Dilute sulphuric acid cannot be used for the preparation of CO2  from marble or limestone:

This is because sulphuric acid reacts with CaCO3 to produce insoluble; CaSO4  which forms a layer of CaCO3. This insoluble layer prevents CaCO3  from reacting with the acid and as a result, the evolution of CO2 ceases within a very short time

CaCO3 + H2SO4→CaSO4+ CO2 + H2O

On the other hand, when dilute hydrochloric acid is, used, highly soluble calcium chloride (CaCl2) is formed. So, the reaction proceeds without any interruption

CO2 can be prepared by the action of dilute H2SO4 on Na2CO3:

The salt, Na2SO4 produced soluble in water or dilute H2SO4

Na2CO3 + H2SO4→Na2SO4 + CO2 + H2O

At ordinary temperatures, CO2 is highly soluble in water. Therefore, it is not collected by the downward displacement of water. The solubility of COz in hot water is very low and hence it can be collected over hot

Other methods of preparation:

1. From carbonate salts:

Except for alkali metal carbonates, all other carbonates undergo thermal decomposition to produce CO2 and the oxides ofthe corresponding metals.

BaCO3 decomposes only at very high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbonates Salts

Calcium carbonate or limestone is thermally decomposed (1000°C) for the preparation of carbon dioxide on a commercial scale.

2. From bicarbonate salts:

Bicarbonates of all the elements decompose on heating with the evolution of CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Bicarbonate Salts

3. From fermentation:

A large amount of CO2 is obtained as a by-product during the manufacture of ethyl alcohol by fermentation of sugar

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements From Fermentation

4. From water gas:

Water gas is industrially prepared by passing steam through a bed of white-hot coke at about 100°C. C + H2O→CO + H2. When a mixture of water gas and excess steam is passed over (Fe2O3+ Cr2O3) catalyst heated at 400°C, CO is oxidised to CO2

(CO + H2) + H2O→CO2 + 2H2

The gaseous product is then passed through a solution of potassium carbonate when CO2 is completely absorbed and KHC03 is formed. H2 and unconverted CO pass out. When the resulting KHC03 solution is boiled, CO2 is obtained.

K2CO2+ CO2 + H2O→2KHCO3

Carbon Dioxide Physical properties

1. Carbon dioxide is a colourless, odourless and tasteless gas having slightly acidic properties.

2. CO2 is 1.5 times heavier than air. So, this gas often accumulates in abandoned wells or pits and because of this, severe breathing problems are caused in such places.

3. By the application of pressure (nearly 40 atmospheric pressure and a temperature < 40°C), CO2 can be easily liquefied. When liquid CO2 is allowed to vaporise rapidly by releasing the pressure, it further gets cooled down and freezes like ice. This is called dry ice or cardice.

4. When solid carbon dioxide is allowed to evaporate at atmospheric pressure, it gets converted into the vapour state without passing through the intermediate liquid state. Therefore, unlike ordinary ice, it does not wet the surface of the substance and because of this, it is called dry ice.

5. It is highly soluble in water (1.7 cm3 of CO2 dissolves in 1 cm3 of water). The solubility increases with an increase in pressure. Aerated waters such as soda water, lemonade etc. contain CO2 under pressure. When the cork of the bottle of aerated water is opened, the pressure is released and excess CO2 escapes in the form of bubbles. Its solubility in water, however, decreases with a temperature rise.

Carbon Dioxide Chemical properties

1. Combustion:

Carbon dioxide is neither combustible nor helps in combustion. When it (heavier than air) falls on a binning substance, it removes air from the surface of the substance and thereby the substance can no longer remain in contact with air. As a result, the fire is extinguished. A burning jute stick when inserted into a jar of CO2, extinguishes.

However, when a burning Mgribbon or metallic sodium is inserted into a CO2 jar, it continues to bum with the separation of black carbon.

⇒ \(\stackrel{+4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{O}_2+2 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{Mg}} \rightarrow 2 \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{MgO}}+\stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}} ; \stackrel{+4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{O}_2+4 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{Na}} \rightarrow 2 \stackrel{+1}{\mathrm{Na}}_2 \mathrm{O}+\stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}}\)

During the burning of such metals, the temperature, due to the liberation of a large amount of heat, is so high that CO2 decomposes into carbon and O2 and it is the oxygen which helps in the burning ofthe metals.

In these reactions, CO2 acts as an oxidising agent and itself gets reduced to carbon. These reactions prove the existence of carbon in C02. It is to be noted that the oxidation number of carbon in CO2 is +4 and this is its highest state of oxidation.

Thus, there is no possibility of an increase in its oxidation number, i.e., CO2 cannot be further oxidised. That is why CO2 cannot exhibit any reducing property. For the same basic reason, C02 is not combustible [CO, on the other hand, is combustible because in this case, the oxidation number of carbon may increase from +2 to +4 ].

2. Acidic property:

Carbon dioxide is an acidic oxide. It dissolves in water forming an unstable dibasic acid called carbonic acid (H2CO3). CO2 is, therefore, regarded as the anhydride of carbonic acid.

CO3+H2O→H2CO3

H2CO3 is known only in solution and when the solution is heated, CO2 is evolved out The solution turns blue litmus red but it cannot change the colour of methyl orange.

H2CO3 forms two types of salts, bicarbonates (HCO3 ) and carbonates (CO2-3). Being an acidic oxide, CO2 combines directly with strongly basic oxides such as CaO, Na2O etc. to form their corresponding salts.

CaO + CO2→CaCO3; Na2O + CO2→Na2CO3

Reaction with alkali:

When CO2 is passed through a strong alkaline solution of NaOH, a carbonate salt is first formed. If the passage of CO2 is continued for a long time, white crystals of sparingly soluble sodium bicarbonate are precipitated. The bicarbonate salt decomposes on heating to form carbonate salt, CO2 and water.

2NaOH + CO2→Na2CO2 + H2O

Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O→ 2NaHCO2

Rection with lime water:

When CO2 is passed through lime water, the solution becomes milky due to the formation of white insoluble calcium carbonate. However, when excess CO2 gas is passed through this milky solution, its milkiness disappears as insoluble calcium carbonate gets converted into soluble calcium bicarbonate

Ca(OH)2 + CO2→CaCO3↓ (white) +H2O

CaCO3+ CO2 + H2O→Ca(HCO3)2 (soluble)

On heating, calcium bicarbonate decomposes to form calcium carbonate, CO2 and water and as a result, the clear solution becomes milky again.

Ca(HCO3)2→CaCO3↓ + CO2 + H2O

Manufacture of sodium carbonate:

When CO2 gas is passed through a concentrated solution of sodium chloride (brine) saturated with ammonia at 30-40°C, white crystals of sodium bicarbonate are precipitated. The reaction occurs in two stages

NH3 + CO2 + H2O ⇌ (NH4)2CO3

CaSO4 + (NH4)2CO3→CaCO3↓ + (NH4)2SO4

Sodium carbonate is prepared by thermal decomposition of sodium bicarbonate. The Solvay process for the manufacture of sodium carbonate is based on this reaction.

Production of ammonium sulphate:

This is carried out by passing CO, and NH3 gases through a slurry of powdered gypsum (CaSO4,2H2O) in water. At first, NH3 and CO2 react together in the presence of water to form ammonium carbonate. It then reacts with calcium sulphate (gypsum) to form calcium carbonate and ammonium sulphate by double decomposition.

2NH3 + CO2 + H2O ⇌  (NH4)2CO3

CaSO4 + (NH4)2CO3→CaCO3 + (NH4)2SO4

The nitrogenous fertiliser ammonium sulphate is manufactured by using this reaction. In this process, (NH4)2SO4 is produced without using H2SO4

Production of urea:

At 200-210°C and 150 atm pressure, CO2 reacts with ammonia to produce urea.

CO2 + 2NH3 ⇌(Ammonium carbamate) NH4 COONH2 ⇌(Urea) CO(NH2 )2 + H2 O

The important fertiliser, urea is manufactured on a large scale by using this reaction.

Photosynthesis:

Plants absorb atmospheric carbon dioxide. In the presence of chlorophyll and sunlight, the absorbed CO2 combines with water (absorbed from the soil) to form glucose, water and oxygen. This process is called photosynthesis. In this process, CO2 is reduced to carbohydrates by water

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Photosynthesis

Reduction of CO2 :

When CO2 is passed over heated C, Fe, Zn etc., it is reduced to CO

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reduction Of Carbondioxide

Identification of carbon dioxide:

  • It extinguishes a burning stick.
  • Lime water becomes turbid when CO2 is passed through it. When excess CO2 is passed through it, the turbidity disappears but when that clear solution is boiled, the turbidity reappears.

N2gas also extinguishes burning sticks but it does not turn the water milky. Again, SO2 gas also turns lime water milky but unlike CO2, it reacts with an acidified solution of potassium dichromate and changes the colour of the solution from orange to green

Uses Of carbon dioxide:

1. CO2 is used in the manufacture of sodium carbonate by the Solvay process and also for the manufacture of fertilisers such as urea, ammonium sulphate etc.

2. CO2 is used in fire extinguishers.  It finds extensive use in the preparation of aerated waters such as soda water, lemonade etc… And baking powder.

3. Solid carbon dioxide i.e., dry ice is used as a refrigerant under the commercial name drikold. Dry ice is also used for making cold baths in the laboratory by mixing it with some volatile organic solvents. It is extensively used as a coolant for preserving perishable articles in the food industry, for curing local burns and for surgical operations of sores.

4. Supercritical CO2 is used as a. solvent to extract organic compounds from their natural sources, for example, caffeine from coffee beans, perfumes from flowers etc.

5. It is used under the name carbogen (a mixture of 95% O2 and 5% CO2) for the artificial respiration of patients suffering from pneumonia and affected by poisonous gases (CO poisoning).

Liquid CO2 is used as a substitute for chlorofluorocarbons in aerosol propellants.

Fife extinguisher:

It is a specially designed metallic pressure vessel having a nozzle at one end. A glass bottle containing dilute sulphuric acid is placed inside it and the remaining portion of the vessel is filled with a concentrated solution of sodium bicarbonate. When required, the glass bottle can be broken by pressing a knob fitted with the vessel at the other end. When the glass bottle is broken, the add comes in contact with sodium bicarbonate solution and reacts to yield copious C02 gas. The gas, ejected under high pressure through the nozzle, falls on the burning substance and as aresult, the fire gets extinguished

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Fire Extinguisher

Na2CO3 + H2SO4→Na2SO4 + CO2↑ + H2O

Baking powder:

The baking powder is used. Fire extinguisher in the preparation of bread consists of a dry mixture of potassium hydrogen tartrate, NaHCO3, tartaric acid and -starch. When this mixture comes in contact with water present in the bread, a chemical reaction leading to the formation of CO2 occurs. The resulting CO2 gas evolved in the form of bubbles making the bread porous and soft. Moreover, NaHC03 and tartaric acid also produce C02 on thermal decomposition

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Baking Powder

Structure of carbon dioxide:

In a CO2 molecule, the carbon atom is sp -hybridised whereas the oxygen atoms are sp² – hybridised. Carbon forms two cr -bonds and two pπ- pπ bonds with two oxygen atoms. The shape of the carbon dioxide molecule is, therefore, linear. The molecule is symmetrical (the two bond moments cancel each other) and hence, it is non-polar. The C —O bond length is 1.15Å. CO2 can be represented as a resonance hybrid of the following three structures:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Hybrid Of Three Structures

Compounds Of Silicon

1. Silicon tetrachloride (SiCI4 )

Silicon tetrachloride Preparation:

Silicon tetrachloride is prepared by heating either silicon or silicon carbide with chlorine

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silicon Tetrachloride

Silicon tetrachloride Properties and uses:

1. Physical state:  It is a volatile liquid (boiling point: 330.5 K).

2. Hydrolysis:

SiCl4 undergoes ready hydrolysis to produce silicic acid, Si(OH)4 which on further heating undergoes partial dehydration to yield silica gel (SiO2  xH2O).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silica Gel

Silica gel is an amorphous and very porous solid which contains about 4% of water. It is used as an adsorbent in column chromatography and as a catalyst in the petroleum industry. When the hydrolysis of SiCl4 is carried out at a much higher temperature, finely powdered silica Is obtained instead of silicic acid

P Block Elements Higher Temperature Of Finely Powdered Silica Of Intsead Of Silicic Acid

The finely powdered silica thus obtained is used as a thixotropic agent (which reduces viscosity temporarily) in polyester, epoxy paints and resins and as an inert filler in silicon rubber.

3.  Reduction: Reduction of SiCl4 with H2 gas gives silicon

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reduction Of Silicon

Ultrapure silicon used for making transistors, computer chips and solar cells is prepared by this method.

4. Reaction with silicon:

When a mixture of SiCl4 and Si is pyrolysed, a series of perhalosilanes of the general formula, Sin Cl2n+ 2 where n = 2-6, are obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Silicon

Chains of perhaloslianes are longer than those of silanes and this is due to the formation of pπ-dπ bonding between a lone pair of electrons present on Cl and the empty d-orbitals of Si

2. Silicones

Silicones e Definition:

The synthetic organosilicon polymers containing repeating R2SiO units held by Si — O — Si linkages are known as silicones The general formula of these compounds is (R2SiO)n where R = methyl or aryl group. Commercial silicones are generally methyl derivatives and in some cases phenyl derivatives.

Silicones Preparation

Hydrolysis of dichlorodimethylsilane (obtained by the reaction between methyl chloride and silicon in the presence of Cu as catalyst) followed by polymerisation involving intramolecular dehydration yields straight chain polymers, i.e., silicones.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silicone

P Block Elements Class 11 Notes PDF

The length of the polymer can be controlled by the reaction of dimethylsiianol with chlorotrimethylsilane. This blocks the terminal end ofthe polymer as follows—

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Terminal End Of The Polymer

Silicones Properties:

  • Silicones containing short chains are oily liquids; those with medium chains are viscous oils, greases and jellies and those with long chains are rubber-like solids.
  • They are stable to heat and are also resistant to oxidation, i.e., they are very inert.
  • They are water repellents (hydrophobic) & good electrical insulators.

Silicones Uses:

  • Silicones are used for making water-proof cloth and paper.
  • These are used as electrical insulators.
  • Silicon oils are used in high-temperature baths and vacuum pumps.
  • Silicon rubbers are very useful as they can retain their elasticity over a wide range of temperatures.
  • These are mixed with paints and enamels to make them resistant to the effects of sunlight, high temperatures and chemicals.
  • These are used for preparing vaseline-like greases which are used as lubricants in aeroplanes

3. Silicates

Silicates Definition:

Silicates are compounds in which the anions present are either discrete SiO44- tetrahedral units or several such units joined together by corners, i.e., by sharing one oxygen atom but never by sharing edges The negative charge on the silicate structure is neutralised by positively charged metal ions.

Classification Of silicates:

Depending upon the number of comers (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4) of SiO44- tetrahedral unit shared with another tetrahedral unit through oxygen atoms, silicates are following six types:

1. Orthosllicates:

These are simple silicates which contain discrete SiO44- tetrahedrons. Some examples are—zircon: Zr2[SiO4] , forsterite: Mg2[SiO4] , willemite: Zn2[SiO4] and phenacite: Be2[SiO4]

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ortho Silicate

2. Pyroslllcates:

When two SiO44- – tetrahedra share one corner (i.e., one oxygen atom), Si2O76-anion is formed. Silicates containing discrete Si2O units are called pyrosilicates.

The common examples of phyllosilicates are:

  1. Thortveitite: Sc2[Si2O7] and
  2. Hemimorphite: Zn4(OH)2[Si2O7]-H2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Pyrosllicute Anion

3. Ring or cyclic silicates:

When two O-atoms per tetrahedron are shared to form closed rings, structures with the general formula, (SiO3)n2n-– are obtained. The silicates containing these anions are called cyclic silicates.

Some common examples are :

  1. Wollastonite: Ca3[Si3O9] (containing the cyclic ion,  Si3O96-  and
  2. Beryl: Be3Al2[Si6O18] (containing the cycle ion, [Si6O18]-12

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ring Cyclic Silicates

4. Chain silicates:

If two oxygen atoms of each tetrahedral unit are so shared that a linear single-strand chain of the general formula, (SiO3)2 is formed, then the silicates containing these anions are called chain silicates.

Minerals of this type are called pyroxene and these include:

  1. Enstatite: Mg2[(SiO3)2],
  2. Diopside: CaMg[(SiO3)2] and s
  3. Spodumene: LiAl[(SiO3)2].

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Chain Silicates

P Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

On the other hand, those chain silicates, containing double chain are called amphiboles. Here, two chains are attached through the O-atom. These silicates contain (Si4O11)n 6- ions. Minerals of asbestos are most commonly known as amphiboles.

For example: Crocidolite or blue asbestos [Na2Fe5(OH)2(Si4O11)2], amosite or brown asbestos [(Mg, Fe)(OH)2(Si4O11)2

Asbestos is heat and fire-resistant and thus is used as a shed for houses. Fine asbestos fibres, on entering the lungs cause asbestosis which can even result in lung cancer.

5. Sheet silicates:

Sharing of three comers i.e., three O-atoms of each tetrahedron results in the formation of an infinite two-dimensional sheet structure of the formula (Si4O5)n 2n-. Silicates containing these anions are called sheet silicates.

Some of the common examples are:

  1. Kaolinite: [Al2(OH)4Si2O5] and
  2. Alc: [Mg3(OH)2Si4O10] .

Clay also belongs to this class containing (Si2O6) 2-– anions

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sheet Silicates

Three-dimensional silicates:

If all the four comers i.e., all the four O-atoms of each tetrahedron are shared with other tetrahedra, a three-dimensional network structure is obtained. These have a general formula, (SiO2)n. Some common examples are quartz, tridymite and cristobalite

When a few silicon atoms in a three-dimensional network of SiO2 are replaced by Al3+ions, the overall structure thus obtained carries a negative charge and is called aluminosilicate. Cations such as Na+, K+ or Ca2+ balance the negative charge. Such three-dimensional aluminosilicates are called zeolites.

A common example is natrolite:

Na2[Al2Si3O18]-2H2O. Feldspars and ultramarines are two other types of three-dimensional aluminosilicates.

Many open channels of molecular levels are present in the structure of the zeolites. Depending on the shape and size of these open channels, ions or molecules of different shapes and sizes are adsorbed by the zeolites. Thus, zeolites are used as molecular sieves for separating molecules of different sizes.

Other two types of three-dimensional aluminosilicates are:

  1. Feldspar example: Orthoclase, KAlSi3O8) and
  2. Ultramarine example: Ultramarine blue, Na8(AlSiO4)6S2 )

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Question And Answers

Question 1. The hydrolysis of n-propyl magnesium bromide and another alkyl magnesium bromide may obtain propane. Write the name and structure of that alkylmagnesium bromide.
Answer:

Propane can be obtained by hydrolysis of isopropyl magnesium bromide (Me2CHMgBr)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Magnesium Bromide

Question 2. When a concentrated aqueous sodium formate solution is used in Kolbe’s electrolysis method, no alkane is obtained—why?
Answer:

In Koibe’s electrolysis method, two— R groups of two RCOONa molecules combine to form the alkane, and R— R and two CO2 molecules are obtained from two COONa groups. As, there is no alkyl group in the salt, sodium formate (HCOONa), no alkane is formed on electrolysis of its concentrated aqueous solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Concentrated Aqueous Solution

Question 3. Prepare 2,2-dimethylpropane by Corey-House synthesis.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 2 Dimethylpropane

Question 4. How will you convert: \(\left(\mathrm{CH}_3\right)_2 \mathrm{CHBr} \longrightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CHDCH}_3\)
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mg And Dry Ether Heated

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Questions

Question 5. Identify RI and R’l in the following reaction \(\mathrm{RI}+\mathrm{R}^{\prime} \mathrm{I} →{\mathrm{Na} / \text { ether }} \text { Butane + Propane + Ethane }\). What is the role of ether in this case?
Answer:

When the Wurtz reaction is carried out with a mixture of HI and R’l, two hydrocarbons with an even number of carbon atoms (R— R and R’—R’) and one hydrocarbon with an odd number of carbon atoms (R—R’) are formed. Among the formed alkanes, butane (CH3CH2CH2CH3) and ethane (CH3CH3) are respectively R— R and R’—R’ whereas, propane (CH3CH2CH2) is R — R’.

So, it is evident that R is an alkyl group containing two carbon atoms, i.e., ethyl group (CH3CH2 — ) and Rr is a one carbon atom-containing alkyl group, i.e., methyl group (—CH3). Therefore, RI is ethyl iodide (CH3CH2I) and R’l is methyl iodide (CH3I). The role ofether in this case is that it acts as a solvent.

Question 6. How will you convert methyl bromide to (1) methane and (2) ethane in one step?
Answer:

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Bromide

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Bromide And Ethane

Question 7. Arrange the following compounds in order of their increasing stability and explain the reason: 2-butene, propene, 2-methyl but-2-ene
Answer:

The order of increasing stability of the given alkenes is— propene < 2-butene < 2-methyl but-2-ene

The number of hypercoagulable hydrogen in propene, 2-butene, and 2-methylbut-2-ene molecules are 3, 6, and 12 respectively. With an increase in several hypercoagulable hydrogens, stability due to the hyperconjugation effect of the molecules increases.

Question 8. Between the position and chain isomer of but-1ene, which exhibits geometrical isomerism and why?
Answer:

Position isomer of but-1-ene is but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3) and chain isomer of but-1-ene is 2-methylpropene [(CH3)2C=CH2] . In a molecule of but-2-ene, different groups are attached to the C-atom which is linked to the double bond.

So, but-2-ene exhibits geometrical isomerism. On the other hand, in a molecule of 2-methylpropene, two similar atoms (H-atom) are attached to the C-atom linked to the double bond. So, 2-methylpropene does not exhibit geometrical isomerism.

Question 9. Write the structures of the two alkenes obtained when 2-butanol is heated with excess ofconcentrated H2SO4. Which is obtained predominantly?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Stability Due To Hyperconjugation

Stability due to hyperconjugation is higher in the case of but-2-ene compared to that it is obtained predominantly.

Question 10.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A Reaction
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A Reaction Answer

Question 11. Identify the compounds obtained on heating (CH3)4NOHO
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Trimethyl Amine

Compounds formed: trimethyl amine and methyl alcohol.

Question 12. What is the major product formed in the reaction between CH2=CH—NMe3Ie and HI? Write its structure.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Anti Markowinkoff Product

Question 13. What happens when a mixture of ethylene and O2 gas is passed through a solution of PdCI2 in the presence of CuCl2  at high pressure and 50°C?
Answer:

When a mixture of ethylene and O2  gas is passed through a PdCl2  solution in the presence of CuCl2  at high pressure and 50°C, acetaldehyde is formed as the product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetaldehyde Is Formed

Question 14. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

  1. HC=C-CH(CH3)2
  2. CH3-C=C-C(CH3)3

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC NAme Of 3 Methylbut 1 yne

IUPAC name: 3 – Methylpent-1-yen

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 And 4 Dimethylpent 2 yne

IUPAC name: 4,4-dimethyl pent-2-yen

Question 15. C = C bond length is shorter than C and C —C —why?
Answer:

The σ -bond In C≡C is formed due to the overlapping of two small sp -hybridized orbitals. In C—C, the σ -bond is formed due to the overlapping of two bigger sp² -hybridized orbitals whereas in C — C.

The σ –bond is formed due to the overlapping of two even bigger sp³ -hybridized orbitals. Again, the multiplicity of the bond between two atoms increases, and the atoms come closer to each other leading to a decrease in bond length. So, bond length follows the order: C=C < C=C < C— C.

Question 16. Write structures and IUPAC names of the alkynes having molecular formula C5H8.
Answer:

Structures and IUPAC names of the alkynes having molecular formula C5Hn are-

⇒ \(\stackrel{5}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \stackrel{4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{3}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{2}{\mathrm{C}} \equiv \stackrel{1}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H} \quad \text { (Pent-1-one) }\)

⇒ \(\stackrel{5}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \stackrel{4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{3}{\mathrm{C}} \equiv \stackrel{2}{\mathrm{C}} \stackrel{1}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \quad \text { (Pent-2-one) }\) Δ

Question 17. What happens when the ethanolic solution of 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane is heated with zinc dust?
Answer:

When the ethanolic solution of 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane is heated with Zn dust, acetylene is formed as the product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 1 And 2 And 2 Tetrabromoethane

Question 18. What happens when the gas obtained by the action of water on calcium carbide is passed through an ammoniacal AgNO3 Solution? Identify the solution through which acetylene gas is passed to form a red precipitate.
Answer:

Acetylene is formed by die action of water on calcium carbide. When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal silver nitrate solution, a white precipitate of silver acetylide (Ag2C2) is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pewsipitate Of Silver Acetylide

Question 19. Which gas is used in carbide lamps or Hawker’s lamps? How does the gas produce a bright illuminating flame in the lamp?
Answer:

Acetylene gas is used in carbide lamps or Hawker’s lamps for producing bright illuminating flame. The percentage of carbon in acetylene is greater than in saturated hydrocarbons having the same number of carbon atoms.

As a result, incomplete combustion of acetylene gas takes place and the heated carbon particles thus formed produce Hluminating flame and bright light.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Short Question and Answers NCERT

Question 20. What is Lindlar’s catalyst? Mention its use.
Answer:

Use of Lindlar’s catalyst:

This catalyst is used to add 1 molecule H2 i.e., for partial hydrogenation of an alkyne. As cis-hydrogenation takes place in this case, a cis-alkene can be prepared from a non-terminal alkyne by using this catalyst.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Use Of Lindlars Catalyst

Question 21. Which out of ethylene & acetylene is more acidic and why?
Answer:

The greater the s -the character of a hybridized carbon atom, the greater will be its electronegativity. The s -character of sp hybridized carbon atom of acetylene is greater than that of the sp² -hybridised carbon atom of ethylene.

So the electronegativity of the carbon atom of acetylene (CH=CH) is greater than the carbon atom of ethylene (CH2=CH2).

The tendency of the H -atom attached to the more electro¬ negative carbon atom to be removed as a proton (H+) is relatively higher. So, the acidity of ethylene is less than that of acetylene, i.e., acetylene is more acidic than ethylene.

Question 22. How will you convert ethyne into ethanol?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethanol

Question 23. Which out of ethyne and propyne is more acidic and why?
Answer:

In ethyne (HC=CH), there are two terminal hydrogen atoms whereas, in propyne (CH3C=CH) there is only one. Apart from this, one electron-donating —CH3 group is attached to the carbon atom present on the other side of the triple bond in the propyne molecule.

This decreases the acidity of the alkynyl hydrogen atom. So, ethyne is more acidic than propyne.

Question 24. How will you distinguish between but-1-yne and but-2-yne?
Answer:

But-1-yne (CH3CH2C=CH) being a terminal alkyne reacts with a solution of ammoniacal stiver nitrate (AgNO3) to form a white precipitate of silver 1-butynide.

However, but-2-yne (CH3C=CCH3) being a non-terminal alkyne does not undergo this type of reaction. So, but-1-one and but-2-one can be distinguished by observing the result of the above-mentioned test using ammoniacal stiver nitrate solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ammonical Silver Nitrate Solution

Question 25. How will you convert propylene into propylene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propyne

Question 26. What is the expected shape ofa benzene molecule in the absence of resonance?
Answer:

In the absence of resonance, benzene will be considered as the compound, 1,3,5-cyclohexatriene. The structure of this hypothetical compound is—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 And 5 Cyclohexatriene

The structure will be such because each carbon-carbon bond length will be unequal. As, C=C is shorter than C—C, the structure of the molecule will appear as an irregular hexagon instead ofa regular one.

Question 27. Write structures of two aromatic ions in which there is a p-orbital containing 2 electrons and the other in which there is a vacant orbital.
Answer:

Cyclopentadienyl anion has two electrons in one of its p -orbital whereas, cyclopropenyl cation has a vacant p -orbital.

Question 28. Write the name and structural formula of the dibromobenzene which forms three mononitro compounds.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Dibromobenzene

Question 29. What happens when each of the following compounds is heated with acidified K2Cr2O7 solution—
Answer:

Ethylbenzene:

Ethylbenzene gets oxidised to benzoic acid.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylbenzene

Question 30. Benzene exhibits a greater tendency towards substitution reactions but a lesser tendency towards addition reactions — Explain.
Answer:

Benzene attains stability by resonance. If benzene undergoes addition reactions, then it no longer participates in resonance. The aromaticity of benzene is no longer retained due to loss of conjugation.

Consequently, the extra stability of benzene is lost. So, benzene has a lower tendency to undergo an addition reaction. However, during the formation of the substitution product, the aromaticity and stability of benzene remain intact. So, benzene has a higher tendency towards substitution reactions.

Question 31. Benzene burns with a luminous sooty flame but methane bums with a non-luminous flame with no black smoke. Why?
Answer:

Due to the high percentage of carbon, elementary carbon is produced during the burning of benzene. As a result, black smoke is formed. The presence of hot carbon particles in the flame makes the flame luminous. In methane, the percentage of carbon is low so no elementary carbon is produced during the burning of methane. Thus, methane burns with a non-luminous flame with no black smoke.

Question 32. Name the electrophiles that participate in the following reactions: nitration, chlorination, Frieclel-Crafts alkylation, Friedel-Crafts acylation, and sulphonation.
Answer:

Electrophiles which participate in nitration, chlorination, Friedel-Crafts alkylation, Friedel-Crafts acylation, and sulphonation reactions are nitronium ion (+NO2), positively charged chlorine ion (Cl+) or chlorine-iron (III) Chloride complex (Cl — Cl+FeCl3), carbocation (R), B: acylium ion (R+CO) and sulfur trioxide (SO3) respectively.

Question 33. Why iodobenzene cannot be prepared directly by combining benzene and iodine in the presence of iron filings? Why is this reaction possible in the presence of nitric acid?
Answer:

Iodobenzene cannot be directly prepared by combining benzene and iodine because the reaction is reversible. However, in the presence of nitric acid, this reaction becomes possible because nitric acid oxidizes the hydrogen iodide as it is formed and so drives the reaction to the right.

Question 34. Write the structure of the compound 4-(1-isopropyl butyl)-3-propyl undecane.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 And 1 Isopropylbutyl 3 Propylundecane

Question 35. Write the structure of 2,2,3-trimethylpentane and label the 1°, 2°, 3° and 4° carbon atoms.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 2 and 3 Trimethylpentane

Question 36. Write the IUPAC names of two different optically active alkanes with the lowest molecular mass.
Answer:

2 optically active alkanes with the lowest molecular masses-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lowest Molecular Masses

Question 37. What is the state of hybridization of the quaternary carbon atom present in the neopentane molecule? Write the IUPAC name and structure of the alkane formed by the combination of neopentyl and tert-butyl groups.
Answer:

The state of hybridization of the quaternary carbon atom In a nooporitanu molecule is sp³

The alkane formed by the combination of neopentyl and terf-butyl groups Is—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names 2 And 2 And 4 And 4 Tetramethylpentane

IUPAC name: 2,2,4,4-tetramethylpentane

Question 38. How many chain isomers will be obtained on replacement of different H-atoms of n-pentane? Write their structures and IUPAC names.
Answer:

Three non-equivalent H-atoms are present in a pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) molecule. Thus, the replacement of these H-atoms by —CH3 groups results in three isomeric alkanes. These are as follows —

CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3 (hexane)

CH3CH2CH2CH(CH3)2(2-methylpentane)

CH3CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH3(3-methylpentane)

Question 39. Write the trivial and IUPAC names of the branched chain alkane with the lowest molecular mass.
Answer:

The trivial name of the branched chain alkane with the lowest molecular mass is isobutane and its IUPAC name is 2-methylpropane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isobutane

Question 40. Write the IUPAC name and structure of the alkane having formula C8H18 and containing a maximum number of methyl groups.
Answer:

The alkane of formula C8H18 containing the maximum number of methyl groups is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Name Of 2 And 2 And 3 And 3 Tetramethylbutane

IUPAC name: 2,2,3,3-tetramethylbutane

Question 41. Benzene cannot be used as a solvent in ozonolysis of unsaturated hydrocarbons—why?
Answer:

Benzene itself reacts with ozone to form a triozonide. So, benzene cannot be used as a solvent in ozonolysis of unsaturated hydrocarbons

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Short Q&A

Question 42. Which one of the following three alkyl halides does not undergo Wurtz reaction and why?

  1. CH3CH2Br
  2. CH3I
  3. (CH3)3CB

Answer:

  1. The second step of the Wurtz reaction is an SN2 reaction.
  2. An SN2 reaction is very susceptible to steric effect so, a 3° alkyl halide does not take part in an SN2 reaction.
  3. So, (CH3)3CBr being a 3° alkyl halide does not undergo Wurtz reaction

Question 43. Which compound is the strongest acid and why?

  1. HC ≡CH
  2. C6H6
  3. C2H6
  4. CH3OH

Answer:

CH3OH is the strongest acid because here the H-atom is bonded to oxygen which is more electronegative titan carbon irrespective of its state of hybridisation

Question 44. Give two equations for the preparation of propane from the Grignard reagent.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Grignard Reagent

Question 45. How can CH3D be prepared from CH4?
Answer:

 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepared From Methane

Question 46. The preparation of which of the following alkanes by Wurtz reaction is not practicable?

  1. (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3
  2. CH3—CH(CH3)—CH2CH3
  3. (CH3)2CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)2

Answer:

  1. Not practicable. Although it is a symmetrical alkane, prepared from a carboxylic acid? its preparation requires a f-alkyl halide, (CH3)3CX, which does not participate in Wurtz reaction.
  2. Not practicable. It is an unsymmetrical alkane.
  3. Practicable, because it is a symmetrical alkane

Question 47. When a concentrated aqueous solution of a mixture of sodium salts of two monocarboxylic acids is subjected to electrolysis, ethane, propane, and butane are liberated at the anode. Write the structures and names of the two starting sodium salts
Answer:

Ethane may be produced from two CH3COONa molecules, propane from 1 CH3COONa molecule and one CH3CH2COONa molecule, and butane (CH2CH2CH2CH3) from 2CH3CH2COONa molecules. Evidentlyethane, propane & butane may be obtained from the mixture of sodium ethanoate (CH3COONa) & sodium propionate (CH3CH2COONa)

Question 48. How can an alkane having one carbon atom less be prepared from a carboxylic acid?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carboxylic Acid

Question 49. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their acidic character.

  1. H2O, CH2=CH2, NH3
  2. HC≡CH, CH3OH, CH3CH3

Answer:

1. Increasing order of acidic character: CH2=CH2 < NH3 < H2O [Because, the increasing order of electronegativity: C2 < N < O ]

2. Increasing order of acidic character: CH3CH3 < HC = CH < CH3OH [increasing order of electronegativity: c ,<C. <ol

Question 50. An alkane (molecular mass 72) produces only one monochloro derivative. Give IIJPAC the name of the compound. Give reasons.
Ana.

As the alkane (CnH2n+2) on monochlorination produces only one monochloride derivative, so all of its hydrogens are equivalent. The molecular mass of the alkane is 72, i.e.,12 × n +{2n + 2) = 72, or n = 5. Hence, the alkane contains a carbon atom, l.e., it is one of the isomeric pentanes. The pentane in which all the H-atoms are equivalent is neopentane, (CH3)4 C. The IUPAC name of the compound is 2,2-dimethylpropane.

Question 51.  NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify ABC And D
Answer:

A = CH3CHO (Acetaldehyde);

B= CHCHOH

(Ethyl alcohol); C = CHCl3

D = HCOONa (Sodium formate)

Question 52. Acetylene does not react with NaOH or KOH, even though it possesses an acidic character —why?
Answer:

Acetylene (HC = CH) is a weaker acid than water (H2O) and OH- is a weak base than HC=C. As a result, weak acid HC=CH does not react with weak base OH to form strong acid H2O and strong base HC≡C. So acetylene fails to react with NaOH or KOH.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Weaker Acid And Stronger Acid

Question 53.  Write the products obtained when propyne ion (CH3C = C:) is allowed to react with

  1. H2O,
  2. CH3OH
  3. H3 (liquid)
  4. 1-hexene and
  5. Hexane.

Also mention, where no reaction occurs
Answer:

  1. CH3C = CH + OH
  2. CH3C = CH + CH3O
  3. No reaction
  4. No reaction
  5. No reaction.

(Propyne is a weaker acid than H2O and CH3OH but it is a stronger acid than, NH3 1-hexene and hexane.]

Question 54. Write the names of the products obtained in the following cases
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Products Obtained In The Following Cases

Answer:

  1. Br CH2CH2 COOH (3-bromopropanoic acid).
  2. C6H5 COCH3 (Acetophenone).

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Q&A

Question 55. How can allyl chloride be prepared from 1-propanol?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ally Chloride

Question 56. trans-pent-2-ene is polar but Frans-but-2-ene is non-polar —why
Answer:

In a trans-but-2-ene molecule, the two C-—CH3 bond moments, oriented in opposite directions cancel each other and so the net dipole moment in a trans-but-2-ene molecule is zero. On the other hand, in the trans-pent-2-ene molecule, although the C-*-CH3 and C—C2H5 bond moments act in opposite directions, they are not equal in magnitude so they cannot cancel each other. Hence, the molecule possesses a net dipole moment.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Non Polar And Polar

Question 57. Convert acetylene into but-2-one.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Into But 2 ene

Question 58. Ozonolysis of an alkene leads to the formation of an aldehyde and an isomeric ketone having the molecular formula, C3H6O. Identify the alkene.
Answer:

The aldehyde and the ketone having molecular formula, C3H6O are CH3CH2CHO and CH3COCH3 respectively.

Therefore, the starting alkene is 2-methylpent-2-ene. (CH3)2C= O + O=CHCH2CH3-(CH3)2C =CHCH2CH

Question 59. An alkene having molecular formula, C4H8 reacts with HBr to form a tertiary alkyl bromide. Identify the alkene and the alkyl bromide.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkene And Alkyl Bromide

Question 60. Carry out the following transformation (in two steps): Methyl acetylene →1-bromopropan
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Acetylene Of 1 Bromopropane

Question 61. H How can butan-2-one be prepared from acetylene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Butan 2 One

Question 62. Write the IUPAC names of the products obtained when buta-1,3-diene reacts with bromine in1:1 molar ratio
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Buta 1 And 3 Diene Reacts With Bromine

Question 63. Distinguish between buta-1,3-diene and but-1-one.
Answer:

But-1-one (CH3CH2C = CH) reacts with ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution to give a red precipitate. Buta-1,3- diene, however, does not respond to this test.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Buta 1And 3 Diene And But 1 Yne

Short Question and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons

Question 64. Prove that benzene is insoluble in water and is lighter than water.
Answer:

Benzene is taken in a separating flask and water is added to it. The mixture is shaken and then allowed to stand until the two layers are separated. The upper layer contains benzene while water settles at the bottom. This observation proves that benzene is insoluble in water and is lighter than water.

Question 65. Why does benzene burn with a sooty flame?
Answer:

As the carbon content in benzene molecule (C6H6, C: H = 1: 1 ) is relatively higher as compared to the saturated hydrocarbon, hexane (C6H14 C: H = 1:2.3), elementary carbon is formed during burning of benzene. So, benzene bums with a sooty flame

Question 66. Nitration of aniline with 98% H2SO4 and cone. [Anilinium sulfate (water soluble)] HNO3 occurs very slowly and mainly metasubstitution occurs —why?
Answer:

In the presence of 98% H2SO4, the — NH2 group of aniline takes up a proton (H) and is converted to an electron attracting (-1) and meta-directing — NH3 group. Electron electrophilic attack of the —NO2 group occurs very slowly. This accounts for the extremely slow rate of nitration of aniline and the formation of the mainly mega-substituted products under strong acidic conditions.

Question 67. Activating groups are ortho-/para- directing, while; the deactivating groups are meta- directing—why?
An8.

The activating groups by exerting their electron-donating +1 and/or +R effects increase electron densities at the ortho and para- positions to a larger extent than the meta-position. So, the electrophiles (E+) enter preferably the ortho- and parapositions. On the other hand, the deactivating groups by exerting their electron-withdrawing -I and I or -R effects decrease electron densities of meta-positions to a lesser extent than the ortho- and para-positions. So the electrophile enters preferably the relatively more electron-rich meta-position.

Question 68. How will you remove traces of aniline present in benzene?
Answer:

If benzene containing traces of aniline (basic) is shaken with a cone. H2SO4 then aniline dissolves in the acid forming a salt.- The acid layer is thus removed. In this way, traces of aniline present in benzene can be removed

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Anilinium Sulphate

Question 69. How can traces of phenol present in a sample of benzene be removed?
Answer:

If the sample of benzene containing traces of phenol (acidic) is shaken with 10% NaOH solution then phenol reacts with NaOH to form sodium phenoxide which dissolves in the aqueous layer. The aqueous layer is then removed. In this way, traces of phenol present in a sample of benzene can be removed.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sodium Phenoxide

Question 70. How will you distinguish between benzene and hexane by a simple test in the laboratory?
Answer:

The percentage of carbon in benzene is much higher than the corresponding alkane, hexane. So benzene bums with the formation of elementary carbon and as a result, a sooty flame is produced. During the burning of hexane no such sooty flame is produced. Thus, by observing the nature of the flame produced, the two compounds can be easily distinguished.

Question 71. Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction, though it contains an electron-donating group—why?
Answer:

Aniline (Lewis base) combines with AlCl3 (Lewis acid) by donating the unshared electron pair on nitrogen, to form a complex. As a result, the N-atom of the — NH2 group acquires a positive charge and this, being converted into an electron attracting group, decreases the electron density of the ring to such an extent that the Friedel-Crafts reaction does not occur.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lewis Acid Lewis Base Complex

Question 72.  How much trisubstituted benzene may be obtained from o-, m-, and p-chlorotoluene and why?
Answer:

Each of o – and m -chlorotoluene will give 4 trisubstituted benzenes, while p -chlorotoluene will give two trisubstituted benzenes. This is because there are 4 types of non-equivalent hydrogens (or positions) in each of the ortho- and meta¬ isomers and two types of non-equivalent hydrogens (or positions) in the para-isomer

Question 73. C5H12 and C8H18 are two alkanes that form one monochloride each reacting with chlorine. Write the names of the alkanes and structural formulas of the chlorides.
Answer:

As both the alkanes form one monochloride, it can be said that all H-atoms in these two alkanes are equivalent. Therefore, the alkane with molecular formula C6H12 is (CH3)4C and the alkane with molecular formula C8H18 is (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulas Of The Chloride

Question 74. How can you convert methyl acetylene to acetone?
Answer:

At 60-80°C temperature, when methyl acetylene or propyne is passed through a dilute (20%) solution of sulphuric acid containing 1% H2SO4, it combines with one molecule of water to form the unstable compound, 2-propanol. Addition of water molecule to unsymmetrical alkyne (propyne in this case) through Markownikoff’s rule. 2-propenol! Rapidly tautomerizes to acetone

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Methyl Acetylene To Acetone

Question 75. Mention two reactions of benzene to show its behavior is different from that of the open-chain unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Answer:

  1. Benzene does not decolorise bromine water.
  2. Benzene does not react with halogen acids such as HCl, HBr, etc

Question 76. Is it possible to isolate pure staggered ethane or pure eclipsed ethane at room temperature? Explain.
Answer:

The energy difference between eclipsed and staggered conformations of ethane is only 2.8kcal .mol-1, which is easily achieved by collisions among the molecules at room temperature. So it is not possible to isolate either pure staggered or pure eclipsed form of ethane at room temperature.

Question 77. Explain why rotation about carbon-carbon double bond is hindered?.
Answer:

Carbon-carbon double bond consists of a σ -and a π bond. The π-bond is formed by lateral overlap of unhybridised p -p-orbitals of two carbon atoms above and below the plane of the carbon atoms. If an attempt is made to rotate one of the atoms of the double bond concerning the other, the p orbitals will no longer overlap, thereby causing the fission of the n bond. Since breaking of a π -bond requires a considerable amount of energy, which is not available at room temperature, rotation about the carbon-carbon double bond is hindered.

Question 78. Arrange the following carbanions in order of their Hg+ decreasing stability

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Arrange The Following Carbanions
Answer:

Due to greater s -character sp -hybridized carbon is more electronegative than sp³ -hybridized carbon and hence can accommodate the -ve charge more effectively. So 1 and 2 are more stable than 3. Again —CH group has an electron-donating +1 effect, therefore it interacts with the -ve charge on carbanion carbon and hedestabilizesises 1 relative to 2. Thus, the stability of the given carbanions decreases in the sequence: B> 1> 3

Question 79. Explain why Tert butylbenzene cannot be oxidized to benzoic acid by treatment with alkaline KMnO4
Answer:

Alkylbenzenes can be oxidized to benzoic acid provided that the side chain contains one benzylic {hydrogen atom. Since tert-butylbenzene does not contain any benzylic hydrogen, so the alkyl chain cannot be oxidized to the — COOH group.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzylic Carbon

Question 80. Explain why HF forms hydrogen bonding with acetylene even though it is non-polar
Answer:

Due to the sp -hybridization of carbon, the electrons of the C —H bond of acetylene are attracted considerably toward carbon. Consequently, each carbon carries a partial negative charge and each hydrogen carries a partial positive charge. Owing to the presence of a partial positive charge on hydrogen, acetylene forms an H -bond with the F -atom of the HF molecule

⇒ \(\begin{array}{r}
\delta+\delta-\delta-\delta+\delta-\delta+ \\
\cdots \mathrm{H}-\mathrm{C} \equiv \stackrel{\delta}{\mathrm{C}}-\mathrm{H} \cdots \mathrm{F}-\mathrm{H}
\end{array}\)

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 Short Question and Answers Class 11

Question 81. One mole ofa symmetrical alkene on ozonolysis gives two moles of an aldehyde having a molecular mass of 44u. Identify the alkene
Answer:

Let, the aldehyde be CnH2n+1CHO

The molecular mass of this aldehyde

=[12n + (2n +1) + (12 +1 + 16)]u

= (14n + 30)u

Thus, 14n + 30 = 44

n = 1

So the aldehyde is CH3CHO.

The alkene is CH3CH=CH— CH..

Question 82. The addition of HBr to 1 -butene gives a mixture of mechanisms: A and B as the main products together with a small amount of another compound C. Identify A, B, and C
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons HBr To 1 Butene Gives Mixture

Question 83. An alkene, C6H12, reacts with HBr in the absence as well as in the presence of peroxide to give the same product. Find its structure.
Answer:

Symmetrical alkenes react with HBr in the presence or absence of peroxide to give the same product. Hence the given alkene may have the structure (1) or (2)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Symmetrical Alkenes React

Question 84. How will you prepare a sample of propane free from other alkanes using ethyl bromide, methyl bromide, and diethyl ether as the organic compounds, together? The product‘T is iodobenzene. With other inorganic materials
Answer:

It can be prepared by Corey-House synthesis:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Corey House Synthesis

Question 85. The catalytic hydrogenation of which of the following is most exothermic?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Exotherimic

Answer:

The least substituted alkene, having the lowest number of hyperconjugative structures, has the least thermodynamic stability (i.e., highest energy content) and so it has the highest heat of hydrogenation. Now, out of the given compounds, (C) is the least substituted alkene and so it has the highest heat of hydrogenation.

Question 86. Identify A, B, C & D in the following reaction—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons ABCD Following Reactions

Answer:

  1. H —C≡C —H
  2.  H —C ≡ CNa
  3. H—C ≡ C—CH3
  4. H2C=CH—CH3

Question 87. Identify A, B, C Si D in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons ABCD Following Reactions.

Answer:

  1.  CH2=CH2
  2. CH= CH
  3. CH3CHO
  4. CH3—CH3

Question 88. What organic compound is obtained when

  1. Ethyl iodide is subjected to react with Zn -Cu couple/aqueous ethanol and 
  2. Iodoform is heated with Ag powder?

Answer:

  1. CH3CH3
  2. C2H2

Question 89. Write structures of A and B in the following reactions.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Following Structure

Question 90.  Which one of these two reactions can be used for the identification of ethylenic unsaturation? Why? ½ + ½+½ + 1
Answer:

R-CH(Br)—CH3

R—CH(Br) —CH2Br

Question 91.  A hydrocarbon (A) is obtained when 1,2-dibromoethane reacts with alcoholic KOH. (A) decolourises alkaline KMnO4 solution. (A) contains acidic hydrogen. Identify (A) with reasons.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 2 Dibromoethane Reacts With KOH

 

Question 92. Writes structures of A, B, and C 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Writes structures of A, B and C

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Writes Structures Of A, B and C. Answer

Question 93. How will you convert?

1. HC = CH→H3C-CH2-CH3

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Example

Answer:

Question 94. An organic compound (A) composed of C and H contains 85.71 %C. It shows M+ at mlz = 42 in the mass spectrum. The compound reacts with HBr in the absence of peroxide to yield an organic compound (B) which is isomeric with the compound (C) obtained when the compound reacts with HBr in the presence of peroxide. Identify A, B, and C.
Answer:

⇒ \(C: H=\frac{85.71}{12}: \frac{14.29}{1}=7.14: 14.29=1: 2\)

Emperical formula = CH2, Molar formula = (CH2)n

According to the problem, n × (12 + 2) = 42.

n = 3. So, the actual molecular formula is C3H6. DBE = 1. So, probable structures of CH6 are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Probable Structure

Structure A is accepted as it can undergo given reactions:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structure A is Accepted As It Can Under Go Given Reactions

Question 95.

1. Write equations of all the steps of the reaction of methane with chlorine in the presence of diffused sunlight

2. Identify A and B NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And B Compounds

Answer:

⇒ \(\mathrm{A} \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{OSO}_3 \mathrm{H}, \mathrm{B} \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{OH}\)

Question 18. Convert benzene into aniline by using the following reagents in the correct order: alkaline KMnO4 and then HCl NH3, heat; Br2/KOH; CH3Cl /anhydrous AlCl3.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert To Benzene Into Aniline

Question 96. Write structures of the organic products obtained in the following reactions :

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures Of The Organic Products

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures Of The Organic Products.

Question 97. Identify (X) and (Y) in the following reactions:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X and Y In the Following Reactions

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X and Y In the Following Reactions.

Question 98. Identify(M) and (N)in the following reactions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify M And N

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identity M And N In The Following Reactions.

Question 99. Write the product of the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product Of The following Reaction
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product Of The Following Reaction Answer

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons Short Questions and Answers PDF

Question 100. Benzene in reaction with NOCl in the presence of acid produces an organic compound (1).

  1. On treatment with NaNH2/Liq.NH3 furnishes another organic compound (15).
  2. Treatment with NaNO2/HBF4 affords an organic compound
  3. Which on heating gives an organic compound.
  4. Identify(1), (2), (3) and (4).

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzene On Reaction With NOCl

Question 101. Two different compounds produce only acetaldehyde on ozonolysis. Draw the structures of the two compounds.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Draw the eclipsed and staggered conformations

Question 102. Write the name and the structural formula of the product obtained when hydrogen bromide reacts with propene in the presence of benzoyl peroxide.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzyl Peroxide

Question 103. Identify the compound in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify Compound A

Answer:

Identify the compound A in the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Compound A Answer

Question 104.

1. Among benzene and toluene, which one will undergo nitration reaction easily and why?

2. Identify A, B, C and D

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify ABCD Reaction

Answer:

If the electron density of the benzene ring increases, then the reactivity of the ring towards electrophilic substitution also increases. In toluene, the —CH3 group increases the electron density of the ring and as a result, the reactivity of the ring also increases due to +1 and the hyperconjugation effect of the —CH3 group. So, nitration occurs more easily for toluene than unsubstituted benzene.

Question 105. Write the name and structural formula of A in the following reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formula Of Benzene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Oxide

Question 106. What happens when NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Happens EtherWhat happens ether?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ether

Question 107. Two isomeric compounds A and B have the molecular formula C3H.Br forms the same compound C on dehydrobromination. C on ozonolysis produces acetaldehyde and formaldehyde. Identify A, B, and C
Answer:

⇒ \(A \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{Br}\)

⇒ \(B \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}(\mathrm{Br}) \mathrm{CH}_3\)

⇒ \(C \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2\)

Question 108. An alkene A on ozonolysis gives a mixture of ethanal & pentan-3-one. Write the structure & IUPAC name of A.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons An Alkene A On Ozonolysis Gives A Mixture Of Ethanal

Question 109. An alkene ‘A’ contains three C —C, eight C —H crbonds and one C — C π -bond. ‘A’ on ozonolysis gives two moles of an aldehyde of molar mass 44 u. Write the IUPAC name of ‘A’.
Answer:

An aldehyde with molar mass 44u is ethanal (CH3CH=:O). The formula of the alkene ‘A’ which on ozonolysis gives two moles of ethanol can be determined as follows—

⇒ \(\underset{\text { Ethanal }}{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}}=\underset{\text { Ethanal }}{\mathrm{O}}+\underset{\text { But-2-ene (A) }}{\mathrm{O}}=\underset{\mathrm{CHCH}_3}{\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}}=\underset{\mathrm{CH}}{\mathrm{CH}}-\mathrm{CH}_3\)

There are three C — C cr -bonds, eight C —H tr -bonds, and one C —C 7t -bond in but-2-one.

Question 110. Propanal and pentane-3-one are the ozonolysis products of an alkene. What Is the structural formula of the alkene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propanal And Pentan 3 One Are The Ozonolysis

Question 111. Write chemical equations of the combustion reaction of the following hydrocarbons: Butane Pantene Hexyne Toluene
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Butane Pantene Hexyne

Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Solutions Short Questions Class 11

Question 112. Draw The Cis- and trans-structure of hex- 2 ene which isomer will have higher B>P and Why?
Answer:

The general formula of hex-2-ene is CH3—CH2—CH2—CH=CH—CH3. Structural formulas of cis-and trans-isomers of this compound are-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cis And Trans Isomers Of This Compounds

The ds-isomer being more polar than the trans-isomer has a higher value of dipole moment than that of the trans-isomer. Intermolecular dipole-dipole interaction in the case of cis-isomers is more than that in trans-isomers. So, the boiling point of the customer is higher.

Question 113. Why is benzene extraordinarily stable though it contains three double bonds?
Answer:

There are (4n + 2) delocalized 7r -electrons (n = 1) in the planar benzene molecule.

Consequently, it attains stability due to aromaticity. So, benzene is extraordinarily stable despite having three double bonds.

Question 114. Out of benzene, m-dinitrobenzene, and toluene which will undergo nitration most easily, and why
Answer:

Nitration of the benzene ring is an electrophilic substitution reaction. In this reaction, the presence of an activating group ( —CH3) increases the reactivity of the benzene ring, whereas the presence of a deactivating group (—NO2) decreases the reactivity of the benzene ring. Therefore, order of nitration is toluene > benzene > m-dinitrobenzene.

Question 115. Suggest the name of a Lewis acid other than anhydrous aluminium chloride which can be used during ethylation of benzene.
Answer:

Ethylation of benzene means the introduction of an ethyl group in the benzene ring. This reaction is carried out by Friedel-Crafts reaction of benzene with ethyl halide (chloride or bromide), ethene, or ethanol. Lewis acids, other than anhydrous AlCl3, that can be used in this reaction are anhydrous FeCl3, SnCl4, BF3, HF, etc.

Question 116. Why does an iline not participate in the Friedel-Crafts reaction?
Answer:

Aniline reacts with AlCl3 complexing \(\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5-\stackrel{\oplus}{\mathrm{N}} \mathrm{H}_2-\stackrel{\ominus}{\mathrm{AlCl}} \mathrm{Cl}_3\) which makes —NH2 group electron-withdrawing nature. Consequently, the benzene ring becomes highly deactivated so aniline does not participate in the Friedel-Crafts reaction;

Question 117. The reaction of CH2=CH—N(CH3)3I takes place contrary to Markownikoff’s rule—why?
Answer: 

The carbocation formed due to the addition of H+ to the carbon atom containing a higher number of hydrogen atoms becomes unstable because of the electron-attracting —NMe3 group.

So, the reaction takes place contrary’ to Markownikoff’s rule;

Question 118. Mention the limitations of the Wurtzreaction.
Answer:

Limitations:

  • Tertiary alkyl halides do not respond to this reaction,
  • Methane cannot be prepared by this reaction and
  • Preparation of unsymmetrical alkanes cannot be done by this method;

Question 119. What product is formed when the given compound reacts with HBr and why?
Answer: The product obtained

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Obtained First Step is because the carbocation formed in the first step

Is, resonance stabilized due to —OCH3 group

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Resonance Stabilised

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons  Warm-Up Exercise Question And Answers

Question 1. What are the chief constituents of LPG?
Answer: The chief constituents of LPG are n-butane and isobutane.

Question 2. Why do C—C bonds instead of C—H bonds of alkanes dissociate due to the effect of heat?
Answer:
The bond energy of the C— C bond (ΔH = 83 kcal. mol-1) is less than that of the C—H bond (ΔH= 99 kcal. mol-1). So, the C—C bond dissociates more easily than the C—H bond.

Question 3. Write the IUPAC name of the straight-chain hydrocarbon consisting of 20 carbon atoms.
Answer:
IUPAC’s name of the straight-chain hydrocarbon consisting of 20 carbon atoms is eicosane.

Question 4. Give the structures of the isomers of molecular formula C5H12
Answer: CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 (n -pentane) CH3CH(CH3)CH,CH3 (isopentane) and (CH3)4C (neopentane)

Question 5. Explain why dry ether is used in the Wurtzreaction.
Answer:

Dry ether is used because it is present in ether, then it may react with metallic sodium thereby rendering it ineffective

2Na + 2H2O→2NaOH + H2

Question 6. Predict whether Me3CBr will take part in the Wurtz reaction or not
Answer:  Wurtz reaction proceeds through the SN2 pathway. As tertiary alkyl halides do not participate in the SN2 reaction (due to steric effect), Me3CBr does not participate in the Wurtz reaction

Question 7. Explain why methane does not react with chlorine in the dark.
Answer:  The reaction does not take place because in the dark Cl —Cl bond does not dissociate to form Cl free radical;

Question 8. One molecule of a hydrocarbon produces one molecule each of acetone, methyl glyoxal, and formaldehyde on ozonolysis. Identify the hydrocarbon.
Answer:

The hydrocarbon is 3, 4-dimethylpenta-l, 3-diene [CH3—C(CH3)=C(CH3)—CH=CH2] or, 2,4-dimethylpenta-1,3-diene [CH2=C(CH3)—CH=C(CH3) —CH3];

Short Answer Questions on Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT

Question 9. Explain why 1-butyne reacts with ammoniacal silver nitrate to produce a white precipitate, but 2-butyne does not
Answer:

1-butyne (CH3CH2C=CH) being a terminal alkyne reacts with ammoniacal AgNOsolution to produce a white precipitate but 2-butyne (CH3C=CCH3) being a non-terminal alkyne does not react with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution;

Question 10. How will you detect the presence of acetylene in a gas mixture?
Answer:

If the gas mixture when passed through ammoniacal AgNO3 solution or ammoniacal Cu2Cl2 solution forms a white or red precipitate, then the gas mixture contains acetylene.

Question 11. Explain why the carbon-carbon bond in acetylene is shorter than the carbon-carbon bond in ethylene.
Answer:

Cr -bond in acetylene (HC=CH) is formed due to the overlapping of two small sp-hybridized orbitals whereas in ethylene (H2C=CH2) it is formed by overlapping of two bigger sp² hybridized orbitals. So, the bond length of HC=CH <H2C=CH2;

Question 12. How will you distinguish between ethylene and acetylene?
Answer:

Acetylene reacts with ammoniacal AgNO2 solution to form a white precipitate of silver acetylide (AgC=CAg) but ethylene does not give a similar reaction with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution.

Question 13. The population of which conformation increases with the temperature rise?
Answer:
The population of the less stable conformation Increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 14. What are the carbides that react with water to form methane commonly known as?
Answer: The carbides which react with water to form methane are commonly known as methanldes.

Question 15.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X And Y

Question 16. Why are hydrocarbons insoluble in water but highly soluble in solvents like petroleum ether, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, etc?
Answer:

An important principle regarding dissolution is ‘like dissolves like’. It means that polar molecules dissolve in polar solvents while non-polar molecules dissolve in nonpolar solvents. This dissolution process is thermodynamically favorable. Water is a highly polar solvent whereas, petroleum, ether, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride are non-polar solvents. As hydrocarbons are non-polar compounds, they are insoluble in water but soluble in petroleum ether, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride.

Question 17. Why are the alkanes called paraffins?
Answer: Alkanes are called paraffin as their chemical reactivity is quite low (Latin: parum = little, affinis = affinity).

Question 18. What are the typical reactions of alkanes?
Answer: Typical reactions of alkanes are substitution reactions.

Question 19. Mention the type of mechanism through which halogenation of alkanes occurs.
Answer: Free-radical mechanism.

Question 20. What happens when methane is heated at 1000°C in the absence of air?
Answer:

Methane when heated at 1000°C in the absence of air, decomposes to form a fine powder of carbon which is known as carbon black:

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_4 →{1000^{\circ} \mathrm{C}} \mathrm{C}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

Question 21. What is the main constituent of natural gas which is used as a fuel?
Answer: The main constituent of natural gas which is used as a fuel is methane (90%).

Question 22. Why is light or heat essential for the chlorination of alkanes?
Answer:

Cl free radical is required for the initiation of the reaction between an alkane and chlorine, i.e., homolysis of the Cl—Cl bond is necessary. The energy required for this hemolysis is derived from light or heat. So, light or heat is essential for the chlorination of alkanes.

Question 23. Which gas is responsible for explosions in coal mines?
Answer: Methane is responsible for explosions in coal mines.

Question 24. Write the IUPAC name of freon – 113.
Answer: IUPAC name off neon-113, i.e., Cl2FC— CClF2 is 1,1,2-trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane

Question 25. Which reaction helps locate the position of the double bond in alkenes?
Answer:

The reaction which helps locate the position of the double bonds in alkenes is ozonolysis.

Question 26. An alkene (C4Hg) reacts with HBr in the presence or in the absence of peroxide to give the same compound. Identify the alkene.
Answer:

As tire given alkene (molecular formula: C4HO) reacts with HBr to give the same product in the presence and absence of peroxide, the alkene is symmetrical. So, a symmetrical alkene with molecular formula C4H8 is but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3).

Question 27. Calculate the number of sigma (or) and pi (n) bonds in methyl acetylene.
Answer:

In methyl acetylene (CH3-C CH), there are 6 a-bonds and 2 bonds.

Question 28. Which of the following compounds will react with metallic sodium to produce H2 gas?

  1. C2H4
  2. C6H6
  3. C2H2
  4. CH3CH2CH3

Answer: 3. Acetylene (C2H2) reacts with metallic sodium to produce H2 gas:

⇒ \(\mathrm{HC} \equiv \mathrm{CH}+2 \mathrm{Na} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaC} \equiv \mathrm{CNa}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

Question 29. The C2 — C3 bond 1,3-butadiene possesses some double bond characteristics.
Answer:

The C2—C3 bond in 1,3-butadiene possesses some double bond character because of the delocalization of n -electrons.

Question 30. An arena when oxidised forms 1,3-dicarboxylic acid. Write the numbers of side chains and their position in the arena.
A
nswer:

As the arena gets oxidized to a dicarboxylic acid, it has two side chains. It can be said that the two side chains are at 1,3- or meta-position of each other because a 1,3-dicarboxylic acid forms in the oxidation.

Question 32. Distinguish between benzene and toluene with the help of a chemical reaction.
Answer:

Toluene on oxidation by alkaline KMn04 and subsequent acidification produces shining white crystals of benzoic acid. Benzene, on the other hand, does not undergo oxidation with alkaline KMnO4 to form any white precipitate.

Question 33. Between — NH2 and —NO2, which group facilitates nucleophilic substitution reaction in the benzene ring?
Answer:

The group that facilitates nucleophilic substitution reaction in the benzene ring is — NO2 because it decreases the electron density of the benzene ring.

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Short Questions and Answers NCERT Solutions

Question 34. Arrange in order of increasing reactivity towards electrophilic substitution: benzene, nitrobenzene, toluene, chlorobenzene.
Answer:

The order of increasing reactivity towards electrophilic substitution of the compounds is :

Nitrobenzene< Chloro¬ benzene < Benzene < Toluene.

Question 35. Name the halogen carrier in the chlorination of benzene.
Answer: The compound that acts as the halogen carrier in the chlorination of benzene is either AlCl3 or FeCl3.

Question 36. Benzene undergoes de-sulphonation but not denitration. Why?
Answer:

Since sulphonation is a reversible reaction, benzene can undergo a desulphonation reaction. However, nitration is an irreversible reaction. So, benzene cannot undergo a nitration reaction.

Question 37. If the calculated and the experimental heats of combustion of benzene are 824.1 and 789.1 kcal mol-1 respectively, then calculate the value of resonance energy of benzene.
Answer:

Resonance energy = calculated heat of combustion experimental heat of combustion = (824.1 – 789.1)kcal. mol-1= 35 kcal .mol-1

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question And Answers

Question 1. How can an eclipsed conformation of ethane be converted into a staggered conformation?
Answer:

In an ethane molecule, if one carbon atom is kept fixed around the C—C bond axis and the other carbon atom is rotated at a minimum angle of 60°, then the eclipsed conformation is converted to the staggered conformation.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Staggered Conformation

Question 2. Give examples of a chiral conformation and an achiral conformation of n-butane.
Answer:

Gauche-staggered conformation of n-butane is chiral because it cannot be superimposed on its mirror image.

However, the fully eclipsed conformation of n-butane is achiral as it can be superimposed on its mirror image.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Superimposed On Its Mirror Image

Question 3. Arrange the following conformations of n-butane according to their increasing stability:

  1. Gauche-staggered
  2. Fully eclipsed
  3. Eclipsed and
  4. Ante-Mggered

Answer:

When 2-iodopropane is used as the alkyl halide in the Wurtz reaction, the alkane obtained is 2,3-dimethylbutane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 3 Dimethylbutane

Question 4. Which of the following alkanes cannot be prepared by the Wurtz reaction in good yield?

  1. (CH3)2CHCH2CH(CH3)2
  2. (CH3)2CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)2
  3. (CH3)3CCH2CH2CH2CH3
  4. CH3CH2C(CH3)2CH2CH3
  5. (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3

Answer:

(1), (3) and (4) are three unsymmetrical alkanes. So, these cannot be prepared by Wurtz reaction in good yield. Again, for preparing alkane (5), a 3° alkyl halide is required. So, despite being a symmetrical alkane, (5) cannot be prepared by the Wurtz reaction.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question and Answers

Question 5. How will you prepare methane and ethane starting from ethanoic acid?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Wurtz Reaction

Question 6. How many monochloro derivatives are obtained on chlorination of n-pentane, isopentane and neopentane? Write down their structures.
Answer:

There are three and four types of non-equivalent hydrogen atoms in n-pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) and isopentane [CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH3] respectively. Whereas, in neopentane [(CH3)4C], all H -atoms are equivalent.

Therefore, chlorination of n-pentane, isopentane and neopentane form three, four and one monochloride derivatives respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monochloro Derivatives

Question 7. Chlorination of cyclohexane to prepare chlorocyclohexane is more practicable than the chlorination of methylcyclohexane to prepare l-chloro-l-methylcyclohexane— explain.
Answer:

There are five types of non-equivalent H -atoms in methylcyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methylcyclohexane

When it undergoes chlorination, four other monochloride derivatives are formed along with 1-chloro-1-methylcyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Chloro 1 Methylcyclohexane

As a result, the yield of the desired product is low’—’ and Low it is difficult to separate the product from the mixture. On the other hand, all H -atoms in cyclohexane are equivalent and thus, only chlorocyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chlorocyclohexane

Is formed as the product for this reason, Achlorination of cyclohexane to prepare chlorocyclohexane is more feasible than the chlorination of methylcyclohexane to prepare 1-chloro-l-methylcyclohexane.

Question 8. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The IUPAC Name Of The Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 3 Isopropyl 4And 4 Dimethylpent 2 ene And 2 Ethyl 3 Methybut1 ene

Question 9. Write the structural formula:

  1. 3-(1- methyl ethyl) hex-2-ene; 
  2. 4-ethyl- 2, 4- dimethyl kept-1- ene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulas Answers

Question 10. Write the IUPAC names and structures of the alkenes having the molecular formula C5H10.
Answer:

IUPAC names and structures of the alkenes having the molecular formula C5H10 are as follows

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkenes Molecular Formulas

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Long Question and Answers NCERT

Question 11. Write the mechanism of acid-catalysed dehydration of butyl alcohol.
Answer:

Dehydration of isopropyl alcohol in the presence of concentrated H2SO4 is an El reaction. The reaction occurs in three steps. The second step of the reaction is the slowest, i.e., it is the die rate-determining step of the reaction.

Step 1: Protonation of the alcohol.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Protonation Of The Alcohol

Step 2: Elimination of water molecules and formation of carbocation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Water Molecule

Step 3: Elimination of proton from carbocation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Proton From Carbocation

Question 12. Write the structures of A and B obtained from given reactions
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Structure Of A And B Obtained In Given Reactions

Answer:

A is R —CHBr —CH3 and B is RCHBrCH2Br. The alkene, HBr and the formed alkyl bromide (A) are all colourless. So, the left reaction cannot be used to detect ethylenic unsaturation.

On the other hand, the alkene and the formed dibromoalkane (B) are colourless but bromine has a reddish-brown colour.

So, the right reaction can be used to detect ethylenic unsaturation because decolourisation of bromine takes place in this reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Decolourisation Of Bromine Place

Question 13. How can a double bond be created in a molecule of a compound which has a carbon-carbon single bond?
Answer:

A double bond is created in a molecule of a compound containing a carbon-carbon single bond by the can-given method.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compound Containing Carbon Carbon

Question 14. Which reaction is used to detect ethylenic unsaturation and why? Write the structures and IUPAC names of the compounds expected to be obtained in the given reactions:

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2+\mathrm{HCl}→{\text { Peroxide }}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2+\mathrm{HBr}→{\text { Peroxide }}\)

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Given Reactions Answers

Question 15. Write the product of the given reaction. Explain its formation:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product of Reaction

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Of Given Reactions

Due to the -R and -I -effect of the — NO2 group, carbocation [I] is less stable than carbocation [II]. So the reaction proceeds through carbocation [II] and the major product formed is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Major Products Of Carbocations

Question 16. State Markownikoffs rule. Explain with an example. How would you convert ethylene to acetylene? Identify the compound in the reaction—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons A In The Reaction

Answer:

Markownikoffs rule and example: Conversion of ethylene to acetylene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene To Acetylene

Question 17. Ethane can be dried by passing through concentrated H2S04 but not ethylene—why?
Answer:

Ethane being a saturated hydrocarbon does not react with concentrated H2SO4

CH3 —CH3  (Ethane) + cone. H2SO4 . So, ethane can be dried by passing through concentrated H2SO4.

On the other hand, ethylene being an unsaturated hydrocarbon, when passed through concentrated H2SO4 gets absorbed by the acid and forms ethyl hydrogen sulphate. So, ethylene cannot be dried by passing through concentrated H2SO4.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Prepared By Passing A Stem Of Pure Hydrogen

Question 18. Identify the compounds A, B and C in the following reaction and write their names:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction And Write Their Names

Answer:

Carbonyl compounds B and C contain three and two carbon atoms respectively. There are also three carbon atoms on one side of the double bond and two carbon atoms on the other side of the double bond in the alkene.

Therefore, two alkenes with molecular formula C5H10 are: 2-methylbut-2-ene [CH3 —C(CH3)=CHCH3] and pent-2-ene (CH3CH2CH=CHCH3) . If A (C5H10) is 2-methylbut-2-ene, thenB (C3H6O) &C(C2H4O) areacetone (CH3COCH3) and acetaldehyde (CH3CHO) respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbut 2 Ene Form Of Acetone And Acetaldehyde

If A is pent-2-ene, then B and C are propanal (CH3CH2CHO) and acetaldehyde (CH3CHO) respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propanal And Acetaldehyde

Question 19. An alkene on ozonolysis produces propanone and propanal. The alkene is—

  1. 2-methyl pent-2-ene
  2. 3-methyl pent-2- ene
  3. A-methyl pent-2-ene
  4. Hex-3-ene.

Answer:

The products formed on ozonolysis are propanone and propanal. Therefore, the alkene can be determined as—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpent 2 ene

The alkene is (1) 2-methylpent-2-ene.

Question 20. How can cis- and trans-hydroxylation of cis-2-butene be carried out? Comment on the optical activity of the formed products.
Answer:

Osmium tetroxide adds to the double bond of cis-2- butene to form osmic ester which is hydrolysed by an aqueous ethanolic solution of sodium bisulphite. In this case, the two —OH groups get attached to the doubly bonded carbon atoms from the same side of the double bond and form 1,2-diol.

So, cis-hydroxylation takes place in case of this reaction. On the other hand, cis-2-butene reacts with peracids to form the corresponding epoxide. The resulting epoxide on hydrolysis with dilute acid or alkali yields 1,2-diol.

Epoxidation followed by hydrolysis causes the addition of two —OH groups from the opposite sides of the double bond. So, trans-hydroxylation takes place in case of this reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Racemic Mixture Optically Inactive

Question 21. What product would you expect from the following reaction?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Of Bromide

Answer:

An alkyne should be formed when a vicinal dihalide is refluxed with ethanolic KOH. However, in the given case, an alkyne does not form because a six-membered ring system cannot accommodate a linear portion like C—C=C —C. So, the compound formed is 1,3-cyclohexadiene.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Cyclohexadiene

Question 22. Identify and B in the following reactions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And B Reactions

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And b Following Reactions

Question 23. Give IUPAC names of the following compounds:

1. CH3CH2-CH=C=CH2

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds Option 2

3.  CH2=CH-CH(CH3)-(CH3)C=CH2

Answer:

IUPACname: 1,2-pentadiene.

IUPAC name: 1-methyl-1,4-cyclohexadiene.

IUPAC name: 2,3-dimethyl-1,4-pentadiene

Question 24. What are the two planar conformations of 1,3-butadiene? Which conformation is less stable and why?
Answer:

The two planar conformations of1,3-butadiene are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Two Planar Conformations

Due to steric hindrance or strain, s-ds-conformation is less stable.

Question 25. Between 1,3- and 1,4-cyclohexadiene, which compound has a lower value of heat of hydrogenation and why?
Answer:

1,3-cyclohexadiene being a conjugated diene is more stable than 1,4-cyclohexadiene which is a nonconjugated diene. So, the heat of hydrogenation of 1,3- cyclohexadiene has a lesser value than that of 1,4- cyclohexadiene.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclohexadiene

Question 26. Calculate the double bond equivalent of benzene from its molecular formula.
Answer:

Double bond equivalent (DBE) of compound,

⇒ \(\mathrm{DBE}=\frac{\sum n(v-2)}{2}+1\)

Where n is the number of different atoms present in the molecule and v is the valency of each atom. The molecular formula of benzene is C6H6.

So, DBE of benzene = \(\frac{6(4-2)+6(1-2)}{2}+1=4\)

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Long Q&A

Question 27. What knowledge about the carbon-carbon bond length in benzene may be obtained from valence bond theory?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hybrid Structure

The benzene molecule is a resonance hybrid of Kekule structures (1) and (2) and the contribution of each hybrid structure is 50% i.e., equal.

The single bonds (C—C) and the double bonds (C—C) in structure (1) become double and single bonds respectively in structure (2). As the two equally stable resonance structures (1) and (2) contribute equally to the hybrid.

It may be said that any two adjacent carbon atoms of a benzene molecule are linked by a bond intermediate between a single and a double bond. So, all the carbon-carbon bonds of benzene are equivalent and their lengths are equal (1.39A).

Again, the bond order of each bond is the same (1.5). So, it can be said that all carbon-carbon bonds are equal in length.

⇒ \(\text { Bond order }=\frac{\text { Double bond }+ \text { Single bond }}{2}=\frac{2+1}{2}=1.5\)

Question 28. Which of the following representations is correct and why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Representation Is Correct Answer

Answer:

According to representation

(1), it seems that structures (1) and (2) have a separate existence. There is no separate existence of structures (1) and (2).

So, (1) and (2) cannot be related by ’. Thus, the representation (i) is incorrect. Since (1) and (2) are two resonance structures which have no separate existence. So, (1) and (2) can be related by’ •*-»ÿ ‘. Thus, the representation

(2) is correct.

Question 29. What is the basic difference between aromatic and anti¬ aromatic compounds?
Answer:

Monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems containing (4n + 2) delocalised; π-electrons (n = 0, 1,2,3, are called aromatic compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 6 Pi Electron System

Monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems containing 4n delocalised π- electrons (n = 1,2,3,…) are called antiaromatic compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 Pie Electron System

Question 30. Will cyclooctatetraene exhibit aromatic character? Explain.
Answer:

Since cyclooctatetraene does not contain (4n + 2)n electrons, it does not exhibit an aromatic character.

As cyclooctatetraene has 4n – electrons (n=2), it should be an antiaromatic compound. However, the ring of this compound is very large so it does not exist in the unstable planar shape, rather it forms a tub-shaped structure. As a result, conjugation is lost and so cyclooctatetraene is a non-aromatic compound.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclooctatetraene Is A Non Aromatic Compound

Question 31. Using the theory of aromaticity, explain the finding that A and B are different compounds, but Cand D are identical.
Answer:

As A is an antiaromatic compound (4nπ -electron system, n = 1 ), it becomes unstable due to the delocalisation of π electrons. As delocalisation of π -electrons does not take place for A, B is not the resonance structure of A.

B is the structural isomer of A. So, A and B are two different compounds. Again, C is an aromatic compound [(4n + 2)π electron-system, n = 1 ] which attains stability due to the delocalisation of electrons. So, delocalisation of electrons takes place for C. D is the resonance structure of C, i.e., Cand D are same compound.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Same And Separete Compounds

Question 32. Classify each of the given species as aromatic, antiaromatic and nonaromatic

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic And Antiaromatic And Nonaromatic

Answer:

  1. Is an antiaromatic compound because the B atom contains a vacant p -orbital,
  2. Is a non-aromatic compound because one carbon atom of the ring does not have a p -orbital.
  3. Behaves as an aromatic compound with (4n + 2)π-electrons (n = 1) because of the vacant d -d-orbital and lone pair of electrons of the sulphur atom

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lone Pair Of Electron Of the Sulphur

Is an aromatic ion with (4n+2)π- electrons, n = 0

Question 33. Which is the smallest aromatics species?
Answer:

The smallest aromatic species is cyclopropenyl cation.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclopropenyl Cation

Question 34. Write structural formulae of isomeric nitrotoluenes.
Answer:

Structural formulae ofisomeric nitrotoluenes are

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulae Of Isomeric Nitrotoluenes

Question 35. Write structural formulae of isomeric dibromophenols.
Answer:

Structural formulae of isomeric dibromo phenols are

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulae Of Isomeric Dibromophenols

Question 36. More than three dibromobenzenes are not possible—explain.
Answer:

Considering the resonance structures of benzene, it is easy to understand that positions 1,2- and 1,6- are indistinguishable. Similarly, positions 1,3- and 1,5- are indistinguishable. Thus, in the case of bromobenzene, only three isomers are possible which are as follows

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dibromobenzene

Question 37. Write the IUPAC names of the given compounds

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Given Compounds

Answer:

  1. 1,2-dihydroxybenzene
  2. 1-phenylpropanoid-l-one
  3. 2-hydroxybenzoic acid
  4. Al-phenylethylamine
  5. l-bromo-3-chlorobenzene
  6. 3-phenylpropanoid acid
  7. 2,4,6-trinitrotoluene
  8. 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy benzaldehyde

Question 38. Write structures and IUPAC names:

  1. Mesitylene
  2. Styrene
  3. Pyrogallol
  4. Picric acid
  5. Salicylaldehyde
  6. Benzophenone
  7. TNT
  8. Phthalic acid
  9. Anthranilic acid.

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Structures And IUPAC Names

Question 39. Classify the following groups as o-/p-or m- directing group and activating or deactivating group:

  1. -NO2
  2. -Cl
  3. -C2H5
  4. -CP3
  5. OH
  6. — NHCOCH3
  7. —NH3
  8. — O
  9. —COCH3

Answer:

  1. — NO2 (deactivating and m -directing),
  2. —Cl (deactivating and o/p -directing),
  3. —C2H5 (activating and o-lp- directing),
  4. — CF3 (deactivating and m -directing),
  5. —OH (activating and o-lp- directing),
  6. — NHCOCH3 (activating and o-lp- directing),
  7. — NH3 (deactivating and m directing),
  8. — Oe (activating and o-lp-directing
  9. — COCH3 (deactivating and m -directing).

Question 40. Explain each of the following observations:

  1. Although —Cl is a deactivating group, it is o-lp-directly.
  2. The —CH3 group is an o-/p- directing group, even though the carbon atom contains no unshared pair of electrons.
  3. The —OCH3 group is an activating and o-/p directing group.
  4. The — CCl3 group is a m -m-directing group, even though the carbon atom is not bonded to a more electronegative atom by a double or triple bond.

Answer:

3. —OCH3  group is an o-/p-directing group because an unshared pair of electrons on O-atom participate in resonance (+R -effect) and increase the electron density of the ring at ortho- and para-positions.

So, electrophiles (E) preferably enter the ortho- and para-positions. Due to an increase in electron density, the ring becomes more activated than the unsubstituted benzene towards an electrophilic substitution reaction. Thus, — OCH3 is an activating group.

4. —CCl3 is an electron-withdrawing group because of its -I effect which is attributed to the presence of three highly electronegative Cl -atoms. Consequently, it decreases the electron density of the benzene ring, especially at the ortho- and para-positions.

So, —CCl3 is a deactivating group which makes the ring less reactive towards electrophilic substitution and substitution occurs preferably at meta-position.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Q&A

Question 41. How will you prepare benzene from the given compounds?

  1. C6H5COOH
  2. C6H5CMe3 
  3. C6H5CH2Cl
  4. C3H5Br

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepare benzene From The Given Compounds

Question 42. Write two processes to convert C6H6 into C6H5D.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Two Process To Convert

Question 43. Write the NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formula And Name Of The Productsformed.

 

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formula Name Of The Products Formed

Question 44. Why groups like — CHO, — NO2, — B(OR) — PBr3 and — SR2 act as meta-directing groups?
Answer:

Since the carbon atom of the:

  1. — The CHO group is bonded to the oxygen atom by a double bond, the nitrogen atom of the
  2. — The NO2 group is linked with the oxygen atom by a double bond, the boron atom of the
  3. —B (OR)3 group contains a vacant p -orbital and the phosphorus and sulphur atoms of the groups

+ PBr3 and — +SR2-, have vacant d-orbitals, all of these groups reduce the electron densities of ortho- and para- positions by their -R effect. Consequently, the electron density at the metaposition becomes relatively higher and the electrophile preferably enters the meta-position. Thus, these groups behave as meta-directing groups

Question 45. Arrange the compounds in increasing order of their rate of nitration and give reason: Benzene, Toluene, Nitrobenzene, Hexadeuterobenzene (C6D6).
Answer:

The increasing order of rate of nitration of given compounds is nitrobenzene < benzene = hexadeuterobenzene < toluene. The electron-attracting nitro (— NO2) group decreases the electron density of the nitrobenzene ring and as a result, its nitration occurs at a rate slower than that of benzene.

On the other hand, the electron-repelling methyl (— CH3) group increases the electron density of the toluene ring and as a result, its nitration proceeds at a rate faster than that of benzene. Benzene and hexadeuterobenzene (C6D6) undergo nitration at the same rate because, in an aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction, cleavage of the C — H or C — D bond does not occur at the rate-determining step.

Question 46. A mixture of benzene and bromine solution remains unchanged for an indefinite period, but if an iron nail is added to the solution, bromination of benzene occurs rapidly—explain.
Answer:

Benzene is an aromatic compound having no ethylenic unsaturation. So benzene does not participate in additional reactions with bromine. Again, the substitution reaction of benzene does not take place with the poor electrophile bromine alone.

So a solution of bromine in benzene remains stable (f.e., unchanged) for an indefinite period. However, when an iron nail is added to the solution, bromination of benzene occurs to yield bromobenzene because iron then acts as a halogen carrier. The red solution of bromine becomes colourless

2Fe + 3Br2→2FeBr3; Br2 + FeBr3 → Br+ FeBr

C6H6 + Br+ FeBr4 →C6H5Br + HBr + FeBr3

Question 47. Write the monosubstituted compounds formed in each of the following reactions and state whether each reaction is faster or slower than that of benzene.

  1. Nitration of C6H5NHCOCH3,
  2. Bromination of C6H5CBr3
  3. Chlorination of C6H5CMe3
  4. Nitration of C6H5—C6H5
  5. Nitration of C6H5—COOCH3
  6. Sulphonation of C6H5CHMe2
  7. Nitration of C6H5CN,
  8. Bromination of C6H5I,
  9. Nitration of C6H5-C6H4C6H5

Answer:

1. p-O2NC6H4NHCOCH3 (for this compound nitration occurs faster than benzene).

2. m-BrC6H4CBr3 (for this compound bromination occurs slower than benzene)

3. p-ClC6H4CMe3 (for this compound chlorination occurs faster than benzene)

4. p-O2NC6H4C6Hg (for this compound nitration occurs faster than benzene)

5. m-O2NC6H4COOMe (for this compound nitration occurs slower than benzene)

6. p-HSO3C6H4CHMe2 (for this compound sulphonation occurs faster than benzene)

7. m-O2NC6H4CN (for this compound nitration occurs slower than benzene)

8. p- BrC6H4I (reaction occurs slower than benzene)

9.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Faster Than Benzene In The Middle Ring

(reaction occurs faster than benzene in the middle ring because it is attached to two activating — CgH5 groups on both sides.)

Question 48. Write three methods by which alkyl side chains can be introduced into the benzene ring
Answer:

The: methods by which alkyl side chains, can be introduced into the benzene ring are—

1. By using (a) CH3CH3X, AlCl3CH2=CH2 HF and CH3CH2OH, BF3 or concentrated H2SO4 in Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction.

2. By acylation of benzene using CH3COCI or (CH3CO)2O, AlCl3 followed by . Clemmensen reduction NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Clemmensen Reduction the formed ketone.

4. By reacting CH3CH2Br with Ph2CuLi according to Corey-House synthesis.

Question 49. Classify the following groups based on their orientation and reactivity:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Orientation And Reactivity

Answer:

1,4 and 5 are activating and ortho-/para- directing groups. 3 and 6 are deactivating and meta-directing groups. 2 is a deactivating group (due to — NO2 ) and is ortho-/para directing >C=C<

Question 50. 1-butyne and 2-butyne are allowed to react separately with the reagents given below:

  1. Na, liquid NH3
  2. H2 (1 mole), Pd-BaSO4, quinoline,
  3. H2SO4,H2O, H2SO4
  4. H2/Pt.

Which reagent(s) will produce the same product in both cases? Write the structures, of products formed in these cases
Answer:

Both 1-butyne & 2-butyne react separately with reagents 1 and 2 to produce 1-butene and 2-butene respectively

However, reagents(3 & 4 react with 1-butyne & 2-butyne separately to yield same products (2-butanone & butane)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Butanone And Butane

Question 51. Ethyne reacts with dil. H2S04 in the presence of Hg2+ salts to give acetaldehyde, but with HC1, under similar conditions, it gives vinyl chloride. Account for such observation.
Answer:

In the first step, ethyne reacts with Hg2+ to form a cyclic complex (I). This is then attacked by more nucleophilic H2O, 2— rather than, weakly nucleophilic SO4, to form unstable vinyl alcohol which then tautomerism to give acetaldehyde

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Tautomerises To Give Acetaldehyde

If HCl is used instead of H2SO4 then the complex (I) is attacked by more nucleophilic Cl-, rather than weakly nucleophilic H2O, to give vinyl chloride

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vinyl Chloride

An alkane has a molecular mass of 72. Give the structure of all the possible isomers along with their IUPAC OH names

Let the alkane be CnH2n+2. It’s molecular

=12n + (2n + 2) = 14n + 2

.*. 14n + 2 = 72, thus n – 5 and hence the alkane is C5H12

The isomers of the alkane C5H12 are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomers Of The Alkenes

Long Questions and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons

Question 52. Find the number of structural and configurational isomers of a bromo compound C5H9Br formed by the addition of HBR to 2-pentyne.
Answer:

Addition of one molar proportion of HBr to CH3—CH2—C=C—CH3 produces two structural isomers 1 and 2

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Isomers Of A And B

Each of these structural isomers can exist as a pair of geometrical isomers (cis and trans) and hence there are four possible configurational isomers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Four Possible Configurational Isomers

Question 53. Identify the products P and Q in the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Products P And Q

Answer: In the absence of light, the reaction occurs via a polar mechanism

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons In Absence And Presence Of Light Reactions

Question 54. Identify the product ‘T’ in the following reaction and the major product. Account for its formation.
NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Product Of T
Answer:

The product‘T is iodobenzene.

Explanation: Since I am less electronegative than Cl, so I+ is the effective electrophile that takes part in the reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sigma Complex And Iodobenzene

Question 55. Identify the major product obtained on; monobromination (Br2/FeBr3) of meta methyl anisole and account for its formation
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monobromination Of Meta Methylanisole

Both —CH3 and —OCH3 are o-/p-directing groups. Therefore, the possible positions of attack which are facilitated by these groups are indicated by arrows as shown below

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Indicated By Arrows Of Possible Positions

Attack by the electrophile (Br+) is disfavoured at C2 because this position is most crowded. Again -I effect of — the OCH3 group does not favour attack at C6. So most favourable attack occurs at C4, thereby producing 4-bromo-3-methylanhole as

Question 56. The enthalpy of hydrogenation of cyclohexene is -119.5 kj. mol-1 ,. If the resonance energy of benzene is 150.4 kj. mol-1 , estimate its enthalpy of Br2/FeBr3 hydrogenation.
Answer:

Enthalpy of hydrogenation of cyclohexene

=-119.5 kj- mol-1

So enthalpy of hydrogenation of hypothetical cyclohexatriene

= 3 × -119.5 kj- mol-1,

In other words, the calculated (or theoretical) enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene =-3 × -119.5 kj- mol-1,

Let the actual (i.e., experimental) enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene = × kj- mol-1

Now, R. E. of benzene = calculated enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene- actual enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene

o,-150.4 = -3 X 119.5 —x

x = -3 ×119.5 + 150.4 = -208.1 kj. mol-1

Question 57. How low will you prove:

  1. Acidic character of acetylene.
  2. Presence of terminal =CH2 group in 1-pentene.
  3. Presence of acetylenic hydrogen in 1-butyne.
  4. 2-butene is a symmetrical alkene. 1-butyne

Answer:

When acetylene is added to water and shaken, the resulting solution does turn blue litmus red. The following reactions in which the H-atoms of acetylene are replaced by metal atoms prove the acidic character of acetylene.

  1. HBr (a) Acetylene (HC=CH) reacts with sodium in two steps to form monosodium acetylide (HC = CNa) and disodium acetylide (NaC = CNa) respectively and in each case, H is evolved.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Disodium Acetylide

2. When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal Cu2Cl2 or AgNO3 solution, metallic acetylide is precipitated in each case

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Metallic Acetylide Is Precipitated

3. Ozonolysis of 1-pentene leads to the formation of formaldehyde (HCHO) as one of the products. This proves that there is a terminal =CH2 group present in 1-pentene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ozonolysis Of 1 Pentene

When 1-butyne is treated with ammoniacal cuprous chloride, a red precipitate of cuprous 1-butynide is obtained. Again, when an aqueous solution of silver nitrate is added to the alcoholic solution of 1-butyne, a white precipitate of silver 1-but nude is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Butyne Is Treated With Ammoniacal Cuprous Chloride

Ozonolysis of any symmetrical alkene results in the formation of only one carbonyl compound (2 moles). Since 2-butene, on ozonolysis, produces two moles of acetaldehyde (CH3 CHO), it must be a symmetrical alkene. Its structure is CH3 CH=CH CH3.

Question 58. Identify the major product obtained in each of the following reactions and explain its formation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Following Reactions And Explain Its Formation

Answer:

1. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Bromo 1 Phenylpropane Of Major

Although the alkene is an unsymmetrical one, Markownikoff’s rule is not directly applicable here because there are the same number of H-atoms attached to double-bonded carbons. Out of the 2 carbocations ( C6H5CHCH2CH3 & C6H5CH2CHCH3 ) obtained in the first step of the reaction, the first one (a benzylic carbocation) is more stable because it is stabilised by resonance involving the benzene ring. So, this carbocation is formed more easily and readily and in the second step, it combines with the Br ion to give 1-bromo-l-phenylpropane as the major product.

2. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Chloro 1 Iodo 2 Methylpropane

This reaction occurs according to Markownikoff’s rule. Chlorine is more electronegative than iodine. So, in the Iδ+– Clδ- molecule, the I-atom with a partial positive charge combines first with the alkene as an electrophile. Between the two carbocations, (CH3)2+CCH2I and  (CH3)2+CICH2 formed in the first one being a 3° carbocation is relatively more stable. So, it is formed more easily and readily and in the second step, it combines with Cl to give 2-chloro-lido-2-methylpropane as the major product.

3. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Chloro 1 Iodo 2 Methylpropane

Double bond is more reactive than triple bond towards electrophilic addition reactions. For this reason, bromine (1 mole) is added mainly to the double bond of the compound to produce 4, 5 -dibromo pent-1-one as the major product.

Question 59. Write the names and structures of the two alkenes (molecular formula: C4H6) which give the compound when added to HBr in the absence of organic peroxide but different compounds when added to HBr in the presence of peroxide
Answer:

When but-1-ene (CH3CH2CH=CH2) and but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3) react with HBr in the absence of an organic peroxide, the same product is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons React With HBr In Absence Of An Organic Peroxide

However, in the presence of an organic peroxide, the addition of HBr to but-1-ene occurs contrary to Markownikoff’s rule and hence differences are obtained from these two cases

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Different Producers Are Obtained In These Two Cases But 1 ene

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Different Producers Are Obtained In These Two Cases But 2 ene

Question 60. Mention two reactions in which ethylene and benzene behave differently and two reactions in which they behave similarly.
Answer:

Benzene, unlike ethylene, fails to discharge the red colour of bromine in CCl4 or the reddish-violet (purple) colour of potassium permanganate solution because, unlike ethylene the π -electron system of benzene possesses extraordinary.
O2 stabilisation.

So, in these two reactions ethylene and benzene behave differently.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene And Benzene

In the following two reactions, ethylene and benzene behave similarly.

1. Both ethylene and benzene bums with sooty flame to produce CO2 and H2O

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4+3 \mathrm{O}_2 \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{CO}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6+15 \mathrm{O}_2 \longrightarrow 12 \mathrm{CO}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

2. Both ethylene and benzene react with ozone to form ozonide (an additional

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4 \mathrm{O}_3\) (Ethylene (ozonides)

⇒  \(\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6+3 \mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6 \mathrm{O}_9\) (Benzene tri ozonide)

Question 61. Distinguish between:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Toluene
Answer:

1. Toluene (C6H5CH3), on oxidation by alkaline KMnO4 solution followed by acidification gives a white crystalline precipitate of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH). On the other hand, tert-butylbenzene does not undergo such an oxidation reaction by an alkaline KMnO4 solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Toluene.

2. O -xylene and m -xylene, on oxidation by alkaline KMnO4 solution, produce phthalic acid and isophthalic acid respectively. Phthalic acid, when heated, forms phthalic anhydride which responds to phthalein test On the other hand, isophthalic acid on heating does not produce any anhydride.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons O-xylene And M-Xylene On Oxidation By Alkaline

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 Long Question and Answers Class 11

Question 62. Write the name & structure of the following compounds:

  1. An unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon which forms monosodium salt.
  2. An organic compound which causes depletion of the ozone layer.
  3. An alkane which is used as a fuel for household cooking.
  4. An alkyl bromide which reacts with alcoholic KOH to form only 1-butene.
  5. An alkene which reacts with HBr in the presence or absence of peroxide to give the same product.
  6. A compound containing iodine which, when heated with silver powder, produces acetylene.
  7. An alkyl bromide (C4H9Br) does not participate in the Wurtz reaction.
  8. An alkene which on ozonolysis forms glyoxal and formaldehyde.

Answer:

  1. Propyne (CH3C= CH).
  2. Dichlorodifluoromethane (CF2Cl2).
  3. Butane(CH3CH2CH2CH3).
  4. 1-bromobutane (CH3CH2CH2CH2Br).
  5. 2-butene (CH3CH=CHCH3).
  6. Iodoform (CHI3).
  7. Tert-butylbromide (Me3CBr).
  8. 1,3-butadiene (CH2=CH—CH=CH2)

Question 63. Identify A … G in the following reaction sequence

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And G In The Following Reaction Sequence

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A AndG In The following Reaction Sequence Answer

Question 64. Write structures and names of the compounds A to Q in the following reaction sequences:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q .

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q..

Question 65. How will you distinguish between each of the given pairs of compounds by a single chemical test? 

  1. Ethylene and acetylene
  2. Ethane and acetylene
  3. 1-butyne and 2-butyne
  4. Ethane and ethylene.
  5. Propene and propyne
  6. 1-butene and 2-butene
  7. 2-pentene and benzene
  8. Benzene and cyclohexene.

Answer:

The distinction between two compounds should be written in a tabular form. A reagent which either causes a colour change, or evolution of a gas or the appearance of a precipitate should be selected for this purpose.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds..

Question 66. How will you carry out the following transformations:

  1. Acetylene → Acetone
  2. Acetylene →Dldeuteroacetylene(C2D2)
  3. Acetylene → Acetylenedicarboxyllc acid
  4. 1-butyne → 2-butyne
  5. Propene → 1-propanol  Propyne →  Propanal

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylenes Acetone

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylenes Acetone2

Question 67. The boiling points of three isomeric pentanes are 36.2°C, 28°C and 9.5°C respectively. Identify the compounds and give a reason.
Answer:

The strength of van der Waals forces depends on the area of products, A and B obtained in the following reactions: contact between molecules. The area of contact between straight-chain n -pentane (CH3CHCH2CH2CH3) molecules is maximum. So, the extent of van der Waals’ attraction among its molecules is maximum. For this reason, its boiling point is highest (36.2°C). On the other hand, the area of contact between spherical neopentane [(CH3)4C] molecules is minimal.

So, _ the extent of van der Waals’ attraction among its molecules is the minimum. For this reason, its boiling point is the lowest (9.5°C). Again, the area of contact between isopentane [(CH3)2CHCH2CH3] molecules is intermediate between n-pentane and neopentane and so, its boiling point (28°C) is intermediate between the other two isomers.

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Long Questions and Answers NCERT Solutions

Question 68. Write the structure and the name of the monobromoderivative which is obtained as the major product when n-butane reacts with bromine in the presence of light. Why is it produced in larger amounts?
Answer:

N-butane reacts with bromine in the presence of light to give 2-bromobutane as the major product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Bromobutane And 2 Bromobutane

The reaction occurs through the free radical mechanism. As 2° free radical (CH3CH2CHCH3) is relatively more stable than 1° free radical (CH3CH2CH2CH2), displacement of 2° H-atom occurs rapidly to give 2-bromobutane as the major product

Question 68. Possible methods for the preparation of 4-methyl-2- pentyne arc are given. Which method is desirable & why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Possible Methods For Preparation

Answer:

In both the methods given, the reaction in the second step (reddish-brown) proceeds through the SN2 pathway and it is known that an SN2 reaction is very susceptible to steric effect So, the product will be obtained in good yield if, in the second step, methyl or primary alkyl bromide is used. In the second step of the second method, methyl bromide (CH3Br) has been used. Hence, the second method is desirable.

Question 70.  Three separate cylinders contain methane, and ethylene acetylene respectively. How will you identify them?
Ana.

The three gases are first separately passed through the ammoniacal solution of cuprous chloride. The gas, which gives a red precipitate, is acetylene. The gases in the remaining two cylinders are separately passed through a solution of bromine in CCl4. The gas, which decolourises the reddish-brown solution of bromine, is ethylene. Hence, the remaining gas in the other cylinder is methane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cylinder Methane

Question 71. Give an example alkene which on oxidation by acidic solution of KMn04 or on ozonolysis gives the same compound. Give reason.
Answer:

A terminal =CR2 group of an alkene gets converted into a ketone when the alkene is heated with an acidic solution of KMnO4 or subjected to ozonolysis. Hence, an example of such an alkene is 2,3-dimethyl but-2-ene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 3 Dimethylbut 2 ene

Question 72. Write the formulas and names of the alkenes which on hydrogenation form 2-methylpentane.
Answer:

The carbon skeleton of the probable alkenes is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbons Probable Alkenes

As there are four different positions of the double bond in the given carbon skeleton, four alkenes are possible which form 2-methylpentane on hydrogenation. The probable alkenes are:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpentane On Hydrogenation

Question 73. Write two possible methods of preparing 2-methylpropane by Corey-House synthesis. Out of these two methods, which one is better and why?
Answer:

Two possible methods of preparing 2-methylpropane by Corey-House synthesis are as follows-

Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpropane By Corey House Synthesis

In Corey-House synthesis, the third step is an SN2 reaction (sensitive to steric effect). So, this step is highly favourable for methyl or primary halides, and less’ favourable for secondary alkyl halides arid1 does not occur in the case of tertiary alkyl halides. In methods (1) and (2), a secondary halide and methyl halide have been used respectively In ease of the third step. So, method

(1) Is better than the method

(2) for preparing 2-methyl propane by Corey-House synthesis.

Question 74. A or B NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons A And B Geometrical Isomers A and B are the two geometrical isomers. Identify them.
Answer:

The alkene which gives only acetaldehyde on ozonolysis is 2-butene (CH3– CH —CH CH3).

CH3CH=O+O=CHCI ⇒ CH3CH=CHCH3

So, A and B are the two geometrical isomers of 2-butene:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Two Geometrical Isomers

Question 75. Dlazomethane (CH2N2), on decomposition forms singlet methylene (: CH2) which gets attached to different non-equivalent C—H bonds of alkanes to form various alkanes. Name the alkanes formed when pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) reacts with singlet methylene. Assuming methylene to be highly reactive and less selective, calculate the probable amounts of the formed alkanes.
Answer:

Three alkanes are formed when pentane reacts with singlet methylene because there are three non-equivalent C—H bonds in pentane molecules. So, the alkanes formed are:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Singlet Methylene Form Of The Alkanes

As methylene is highly reactive and less selective, its insertion occurs randomly. So, the amounts of the formed compounds have calculated the basis of the probability factor and number of equivalent C— H bonds. For example, Percentage of hexane,

(CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3) = \(\frac{6}{12}\) × 100 = 50

Percentage of 2-methyl pentane

CH3—CH – CH3—CH2CH2CH3  =\(\frac{6}{12}\) × 100 = 50

percentage of 3-methyl pentane = \(\frac{2}{12}\) × 100 = 16.7

Question 76. How will you prepare (CH3)2CD14 CH3 from propane (CH3CH2CH3)?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons How Will You Prepare Form Of Propane

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons Long Question and Answer PDF

Question 77. How will you prepare \({ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3{ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_2{ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3\) taking \({ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{I}\) as the only source of carbon?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Source Of Carbon

Question 78. In the reaction of 2-pentene with HI, the two isomeric iodopentanes are produced in almost equal amounts —why?
Answer:

The two doubly bonded carbon atoms in 2-pentene are bonded to the same number (one) of H-atoms. So, the two isomeric iodopentanes are produced in nearly equal amounts.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Idopentane And 3 Iodopentane

The two 2° carbocations (CH3CH2CH2CHCH3 and CH3CH2CHCH2CH3 ) obtained on the addition of proton at C-2 or C-3 are almost equally stable. So, the reaction proceeds through the two routes nearly at the same rate and consequently, the two isomeric iodopentanes are formed in nearly equal amounts.

Question 79. From the following two reactions, arrange HC = CH, NH3 and H2O in the increasing order of their acidic character.

  1. HC = CH + NaNH2→ HC = CNa + NH3
  2. HC = CNa + H2O → HC = CH + NaOH

Answer:

In reaction no. , HC ≡ CH exhibits its acidic character and produces NH3 from NaNH2. So HC = CH is more acidic than NH3.

On the other hand, in reaction (2), water exhibits its acidic character and produces HC = CH from HC = CNa. So, H2O is more acidic than HC = CH. Thus, the increasing order of acidic character: NH3 < HC=CH < H2O

Question 80. Unlike acetylene, ethylene dissolves in concentrated sulphuric acid—why?
Answer:

In the first step of the reaction with concentrated H2SO4, ethylene forms an ethyl cation (CH3C+H2) and acetylene forms a vinyl cation (CH2 =+CH) by accepting a H® ion.

Since vinyl cation is less stable than ethyl cation, in the case of acetylene, the first step (rate-determining step) of the reaction does not occur easily. Thus, unlike ethylene, acetylene fails to dissolve in concentrated H2SO4

Question 81. Write the structure of the product expected to be formed when CH2=CH—CH3(C = 14C) is subjected to free radical chlorination.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chlorination

Question 82. Identify the products obtained when ethylene gas is passed through bromine water in the presence of sodium chloride.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Bromine Water Presence Of Sodium Chloride

Question 83. Which alkenes are formed by dehydrating the following alcohols in the presence of acid? Give the reaction mechanism.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydrating The Following Alcohols

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkenes Are Formed On Dehydrating

Question 84. The conjugated dienes are more reactive than alkenes which in turn are more reactive than alkynes towards electrophilic addition reactions —explain.
Answer:

The reactivity of alkenes, alkynes or conjugated dienes towards electrophilic addition reaction depends on the stability of the intermediate carbocation obtained in the rate-determining step by addition of the electrophile (E+).

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophilic Addition Reactions

Out of the three carbocations (la, Ila and IUa), (IlIa) is the most stable because it is stabilised by resonance. Again, out of (a) and (Ila), (IIla) is less stable because the positive charge in it is placed on a more electronegative sp2 -hybfiflis6d carbon atom.

Thus, the stabilities of these carbocations follow the order IIIa> la > Ila. Therefore, the order of activity of these compounds is conjugated diene > alkene > alkyne.

Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Solutions Long Questions Class 11

Question 85. Calculate the resonance energy of 1,3-butadiene from the following data

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Butadiene

Answer:

The heat liberated due to hydrogenation of one double bond = 30 kcal – mol-1

The heat liberated due to hydrogenation of two double bonds = 30 × 2 = 60 kcal – mol-1.

Heat liberated due to hydrogenation of 1,3-butadiene (CH=CH—CH=CH2) = 57 kcal -mol-1.

Therefore, resonance energy of 1,3-butadiene = 60- 57 = 3 kcal – mol-1

Question 86. Dehydration of alcohols to alkene is carried out by treating with a cone. H2SO4 but not with cone. HCl or HNO3. Give reasons.
Answer:

Dehydration of alcohol proceeds via the formation of a carbocation intermediate. If HCl is used as the dehydrating agent then chloride ion (Cl), being a good nucleophile, attacks at carbonium ion carbon (Cl+) thereby producing alkyl chloride as the substitution product together with the alkene as the elimination product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydration Of Alcohols

If cone. H2SO4 Is used as the reagent the H2SO4 ion derived from H2SO4 does not act as a nucleophile. Instead, the carbocation loses a proton from the β -carbon atom to give alkene (R—CH=CH2) as the elimination product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Products

If cone. HNO3 is used as the reagent then it being a strong oxidising agent, brings about oxidation of the alcohol first to an aldehyde or a ketone and then to a carboxylic acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ketone And Then To A Carboxylic Acid

Question 87. How will you prepare ethylbenzene by using ethyne as the only organic substance and any other inorganic substance of your choice?
Answer:

Ethylbenzene (C6H5C2H5) may be prepared from ethyne (acetylene) through the following steps:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepare Ethylbenzene By Using Ethyne

Question 88. Explain why the bromination of benzene requires FeBr3 as a catalyst, while the bromination of anisole (C6H5OCH3) does not require any catalyst.
Answer:

Since the benzene molecule is not so reactive,© for bromination it requires more reactive bromine cation (Br) or the complex Br— Br—FeBr3 as the electrophile. Due to the presence of electron-donating (+R) methoxy (— OCH3) group.

The anisole ring becomes much more reactive towards an electrophilic substitution reaction. When the non-polar bromine molecule comes in contact with the anisole ring, it 6+ 6 — becomes partially polarised (Br— Br)and its positive end (weak electrophile) undergoes easy attack by anisole. Therefore, due to the greater reactivity of anisole, its bromination requires no catalyst.

Question 89. Neither vinyl chloride (CH2=CH—Cl) nor chlorobenzene (C6H5 —Cl) can be used as an alkylating agent in the Friedel-Crafts reaction—why?
Answer:

In vinyl chloride or chlorobenzene, the unshared pair of electrons on the Cl atom is involved in resonance interaction with the σ -electron system and as a result, the C—Cl bond in both cases acquires some double bond character.

The Lewis acid AlCl3 is incapable of breaking such a strong C—Cl bond. Moreover, even if the C— Cl bond breaks, the carbocations produced would be unstable (due to a positive charge on an sp² – hybridised carbon atom).

Hence such a bond is very much reluctant to undergo cleavage. For this reason, vinyl chloride or chlorobenzene cannot be used as an alkylating agent in the Friedel-Crafts reaction.

Question 90. Two methods for the preparation of propylbenzene are given below-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propylbenzene Methods Given In Below

Question 91. Which one of the two methods is more effective for the preparation of propylbenzene? Give reason.
Answer:

Method 2 is more effective for the preparation of propylbenzene. This is because, in method 1, the alkylating agent containing a chain of three carbon atoms isomerises to give isopropyl benzene as the principal product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isopropylbenzene

Moreover, the alkyl group activates the benzene ring towards further substitution. So, there is a possibility of polyalkylation of benzene. However, although method 2 involves two steps, the desired propylbenzene is obtained as the only product with a higher yield. In the first step of the reaction.

The CH3CH2CO — group is introduced into the ring. Since the acyl group has no possibility of isomerisation, no other isomeric group can enter the ring.

Furthermore, the acyl group being an electron-attracting one deactivates the ring and consequently, polyacylation cannot take place. Hence in the first step, only propiophenone (C6H5COCH2CH3) is produced and in the second step, it is reduced by Clemmensen method to give only propylbenzene.

Question 92. Which ring (A or B) is in each of the following? Compounds will undergo nitration readily and why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propylbenzene

Answer:

  • Ring A is attached to the electron-donating or activating group — :O: COPh, whereas ring B is attached to the electron-attracting or deactivating — COOPh group. So, ring A is more reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution reaction. Hence, ring A will undergo nitration readily.
  • Since a deactivating — N02 group is attached to ring A, it is relatively less reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution. Consequently, ring B undergoes nitration readily.
  • Ring A is attached to an electron-donating or activating — CH3 group while ring B is linked to an electron-attracting or deactivating — CF3 group. So, ring A is relatively more reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution. Hence, ring A undergoes nitration at a faster rate.
  • Ring B undergoes nitration readily. The reason is similar to that given in the case of compound (1).

Question 93. Write the names and structures of the compounds formed during the Friedel-Crafts reaction of benzene with

  1. CH2Cl2
  2. CHCl3 and
  3. CCl4

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Friedel Crafts Recation Of Benzene

Question 94. Show the formation of the electrophile in each case:

  1. Cl3/AlCl3
  2. Br2/Fe
  3. Conc.HNO3 + conc.H2SO4

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophile In Each Case

Question 95. How will you prepare the following compounds from benzene?

  1. PhCH2CH2Ph,
  2. PhCH2CH2CH2Ph and
  3. PhCH2CH2CH2CH2Ph

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds From Benzene

Question 96. An optically active compound A (C10H4) gets oxidised to benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) by alkaline KMnO4 However, compound B, which is an optically inactive isomer of A does not get oxidised by alkaline KMn04. Identify A and B.

Answer:

As A is oxidised to C6H5COOH, A is a substituted benzene which has only one side chain consisting of four carbon atoms. Again, as A is optically active, there must be an unsymmetric carbon atom present in the side chain.

So, the side chain is —CH(CH3)CH2CH3 and A is sec-butylbenzene, C6H5CH(CH3)CH2CH3. B, an isomer of A does not get oxidised by alkaline KMnO4.

Thus, there is no benzylic hydrogen in the compound. So, the side chain is — C(CH3)3. The compound B is tert-butylbenzene, C6H5C(CH3)3

Question 97. Considering the stability of <r -complex, explain why — OCH3 is o-lp- orienting while —NO2 is mega-orienting.
Answer:

Electrophilic substitution reaction in anisole proceeds via the following reaction mechanism:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophilic Substitution Reacyion In Anisole

There is an extraordinarily stable (every atom has its octet fulfilled) resonance structure in both ortho- and para-a -complex, but there is no such resonance structure in the meta-σ- complex. So, ortho- and para-cr -complex is more stable than meta-cr complex. Consequently, electrophilic substitution proceeds easily and rapidly via ortho- and para-a -complex resulting in ortho and para-substituted compounds as major products. Thus, — OCH3 is ortho-/para-orienting group.

Electrophilic substitution reaction in nitrobenzene proceeds via the following reaction mechanism:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nitrobenzene Proceeds

Both ortho- and para-complexes are extraordinarily unstable resonance structures (due to the presence of a positive charge on two adjacent atoms). However, in meta-σ -complex there is no such resonance structure and so it is more stable than ortho- and para- σ -complex.

Thus, the reaction proceeds rapidly via the meta- σ -complex and the meta- substituted compound is obtained as the major product Thus, — NO is /nefa-orienting group.

Question 98.  Identify (A)-(F) in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of The Two Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of The Two Compounds Answer

Question 99.

1. What will be the major product when propyne is treated with aqueous H2SO4? Explain the equation.

2. An organic compound (A), C7H8O is insoluble in aqueous NaHCO3 but soluble in NaOH. (A), on treatment with bromine water rapidly forms compound (B), C7H5OBr2. Give structures of (A) & (B). What will be (A) if it does not dissolve in NaOH solution but shows the reaction given above?

Answer:

Propyne does not react with aqueous H2SO4 in the absence of Hg2+ ion. In the presence of an Hg2+ ion, propyne reacts with aqueous H2SO4 to give the unstable compound prop-2-enol (according to Markownikoff’s rule) which tautomerism to give acetone.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Among Benzene And Toluene

The problem is solved by assuming that the compound ‘B’ has the molecular formula C7H6OBr2

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compound B Molecular Formula

Long Answer Questions on Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT

Question 100.  Write the structural formula of the compounds A to F:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Structural Formula OfThe Compound A To F
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds A To F

Question 101. Both Br2(g) and NO2(g) are reddish-brown gaseous substances. How will you chemically distinguish between them?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reddish Brown Gaseous

Question 102. Draw the structural formula of the compound from A to F.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Draw Structural Formula Of The Compound From A to F

Question 103. Convert:

  1. 2-propanol → 1-propanol
  2. 2-butene→Ethane

Answer: 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Reactions

Question 104. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds Answer

Question 105. For the Riven compounds write structural formulas and IUFPAC names for all possible isomers having the number of double or triple bonds as indicated:

  1. C4H8 (one double bond)
  2. C5H8 (one triple bond)

Answer:

Hydrocarbons Double Bond And Triple Bond

Question 106. Write IUPAC names of the products obtained by the ozonolysis of the following compounds:

  1. Pent-2-ene
  2. 3,4-dimethyIhept-3-ene
  3. 2-ethyl but-1-ene
  4. I-phenyl but-1-ene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons OZonolysis Of The Following Compounds

Question 107. Explain why the following systems are not aromatic.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Systems Are Not Aromatic

Answer:

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Systems Are Not Aromatic 1

There are no p-orbitals on one of the H H CH3H CH3 carbon atoms forming the ring structure of this system and It is not a cyclic conjugated polyene containing (4n + 2)n -electrons. So, the system is not aromatic.

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ring Structure

There are no p-orbitals on one of the carbon atoms forming the ring structure of this system and it is not a cyclic conjugated polyene containing (4n + 2)n -electrons. So, the system is not aromatic.

3.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons CyclooctatetraeneCyclooctatetraene has a non-planar structure and there are 8π -electrons in it. So, cyclooctatetraene is a non-aromatic compound.

Question 108.  How will you convert benzene into

  1. p-nitrobromobenzene
  2. m-nltrochlorobenzene
  3. p-nitrotoluene
  4. Acetophenone

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert To Benzene

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Long Question and Answers NCERT

Question 109. In H3C—CH2—C(CH3)2—CH2CH(CH3)2, identify 1°, 2°, and 3° carbon atoms and give the number of H atoms bonded to each one of these.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbons In H Atoms Bonded

Number of H-atoms attached to 1° carbon atom = 15

Number of H-atoms attached to 2° carbon atom = 4

Number of H-atoms attached to 3° carbon atom = 1

Question 110. Write down the products of ozonolysis of 1,2-dimethylbenzene (o-xylene). How does the result support the Kekule structure for benzene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kekule Structure

As the products A, B and C cannot be obtained from any one of the two Kekule structures, this confirms that o-xylene is a resonance hybrid of the two Kekule structures 1 and 2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kekule Structure Resonance Hybrid

Question 111. Arrange benzene, n-hexane and ethyne in decreasing order of acidic behaviour. Also, give a reason for this behaviour.
Answer:

The hybridisation state of carbon in the compounds benzene, n-hexane and ethyne is as follows—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons n Hexane And Ethyne

The nucleus. Thus, the correct order of decreasing acidic behaviour is ethyne > benzene > n-hexane.

Question 112. How would you convert the given compounds into benzene?

  1. Ethyne
  2. Ethene
  3. Hexane

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds Into Benzene

Question 113. Write structures of all the alkenes which on hydrogenation give 2-methylbutane.
Answer:

The structural formula of 2-methyl butane is—

Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbutane

The structures of different alkenes by putting double bonds at different positions along with satisfying the tetravalency of each carbon atom which gives 2-methyl butane on hydrogenation are as follows-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbutane On Hydrogenation

Question 114. Arrange the following set of compounds in order of their decreasing relative reactivity with an electrophile, E+.

  1. Chlorobenzene, 2,4-dinitrochlorobenzene, p-nitrochlorobenzene
  2. Toluene, p-H3C —C6H4—NO2, P-O2N—C6H4—NO2

Answer:

The electron density of the benzene nucleus increases in the presence of an electron-donating group (activating group). Consequently, electrophiles can easily attack the benzene nucleus. On the other hand, the electron density of the benzene nucleus decreases in the presence of the electron-withdrawing group (deactivating group). This makes electrophilic substitution difficult for the benzene nucleus.

Therefore, the order of the different compounds according to their decreasing relative reactivity with an electrophile E+ is—

Chlorobenzene > p-nitrochlorobenzene > 2,4-dinitrochlorobenzene

Toluene > p-CH3C6H5NO2 > p-O2NC6H4NO2